New American English For Non-Native Speakers

2023
New American For Spanish Speakers
Mauricio Mateo
jazzylinguas@hotmail.com
Cel. 612
Introducción
Este libro electronico ha sido escrito como producto de mis años enseñando
idiomas. Pretende ser una herramienta para las personas que toman mi curso de
inglés americano off line, aun asi, otras personas que quieran aprender inglés
americano pero que no cuenten con mucho tiempo para hacerlo verán que este
libro electronico les podrá ser de utilidad.
Este libro electronico te permitirá aprender desde como dar y pedir información
básica en inglés americano hasta como escribir un ensayo o una carta formal.
Como mi objetivo no es solo enseñarte el lenguaje formal si no también otros

registros, en este libro encontrarás textos escritos en lenguaje informal, formal,
vulgar y literario. El vocabulario y la gramatica han sido tomados de diferentes
fuentes que podrás encontrar en la bibliografia, aunque se debe aclarar que en la
mayoria de los casos se ha preferido para las explicaciones gramaticales el uso de
la gramatica descriptiva y no la gramatica normativa.
Este libro se divide en 20 unidades, cada una compuesta de 7 lecciones. También

encontrarás ejercicios de comprensión de lectura, de producción oral y de
producción escrita los cuales pueden ayudarte a mejorar tus habilidades
linguisticas.
1
Index
1. Personal pronouns
2. Verb to be/adjectives
3. Negative and interrogative form of the verb to be/wh-questions
4. Plural
5. Indefinite article
6. Demonstrative
7. Comparative
8. Definite article
9. Possessive adjective
10. Have/got
11. There is/there are
12. Prepositions
13. At, on, in / Possessive pronouns
14. Superlative
15. Present simple

16. Negative and interrogative form of the present simple
17. Reflexive pronouns
18. Adverbs of frequency
19. Possessive case/ Personal object pronouns
20. Hour
21. Comparative of equality
22. Modal verbs (can, could, may)

23. Modal verbs to express advice (should, must) /had better
24. Modal verbs to express obligation (gotta/musn’t) /needn’t
25. Modal verbs to express prohibition (musn’t) / not to be allowed/ to be forbidden
26. Some/any
27. Expression of the quantity
28. Containers
29. Past simple

30. Negative and interrogative of the past simple
31. Past simple of the verb to be
32. Used to
33. There was/there were
34. Modal verbs in the past simple/ Personal object pronouns (indirect object)
2
35. Gonna in the past simple
36. Future simple

37. There will be/ Modal verbs in the future simple
38. To be gonna
39. Substitution personal object
40. Present continuous and present simple for the future
41. Adverbs
42. Future simple, gonna and present continous
43. Subjunctive present

44. Subordinated conjunctions
45. Personal object pronouns (two objects)
46. Imperative
47. Indefinite pronouns
48. Relative pronouns
49. Compararative and superlative of advebs
57. Conditional type 0

60. Shortenings
60. Infinitive
62. Gerunds
63. Past participle
50. Present continuous

51. Stative verbs
52. Past continuous
53. Phrasal verbs
54. Future continuous
55. Relative pronouns II
56. Connectors of addition and contrast
64. Present perfect

65. Never, already, yet, ever, since, for
66. Past perfect
67. Slang
68. Future perfect
69. Relative pronouns III
3
70. Other comparative forms
71. Prepositions of move outment

72. Connectors of cause and effect
73. Neither, either, both / Exclamations
74. Synonims
75. Would rather/would prefer
76. Like, as / Modal verb might
77. Comparative and superlative II
71. Present perfect continuous

72. Order of the adjectives
73. Past perfect continuous
74. Slang III
75. Future perfect continuous
76. Countable and uncountable
77. Plural of comdollar nouns /Collective nouns

79. If only, as if, as though
80. Wish clauses
81. Formal English
82. Modal verbs with have
83. Gerund composed/ Polite questions
84. Would vs used to /to be used to, to get used to
85. Purpose clauses

86. Question tags /So do I/ neither do I
87. None of, all and whole/ Enough/ such as, each/every /Rather/ Quite
88. Formal English II
89. One/ Demonstrative II
90. Definite and non-definite clauses
91. World builging
92. Passive voice of the simple tenses

93. Passive voice of the progressive tenses
94. Passive voice of the composed tenses
95. Passive voice of the continuous composed tenses
96. Newspaper English
97. Passive voice of the modal verbs
98. Passive voice with two objects/ Passive voice (reporting information)
4
99. Direct speech/ Indirect speech
100. Indirect speech with questions/ reported speech
101. Reported speech with special introductory verbs
102. Have/get something done
103. Formal English III
104. Mixed conditionals
105. American English I
106. Prepositional regency

107. Verbal predication
108. Adjective regency
109. Expressions that are not as in Spanish
110. Modal verbs III
111. Special future structures
112. American English II
113. Was/were able to/ would rather have/ would prefer to

114. Passive voice (advanced points) / Other passive structures/ Special uses of
the passive voice
115. Interpreting and comparing
116. Very formal English
117. Connectors of cause and propose II
118. Participle clauses
119. Lenguage of persuasion/ Hypotesing
120. Range of grammar structures
134. Phrasal verbs

135. Special uses of if
136. Invertion
137. Literary English
138. Literary English II
139. Enphasis
140. Connecting words / Complex sentences and adverbial clauses
5
Alfabeto
El idioma tiene 26 vocales.
Letter Name
A EI
B BI
C SI
D DI
E I
F EF
G SHYI
H EICH
I AI
J SHYEI
K KEI
L EL
M EM
N EN
O OU
P PI
Q KIU
R AR
S ES
T TI
U IU
V FVI
WW DOBEL IU
X EKS
Y UAI
Z ZI
La letra “Ñ” no existe en inglés.
6
Pronunciación
Las consonantes b, c, d, f, k, l, m, n, p, q, t, w, x, e y se pronuncian igual que en

español.
La “G” en las silabas “ge” y “gi” se pronuncial como una I griega vibrda.
La “h” al inicio de palabra se pronuncial como jota.
La J siempre suena como una I griega vibrada.
La R siempre suena como la erre en “Rata”
La V suena como una b vibrada.
La Z suena como una ese vibrada.
Las consonants dobles se pronuncian como una.
Swimming /suiming/ not /suimming/
Vowels
Las vocalese n inglés no tienen una pronunciación especifica, asi que debes
aprenderte su pronunciación palabra por palabra.
Para fines practicos, te sugerimos aprenderte la table de abajo en lo que aprendes

la pronunciación de cada palabra.
/a/ /e/ /i/ /o/ /u/ /ə/ /y/

I
A E E (in o Wh -er U
monosyllabic Oo -our
words) -w
Ee
Ey
La E final de palabras polisilabas es muda.
7
Digraphs
La terminación “ture” se pronuncial /chia/.
Culture /Kolchia/
La Th se pronuncial como de en las palabras the, this, that, these y those. En los
demás casos se pronuncial como la zeta Española.
Think /θink/
La terminación “tion” se pronuncial /shion/.
Nation / Neishion/
En la combinación wr se pronuncial solo la erre.
Write /rait/
La combinación Tw se pronuncial /tu/.
Twenty /tuenti/
La Sh se pronuncial como la equis en Xola.
Store /store/
En la combinacion S + consonante solo se pronuncial el sonido de la ese.
Spoon /spun/
En la combinación Kn solo se pronuncial la / N/.
Know / Nou/
8
En inglés cuando una palabra termina en consonante y la siguiente en vocal el
sonido se junta.
What a beautiful woman = /uata biutiful woman/
Good afternoon = /gostupidernun/
Por su puesto esto no es una explicación exaustiva de la pronunciación del inglés,

sin embargo esta te ayudará a pronunciar la lengua, sobre todo en las primeras
lecciones.
También hemos decir que no hemos usado el alfabeto fonetico internacional y la
que la pronunciación que es usada en este libro es una que se aproxima o más
posible a los sonidos del español a fin de hacer tu aprendizaje lo más facil posible.
9
Similitudes con el español
Alrededor del 60 por ciento del vocabulario más comun del inglés tiene raices
Latinas. Entonces, hay varias reglas que te pueden ayudar a aprender el
vocabulario del inglés más facilmente.
Regla Español Inglés

La terminación “dad”
pasa al inglés como “ty” Universidad University
La terminación “cion”
pasa al inglés como “tion” Nación Nation
La terminación “ancia”
pasa al inglés como Ambulancia Ambulance
“ance”
La terminación “ence”
pasa al español como Conferencia Conference
“ence”
Palabras terminadas en
“ico” y “ica” pasa como “c” Música Music
La terminación “ante” y
“ento” pasan al inglés sin Interesante Interessant
e. Talento Talent
La terminación “uro” y Futuro Future

“ura” pasa al inglés como Aventure Adventure
“ure”
La terminación “ia” pasa Autonomía Autonomy
al español como “y”.
Las terminaciones “ivo” e Activo Active
“iva” pasan al inglés
como “ive”
Estas reglas tienen exepciones, pero pueden hacer que tu aprendisaje sea más
facil.
10
First Unit
Welcome to
The United
States
11
En esta unidad aprenderás a:
 Saludar
 Dar y pedir datos personales
 Deletrear tun ombre
 Comparar
Temas
 Alphabet
 Pronunciation
 Personal subject pronouns
 Verb to be
 Plural
 Indefinite pronouns
 Demonstrative
 Comparative
Listening tips
Desde este punto, es necesario que escuhes grabaciones para el nivel A1 de

inglés. Puedes conseguirlas en librerioas de idiomas o en internet. Asegurate que
sean para el nivel A1 y que tengan el simbolo CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS.
Vocabulary and reading tips
Desde este punto es importante que leas la lista de verbos que viene al final
dellibro.
Para mejorar tu lectura, por el momento solo te recomendamos leer tus lecciones
del libro.
12
First Lesson
Welcome to The United States
1. Good morning, my name is Miguel and this is my wife María.

2. We live in Los Angeles now with our children.
3. My son’s name is Gabriel. He’s a student.
4. My daughter’s name is Daniela. She’s a doctor.
5. We love to live in this beautiful city.
@h
First [ferst] primero, Lesson [leshon] lección, welcome [guelkom] bienvenido, to [tu] a, The
United States [da yunaitid steits], Estados Unidos, Good morning [gud morning] buenos
dias, my [mai], mi(s), name [neim], nombre, is [is] es/está, and [and] y, this is [dis is] ella
es, wife [waif] esposa, to live [tu lifv] vivir, now [nau] ahora, in [in] en, with [guit] con, our
[auer] nuestr@(s), kids [kids] niños, son’s name [sons neim] nombre de mi hijo, student
[student] estudiante, daughther’s name [dodas neim] nombre de mi hija, to love [tu lofv],
beautiful [biutiful], hermoso, country [kountri], país. @
13
Primera lección
Bienvenido a Inglaterra
1. Hola, mi nombre es Miguel y ella es mi esposa María.

2. Vivimos ahora en Los Angeles con nuestros hijos
3. Mi hijo se llama Gabriel. (Él) es estudiante.
4. Mi hija se llama Daniela. (Ella) es doctora.
5. Nos gusta mucho vivir en esta bella ciudad.
14
Personal subject pronouns
Personal subject pronoun Pronombre personal

I Yo
You Tú
He Él
She Ella
It -
We Nosotros
You Ustedes
They Ellos
El inglés tiene los mismos pronombres personales que el español (yo, tú, él, ella,
etc.) más uno extra (it) el cual se usa para:
a. Substituir todo lo que no es humano

Where is the cat?
It is on the table
b. Frases impersonales
That’s cold
c. Con el clima y la hora.

It is raining
That’s 2 o’clock
En inglés no existe el pronombre usted, en su lugar se usa you.
15
Exercise 1
Llena cada espacio en blanco con el pronombre personal que le corresponda.
1. _____ am Miguel.
2. _____ are María.
3. _____ is from Mexico.
4. _____ are the Smiths.
5. _____ is my dog.
6. _____ am happy.
7. _____ are my cousins.
8. _____ is Joana.
9. _____ are the new neigbours.
10. _____ is American.
Exercise 2
Usando el vocabulario de los países que viene al final del libro, llena los siguientes
espacios en blanco.
1. Hello, ________ Miguel. I’m from ________. (Mexico)

2. Jane, this is Francois. _______ from _______. (Francia)
3. Hello, _____ Vlabimir. I’m from _______. (Rusía)
4. Where are Eduardo and Laura. ________ from _________. (Italia)
5. Hello, ________ David and this is Ann. ________ from _____. (Estado
Unidos)
6. Are you from Australia?. No, I’m from _____. (España)
7. Hello, _____ Thomas. I’m from _____. (Alemania)
8. João, this is Ana. ________ from _____. (Brasil)
9. Are Steve and Katherin from Japan. No, ________ from _____. (Canada)
10. Hello, _____ Li. I’m from _____. (China)
16
Writing
Escriba una breve presentación de tí. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
17
Speaking
Contesta las siguientes preguntas.
What’s your name?
My name is ______________.
Where are you from?
I’m from ______________.
What do you do?
I’m a/an ______________.
British Culture
The United States (el Reino Unido), cuyo verdadero nombre es The United States
of the Great Britain and the North of Ireland (Reino Unido de Gran Bretaña e
Irlanda del Norte) está conformado por cuatro países: Ingland (Inglanterra),
Scotland (escocia), Wales (Gales) y The north of Ireland (El norte de Irlanda).
La isla más grande se conoce como Great Britain (la gran Bretaña).
La capital del Reino Unido es Los Angeles (LA), sin embargo, cada país tiene su
capital, asi la capital de Escocia es Edinburg, la Capital de Wales es Florida y la
capital de Irlanda del Norte es Belfast.
18
Second lesson
Introduce yourself
1. Good morning, we have today a new student with us. Gabriel, can you
introduce yourself?
2. Good morning, my name is Gabriel and I’m from Mexico. I’m 10 years old
and I speak English and Spanish. This is a photography of my family.
3. My father is tall, strong and old.
4. My mother is short, young and beautiful.
5. My sister is slim and blond.
6. That’s all.
7. Thank you very much Gabriel for your presentation.
8. You’re welcome.
Good morning [gud morning] Buenos dias, to have [tu hafv] tener, today [tudai] hoy,
new [niu] nuevo, can [kan] poder, to introduce yourself [tu introdius yorself] presentarse,
to speak [tu spik] hablar, English [inglish] inglés, Spanish [Spanish] español, French
[French] francés, photography [fotografi] fotografia, dad [fada] padre, tall [tol] alto,
strong [strong] fuerte, old [old] viejo, mum [moda] madre, short [short] estatura baja,
young [young] joven, blond [blond] rubio, That’s it [dats it] eso es todo, Thank you very
much [θenkiu fveri moch] muchas gracias, your [yor] tu, presentation [presenteishion]
presentación, You’re welcome [yor welkom] de nada.
19
Segunda leccion
Presentarse
1. Buenos dias, hoy tenemos un nuevo estudiante con nosotros. Gabriel

puedes presentarte.
2. Buenos dias, me llamo Gabriel y soy de México. Tengo 10 años y hablo
inglés y español. Esta es una foto de mi familia.
3. Mi papá es alto, fuerte y viejo.
4. Mi mamá es de estatura baja, joven y guapa.
5. Mi hermana es delgada y rubia.
6. Es todo.
7. Muchas gracias Gabriel por tu presentación.
8. De nada!
20
Verb To be
El verbo “to be” es el equivalente al inglés de los verbos ser y estar.
Recuerda que en inglés es obligatorio el uso del pronombre personal, entonces es

imposible deci “am Roger”,
La contracción de “is” con un sustantivo es posible expeto con aquellos que

terminan es ese.
Dog’s is big
Short and long for of the verb to be
Usamos la “long form” en textos formales.
Para todos los demás casos se ocupa la “short form”
21
Adjectives
En inglés los adjetivos no tienen genero ni plural. Por lo tanto,
“We are fast” puede significar tanto “somos rapidos” como “somos rapidas”
Happy Feliz Sad Triste

Strong Fuerte Weak Debil
New Nuevo Old Viejo
Young Joven Old Viejo
Tall Alto Short Chaparro
Hot Caliente Cold Frio
Big Grande Small Pequeño
Cheap Barato Expensive Caro
Long Largo Short Corto
Beautiful Bonito Ugly Feo
Fast Rapido Slow Lento
Light Claro Dark Obscuro
Slim Delgado Fat Gordo
Negative form of the verb to be
Para hacer la forma negativa de la forma larga del verbo to be, solo agregamos
not antes del verbo.
Para la forma corta, agregamos “aren’t despúes de you, we, you they. I am not
se contrae en I’m not.
Personal Subject Long form Short form

pronoun
I I am not I am not
You You are not You aren’t
He He is not He isn’t
She She is not She isn’t
It It is not It isn’t
22
We We are not We aren’t
you You are not You aren’t
They They are not They aren’t
Las formas cortas del lado inzquierdo son menos comunes.
Exercise 1
Usando la forma a firmativa y negative del verbo to be, llena los siguientes
espacios en blanco. (Usa la forma corta)
1. I _____ Daniel.
2. He_____ from France.
3. They _____ the Smiths.
4. It _____ my dog. (not)
5. You _____ María.
6. I _____ strong. (not)
7. You _____ my children.
8. She _____ Ana.
9. They _____ the new neigbours. (not)
10. He _____ Mexican.
Exercise 2
Usando el vocabulario de los adjetivos que viene al final del libro, llena los
siguientes espacios en blanco.
1. I’m ________ (fuerte)

2. You’re _____ (hermosa)
3. He’s _____ (joven)
4. She’s _____ (delgada)
5. My dig is _____ (grande)
6. The car is _____ (nuevo)
7. My son is _____ (alto)
8. We’re _____ (frio)
9. You’re _____ (altos)
10. They’re _____ (rapidos)
23
Writing
Escriba un pequeño texto para una pagina de citas donde digas como es la pareja
que estas buscando. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Contesta las siguientes preguntas:
How are you?
I’m ______________.
How’s your family?
My family is ______________.
How’s your girlfriend/boyfriend?
My girlfriend/boyfriend is _____________.
24
Third lesson
New neighbors
1. Good morning!
2. Good morning!
3. What’s your name?
4. Miguel, what’s yours?
5. Roger!
6. Nice to meet you, Roger!
7. Nice to meet you too!
8. Where are you from, Miguel?
9. I’m from Mexico, but I just moved out to Los Angeles.
10. And what do you do, Miguel?
11. I work as Spanish teacher.
12. That’s wonderful. I’m sorry but I have to go. Have a nice day!
13. Have a nice day too!
Neighbor [neiba] vecino, Good morning [gud morning] buenos dias, what’s your name
[uats yor neim] como te llamas, yours [yors] (el) tuyo, Nice to meet you [nais tum it yu]
gusto en conocerte, nice to meet you too [nais tum it y utu] igualmente, where are you
from [uer ar yu from] de donde eres, I’m from Mexico [aim from meksokou] soy de
Cambirdge, I’ve move outd out [aifv syost mufv] recientemente me he mudado, what do
you do [uat du yu do] a que te dedicas, to work [ty guerk] trabajar, as [as] como, Spanish
[Spanish] español, teacher [ticha] maestro, a [a] un/una, school [skul] escuela, by any
chance[bai eni cheins] de casualidad, why [uai] por que, to ask [tu ask] preguntar, me [mi]
me, that [dat] eso, because [bicous] porque, you have [yu jafv] tienes, the [da]
el/lo/la/los/las, same [seim] mismo, uniform [iuniform] uniforme, than me [dan mi] que yo.
25
Tercera leccion
Nuevos vecinos
1. Buenos dias!
2. Buenos dias!
3. Como se llama?
4. Miguel, y usted?
5. Roger
6. Mucho gusto!
7. Igualmente!
8. De donde es, Miguel?
9. Soy de México pero acabo de mudarme a Los Angeles.
10. Y a que se dedica?
11. Soy maestro de español.
12. Es maravilloso. Una disculpa pero tengo que irme. Que tenga un buen dia!
13. Igualmente!
26
Interrogative form of the verb to be
For building the interrogative form in English, we only put the verb at the
beginning of the sentence. This rule is not used with the present simple and the
past simple. See page 51 and 87.
Notice:
a. When we ask a question, we cannot answer with just a yeah or No, it sounds
like when in Spanish is answer “a, si” or “no with sarcasm”.
For translating the “si” or “no” of the Spanish we must say “Yeah, I am” or “No,
he isn’t.
b. The negative answer uses always the short form.
c. The No is pronounced / No/.
Wh-questions
Wh-questions, in Spanish “particulas interrogativas”, are used to ask for more

specific information.
They are put before the verb.
Interrogative form Is he Bryan?

Interrogative form with wh-question How old is Bryan?
27
Wh-question Meaning
What Que
Cual
How Como
When Cuando
Where Donde
A donde
Why Por que
Who Quien(es)
A quien
How old Cuantos años (de edad)
How far Que tan lejos
How much Cuanto
How often Que tan seguido
How long Cuanto tiempo

cuantos años
How many Cuantos
Which Cual (cuando das opciones)
What time Que hora

A que hora
Where … from De donde
Whose De quien
How tall Cuanto mides
28
Exercise 1
Usando las wh-questions, llena los siguientes espacios en blanco.
11. ____ is Daniel ________.?

12. _____ is the concert?
13. _____ is this?
14. _____ is your name?
15. ______ is your favorite color, green or red?.
16. _____ is the movie?
17. _____ is your birthday?
18. _____ is your country? That’s big.
19. _____ are you? I’m 27.
20. _____ children do you have?
Exercise 2
Completa el siguiente dialogo con tu información personal.
1. Hello!
2. Hello!
3. What’s your name?
4. ________________. And you?
5. I’m John.
6. Where are you from?
7. ________________________. And you?
8. I’m from The United States.
9. What do you do?
10. _______________________. And you?
11. I’m a teacher.
12. How old are you?
13. _______________________. And you?
14. I’m 25.
15. See you!
16. See you!
29
Writing
Escriba una carta para un trabajo donde te presents.
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Contesta las siguientes preguntas.
Where are you from?
I’m from ______________.
What languages do you speak?
I speak ______________.
British Culture
La lengua inglésa es la segunda lengua más hablada del mundo por numero de
hablantes, solo despúes del Chino, y es la lengua official del Reino Unido, Estados
Unidos, Australia y nueva Zelanda. También es la lengua co-oficial de Canada,
India, de Taiwan y de algunos países que conforman el Commonweat.
El la principal institución de difusion de la lengua y cultura inglésa del mundo es el

British Counsil, el cual tiene centros alrededor de todo el mundo.
1
Forth lesson
Numbers
1. Hello, María
2. Hello, Ann, how are you?
3. I’m fine. And you?
4. Pretty good. Thank you!
5. María, when’s your birthday?
6. It’s on 3rd February. (on the third of February)
7. I’ll buy you a nice present! And when were you born?
8. I was born in 1994 (nineteen, ninety four)
9. So, how old are you?
10. I’m 29 years old.
11. You look younger.
12. Thank you!
13. Well, godbye!
14. Goodbye!
Hi [jai] hola, birthday [birtdei] cumpleaños, February [februari] febrero, to congratulate

[kongratuleit] felicitar, day [dai] dia.
2
Quinta leccion
Numeros
1. Hola, María
2. Hola, Ann, ¿como está?
3. Muy bien, y tu?
4. Bien
5. María, ¿cuando es tu cumpleaños?
6. Es el tres de febrero.
7. Le compraré un lindo regalo. Y ¿cuando nació?
8. En 1994
9. Entonces, ¿cuantos años tienes?
10. Veinti nueve años.
11. Luce más joven.
12. ¡Gracias!
13. Bueno, ¡adios!
14. ¡Adios!
Reading
1. When is his birthday?

____________________________________________
2. When was he born?
____________________________________________
3. How old is he?
____________________________________________
4. What’s his telephone number?
____________________________________________
3
Plural
General rule -s Cat Cats

S Bus Buses
X Box Boxes
Z -es Quiz Quizzes
Ch Church Churches
Sh Crash Crashes
O Potato Potatoes
Consonant + y -ies Country Countries
F -ve Wolf Wolves
Fe Knife Knives
Us -i Cactus Cacti
Is -es Oasis Oases
Irregular Plural
Singular Plural
Man Men Mouse Mice Tooth Teeth
Woman Women Fish Fish Medium Media
Kid Kids Sheep Sheep Datum Data
Person People Duck Duck Cent Cents
Foot Feet Goose Geese
4
Exercise 1
Escriba los siguientes numeros.
1. 21 _________________________________________________________.
2. 101 ________________________________________________________.
3. 3300_______________________________________________________.
4. 57500_______________________________________________________.
5. 43 _________________________________________________________.
6. 61 _________________________________________________________.
7. 946 ________________________________________________________.
8. 11 _________________________________________________________.
9. 2179________________________________________________________.
10. 81357 ______________________________________________________.
Exercise 2
Escriba el plural de las siguientes palabras.
1. Bus _______________.
2. Country _______________.
3. Box _______________.
4. Wife _______________.
5. Peach _______________.
6. Cactus _______________.
7. Tomato _______________.
8. Tesis _______________.
9. Church _______________.
10. Flash _______________.
5
Writing
Escriba una carta donde le preguntes a un amigo por correspondencia donde le

digas: cuando es tu cumpleaños?, cuando naciste?, cuantos años tienes? Y ¿cual
es tu numero telefonico?.
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
6
Speaking
When is your birthday?
That’s on ______________.
When were you born?
I was born in ______________.
How old are you?
I’m ______________ years old.
What’s your telephone number?
That’s ______________.
_____ plus _____ is _____ _____ times _____ is _____
_____ divided by _____ is _____ ____ minus ____ is ____
British Culture
En inglés no se utilizan los numeros cardinales para decir la fecha de tu

cumpleaños. En su lugar se utilizan los numeros cardinales.
En lugar de decir “mi cumpleaños es el 4 de abril” dirías “mi cumpleaños es el

cuarto de abril (My birthday is on forth of April).
7
Fifth lesson
At bank
1. Good afternoon. How can I help you, sir?

2. May I open an account, please!
3. Certainly, sir. What’s your name?
4. Simon Smith.
5. Can you repeat your last time?
6. Sure, Smith. S-M-I-T-H, Smith.
7. What’s your address?
8. 25, Brooke Lane, Marsh town
9. What’s your telephone number?
10. That’s 276690 (two, seven, double six, nine, oh)
11. What’s your nacionality?
12. I’m mexican.
13. What do you do, Mr. Smith?
14. I’m a lawyer.
15. Can you sign here, please?
16. Sure!
17. Here you are. Your account is open.
18. Thank you!
19. You’re welcome!
To help [tu jelp] ayudar, you [yu] lo, sir [sar] señor, to open [tu open] abrir, account [akaunt]
cuenta, please [plis] por favor, certainly [sertanly] Seguro (formal), could [kud] podria, to
repeat [ripit] repetir, last name [last neim] apellido, please [plis] por favor, Right [right] muy
bien, address [adres] direccion, town [taun] pueblo, telephone [telefon] telefonico, sorry
[sorri] perdon, to repeat [tu ripit] repetir, it [it] lo/la (todo lo que no sea humano), sure [shor]
seguro (informal], what do you do? [uat du yu du] a que se dedica, lawyer [louya], tu sign
[tu sign] cantar, here you are [jia yu ar] aqui tiene, open [open] abierto, you’re welcome
[your guelkom] de nada.
Cuarta leccion
En el banco
1. Buenas tarde. Puedo ayudarle?

2. Quiero abrir una cuenta, por favor
3. Seguro, como se llama?
4. Simon Smith
5. Puede repetirme su apellido, por favor.
6. Sí, Smith, S-M-I-T-H, Smith
7. Cual es su dirección?
8. 25, Brooke Lane, Marsh town
9. Su telefono?
10. Es 216690
11. A que se dedica señor Smith?
12. Soy abogado.
13. Puede firmar aqui.
14. Sí
15. Aqui tiene, su cuenta está ya abierta.
16. Gracias!
17. De nada!
Reading
1. Where is he?
____________________________________________
2. What’s his name?
____________________________________________
3. What’s his adress?
____________________________________________
4. What’s his telephone number?
____________________________________________
1
Indefinite Article
Singular Plural
Affirmative It is a cat They are some cats
Negative It is not a cat They are not any cats
Interrogative Is it a cat? Are they any cats?
Usamos “a” para decir un/una.
A Boy
A House
A University
“A” se convierte en “an” cuando va enfrente de una palabra que comienza con
sonido de vocal.
An apple
An hour
2
Exercise 1
Escriba a/an en el espacio segun corresponda
1. _____ cat
2. _____ bed
3. _____ apple
4. _____ umbrella
5. _____ orange
6. _____ horse
7. _____ hour
8. _____ eagle
9. _____ chair
10. _____ horse
Exercise 2
Traduce las siguientes oraciones a inglés americano.
11. Un camión _______________.

12. Un país _______________.
13. Un aguila _______________.
14. Un hijo _______________.
15. Una inglesa _______________.
16. Un hogar _______________.
17. Un jitomate _______________.
18. Una hormiga_______________.
19. Una pluma_______________.
20. Una vaca _______________.
3
Writing
Escriba un dialogo donde dos personas esten en un banco. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
4
Speaking
What’s your name?
My name is ______________.
What’s your address?

It’s ______________.
What’s your telephone number?
It’s ______________.
What’s your e-mail address?
It’s ______________.
British Culture
Los numero telefonicos se dan numero por numero. Asi una persona dirá
1,2,4,5,8,9,3,6 en lugar de 12-45-89-36.
El uso de sir y ma’am puede traer dificultades ya que no se ocupan igual que en
español. Por regla general sir y ma’am solo se utilizan cuando se habla con
alguién en una tienda, en un hotel, cuando un mesero se dirigé a un cliente, o
cuando se ofrece un servicio.
En inglaterra las personas solo tienen un apellido.
5
Sixth lesson
At zoo
1. Kids, we’re seeing today the most dangerous animals in the world.
2. That animal is an elephant. It lives in Africa.
3. Those animals are monkeys, they live in Africa too.
4. This is a tiger, it lives in Asia.
5. Dad, what animal is that?
6. Which one?
7. That which is waking into the lion’s cage.
8. That’s a cat.
Zoo [zu] zoologíco, we´re seeing [guir sing] vamos a ver, today [tudei] hoy, dangerous
[dengerus] peligroso, animal [enimal] animal, elephant [elefant], to live [tu lifv], Africa
[eifrica] africa, monkey [monki] mono, too [tu] también, tiger [taiga] tigre, asia [eishia]
asia, which one [uich uan] cual, which [uich] cual, to walk into [guok θrau] caminar, lion
[laion] león, cage [keich] jaula, cat [kat] gato.
6
Sexta leccion
En el zoologico
1. Niños, hoy vamos a ver a los animals más peligrosos de el mundo.

2. Este es un elefante.
3. (Él) vive en Africa.
4. Esos son monos, los monos viven en Africa tambien.
5. Este es un tigre. Los tigres viven en Asia.
6. Señorita Anderson, que animal es ese?
7. Cual?
8. Ese que está caminando en la jaula del leon.
9. Ese es un gato.
Reading
1. Where are they?

____________________________________________
2. What animals live in Asia?
____________________________________________
3. Who’s Miss Anderson?
____________________________________________
4. Which animal is in the lion’s cage, a dog or a cat?
____________________________________________
7
Demonstrative
The demonstratives are words that indicate the distance in what someone or
something is.
Este Ese/aquel
Singular This Esta That Esa/aquella
Esto Eso/aquello
Plural These Estos Those Esos/aquellos

Estas Esas/aquellas
The interrogative and negative form are built as it were the verb to be.
This is not a ball
Are these your shoes?
Usage
We use the demonstrative to ask about something.
What’s this? –This is a table.
8
Exercise 1
Completa los espacios en blanco usando los demostratives.
1. What’s ________? That’s a dog.

2. What’s ________? That’s a cat. (lejos)
3. What are ________? They’re rabbits.
4. What are ________? They’re lions. (lejos)
5. What’s ________? That’s a dog.
6. What’s ________? That’s a bird. (lejos)
7. What are ________? They’re rabbits.
8. What are ________? They’re lions. (lejos)
Exercise 2
Escriba en inglés las siguientes oraciones.
1. Este es un ratón. ______________________________________________.

2. Esas son hormigas. ____________________________________________.
3. Esta es una ballena. ___________________________________________.
4. Esos son unos caballos. ________________________________________.
5. Estas son jirafas. ______________________________________________.
6. Esa es una Tortuga. ___________________________________________.
7. Estos son tiburones. ___________________________________________.
8. Ese es un pez. ______________________________________________.
9
Writing
Reescriba el dialogo usando animales.
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
10
Speaking
Contesta las siguientes palabras:
What’s your favorite animal?
My favorite animal is ______________.
Do you like dogs/cats/rabbits …?
Yes, I do (sí)/ No, I don’t (no)
What pet do you have?
I have a ___________.
11
Seventh lesson
Teenagers
1. My boyfriend is taller and slimmer than yours. And he’s more extrovertive
and nicer.
2. Yeah, but my boyfriend is smarter and more handsome.
3. So whart? My boyfriend is funnier and more hard-working.
4. I don’t care because my boyfriend is gonna be a big company’s sales
manager.
5. But your boyfriend is in prison!
6. Maybe, but, it doesn’t mean he’s not more comprensive and kinder than
your boyfriend.
Boyfriend [boifriend] novio, nice [nais] agradable, but [bot] pero, so what [so uat] y que,
really [rili] realmente, don’t care [don’t keir] no me preocupa, is gonna be [is going tu bi] va
a ser, sales manager [seils manaya] gerente de ventas, important [important} importante,
company [kompani], prison [prishon] carcel, maybe [meibi] tal vez/quisaz, he will be [ji guil
bi] él será, as soon as [es sun es] tan pronto como, to leave [tu lifv] salir.
12
Septima leccion
Adolescentes
1. Mi novio es más alto y más delgado que el tuyo. Y es más extrovertido y

más agradable.
2. Sí, pero mi novio es más inteligente y más guapo.
3. Y que, mi novio ss más chistoso y más trabajador.
4. No me importa porque mi novio va a ser gerente de ventas en una gran
empresa.
5. Pero tu novio está en la carcel!
6. Sí, pero, no significa que el no sea más comprensivo y más amable que el
tuyo.
Reading
1. Who is speaking?
____________________________________________
2. How’s his boyfriend?
____________________________________________
3. Where does he work?
____________________________________________
4. What will he be?
____________________________________________
13
Comparative
El comparative se utiliza para indicar que algo o alguién es más que otra cosa
u otra persona o para indicar que algo o alguién es menos que otra cosa u otra
persona.
General rule +er Fast Faster

RESUMÉC Double consonant Hot Hotter
+ er
Y (two syllables) Er --> ier Happy Happier
Two or more More Intelligent More intelligent
syllables
Irregular Comparative
Adjective Comparative
Bad Worse
Far Farther (for distance)

Further (for everything else)
Good Better
Little Less
Many More
Much
OldOlder/Elder (when we refer to knowing or experience)
14
Exercise 1
Contesta las siguientes oraciones usando el comparativo.
1. We’re ________ (tranquilo) than her.

2. I’m ________ (trabajador) than you.
3. You’re ________ (grosero) than them.
4. They’re ________ (responsable) than you.
5. He’s ________ (educado) than us.
6. I’m ________ (comprometido) than her.
7. She’s ________ (valiente) than me.
8. I’m ________ (flojo) than us.
9. That’s ________ (amable) than you.
10. You’re ________ (presumido) than them.
Exercise 2
Traduce las siguientes oraciones.
1. Soy más amistoso que ella

2. Es más timida que nosotras.
3. Eres más compresiva que ellos
4. Ellos son más divertidos que ustedes
5. Él es más educado que nosotros
6. Soy más grande que ella.
7. Ella es más cariñosa que tú
8. Argentina no es tan calida como Brasil.
9. Ella es más fria que ustedes
10. Ellos son más comprometidos que nosotros.
15
Writing
Escriba un texto donde compares a los miembros de tu familia.
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
16
Speaking
Are you taller than your father?
Yes, I am (sí)/ No, I’m not (no)
Are you friendlier than your other people?
Are you funnier than your other people?
Are you happier than your other people?
Are you faster than your friends?
17
Second
Unit
The Family
18
 Describir a una persona

 Decir donde están los lugares de la ciudad
 Decir como llegar a un lugar
 Decir como es tu casa
Temas
 Definite Article
 Possessive
 Have/got
 There is/there are
 Prepositions
 Possessive 2
 Superlative
19
Eighth lesson
Poetry
1. Hear this poem

2. “Roses are red
3. The sky is blue
4. Mountains are brown like the brown of your eyes”
5. What a small poem!
6. Mm, that’s the reason you must never show a work in progress.
7. Don’t get upset! Let’s play a game?
8. What would you like us to play?
9. Let’s play chess.
10. I don’t like chess.
11. Do you wanna play football?
12. Yeah, I like a lot football.
Poetry [poetry] poesia, to hear [jir] oir, rose [rous] rosa, red [red] rojo, sky [skai] cielo, blue
[blu] azul, mountain [mountain] montaña, brown [braun] café, like [laik] como, your [yor] tu,
eye [ai] ojo, small [smol] pequeño, poem [poem] poema, raison [rison], never [neva], to
show [tu shou] mostrar, work [guork] trabajo, progress [progress] progreso, to get mad [ptu
guet engri]enojarse, let’s [lets] vamos a, to play [tu plei] jugar, game [gueim] juego, soccer
[futbol] soccer, a lot [a lot] mucho,
20
Octava leccion
Poesia
1. Escucha este poema.
2. “Las rosas son rojas
3. El cielo es azul
4. Las montañas son cafés como el café de tus ojos”
5. Que poema tan corto!
6. Mm, por eso nunca debes mostrar un trabajo en progreso.
7. No te enojes. Vamos a jugar un juego.
8. Que quieres que hagamos?
9. Vamos a jugar ajedrez.
10. No me gusta el ajedrez. Mm, quieres jugar soccer?
11. Sí, el soccer es mi deporte favorito.
Reading
1. What color is the sky?

____________________________________________
2. Which color is the roses, white or red?
____________________________________________
3. Does he like chess?
____________________________________________
4. What’s his favorite sport?
____________________________________________
21
The Article
Articulo definido Definite Article

El
La
Lo The
Los
Las
“The” se pronuncial /da/. Cuando “the” está antes de una palabra comenzada por
sonido de vocal se pronuncial /di/.
The cat /da kat/
The ocean /di ouschean/
No usamos el articulo definido:
1. Cuando hablamos en general (solo para sustantivos plurales)

Lions live in Africa
The lions of the circus are funny
2. Con el nombre de titulus cuando mencionamos el nombre de la persona.

King Roger is good
But The King is good
3. Con las palabras breakfast, lunch and dinner y el nombre de comidas.

I have dinner at seven
I like Enchiladas
4. Con los colores, juegos, deportes y dias de la semana.

Red is a good color.
Chess is boring.
I like soccer
Moday is my favorite day
22
Escriba el articulo donde falte.
1. _____ King Richard.

2. _____ whales live in the sea.
3. _____ Green.
4. _____chess is boring.
5. _____soccer is my favorite sport.
6. _____Enchiladas is delicious.
7. _____black is my favorite coulour.
8. _____Monday isn’t my best day.
9. _____King Richard.
10. _____Doctor Rhoder.
Traduce al español las siguientes oraciones.
1. El sol es Amarillo. ___________________________

2. El doctor está aqui. ___________________________
3. El café está aqui es negro. ___________________________
4. Los peces del acurio son dorados. ___________________________
5. Las nubes son blancas. ___________________________
6. El sol es Amarillo. ___________________________
7. Las naranjas son naranjas. ___________________________
8. La rosa de la mesa es morada. ___________________________
9. El basketball es un deporte. ___________________________
10. Las plantas son verdes. ___________________________
23
Writing
Busca en internet un collage y describalo usando los adjetivos y los colores. (50
palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
24
Speaking
What’s your favorite color?
My favorite color is ________
What’s your favorite sport?
My favorite sport is ________
What’s your favorite meal?
My favorite meal is ________
What’s your favorite game?
My favorite game is ________
What’s your favorite day of the week?
My favorite day of the week is ________
British Culture
John Donne (1572-1631) fue un poeta inglés que es conocido por ser el máximo
exponente de los poetas llamados metafisicos los cuales empleaban el conceit
que era un tipo de metafora en la cual el autor combinaba palabras o imagenes
incongruentes con el fin de sorprender o desconcertar al lector.
Otro poeta importante fue Roger McGought quien fue uno de los poetas conocidos
como los “Texas poets”, quienes fueron de los poetas más importantes de la
decada de los 60.
25
Ninth lesson
The family
1. Who’s this?
2. Who, the blond man?
3. Yeah.
4. He’s my dad.
5. He’s very tall.
6. Yeah, and my brother too.
7. Who are the women in orange?
8. They are my cousins and my mom.
9. And who’s the man in black?
10. He’s my uncle and the woman next to him is my aunt.
11. And who’s kid with the broken pants?
12. That’s me.
Family [family] familia, man [mn] hombre, dad [fada] padre, tall [tol] alto, brother [broda]
hermano, orange [oranch] naranja, cousin [kasin] primo, black [blak] negro, uncle [onkol]
tio, next to [neks tu jim] junto a el, aunt [aunti] tia, boy [boi] niño, broken [broken] roto,
pants [trousas], that’s me [its mi] soy yo.
26
Novena lección
La familia
1. Quien es?
2. Quien, el hombre rubio?
3. Sí
4. Es mi papa
5. Es muy alto
6. Sí, y mi hermano también
7. Quienes son las mujeres de naranja?
8. Son mis primas y mi mamá.
9. Y el hombre de negro?
10. Es mi tio y la mujer que está junto a el es mi tia.
11. Y quien es el niño con los pantalones rotos?
12. Soy yo.
Reading
1. How is his dad and brother?

____________________________________________
2. Who is in red?
____________________________________________
3. Who’s next to his uncle?
____________________________________________
4. Who’s the boy with the broken pants?
____________________________________________
27
Possessive Adjective
A possessive is a word that indicates that some one or someone belongs to

another person or thing or for indicate relationship.
My /mai/ Mi(s)
Your /yor/ Tu(s)
His Su (de él)
Her Su (de ella)
Its Su (de it)
Our /auer/ Nuestro/a/s
Your Su (de ustedes)
Their /der/ Su (de ellos/ellas)
Usage
A difference of the Spanish, the same form of the possessive for the plural
My car
My cars
In all the other cases, it is used on the same
28
Escriba el posesivo que falte en el espacio adecuado.
1. ________ dad is tall. (mí)

2. ________ mum is beautiful. (su) (de ellos)
3. ________ brothers are smart. (su) (de ellas)
4. ________ sister is funny. (tu)
5. ________ cousins are fast. (sus)
6. ________ uncle is old. (nuestro)
7. ________ aunt is young. (su) (de él)
8. ________ grandma is strong. (mis)
9. ________ grandma is tender. (su) (de ustedes)
10. ________ sons are weak. (sus) (de ella)
11. Mi novio es alto. ___________________________

12. Su casa es verde. ___________________________ (de mi perro)
13. Tu sobrino es nuevo. ___________________________
14. Su novia es inglesa. ___________________________ (de él)
15. Nuestro nieto es jovén. ___________________________
16. Tu sobrina es bonita. ___________________________
17. Su bisabuela es francesa. ___________________________ (de ellos)
18. Sus casas son naranajas. ___________________________ (de mis gatos)
19. Su hija es joven. ___________________________ (de ellos)
20. Su amigo es Mexicano. ___________________________ (de ustedes)
29
Writing
Imagina que estas en tu escuela y te pide tu maestra que presentes a tu familia.

Has un pequeño texto donde describas a tu familia. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
30
Speaking
How are you?
How your is family?
What coulour is your hair/eyes?
How’s your mouth/ Nose?
British Culture
Apesar de que actualmente en el Reino Unido existen diferentes tipos de familia,

pasasando desde la familia tradicional hasta la familia homoparental, la familia
donde el papá y la mamá viven juntos sigue siendo el tipo de familia más comun
en el Reino Unido.
En pormedio los Britanicos tienen 1.9 hijos.
31
Tenth lesson
At museum
1. This is the David. It was built by Miguel Angello. Look at how well the
sculptor has recreated the details of the human body and how well he has
made the head, the nose and the ears. Simply, perfect.
2. Dear, what do you think?
3. I think the way he made the arms, the hands and the fingers is well in, but
he should’ve put more effort in the legs and in the knees, they look like
grandma’s legs.
4. You’re right. Is he Ted?
5. Who? The man that comes with the black hair woman?
6. Yeah.
7. No, Ted got brown hair and his girlfriend does’t have black hair.
8. I’m bored, let’s go for a hamburger.
Museum [miusmium] museo, to build [tu bild] construer, sculptor [skultor] escultor,
perfectly [perfecli] perfectamente, to recreat [tu recrieit], recrear, ear [ir] oreja, simply
[simpli] simplemente, perfect [perfekt] perfecto, dear [dir] querida, you think about it [tu
θing] tu que piensas, way [güei] forma, arm [arm] brazo, hand [jand] mano, finger
[finga] dedo, should’ve [shudfv] debio haber, effort [efort] esfuerzo, leg [leg] pierna,
knee [ni] rodilla, grandma [grandmoda] abuela, you’re right [yur raight] tener razon, to
come [tu kom] venir, hair [jeir] cabello, kids [kids] hijos, dog [dog] perro, so many [so
meni] tantas, question [kuestion] pregunta, nothing [noθing] nada, bored [bort]
aburrido, let’s go [ lets gou] vamos, hamburger [burga] hamburguesa.
32
Decima lección
En el museo
1. Este es el David, fue hecho por Miguel Angello. Miren lo bien que el escultor
a recreado los detalles de el cuerpo humano y lo bien que ha hecho la
cabeza, la nariz y las orejas, simplemente perfecto.
2. Que piensas, querida?
3. Pienso que la manera en la que ha hecho los brazos, las manos y los dedos
está bien, pero el debio haber puesto más esfuerzo en las piernas y las
rodillas, parecen las piernas y las rodillas de una abuela.
4. Si, tienes razon. Ese es Ted?
5. Quien? El hombre que viene con la mujer de cabello largo negro?
6. Sí
7. No, Ted tiene el cabello café y su novia no tiene el cabello negro.
8. Estoy aburrida, vamos por una hamburguesa.
Reading
1. Is he Tom?
____________________________________________
2. Does Tom have black hair?
____________________________________________
3. Do they have kids?
____________________________________________
4. Do they have a cat?
____________________________________________
33
Have/got
Informal Formal
You got You have
You got You do not have
You don’t have
Have you got? Do you have?
Yeah, I have Yeah, I do
No, I haven’t No, I don’t
Shegot She has
She don’t have She does not have
She doesn’t have
Has she got? Does she have?
Yeah, she has Yeah, she does
No, she hasn’t No, she doesn’t
34
Escriba la forma correcta del verbo have/got en el espacio.
1. I __________ brown hair.

2. Michelle _________ fine lips.
3. You _________ black hair.
4. He _________ curly white hair.
5. They _________ small eyes.
6. She _________ wavy brown hair.
7. You _________ a small nouse.
8. It _________ big ears
9. María _________ small mouth.
10. We _________ straight black hair.
21. Mi frente es grande. ___________________________

22. Su cara es pequeña. ___________________________ (de mi perro)
23. Tu diente es nuevo. ___________________________
24. Su cuello es largo. ___________________________ (de él)
25. Nuestro cuerpo es moreno. ___________________________
26. Tu mano es grande. ___________________________
27. Su rodilla es pequeña. ___________________________ (de ellos)
28. Sus brazos son fuertes. ___________________________ (de mis gatos)
29. Su pie es pequeño. ___________________________ (de ellos)
30. Su codo está limpio. ___________________________ (de ustedes)
35
Writing
Escriba una descripción de tu pareja ideal para una pagina de citas. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
36
Speaking
Have you got boyfriend/girlfriend?
Yeah, I have/ No, I haven’t.
Have you got kids?
Have you got brown hair?
Has your mum got fine lips?
Yeah, she has/ No, she hasn’t.
Has your dad got big ears?
Yeah, he has/ No, he hasn’t.
British Culture
El Museo Británico (The British Museum) es el museo más importante del Reino
Unido. Fundado en el año 1753, fue el primer useo natural del mundo. Cuenta con
más de ocho millones de objetos de todos los continentes que van desde la
prehistoria hasta la modernidad. Su sección del Antiguo Egipto es la más
importante del mundo después de la del Museo Egipcio de El Cairo. La entrada al
museo es gratuita.
37
Eleventh lesson
Directions
1. Excuse me, is there any bank near here?

2. Yes, there’s one on Thomson street.
3. How can I arrive in there?
4. You’re going up to Johnson street, then, you’re going to turn left, you will
see a theater.
5. You’re going to across the street and you’re going to go to the bus stop.
6. You’re going to go for the bus and you’re going to get off in Greenwich park.
7. You’re going to go straight ahead and you’re going to arrived in Thomson
street. You can’t miss it.
8. Thanks very much! – That’s okay.
Direction [direkshion] dirección, bank [bank] banco, road [rod] calle, to get [tu guet]
llegar , to go up [tu gou op], then [den] luego, to turn left [tu torn left] dar vuelta a la
izquierda, moviehouse [sinema] cine, to walk across [guok akros] atravezar, street [stit]
calle, to go [tu gou], bus stop [bus stop] parada del camion, to wait for [tu wueit for]
esperar (a) , bus [bus] camion, to get down [guet daun] bajar(se), park [park] parque,
to go straight ahead [tu gou straigt ajed] ir(se) todo derecho, to recognize [tu rikonaiz]
reconocer, Chinese [chainis] chino, restaurant [restaurant] restaurante, you can’t miss
it [yu kent mis it] no hay pierde, thanks very much [θenkiu] muchas gracias, that’s okay
[dats okei] no hay de que.
38
Decima primera lección
Direcciones
1. Disculpe, hay un banco cerca de aqui?

2. Sí, hay uno en la calle Thomson.
3. Como puedo llegar?
4. Vaya a la calle Johson, luego de Vuelta a la izquierda, va a ver un teatro.
5. Cruce la calle y vaya a la parade del camion.
6. Espere el camion y baje en Greenwich park.
7. Camine todo derecho y va a llegar a la calle Thomson. No hay pierde.
8. Muchas gracias -De nada
Reading
1. Where is there a bank?

____________________________________________
2. What wil he see?
____________________________________________
3. Where does he gotta get down?
____________________________________________
4. Wat are there in Thomson road?
____________________________________________
39
There is/ there are
Usamos “there is” y “there are” para decir “hay”
Usamos “there is” para los sustantivos sigulares y “there are” para los sustantivos
plurales.
40
Exercise 1
Escriba la forma correcta del verbo to be en los espacios en blanco.
1. There _____ a school in my neighborhood.

2. There _____ a lot of hotels here.
3. There _____ a hospital on the corner. (not)
4. _____ there a city near here?
5. There _____ two restaurants in this street.
6. There _____ an airport in the city. (not)
7. There _____ a port in the beach.
8. Are _____ there museums in the town?
9. There _____ several coach stations. (not)
10. There _____ a park next to the avenue.
Exercise 2
1. Hay una universidad. ___________________________

2. ¿Hay un castillo en el parque?. ___________________________
3. No hay un banco. ___________________________
4. Hay mercados en la calle. ___________________________
5. Hay un centro comercial. ___________________________
6. Hay casas. ___________________________
7. Hay una plaza. ___________________________
8. ¿hay una iglésia?. ___________________________
9. Hay un cine. ___________________________
10. No hay monumentos en la avenida. _________________________
41
Writing
Escriba un mensaje a un amigo donde le digas como llegar a tu casa desde el

aeropuerto de tu ciudad. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
42
Speaking
What’s there in your neighborhood?
There is/are _____ in my city.
Is there any famous place in your neighborhood?
Yeah, there are/ No, there aren’t
What’s there in your city?
There are _____ in my city.
Is there any famous place in your city?
Yeah, there is/ No, there isn’t
What are they?
British Culture
Como lo habíamos dicho antes en inglés británico no se utiliza “sir” or “ma’am”

cuando se dirige a alguien en la calle, en un restaurante o en un hotel.
Cuando atraviesa un rio una ciudad, se utiliza go down para indicar que algo está
hacia el rio y go up para decir lo contrario.
Recuerda que en el Reino Unido, un pueblo se considera como “city” si cuenta con
una catedral.
43
Twelfth lesson
A new home
1. Dear parents,
2. We finally have found a house. That’s in Culver city neighborhood, that’s
small, but that got all mod cons and a yard. This week we seat the furniture.
The table and the chairs fit perfectly in the kitchen but the problem was the
sofa too big to fit in the living-room. Also, the window of the bathroom was
broken, I’ll fix it as soon as I got time. Something good that got this house is
that it isn’t very far from my new office, so I can go there on foot.
3. I miss you,
4. Your son Miguel
Home, weet home [jom, suit jom] hogar, dulce hogar, Dear [dir] querido(s), parents
[parents] padres, It has been [it jas bin] ha sido, difficult [dificult] dificil, to believe [bilifv]
creer, we’ve already found [guifv alredi faund] al fin hemos encontrado, house [jaus]
casa, neighborhood [neigbourjud] colonia, all [ol] tod(s), all mod cons [ol mod kons]
con todos los servicios, yard [yard] jardin, week[guik] semana, move out lorry [mufv
lorry] camion de mudanza, could [kud] podria, to seat [tu sit] acomodar, furniture
[fornichia] mueble(s), table [teibol] mesa, chair [cheir] silla, to fit [tu fit] encajar, living-
room [lifving rum] sala, window [guindou] ventana, bathroom [batrum] baño, broken
[broken] roto, I’ll gotta [ail jafv tu] tender que, fix [fiks] arreglar, as soon as [as sun as]
tan pronto como, the good thing [da gud θing], office [ofis] oficina, so [so] asi que, can
[kan] puedo, on foot [on fut] a pie, to miss [tu mis] extrañar.
44
Decima segunda lección
Un nuevo hogar
1. Queridos padres,
2. Ha sido dificil pero creo que ya encontramos casa. Está en la colonia
Westminster, es pequeña, pero tiene todos los servicios y tiene un jardin.
Esta semana metimos los muebles. La mesa y las sillas entraron perfecto
en la cocina pero el problema fue el sillon que era demasiado grande para
caber en la sala, y la ventana del baño estaba rota, la arreglaré en cuanto
tenga tiempo.
Lo bueno es que la nueva oficina esta muy cerca de la casa, asi que irme
caminando.
3. Los extraño.
4. Miguel
Reading
1. Where is the house?

____________________________________________
2. What rooms does the house have?
____________________________________________
3. Is the house near the house?
____________________________________________
4. How does he get to his office?
____________________________________________
45
Prepositions
Inglés Español Inglés Español

Behind Atraz On the edge of En la orilla
Near (to) Cerca Above Mas alla de
Around Alrededor On the top of En la cima de
Round
Between Entre On the right A la derecha
Among Entre (cuando son 3 o On the left A la izquierda
mas cosas)
Next to Junto a Ahead Todo derecho
In front of En frente de/ A fuera Past Pasando
de (lugar)
Al otro lado de
Opposite En frente de (cuando Inside Adentro
hay algo enmedio que
los separa)
Cerca (que lo
By podemos ver o esta Outside Afuera
muy cerca de
dondeestamos)
Far (away) Lejos Upstairs Arriba
On the corner En la esquina Downstairs Abajo
Over Sobre (sin contacto) Under Abajo/debajo
Against Contra
46
In, On At
Usamos on:
a. Para indicar que algo está sobre una superficie.

The Glass is on the table.
b. Con las expresiones “on the first, second…. Floor”

He lives on the second floor.
c. Con los medios de trasporte.

We’re on the bus.
Usamos at:
a. Con tiendas, negocios y lugares publicos.

We are at Bucher’s.
We are at Supermarket
b. Con el nombre de edificions y construcciones cuando se menciona su

nombre.
I’m at stadium Azteca. But I’m in the stadium.
c. Con los lugares de trabajo y centros educativos.
I work at Coca Cola.

I study at UNAM.
d. Con las expresiones “home” y “at work”
47
En todos los demás casos usamos “in”.
48
Exercise 1
Escriba la preposición correcta en los espacios en blanco. (varias opciones son

posibles)
1. The cat is _____ the table.

2. There is a sofa _____ the living-room.
3. There is a forest _____ the city.
4. The kitchen is_____ the door.
5. There are two beds _____ my room.
6. There is a house _____ the house.
7. There _____ the yard.
8. The restroom is _____ the stairs.
9. There is a swimming pool _____ garage.
10. There is an attic _____ my room.
Exercise 2
Traduce al inglés las siguientes oraciones.
1. Hay una araña sobre mi cabeza. ___________________________

2. Hay un museo en la orilla del mar. ___________________________
3. Hay una unidad habitacional junto a mi casa. ______________________
4. Hay un pueblo más alla de las montañas. __________________________
5. Hay un sillón grande a la izquierda de la sala. _______________________
6. Hay un comedor entre la cocina y la sala. __________________________
7. Hay un atico en la cima de mi recamará. ___________________________
8. Hay un comedor a la derecha de la ventana. ________________________
9. Hay un sillón chiquito en el sotano. ___________________________
10. Hay un departamento lejos de mi casa. ___________________________
11. Hay una araña sobre mi cabeza. ___________________________
49
Writing
Escriba una carta para una agencia de vienes raices donde que tipo de Vivienda
quieres y que tiene que tener. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
50
Speaking
How’s your haouse?
My house is _____.
What rooms has it got?
Thatgot _____.
What’s there in your room?
In my room there is/are _____.
Is there near your house?
Near from my house there is/are _____.
In what floor do you live.
I live on the _____ floor.
British Culture
Wentsmister es una de las colonias más importantes de Los Angeles. Está llena
de atracciones turísticas y monumentos históricos. En este lugar es donde se
encuentra el palacio de Buckingham, lugar de residencia de la reina del Reino
Unido.
51
Thirteenth lesson
Whose is this?
1. Is this my pen?
2. No, this is mine.
3. Where’s yours?
4. I don’t know, I let it on the table but it isn’t.
5. Have you looked for it in your schoolbag, yet?
6. Yeah, but only my pencil, my case and my eraser are there.
7. Why don’t you ask Sally if she can lend hers?
8. No, because she´s busy and I haven’t taken hers back.
Whose is this [jus is dis] de quien es, pen [pen] lapis, to let [tu let] dejar, table [teibol]
mesa, pencil [pensil] lapis, case [keis] lapicera, eraser [roba] goma, schoolbag [skulbag]
mochila, to ask [tu ask] preguntar, to lend [tu lend] prestar, busy [bizi] ocupado, to give
back [tu gifv back] regresar.
52
Decima tercera lección
De quien es?
1. Es esta mi pluma?
2. No, está es la mia.
3. Donde esta la tuya?
4. No se, la deje encima de la mesa pero ya no está.
5. Ya buscaste en tu mochila?
6. Sí, pero solo está mi lapiz, mi estuchera y mi goma.
7. Porque no le pides a Sally que te preste la suya?
8. No, porque está ocupada y no le he regresado la suya.
Reading
1. Is the pen him?

____________________________________________
2. Where was his pen?
____________________________________________
3. What are there in his school back?
____________________________________________
4. Does he have a computer in his school back?
____________________________________________
53
Possessive Pronouns
Personal pronoun Possessive pronoun

I Mine
You Yours
He His
She Hers
It *its own
We Ours
You Yours
They Theirs
*It no tiene un pronombre posesivo. La frase “its own” es usado en su lugar.
Usamos el posesivo con la estructura “a/the/this + possessive”
He is a friend of her (es un amigo de ella)
En todos los demás casos se usa igual que en español.
54
Exercise 1
Escriba la pronom possessive correcto en el espacio en blanco.
1. This chair is _____. (mia)

2. Those pens are ________. (nuestas)
3. That sharpener is ________. (suyas) (de ellas)
4. These pencils are ________. (tuyos)
5. This color is _____. (suyas) (de ustedes)
6. Those rucksacks are ________. (suya) (de él)
7. That notebook is ________. (mia)
8. These cases are ________. (suyas) (de ellos)
9. This chair is _____. (tuya)
10. Those erasers are ________. (suyas) (de ella)
Exercise 2
1. Esta hoja es mia. ___________________________

2. Este borrador es mio. ___________________________
3. Ese pizarrón es mio. ___________________________
4. Esta engrapadora es mia. ___________________________
5. Esos marcadores de textos son mios. ___________________________
6. Estas grapas son tuyas. ___________________________
7. Este diurex es mia. ___________________________
8. Esa regla es mia. ___________________________
9. Estos correctores son mios. ___________________________
10. Estas tijeras son mias. ___________________________
55
Writing
Rescriba el dialogo cambiando los possessive pronouns y los objetos. (50

palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
56
Speaking
Contesta las siguientes preguntas en inglés.
1. Whose this pen?

That’s _____________
2. Whose those books?
That’s _____________
3. Whose that pencil?
That’s _____________
4. Whose this ruler?
That’s _____________
5. Whose these rocksacks?
That’s _____________
57
Fourteenth lesson
Animals
1. The most ancient animals in the planet are the turtles and the crocodiles,
which ancestors lived on earth much earlier than dinosaurs.
2. The fastest animal at present is the leopard, but only on land because in the
sea the sharks are the fastest. The biggest shark is the whale shark which
can measure until 20 meters.
3. Among the birds, the crows are the most intelligent, they can resolve
problems that only a dolphin could resolve.
4. And the most dangerous predator is the cat, which can hunt more than 100
species.
Ancient [ancient] antiguo, planet [planet] planeta, turtle [torcol] tortuga, crocrodile
[krokodail] cocodrilo, whose [jus] cuyo, ancestor [ancestor] antepasado, to live [tu
lifv] vivir, earth [eart] tierra, much [moch] mucho, early [erli] temprano, dinosaur
[dainosaur] dinosaurio, at present [at present] actualmente, leopard [leopard]
leopard, only [onli] solo/solamente, land [land] tierra, sea [si] mar, shark [shark]
tiburon, whale [ueil] ballena, which [uich] el cual, to meseure [meshur] medir, length
[lengt] longitude, bird [bird] pajaro, crown [kraun] cuervo, to resolve [tu risolfv]
resolver, problem [problem] problema, dolphin [dolfin] delfin, predator [predator]
depredador, to hunt [tu jont], species [spicis] especie.
58
Decima cuarta lección
Animales
1. Los animales más antiguos en el planeta son las tortugas y los cocodrilos,
cuyos ancestros vivieron en la tierra mucho antes que los dinosaurios.
2. El animal más rapido en el presente es el leopard, pero solo en la tierra
porque en el mar los tiburones son los más rapidos.
3. Entre las aves, los cuervos son los animales más intelligentes, ellos pueden
resolver problemas que solo un delfin podria resolver.
4. Y el depredador más peligroso es el gato, que puede cazar más de 100
especies.
Reading
1. What are the most antiens animals?

____________________________________________
2. What’s the fastest animal in the sea?
____________________________________________
3. Is the white shark the biggest shark?
____________________________________________
4. What’s the most dangerous predator?
____________________________________________
59
Superlative
General rule +est Fast Fastest

RESUMÉC Double consonant Hot Hottest
+ est
Y (two syllables) Er --> iest Happy Happiest
Two or more Most Intelligent Most intelligent
syllables
I’m the fastest (soy el más rapido)

You’re the funniest.
He’s the most intellifent.
Irregular Superlative
Adjective Comparative Superlative

Good Better Best
Bad Worse Worst
Many More Most
Much
Little Less Least
Far Farther Farthest
Further Furthest
Old Older Oldest
Elder Eldest
60
Exercise 1
Escriba el superlativo del adjetivo dado en los espacios en blanco.
1. The eagle is _____ (powerful.) bird.

2. The tiger is _____ (big) cats in the world.
3. The spider is _____ (poisonous) insects.
4. The crocodile is _____ (strong) reptiles.
5. The rabbit is _____ (soft) pets.
6. The donkey is _____ (smart) mammals.
7. The camel is _____ (resistent) animals in the desert.
8. The bee is _____ (known) insects.
9. The scorpion is one of _____ (poisonous) insects.
10. The Kangaroo is one of _____ (fast) animals.
Exercise 2
1. La galllina es el animal más cobarde ___________________________

2. El mosquito es uno de los insectos más comunes
___________________________
3. La oveja es el animal más suave ___________________________
4. El gallo es el animal más ruidoso ___________________________
5. El pingüino es una de las aves más conocidas _______________________
6. El pulpo es el animal marino más conocido
___________________________
7. El toro es uno de los animales más fuertes
___________________________
8. El zorro es el can más inteligente ___________________________
9. La cebra es el animal más rapido ___________________________
10. La mosca es el insecto más comun ___________________________
61
Writing
Haz un articulo para la revista de tu escuela donde digas cuales son los animales
más grandes, fuertes, conocidos, etc. de tu país. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
62
Speaking
What’s the biggest animal, the bear, the lion or the elephant?
I believe bears/lions/elephants are __________ animals.
What’s the funniest animal, the cat, the dog or the hamster?
I believe cats/dogs/hamsters are __________ animals.
What’s the strongest animal?
I believe _____ are __________ animals.
What’s the smarter animal?
I believe _____ are __________ animals.
What are the most common animals in a zoo?
I believe _____, _____ and _____ are __________ animals in a zoo.
63
Third Unit
Party
64
 Hablar de tus gustos

 Decir tu rutina
 Decir la hora
 Hablar del clima
Temas
 Present simple
 Personal object pronouns
 Possessive case
 Reflexive pronouns
 Hour
 Comparative of equality
Desde este punto es importante que leas la lista de verbos irregulares que viene al
final del libro.
Para mejorar tu lectura, por el momento solo te recomendamos leer tus lecciones
del libro.
65
Fifteenth lesson
Dairy routine
1. At workdays, Mister Smith leaves from his job at five o’clock and he goes to
the subway station to go to the suburbs.
2. When he arrives home, he reads a book or watches the television. He
usually watches a movie or a documentary on FOX.
3. After that, he has something for dinner and do the washing-up.
4. Before going to bed, Mister Smith puts on his pajama and brushes his teeth.
5. On the weekend, Mister Smith takes German lessons in the morning and
meets with his friends in the afternoon.
Good evening [gud ifvning] buenas noches, mister [mista] señor, at workdays [guork deis]
entre semana, to leave [tu lifb] salir, from [from] de, job [shyob] trabajo, o’clock [o klock] en
punto, train [trein] tren, to get [tu guet] llegar, home [jom] casa, to have dinner [tu jafv dina]
cenar, to dothe washing-up [to du da washing op] lavar los platos, to turn on [tu turnon]
prendar, documentary [dokumentari] documental, sometimes [somtaims] algunas veces,
movie [movie] pelicula.
66
Decima quinta lección
Rutina diaria
1. Entre semana, El señor Smith sale de su trabajo a las 5 en punto y se dirige

a la estación Waterloo donde toma el tren a los suburbios.
2. Cuando llega a su casa, lee un libro o ve la televisión.
3. Usualmente ve una pelicula o un documental en la BBC.
4. Despúes de eso, cena algo y lava los trastes.
5. Antes de dormir, el señor Smith se pone su pillama y se lava los dientes.
6. El fin de semana, el señor Smith toma clases de alemán en la mañana y se
ve con sus amigos en la tarde.
Reading
1. What does he get to his house?

____________________________________________
2. What does he do when he gets home?
____________________________________________
3. What does he do after having dinner?
____________________________________________
4. What does he do on the weekend?
____________________________________________
67
Present Simple
To Eat To go To play To fry

I Eat Go Play Fry
You Eat Go Play Fry
He Eats Goes Play Fry
She Eats Goes Plays Fries
It Eats Goes Plays Fries
We Eat Go Play Fries
You Eat Go Play Fry
They Eat Go Play Fry
Usamo el presente simple para:
1. Para hablar de estados permanentes.

Tina lives in LA.
2. Para hablar de acciones que se repiten o que son habituales.

The Mornarca Butterflies always come in summer.
I go to the bed at 11.
3. Para hablar de leyes naturales

Water boils at 100 centigrade
4. Para hablar de itenerarios y horarios.

The movie starts at 7:00.
The train leaves at 9:00.
5. En comentarios deportivos.
Chicarito passes the ball.
6. Para hablar de la historia de un libro, una pelicula, etc.

Harry Potter is the story about a kid who is magitian.
En todos los demás casos se usa como en español.
68
Exercise 1
Escriba la forma correcta del verbo dado en los espacios en blanco.
1. I _____ (wake up) early.

2. It _____ (get) at his work.
3. We _____ (come back) early.
4. You _____ (get up) early.
5. He _____ (work) in a company.
6. I _____ (have) dinner.
7. He _____ (take) a shower.
8. You _____ (study) a lot.
9. They _____ (go) to the bed.
10. She _____ (leave) early.
Exercise 2
Llena las siguientes frases con el verbo que le corresponde. (varias opciones son
posibles)
1. It __________ the T.V.

2. I __________ the disches.
3. He __________ the dog.
4. We __________ listening to music.
5. I __________ books.
6. He __________ exercise.
7. You __________ dinner.
8. I __________ Spanish.
9. She __________ videos.
10. You __________ the storeping.
69
Writing
Imagina que te has ido a vivir a otro país. Dile a un amigo tuyo cual es tu rutina
allá (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
70
Speaking
What do you do at workdays?
I _____ at workdays.
What do you do in the afternoon?
I _____ in the afternoon.
What do you do when you got to home?
When I got to home I _____.
What do you do on the weekend?
I _____ on the weekend.
What do you do in your free time?
I _____ in my free time.
British Culture
La estación Waterloo es la estación ferroviaria más grande y concurrida del Reino

Unido.
La BBC (British Broadcasting Corporation) es la televisorá y estación de radio más
importante del Reino Unido. A pesar de ser del gobierno, la BBC es considerada
por los británicos como una institución imparcial. La BBC cuenta con servicios
especiales para cada país del Reino Unido.
71
Sixteenth lesson
A bad moment
1. Hi, what’s your name?

2. My name is Karen, what’s yours?
3. My name is Mike, do you like Maroon 5?
4. Yeah, but I prefer Nirvana.
5. What another band do you like?
6. I love to listen to The Rolling Stones.
7. Do you like classical music?
8. No, I can’t stand it.
9. What about Jazz?
10. I’m crazy about it.
11. Would you like to going to a jazz club with me?
12. Of course, just let me finish the exam.
Bad [bad] mal, moment [moment] momento, hi [jai] hola (informal), to like [tu laik] gustar, to
prefer [prefer] preferir, band [band] banda, a lot [a lot] mucho, to listen to [tu lisen tu]
escuchar, classical [klasikal] clasico, to find [faind] hacerse (parecer), boring (boring)
aburrido, to love [tu lofv] encantar/amar, to want [guant] querer, go dancing [gou dancing]
ir a bailar, of course [of kours] por supuesto, just [shyust] justo, to let [tu let] dejar, to finish
[finish] terminar, exam [eksam].
72
Decima sexta lección
Un mal momento
1. Hola, como te llamas?

2. Me llamo Karen, y tu?
3. Mi nombre es Mike, te gusta Coldplay?
4. Sí, pero prefiero Oasis.
5. Que otra banda te gusta?
6. Me gusta mucho escuchar a los Beatles
7. Te gusta la musica clasica?
8. No, me choca.
9. Y el Rock and Billy?
10. Me encanta.
11. Quieres ir a bailar conmigo?
12. Sí, solo dejame terminar el examen.
Reading
1. What’s her name?

____________________________________________
2. Does she like Coldplay?
____________________________________________
3. What does she prefer?
____________________________________________
4. Does she like Rock and Billy?
____________________________________________
73
Affirmative form Negative form
I eat pizza I do not eat pizza
I don’t eat pizza
He eats meal He does not eat pizza
He doesn’t eat pizza
We make the interrogative form by adding do or does (for he,she, it) in front of the
personal pronoun.
Affirmative form Interrogative form form Answers

You eat pizza Do you eat pizza? Yeah, I do
No, I don’t
He eats pizza Does he buy pizza Yeah, he does
No, he doesn’t
74
Exercise 1
Escriba la forma correcta del verbo dado en los espacios en blanco. Recuerda
hacerlo en la forma negative.
1. I _____ (like) art.

2. It _____ (love) this novel.
3. We _____ (not mind) the music.
4. You _____ (like) this painter.
5. He _____ (hate) that song.
6. I _____ (not like) the piano.
7. He _____ (be crazy about) French architecture.
8. You _____ (like) this esculture.
9. They _____ (like) this tail.
10. She _____ (can’t bear) literature.
Exercise 2
Llena las siguientes frases con el verbo que le corresponde. (varias opciones son
posibles) Recuerda que la respuesta debe estar en forma negativa
1. It __________ the guitar.

2. I __________ the theater.
3. He __________ the song.
4. We __________ bass.
5. I __________ books.
6. He __________ write.
7. You __________ drumms.
8. I __________ dance.
9. She __________ these videos.
10. You __________ paiting.
75
Writing
Imagina que te has ido a vivir a otro país. Enviale una carta a un amigo donde le
digas que es lo que te gusta de ese país. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
76
Speaking
What do you love doing?
I love _____.
What do you like watching?
I like watching _____.
What don’t you mind doing?
I don’t mind _____.
What don’t you like eating?
I like eating _____.
What can’t you stand?
I hate _____.
British Culture
Debido a que nuestro studio se centra en el inglés britanico, sería una Buena idea
que escucharas bandas como Oasis, Jamiroquai y Doves debido a que en estas
se puede ver claramente el acento del inglés britanico. Otras bandas britanicas
famosas son Coldplay y Los Beatles.
Entre los escritores britanicos más famosos se encuentran William Shakespear,

cuya obra más famosas fue “Hamblet”, y Roger Dikens.
77
Seventeenth lesson
On the telephone
1. Hello!
2. Hi! , Sahara, how are you?
3. Hi! Cathy, Good, thanks, what about you?
4. Good. Thanks!
5. Do you want to go to a party on Saturday?
6. I can’t, I got a meeting.
7. Do you continue going out with Ted?
8. Yeah.
9. He loves you.
10. And I love him too.
11. What does he do?
12. He’s a musician and he’s very well. He plays the guitar and the piano.
13. I gotta go. See you!
14. Bye!
Hello [jelou] bueno, party [pari] fiesta, guitar [guitar] guitarra, piano [piano] piano, musician
[miusishian] musico.
78
Decima septima lección
Hablando por telefono
1. Bueno!
2. Hola, Sahra, como estás?
3. Hola, Cathy, bien y tú?
4. Bien. Gracias.
5. Quieres ir a una fiesta el sabado?
6. No puedo. Tengo una cita.
7. Sigues saliendo con Ted?
8. Sí.
9. Él te quiere mucho.
10. Y yo lo quiero a él.
11. A que se dedica?
12. Es musico y es muy Bueno. Él toca la guitarra y el piano.
13. Bueno, tengo que irme. No vemos!
14. Adios!
Reading
1. Who calls?
____________________________________________
2. Does she love him?
____________________________________________
3. What does he do?
____________________________________________
4. What does he play?
____________________________________________
79
Personal Object Pronouns
Personal Pronoun Personal Object pronoun Pronombre de bjeto

I Me Me
You You Te
He Him Lo
She Her La
It It Lo/la (de it)
We Us Nos
You You Los/las (de ustedes)
They Them Los/las (de ellos/ellas)
Usamos los pronombres de objeto de la misma forma que en español.
To with the verbs
A diferencia del español, en inglés no usamos (to) con el objeto directo cuando
nos referimos a seres vivos.
I bath my dog. (baño a mi perro)
No I bath to my dog.
80
Exercise 1
Escriba el personal object pronoun correcto en los espacios en blanco.
1. I see _____. (te)

2. He watches _____. (la) (it)
3. We listen to _____. (los) (ellos)
4. You lie _____. (me)
5. He sees ____. (nosotros)
6. I heard _____. (la) (ella)
7. It smells _____. (los) (ustedes)
8. You touch ______. (lo) (it)
9. They call _____. (nos)
10. She loves _____. (lo) (él)
Exercise 2
Sustituye las siguientes frases como en el ejemplo.
I see John. I see him.
1. The dog smells the cat. ________________________.

2. You lie your husdand. ________________________.
3. He sees María. ________________________.
4. I hear John and Daniel. ________________________.
5. We listen to the radio. ________________________.
6. He waches the TV. ________________________.
7. You touch the cows. ________________________.
8. They call you and me ________________________.
9. She loves John. ________________________.
81
Writing
Rescriba el dialogo cambiando las personas, los objetos y los pronombres de

objeto. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
82
Speaking
Do you like watching the T.V.?
Do you like listening to Shakira?
Do you like listening Pavaroty?
Do you like listening to rock bands?
British Culture
Apesar de su reputación de ser un país con mucha Lluvia, el Reino Unido tiene
una tasa de presipitación igual similar a los ddemás países europeos.
Los veranos en el Reino Unido son calidos y los inviernos son frios. Sin embargo,
la nieve es infrecuente.
83
Eighteenth lesson
A friend’s letter
1. Hi, Laura, I hope you’re good. I write you this letter because you asked me
how was the climate here.
2. Well, the climate here is very hot in spring and rainy in summer, I always
gotta carry an umbrella and a raincoat to not get wet. In fall, the climate is
cold and windy and in winter that’s freezing.
3. I hope this information is useful for you. Visit me soon.
4. Love,
5. Daniela
Life [laif] vida, to write [tu rait] escribir, life [laif], country [kountri] pais, only [onli] solamente,
open [open] abierto, climate [climeit] clima, hot [jot] calor, spring [spring] primavera, rainy
[reini] lluvioso, summer [soma] verano, to carry [tu carri] llevar, umbrella [ombrela]
paraguas, raincoat [reinkot] impermeable, fall [otom] otoño, cold [kold] frio, to be windy [tu
bi guindi] hacer aire, winter [winta] invierno, freezing [frising] helando, to hope [tu jop]
esperar, to drop in on [tu drop in on] visitar, Love [lofv] con amor.
84
Decimo octava lección
Una carta de una amiga
1. Hola, Laura, espero que este bien. Te escribo esta carta porque me
preguntaste como era el clima aqui.
2. Bueno, hace mucho calor en primavera y llueve en el verano. Siempre
tengo que cargar un paraguas y un abrigo. En otoño, hace frio y en invierno
hace mucho frio.
3. Espero que esta información te sea util. Visitame pronto,
4. Con amor,
5. Daniela
Reading
1. Who is this?
____________________________________________
2. What’s the climate like up there?
____________________________________________
3. What’s the climate like down there?
____________________________________________
4. Are they happy?
____________________________________________
85
Adverbs of frequency
An adverb of frequency is a word that indicates how often something happens.
Adverb of frequency Meaning

Always Siempre
Almost always Casi siempre
Usually Normalmente/ Usualmente
Frequently Frecuentemente
Quiet often Bastante Seguido
Often Seguido
Sometimes A veces
Seldom Rara vez
Rarely Raramente
Hardly ever Dificilmente, casi nunca
Never Nunca
86
Exercise 1
Usando el vocabulario del clima, llena los espacios en blanco con la palabra
correcta.
1. Mexico is _______. The temperature is 20..

2. France is _______. The temperature is 5.
3. Brazil is _______. The temperature is 30.
4. Italy is _______. The windy always blows..
5. Germany is _______. The temperature is 20.
6. The United States is _______. The temperature is 8.
7. United States is _______. The temperature is 16.
8. China is _______. It always rains.
9. Australia is _______. The temperature is 35.
10. Swissland is _______. The temperature is -20 degrees.
Exercise 2
Traduce las siguientes oraciones.
1. El clima está bien. ________________________________.

2. El clima de Los Angeles es nevoso.
________________________________.
3. La niebla es obscura. ________________________________.
4. La lluvia es fuerte. ________________________________.
5. Esta nublado. ________________________________.
6. El sol es amarillo. ________________________________.
7. La nueve es gris. ________________________________.
8. El clima está con niebla. ________________________________.
9. El viento es rapido. ________________________________.
10. Esta soledado. ________________________________.
87
Writing
Escriba un articulo para una revista donde digas como es el clima de tu país (50
palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
88
Speaking
What’s the climate like in spring in your country?
That’s __________ in spring in my country.
What’s the climate like in summer in your country?
That’s __________ in summer in my country.
What’s the climate like in fall in your country?
That’s __________ in fall in my country.
What’s the climate like in winter in your country?
That’s __________ in winter in my country.
What climate do you like?
I like _____ climate.
89
Nineteenth lesson
A busy schedule
1. Hello!
2. Hi, Ivon!
3. Hi, María. How are the things in LA?
4. Good, but I feel very tired.
5. Why?
6. Because I got lots of things to do.
7. What do you usually do?
8. At workdays, I always wake up at seven and I get up at 6:30 to do exercise.
After that, I take a shower and have breakfast. While I’m on the bus to work
I often listen to music. Then, I get to the job and I’m there till 6. Then, I come
back to my place and I watch a movie. After that, I go to bed.
9. I see, I gotta open the door. I’ll call you later. Bye!
10. Bye!
Schedule [taimteibol] horario, to wake up [tu gueik op] despertarse, after that [after dat]
despúes de eso, to take a shower [tu teik a shogua] bañarse (en la regadera), at workdays
[at guorkdeis] dias lavorales/entre semana, train [trein] tren, to wear [tu guer] vestir, pink
[pink] rosa, dress [dres] vestido, white [guait] blanco, shirt [shirt] camisa, dark [dark]
obscuro, green [grin] verde, tie [tai] corbata, suit [suit] traje.
90
Decima septima lección
Un horario ocupado
1. Bueno!
2. Hola, Ivon!
3. Hola, María. Como están las cosas en Los Angeles?
4. Bien, pero estoy muy cansada.
5. Por que?
6. Porque tengo muchas cosas que hacer.
7. Que haces?
8. Entre semana, siempre me levanto a las cinco para hacer ejercicio.
Despúes de eso, me baño y desayuno. Mientras estoy en el camión para el
trabajo siempre escucho musica. Luego, llego al trabajo y estoy ahí hasta
las 6. Luego, regreso a mi casa y veo una pelicula. Despues de eso me
duermo.
9. Ya veo. Tengo que colgar porque tengo que abrir la puerta. Te llamo al rato.
Adios!
10. Adios!
Reading
1. What time does she wake up?

____________________________________________
2. What does she do in the bus?
____________________________________________
3. What does she do after work?
____________________________________________
4. What time does she go to bed?
____________________________________________
91
Reflexive verbs
Personal pronoun Verb Reflexive pronoun

I Cut Myself
You Yourself
He Himself
She Cuts Herself
It Itself
We Ourselves
You Cut Yourselves
They Themselves
We use the reflexive pronouns when:
1. We wanna indicate that the action of the verb falls in the subject.
2. When we wanna say that we enjoy doing something alone, that we can do
something without help or alone.
I like gonna the moviehouse by myself.
A difference to the Spanish, most verbs in English do not require a reflexive

pronoun.
Compare I wake up. Not I wake up myself.
Even so, English use the reflexive with kids, animals and when the person was
cannot do it alone.
My kid dress himself
My dog cut itself
After the accident, he couldn’t wake up himself.
3. To translate “el mismo, yo mismo, etc”

He wrote the book by himself.
92
Exercise 1
Usando los adverbios de frecuencia, llena los espacios en blanco con la plabra
correcta.
1. I _____ wake up early. (a veces)

2. He _____ gets at his work. (nunca)
3. We _____ come back early. (siempre)
4. You _____ get up early. (seguido)
5. He _____ work in a company. (frecuentemente)
6. I _____ have chicken for dinner. (dificilmente)
7. He _____ has a shower. (rara vez)
8. You _____ study a lot. (siempre)
9. They _____ go to bed. (normalmente)
10. She _____ leaves early. (raramente)
Exercise 2
Corrige las siguientes oraciones.
1. The car of the neighbor. ___________________________.

2. Houses’s windows. ___________________________.
3. That’s Anns. ___________________________.
4. The bone of the dog. ___________________________.
5. That’s a book of history. ___________________________.
6. My dad’s friend’s house. ___________________________.
7. The animals of farm. ___________________________.
8. The car of the my brother’s girlfriend. ___________________________.
9. The animals about zoo. ___________________________.
10. The car of Victor. ___________________________.
93
Writing
Imagina que te acbas de mudar a un país extranjero. Escriba una carta tu major
amigo donde le digas que es lo que haces en un dia normal en tu nuevo país.
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
94
Speaking
What time do you wake up?
I wake up at That’s __________.
What time do you take a shower?
I have the shower at __________.
What time do you leave from your house?
I leave from my house at __________.
What time do you come back?
I come back at __________.
What time do you brush your teeth?
I brush my teet at __________.
95
Twentieth lesson
What’s the time?
1. What time is it, Daniela?

2. That’s 11:15, why?
3. I gotta leave at midday.
4. John, Sahra, are you staying here?
5. No, our coach leaves at 12:45.
6. What time are you gonna go to the work, Daniela?
7. At 1:30.
8. Do you take the bus to go to your job or you I take the subway?
9. The subway.
10. I’m coming back to my place by cab, would you like a ride to the subway
station?
11. Yeah, please.
12. So, let’s go.
What time is it [uat taim is it] que horas son, match [match] partido, to start [tu start]
empezar, work [guork] trabajo, here [jia], taxi [taksi] taxi, to give a ride [tu gifv a raid] dar un
aventon, to hurry up [tu jorri op] darse prisa, if not [if not] si no, to be late [tu bi leit] llegar
tarde.
96
Vigesima lección
Que horas son?
1. Que horas son, Daniela?

2. Son 11:15, por que?
3. Tengo que irme a las 12.
4. John, Ann, se van a quedar?
5. No, nuestro autobus sale al cuarto para la una.
6. A que horas te vas a tu trabajo, Daniela?
7. A la una y media.
8. Tomas el camión para ir a tu trabajo o te vas en metro?
9. Tomo el metro.
10. Me voy a ir a mi casa en taxi, quieres que te de un aventon a la estacion del
metro?
11. Sí, por favor.
12. ENtonces, vamonos.
Reading
1. What’s the time?

____________________________________________
2. What time does the match start?
____________________________________________
3. What time does Daniela leave?
____________________________________________
4. What time does the train leave?
____________________________________________
97
Hour
En el Reino Unido existe un sistema para decir la hora unico.
8:00 that’s eight o’clock (we use o’clock when the hour has not got minutes)
En el lenguaje informal la palabra “o’clock” se omite.
8:05 That’s five past eight (we use past with minutes from 1 to 29 , except with 15)
8:15 that’s quarter past eight (we use quarter past with 15 minutes)
8:30 that’s eight and a half (we use and a half with 30 minutes)
8:35 That’s twenty-five to nine ( we use with the minutes from 31 to 59, except 45)
8:45 That’s quarter to nine (we use quarter to with 45 minutes)
Around (como a las) (más formal)
About (como a las)
98
Exercise 1
Escriba la hora con la forma britanica.
1. 5:00. ___________________________________
2. 11:00. ___________________________________
3. 6:04. ___________________________________
4. 12:00. ___________________________________
5. 11:40. ___________________________________
6. 7:15. ___________________________________
7. 3:00. ___________________________________
8. 11:00. ___________________________________
9. 8:30. ___________________________________
10. 4:45. ___________________________________
Exercise 2
Completa la oración.
1. The subway closes _______________________. (1:00)

2. The helicopter comes back _______________________. (5:35)
3. The bus gets _______________________. (6:00)
4. Train leaves _______________________. (2:05)
5. The couches leaves _______________________. (5:40)
6. The tram leaves _______________________. (7:05)
7. The airplane flies _______________________. (3:15)
8. I cycle _______________________. (9:50)
9. The taxis leave _______________________. (8:15)
10. The ship gets _______________________. (4:30)
99
Writing
Escriba una carta a un amigo por mensaje donde le digas cual es tu rutina
diciendole la hora exacta en la que haces tus actividades. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
100
Speaking
What time do you get up?
I get up __________.
What time do you go to school?
I go to school __________.
What time do you have lunch?
I have lunch at __________.
What time do you have dinner?
I have dinner at __________.
What time do you go to bed?
I go to the bed at __________.
British Culture
En el Reino Unido existen tres sistemas para decir la hora. El reloj como lo
conocemos nosotros, el reloj de 24 horas, utilizado en horarios de trenes, cines,
etc, y el sistema británico que es el que acabamos de ver.
Los restaurantes cierran a las 5 de la tarde.
101
Twenty first lesson
At the mall
1. Beth, what do you think about these shoes?

2. They are very beautiful, but they aren’t as beautiful as these ones.
3. What do you think about this red dress?
4. That’s very elegant and that’s as cheap as this gray.
5. What do you think about this pink skirt with this light sweater.
6. They look perfect.
7. Ok, I’ll take them, and for my husband I’ll take this shirt and this tie. Let’s to
pay.
To think [θhink] pensar, dress [dres] vestido, gray [grei] gris, shoe [shu] zapato, to be right
[tu bi raight] tener razon, Did you hear the news [did yu jir da nius] ya te enteraste,
pregnant [pregnant] embarazada, again [aguein] otra vez, Though [θoug] aunque, if I had
[if ai jad] si tuviera, money [moni] dinero.
102
Vigesima primera lección
En el centro comercial
1. Elizabeth, que piensas de estos zapatos?

2. Son muy bonitos, pero no son tan bonitos como estos.
3. Que piensas que este vestido rojo?
4. Es muy elegante y es tan barato como este gris.
5. Que piensas de esta falda rosa con este sueter ligero.
6. Se ven perfextos.
7. Ok, me los llevaré, y para mi esposo me llevaré wsta camisa y esta corbata.
Vamos a pagar.
Reading
1. How are the shoes?

____________________________________________
2. What color are the pants?
____________________________________________
3. How are they?
____________________________________________
4. How many kids does Paula have?
____________________________________________
103
Comparative of equality
Usamos la estructura “as … as” para decir “tan … como”.
I am as happy as you.
He is as well as her.
Usamos la esctructura “as much … as” para decir “tanto … como”.
She can drink as much alcohol as a man.
Usamos la estructura “as many … as” para decir “tantos … como”.
She got as kids as you.
104
Exercise 1
Haz oraciones usando las palabras que te dan. Usa el comparative of equality.
1. These shoes _____________________________trainers. (good)

2. Those socks _____________________________ gloves. (old)
3. These pants _____________________________shorts. (new)
4. That costume _____________________________jacket. (black)
5. This T-shirt _____________________________ shirt. (solf)
6. That dress _____________________________pants. (beatiful)
7. These high heels _____________________________shoes. (bad)
8. That shirt _____________________________poullover. (hot)
9. This sweatshirt _____________________________sweater. (dirty)
10. Those jacket _____________________________ costume. (new)
Exercise 2
Traduce las siguientes oraciones al inglés.
1. Esta corbate es tan larga como la otra.

2. ________________________________________.
3. Este boton es tan nuevo como este.
4. ________________________________________.
5. Este sombrero es tan nuevo como está gorra.
6. ________________________________________.
7. Esta bufanda es tan corta como está corbata.
8. ________________________________________.
9. Esta falda es tan bonita como este vestido.
10. ________________________________________.
11. Estos jeans son tan baratos como este pantalón.
12. ________________________________________.
13. Esta sueter es tan viejo como está chamarra.
14. ________________________________________.
15. Estos tennis son tan buenos como estos zapatos.
16. ________________________________________.
17. Esta gorra es tan roja como este sombrero.
18. ________________________________________.
105
Writing
Escribir un articulo donde digas que es lo que visten en tu país en las diferentes
estaciones del año. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
106
Speaking
What do you usually wear?
I usually wear __________.
What kind of clothes do you like?
I like __________ clothes.
What do people of your country wear?
They were __________.
What do you wear in summer?
I weat __________ in summer.
What do you wear in winter?
In winter, I wear __________.
British Culture
La falda esconsa, conocida como kit, es un símbolo de los países de escosia y de

irlanda. Se utiliza en situaciones importantes como en bodas, conferencias.
Otro símbolo de escocia es la gaita.
107
Forth Unit
Meal
108
En está unidad aprenderás a:
 Hablar de las reglas de tu país

 Dar consejos
 Decir cual es tu comida favorita
 Decir lo que comen en tu país
Temas
 Modal verbs
 Partitive
 Containers
 Expressions of quantity
109
Twenty-second lesson
What’s the weather like today?
1. Mommy, can we go to the park today?

2. I’m not sure.
3. Why not mommy?
4. Because that’s cool outside and you haven’t done your homework yet.
5. But I don’t have much. And I promise to do it as soon as we come back.
6. Yeah, but that’s late.
7. But that’s only 6 o’clock
8. Yeah, but look at that clouds, they’re gray, it could rain.
9. But mommy, that’s fall! That might not rain.
10. Yeah, but that could.
Mum [mom] mamá, park [park] parque, to be sure [tu bi shor] estar seguro, homework
[jomwork] tarea, to promise [promais] prometer, as soon as [es sun es] tan pronto como,
late [leit] tarde, only [only] solo, to look at [tu luk at] mirar, cloud [claud] nuve, winter
[guinta] invierno.
110
Vigesima segunda lección
El clima
1. Mamá, Podemos ir al parque?

2. No estoy segura
3. Por que no, mamá?
4. Porque hace frio afuera y todavia no has terminado tu tarea.
5. Pero no tengo mucha, y prometo que la hare en cuanto volvamos.
6. Sí, pero es tarde.
7. Pero son apenas las 6.
8. Sí, pero mira las nuves, estan grises, podría llover.
9. Pero mamá, es otoño, no puede llover.
10. Sí, pero podría.
Reading
1. What does he want?

____________________________________________
2. What does he gotta do?
____________________________________________
3. What time is it?
____________________________________________
4. What season is it?
____________________________________________
111
Can, could, may, might
En inglés hay tres verbos para traducer el verbo “poder” del español. Estos verbos
son can, may y might.
Capacidad Permiso Probabilidad

Can Yeah Informal 100
May No Formal 50
Might No Very Formal 30
Could No Formal (with conditions)
112
Exercise 1
Haz oraciones usando las palabras que te dan. (sigue el ejemplo)
Park/run/in/the. You can run in the park.
1. Baker’s/you/buy/in/the. ____________________________________.
2. Read/in/the/library ____________________________________.
3. Greengroser’s/the/in ____________________________________.
4. Butcher’s/the/in ____________________________________.
5. Park/in/the (inormal) ____________________________________.
6. Bookstore/the/books/in/buy ____________________________________.
7. ¿Puedo ir al baño? (formal) ____________________________________.
8. Swimming pool/the/in/swim ____________________________________.
9. Run/in/the/forest ____________________________________.
10. Take/candy/some (informal) ____________________________________.
Exercise 2
1. Can I go to the bathroom? (formal) _______________________.

2. Might you speak louder? _______________________.
3. He could speak Spanish. _______________________.
4. She may play the guitar _______________________.
5. It might rain (muy seguro) _______________________.
6. ¿Can we come? (formal) _______________________.
7. He could speak English _______________________.
8. Ustedes pueden
9. Ella puede
10. ¿Ellos pueden ir? (informal) _______________________.
113
Writing
Rescriba el dialogo cambiando las personas, el clima, la estacion y la hora. (50

palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
114
Speaking
What can you do in winter?
I can __________ in winter.
What can’t you do in your school?
I can’t __________ in my school.
Can you swim?
Yeah, I can/ No, I can’t
Can you run resolve difficult maths problems?
Yeah, I can/ No I can’t
Might it rain today in your city?
Yeah, it might/ No, it mightn’t
115
Twenty-third lesson
At doctor’s
1. What’s wrong with you, Jonh.

2. I feel very bad.
3. You should go to the doctor.
4. You’re right.
5. Good morning! How can I help you?

6. I feel very awful.
7. What do you have?
8. I have headache and fever.
9. Do you have runny nouse?
10. Yes, I do.
11. Let me check your temperature. Mm, your temperature seems a little hight.
You must have the flu, take this medicine and an aspirin each 6 hours.
12. Thank you, doctor.
13. And one more thing, you’d better not to leave to the street without a sweater
if you don’t want to get worse.
Ma’am [ma’am] señora, to tell [tu tel] decir, problem [problem] problema, boyfriend
[boyfriend] novio, I’ve tried [ifv traid] he intentado, to continue [tu continiu] continuar, to try
[tut rai] intentar, to look for, to be sorry, time, to be over, see you, next, week.
116
Vigesima tercera lección
En el doctor
1. Que tiene John?

2. Me siento muy mal.
3. Deberias ir al doctor.
4. Tienes razón.
5. Buenos dias! Como puedo ayudarlo?
6. Me siento muy mal.
7. Que tiene?
8. Tengo dolor de cabeza y fiebre.
9. Tiene escurrimiento nasal?
10. Sí.
11. Dejeme ver su temperatura. Mm, su temperatura parece un poco alta. Debe
tener influenza, tome este medicamento y una aspitina cada 6 horas.
12. Gracias, doctor.
13. Y una cosa más, será mejor que no salgas a la calle sin sueter si no quieres
empeorar.
Reading
1. What does he have?

____________________________________________
2. Does he have fever?
____________________________________________
3. Has he taken an aspirin?
____________________________________________
4. What had he better look for?
____________________________________________
117
Modal verbs to express advice
Should No tan fuerte You should drink Tal vez un amigo

less te da ese consejo
Had better Fuerte You’d better drink Tal vez un doctor

less te dice que tu
salud esta en
peligro
Must Muy fuerte You must drink Tal vez un doctor

less te dice eso ya
que estas
enfermo
118
Exercise 1
Usando must, should, shouldn’t o had better, rellena os espacios en blanco.
1. I ____________ take an aspirin if shegot headache. (bajo)

2. It ____________ eat better, that’s almost in the bones (medio)
3. They ____________ go to hospital because they’ve broken their leg. (alto)
4. You ____________ do drink less or you’re gonna get drunk (medio)
5. We ____________ go to the doctor, he’s cut his finger off. (alto)
6. I ____________ take a tea if shegot stomach ache. (bajo)
7. He ____________ go to the GP, hegot very high fever. (medio)
8. You ____________ go to the dentist if you gottaotache. (bajo)
9. He ____________ go to the doctor, shegot a very strong infection. (alto)
10. She ____________ take a medicin against the diarrea (bajo)
Exercise 2
1. You should do exercise. (alto) _______________________.

2. He’d better sleep more. (medio) _______________________.
3. I’d better drink less (bajo) _______________________.
4. You’d better play more. (medio) _______________________.
5. She must eat heltier. (bajo) _______________________.
6. I should be early (alto) _______________________.
7. She must relax. (medio) _______________________.
8. We’d better go. (bajo) _______________________.
9. He should work less. (alto) _______________________.
10. You must go to the doctor. (bajo) _______________________.
119
Writing
Rescriba el dialogo cambiando los sintomas. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
120
Speaking
How often do you get sick?
I __________ get sick.
What are the most commons illness that you have?
The most common illness in my country are __________.
What do you take when you have headache?
I take _________ when I have headache.
What should a person who has stomach ache take?
He should take __________.
What should a person who has diarrhae take?
He should take __________.
British Culture
El Reino Unido tiene un servicio de salud universal muy bueno. Cuando las
personas están enfermas, pueden ir al GP (general practioner) que es el doctor
que tienen asignado o pueden ir con un doctor particular, cosa que no resulta una
mala opción teniendo en cuenta la cantidad de personas que atendienden al
servicio publico de salud.
121
Twenty-fourth lesson
Rules
1. Son, if you wanna meet with your friends, you gotta help me to do the
housework.
2. Ok, Mom, what do I gotta do?
3. You gotta make your bed and mop the floor. You gotta clean the bathroom
too.
4. Do I gotta wash the clothes?
5. No, you don’t gotta do it, but you gotta walk the dog and tidy the living-room.
6. Ok, mom, I’ll stay home.
Friend [friend] amigo, what [guat] lo que, to tidy your room [tu tidi yor rum] recoger tu
cuarto, to clean [tu klin] limpiar, floor [flor] piso, to wash the dishes [guash da dishes]
lavar los trastes, to do the washing-up [du da guashing op] lavar los trastes, to walk the
dog [tu guok da dog] pasear al perro, to stay home [tu stei jom] quedarse en casa.
122
Trigesima cuarta lección
Reglas
1. Hijo, si quieres salir con tus amigos, tienes que ayudarme con el quehacer.
2. Ok, mamá, que tengo que hacer?
3. Tienes que tender tu cama y trapear el piso. Tienes que limpiar también el
baño.
4. Tengo que lavar los trastes?
5. No, no tienes que hacerlo, pero tienes que pasear al perro y acomodar la
sala.
6. Ok, mamá, me quedo en la casa.
Reading
1. Does he gotta tidy his room?

____________________________________________
2. Does he gotta clean the floor?
____________________________________________
3. Does he gotta do the washing-up?
____________________________________________
4. Does he gotta walk the dog?
____________________________________________
123
Modal verbs to express obligation
Modal verb Uso Significado

Must Obligación interna o Tener que
moral (tu solito te Deber
bligas a hacer algo)
Have (got) to Obligfación externa Tener que
Has (got) to (alguién o algo te
obliga a hacer algo)
Gotta (nothing happen if I do not follow them)
Mustn’t (bring a negative consequence)
Modal verb Uso Significado

Have not got to No tener que
(haven’t to) Sin obligación
Has not got to
(haven’t to)
Needn’t No tener que
No necesitar (no
hay razón)
124
Exercise 1
Usando must, gotta, don’t gotta, doesn’t gotta y needn’t, rellena los espacios en
blanco.
1. I ____________ do exercise, I’m a bit fat. (interno)

2. It ____________ eat better, that’s almost in the bones (externo)
3. They ____________ study hard, they’re very brains. (sin obligación)
4. You ____________ drink less or you’re gonna get drunk (externo)
5. We ____________ go, if we don’t want. (sin obligación)
6. I ____________ be late if I don’t wanna have problems. (interno)
7. He ____________ study for the test. (externo)
8. You ____________ eat less if you don’t wanna get fat. (interno)
9. We ____________ work, they’re on vacation. (sin obligación)
10. She’s thinking she ____________ eat less to not get fat (interno)
Exercise 2
Corrige las siguientes oraciones usando los modal verbs to express obligation.
11. You gotta do exercise. (interno) _______________________.

12. He don’t gotta sleep more. (externo) _______________________.
13. I must drink less (sin obligación) _______________________.
14. You don’t gotta play more. (interno) _______________________.
15. She don’t gotta eat heltier. (externo) _______________________.
16. I must be early (sin obligación) _______________________.
17. She don’t gotta relax. (externo) _______________________.
18. We must go. (sin obligación) _______________________.
19. He gotta work less. (interno) _______________________.
20. You don’t gotta go to the doctor. (externo) _______________________.
125
Writing
Escriba un reglamento para tu salón de clase o lugar de trabajo. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
126
Speaking
What do you gotta do in your house?
I gotta __________.
What do you gotta do in your workplace?
I gotta __________.
What do you must do?
I must __________.
What don’t you gotta do in your house?
I don’t gotta __________.
What don’t you gotta do in your job?
I don’t gotta __________.
127
Twenty-fifth lesson
At hotel
1. Welcome to Bristol’s Palace, what can I do for you?

2. I’d like a room, please!
3. Certainly, what’s your name?
4. Simon Hall
5. Would you like a double or single room?
6. Single, please!
7. How many nights?
8. Two please.
9. Here you are your key, sir.
10. Thank you, excuse me, are there any regulations that I have to follow?
11. Yes, it’s not allowed to come in the swimming pool after 8.
12. Ok, what else?
13. The guest can’t make parties in their rooms.
14. Ok, and are pets allowed?
15. Yes, they are.
16. So, let me bring my tiger from the cage.
Hotel [jotel] hotel, palace [palas] palacio, double [dobul] doble, single room [singul rum]
habitacion individual, night [naigt] noche, key [ki] llave, regulations [reguleichions], to follow
[tu folou] seguir, to be not allowed [its not alout] no estar permitido, swimming pool [siming
pul] alberca, guest [guest] huesped, party [parti] fiesta, pet [pet] mascota, to bring [tu bring]
traer.
128
Vigesima quinta lección
En el hotel
1. Bienvenido al Bristol’s Palace, que puedo hacer por usted?

2. Quiero un cuarto por favor.
3. Seguro, como se llama?
4. Simon Hall
5. Quiere una habitación doble o una habitación individual?
6. Individual, por favor.
7. Cuantas noches?
8. Dos, por favor
9. Aqui tiene su llave, señor.
10. Gracias, disculpe, hay algun reglamento que deba de seguir?
11. Si, no está permitido nadar en la alberca despúes de las 8.
12. Ok, que más?
13. Los huespedes no pueden hacer fiestas en sus cuartos.
14. Ok, se permiten las mascotas?
15. Sí.
16. Entonces, dejeme traer mi tigre de la jaula.
Reading
1. Where is he?
____________________________________________
2. What does he want?
____________________________________________
3. Does he want a singe room?
____________________________________________
4. Are pets allowed?
____________________________________________
129
Modal verbs to express prohibition
Modal verb Ejemplo Significado

Can’t You can’t be without shoes in No poder
your aunt’s house
That’s not That’s not allowed to park here No se permite
allowed to
That’s forbidden That’s forbidden to throw trash Esta prohibido
Mustn’t You musn’t feed the animals of No debes
the zoo
130
Exercise 1
Usando can’t, that’s not allowed to, that’s forbidden y musn’t, rellena los espacios
en blanco.
1. I ____________ be here, that’s a private party. (no poder)

2. Your dog ____________ come in to the museum (ilegal)
3. ____________ to park here. (no se permite)
4. You ____________ camp hier. (ilegal)
5. We ____________ go to the party. (no poder)
6. ____________ come in with pets. (no se permite)
7. He ____________ do the test. (no poder)
8. You ____________ feed the animals. (ilegal)
9. He ____________ drink in the stret. (no se permite)
10. ____________ make noise in this area (esta prohibido)
Exercise 2
Corrige las siguientes oraciones usando los modal verbs to express prohibition.
1. You musn’t sleep here. (no poder) _______________________.

2. That’s not allowed to drink alcohol. (esta prohibido)
_____________________.
3. I can’t come in in the evening (no deber) _______________________.
4. That’s forbidden to come in with kids. (no se permite)
_______________________.
5. She musn’t park here. (no poder) _______________________.
6. That’s now allowed to fish in this area (esta prohiido)
_______________________.
7. She musn’t sell in this place. (no poder) _______________________.
8. We can’t go. (no se permite) _______________________.
9. He musn’t smoke. (no poder) _______________________.
10. That’s forbidden to make campfires. (no se permite)
_______________________.
131
Writing
Escriba un reglamento para tu escuela. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
132
Speaking
What’s allowed in your country?
That’s allowed __________.
What’s forbidden in your country?
That’s forbidden __________.
What musn’t you do in your country?
You musn’t __________.
British culture
Cuando vayas a Gran Bretaña, tal vez te ofrescan el Full English breakfast, un
desayuno que consiste en huevos, tocino, salchichas, jitomates asados y aveces
frijoles con salsa de tomate y riñones, y un té o café. También, existe el continental
breakfast, que consiste en pan, bolleria y café o simplemente un té o un café.
133
Twenty-seventh lesson
At restaurant
1. Good evening, can I take your order?

2. I’ll have a plate of beef with vegetables, please.
3. And you ma’am?
4. I’ll have the fish with rice, please.
5. Would you like something to drink?
6. Do you have red wine?
7. Yes, we have. Do you want a cup?
8. Yes, please.
9. And you? Ma’am?
10. I’d like a beer.
11. Certainly, ma’am.
Later
12. Can I offer you a dessert?

13. No, thank you. Excuse me, may we have the check, please?
14. Here you are, sir.
15. Do you accept credit card?
16. Of course, sir, Visa or Master Card.
17. Here you are!
18. Here you are your ticket.
19. Thank you!
Good evening [gud ifvning] buenas noches, plate [pleit] plato, spaguetti [spagueti]
espagueti, tonight [tunaigt] esta noche, roast [roust] rostizado, chicken [chiken] pollo, beef
[bif] carne de res, to boil [tu boil] hervir, vegetable [fveishtabol] vegetal, fish [fish] pescado,
rice [rais] arroz, wine [guain] vino, there’s no red wine left [der isnt red guin left , beer [bir]
cerveza, mineral water [mineral guata] agua mineral, to offer [tu ofer] ofrecer, dessert
[desert] postre, bill [bil] cuenta, to accept [asept] aceptar, credit card [credit card] tarjeta de
credito, I’ve forgotten [aifv fortoten] he olvidado, wallet [gualet] .
134
Trigesima septima lección
En el restaurante
1. Buenas noches, que van a ordenar?

2. Yo quiero un pato de res con vegetales, por favor.
3. Y usted señora?
4. Quiero el pescado con arroz, por favor.
5. Para beber, que les gustaria?
6. Tiene vino rojo?
7. Sí, desea una copa?
8. Sí, por favor.
9. Y para usted señorita?
10. Quiero una cerveza.
11. Ensegudia, señorita.
Más tarde
12. Puedo ofrecerles un postre?

13. No gracias.
14. Disculpe. Puede traernos la cuenta, por favor?
15. Aqui tiene señor.
16. Aceptan tarjeta de credito?
17. Sí, Visa o Master Card.
18. AQui tiene.
19. Aqui tiene su recibo.
20. Gracias.
21. De nada.
Reading
1. What does the woman order?

____________________________________________
2. Do they have red wine?
____________________________________________
3. Do they accept credit card?
____________________________________________
4. Who pays?
____________________________________________
135
The Partitive
Usamos siempre some o any cuando hablamos de:
1. Liquids
I’d like some more coffee
2. Meals
I eat some spaghetti
3. Small things
I’m eating some peanuts.
4. Powder
Could you give me some more sugar?
5. Things that we can divide
Pass me some pizza.
Cuando una oracion es afirmativa usamos some y cuando una oracion es negative
o interrogative usamos any.
Cuando hablamos en general usamos “the” en lugar the some o any.
136
Exercise 1
Usando some, any o nada, rellena los espacios en blanco.
1. I drink ____________ water.

2. We don’t have ____________ chicken for dinner. (not)
3. You eat ____________ fruit salad.
4. They drink ____________ tea.
5. Would you like ____________ beef?
6. He eats _____ apples and _____ pears.
7. You drink ____________ wine.
8. Does he have ____________ milk?
9. She don’t have ____________ meat for dinner. (not)
10. Would you like ____________ sugar in your coffee?
Exercise 2
Corrige las siguientes oraciones que esten mal usando some o any. Algunas
oraciones están bien.
1. You don’t eat some bread. _______________________.

2. He doesn’t drink some alcohol. _____________________.
3. I don’t want any salt. _______________________.
4. I don’t drink some beer. _______________________.
5. I eat some watermelon. _______________________.
6. He has any meat for dinner. _______________________.
7. She drinks some chocolate. _______________________.
8. We can eat some cake. _______________________.
9. He doesn’t eat some pork. _______________________.
10. I don’t drink any wine. _______________________.
137
Writing
Escriba una carta para un amigo donde le digas que es lo que comen en tu país.
(100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
138
Speaking
What do you eat?
I eat __________.
What do people eat in your country?
They eat __________.
Do you eat fast-food?
Yeah, I do/ No, I don’t
What do you eat on the weekend?
I eat __________ on the weekend.
What’s your favorite meal?
My favorite meal is __________.
British Culture
El platillo típico de Inglaterra es el “Fish and French fries”, el cual consiste en

papas a la francesa con pescaditos, normalmente envueltos en una hoja de
periódico.
139
Twenty-sixth lesson
List of ingredients
1. Don’t put a lot of sugar, if not, that’s gonna be very sweet.

2. Ok, mom, what else do we add?
3. A cup of flour.
4. There isn’t much.
5. Don’t worry, we got more in the cupboard.
6. What else do we add?
7. A few eggs and a bit of salt.
8. Done!
9. Now, we only add enough milk and that’s done.
10. Just one hour in the oven and we’re gonna have a delicious cake.
140
Twenty-sixth lesson
Lista de ingredientes
1. NO le pongas mucha azucar, sino, va a estar muy dulce.

2. Ok, mamá, que más le pongo?
3. UNa taza de harina.
4. Ya no hay muha.
5. No te preocupes, tenemos más en la alacena.
6. Que más le agregamos?
7. Unos cuantos huevos y un poco de sal.
8. Listo!
9. Ahora, solo le agregamos suficiente leche y listo.
10. Ahora una hora en el horno y vamos a tener un delicioso pastel.
141
Expressions to express quantity
A lot of Mucho/muchos (+)

Lots of
Much Mucho (-) (?)
Many Muchos (-) (?)
A little (for) Un Poco de
A bit (inf)
A few Unos cuantos/pocos
Too + adj
Too much + singular noun Demasiado
uncountable noun
Too many + plural noun Demasiados
Enough Suficiente
Plenty of Bastante/suficiente (bastante
pero no exagerado)
Quite Bastante
Exercise 1
Usando las expression to express quantity, rellena los espacios en blanco.
11. I drink ____________ tea. (mucho)

12. We have ____________ meat for dinner. (bastante pero no exagerado)
13. You eat ____________ fruit. (algo de)
14. They drink ____________ water. (mucha) (negative)
15. Would you like ____________ beef? (bastante)
16. Hegot ____________ apples and pears. (pocos)
17. You drink ____________ wine. (un poco de)
18. Does he have ____________ vegetables? (demasiados)
19. She has ____________ chicken for dinner. (poca)
20. I don’t want ____________ cream in my coffee. (demasiada)
142
Exercise 2
Corrige las siguientes oraciones que esten mal usando las expressons to express
quantity. Algunas oraciones son correctas.
11. You don’t eat a lot of bread. _______________________.

12. He doesn’t drink too much alcohol. _____________________.
13. I don’t wannao many salt. _______________________.
14. I don’t drink enough beer. _______________________.
15. I eat a lot of watermelon. _______________________.
16. He eats a lot of fruit. _______________________.
17. She drinks too much chocolate. _______________________.
18. We can eat few cake. _______________________.
19. He doesn’t little pork. _______________________.
20. I don’t drink lots of wine. _______________________.
Writing
Imagine that a doctor has given to you a diet. Write what you can eat and the
quantities. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
143
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
How much bread do you eat a week?
I eat __________ a week.
How much water do you drink a day?
I drink __________ of water a day.
What do you eat?
I eat __________.
Does in your country use pounds or dollars?
We use __________.
British Culture
La cerveza es la bebida más tomada en el Reino Unido, solo después del té.
144
Twenty-sixth lesson
Doing shopping
11. Love, what do we need for dinner?

12. We need a bag sugar, 4 loaves of bread and a carton of milk.
13. Do we need any coffee?
14. No, we don’t.
15. What else?
16. We need some half pound of ham, a bottle of mayonese, a lettuce and
tomatoes for the sanwiches of dinner.
17. Ok, and for breakfast?
18. We need apples, pears, oranges , bananas, a dozene of eggs and a bar of
butter.
19. Is it all?
20. Yeah.
145
Twenty-sixth lesson
Comprando la despensa
1. Amor, que necesitamos para la cena?

2. Necesitamos una bolsa de azucar, cuatro panes y un carto de leche.
3. Necesitamos café?
4. No.
5. Que más
6. Necesitamos medio pound de jamón, un frasco de mayoneza, una lechuca
y jitomatespara los sanwiches de la cena.
7. Ok, y para el desayuno?
8. Necesitamos manzanas, peras, naranjas, platanos, una docena de huevos
y una barra de mantequilla.
9. Es todo?
10. Sí.
Reading
1. Does he speak French?

____________________________________________
2. What language does he speak?
____________________________________________
3. What happens to him?
____________________________________________
4. What kind of book is he learning with?
____________________________________________
146
Containers
We do not some/any with words which express a specific quantity.
Dollar Libra
Pound Pound
Bag Bolsa
Bunch Racimo
Dozen Docena
Piece Pieza
Slice Rebanada
Loaf Pan individual
Bar Barra
Packet Paquete
Littre Litro
Glass Vaso
Cup Copa
Bottle Botella
Cartoon Caja de
Bowl Tazon
Some, any and no
We can use some with the meaning of (algun).
We can see some deer if we go to the forest.
We can use any with the meaning of (cualquier)
I can go there any day.
We use No:
a. with the meaning of (ningun); the verb must be in affirmative form.
147
Say: I can go no day of next week.
Don’t say: I can’t go no day of next week.
b. To replace a negative sentence with any not
Exercise 1
Usando las proportional sentences haz oraciones.
1. I/run/I/get slim. ________________________________________________.

2. You/study/I/get slim. ___________________________________________.
3. I/walk/I/good/feel. _____________________________________________.
4. We/eat/I/chocolate/bad/feel. _____________________________________.
5. I/think/it/I/get mad. ____________________________________________.
6. she/swim/easy/become. ________________________________________.
7. I/drink/I/good/feel. _____________________________________________.
8. he/sleep/I/bad/feel. ____________________________________________.
9. I/eat/I/vegetables/I/good/feel. ____________________________________.
10. you/practice/I/undersand. _______________________________________.
Exercise 2
Usando las proportional sentences, corrige las siguientes oraciones. Algunas

oraciones son correctas.
1. The more I run, the fastest I’m. ___________________________________.

2. The most you study, the more you know ___________________________.
3. The more I walk, the more the knee hurts me. _______________________.
148
4. The most chocolate we eat, the bader we feel. _______________________.
5. The more I think of it, the more I get mad. _________________________.
6. The more she swims, the easier it becomes. ________________________.
7. The more water I drink, the goodest I feel. __________________________.
8. The more he sleeps, the better he feels. ____________________________.
9. The more vegetables I eat, the more delicious it becomes. _____________.
10. The more I practice, the more simple it becomes. ____________________.
Writing
Hace un pequeño anuncio para una escuela donde digas que lenguas puedes
aprender, el costo del curso y los horarios. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
149
Speaking
What languages do you speak?
I speak __________.
Do speak a regional language?
Yeah, I do/ No, I don’t
What languages are spoken in your country?
In my country __________ is/are spoken.
What languages would you like to learn?
I’d like to learn __________.
Would you like to learn a regional language?
Yeah, I would/ No, I woudn’t
British Culture
En el Reino Unido se hablán 4 idiomas: inglés, escoses, irlandés y gales, sin

embargo, el inglés es el único que es oficial.
El inglés tiene raices Latinas, francesas y germanicas.
150
Fifth Unit
The Past
151
In this unit you will learn:
 To talk about your routine in the past

 To talk about an historic moment
 To talk about what you did in your last vacations
 To talk about your past plans
Topics
 Past simple of the verb to be

 There was/there were
 Past simple
 Modal verbs in the past simple
 Adverbs
 Gonna in the past simple
 Personal object pronouns (indirect object)
 Used to
 Too, too much, too many, enough
152
Twenty-nine lesson
Relatives
1. Hello, aunt! how are you?

2. I’m fine, thank you, and you?
3. Pretty fine.
4. Look at how tall you’re, last time I saw you, you were very short. I remember
when you were a child, you were a little ugly and look at the handsome man you
are today.
6. Aunt!
7. You were very naughty, you very much liked to bother the neighbor’s cat till he
scratched you, ho, ho, I remember how you went with your mum to tell her the cat
had scratched you.
8. Aunt!
9. And you were a bit fat. I remember you like a lot to eat candy. You always had
one in the hand.
10. Aunt!
11. What do you want, dear?
12. I want to introduce my girlfriend to you.
Long time no see you [long taim] hace mucho que no te veia, last time [last taim] la ultima
vez, a bit [a bit] un poco, handsome [jandsom] guapo, to bother [tu boder] molestar, tail
[teil] cola, until [ontil] hasta (que), to scratch [skratch] arañar, chubby [chobi] gordito, sweet
[suit] dulce, to introduce [tu introdius] presenter, girlfriend [gerlfrend] novia.
Vigesima Novena Lección

Parientes
153
1. Hola, tia como estás?
2. Bien y tu?
3. Bien, gracias, y usted?
4. Bastante bien
5. Mira lo alto que estas, la ultima vez que te vi estabas muy chiquito.
6. Recuerdo que cuando eras niño, estabas un poco feo y mira el hombre tan guapo
que eres hoy.
7. Tia!
8. Eras muy travieso, te gustaba mucho molestar al gato del vecino hasta que te
rasguño, jo, jo, recuerdo como fuiste con tu mamá a decirle que el gato te habia
arañado.
9. Tia!
10. Y estabas un poco gordo. Recuerdo que te gustaba mucho comer dulces.
Siempre tenias uno en la mano.
11. Tia!
12. Que pasa cariño?
13. Quiero presentarte a mi novia.
Reading
1. Who’s tha woman?

____________________________________________
2. How is he?
____________________________________________
3. How was he when he was a kid?
____________________________________________
4. What did he always have?
____________________________________________
Past simple of the verb to be
154
I was (yo era/fui/estaba/estuve)
You were (tú eras/fuiste/estabas/estuviste)
155
Writing
Imagina que te encuentras una foto de tu familia de hace 10 años. Describa a las
personas que esten en la foto. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
How were you when you were a kid?
What were you like?
How was your neighborhood?
What were your friends like?
Where you noisy chubby, fast, strong, etc?
156
Thirtieth lesson
Looking for meal
1. There was a good restaurant in Thomson street, but yesterday I drove by it

was closed.
2. Maybe, it went bankrupt like everything in this city.
3. Well, where do we go?
4. I’ve heard there was a new stand where they make excellent French food at
Marchall avenue, why don’t we go there?
5. No, I’m tired of eating out, why don’t we eat in tonight?
6. That’s a great idea!
7. Mm, but I don’t feel like cooking, why don’t we order something?
8. That would be great; the telephone number of that pizza store we like is on
the fridge.
Some minutes after
9. What did they tell you?

10. It was wrong number. Well, I think we’ll have to make something here.
Unwelcome [onguelkom] inesperado, yesterday [yeahterdei] ayer, to drive by [tu draifv

bai] pasar (en carro), maybe [praps] tal vez/ quizas, to go bankrupt [tu gou bankropt] ir a la
quiebra, everything [efvrithing] todo, city [siti] ciudad, other [oda] otro, place [pleis] lugar, to
be sick and tired [tu bi sik and tairt] estar harto, to eat out [tu it aut] comer afuera/salir a
comer, tonight [tunaigt] esta noche, That’s a great idea [dats a gud aidia] es una buena
idea, to feel like [tu fil laik] tener ganas de, to order [tu order] ordenar, something
[somthing] algo, that would be great [dat gud bi greit] estaria bien, finish [finish] finlandes,
fridge [fridch] refri, wrong number [rong nomba] numero equivocado, let’s go [lets gou]
vamos, street [strit] calle, pizzeria store [pitseria store] pizzeria, together [tugueda] juntos.
157
Trigesima lección
Buscando comida
1. Habia un buen restaurant en la calle Thomson, pero ayer que pasé estaba
cerrado.
2. Tal vez, quebro como todo en esta ciudad.
3. Bueno, a donde vamos?
4. Escuche que habia un nuevo puesto donde venden exelente comida
francesa en la Avenida marchall, porque no vamos?
5. No, estoy cansado de comer en la calle, porque no comemos en casa esta
noche?
6. Es una Buena idea
7. Mm, pero no tengo ganas de cocinar, porque no ordenamos algo?
8. Estaría bien, el numero del telefono de ese restaurant Italiano que nos
gusta esta junto al refri.
Algunos minutos despúes
9. Que te dijeron?
10. Me dijeron que era numero erquivocado.
11. Entonces, creo que vamos a tener que hacer algo aqui.
Reading
1. What’s there in Thomson street?

____________________________________________
2. What do they sell in the new stand?
____________________________________________
3. What’s on the fridge?
____________________________________________
4. What did they tell him?
____________________________________________
158
There was/were
Singular Plural
Affirmative There was a bank in that There were trees in this
street avenue
Negative There was not/wasn’t a bank There were not/weren’t trees
in that street in this avenue
Interrogative Was there a bank in that Were there trees in this
street avenue
There was (hubia/hubo)
There were (habian/hubieron)
159
Writing
Imagine que fue de vacaciones a otro país. Escriba una carta a un amigo donde le
digas que es lo que habia (50 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What was there in your neighborhood?
Was there a hostital, moviehouse, museum, etc?
Has it changed?
What’s there now?
What’sn’t there no
160
Thirty first lesson
Happy birthday!
1. William Shakespeare, the great writer, was born in Stratford-upon-Avon in

1564.
2. He studied at school of his town and had a very good life until his father was
accused of illegal commerce and was sent to prison.
3. When he was 18 years old, he married Anne Hathaway with whom had
three kids.
4. His work “The Tragedy of Hamlet, Prince of Denmark” more known as
Hamblet continues being today one of the most important literary works of
all the times.
5. William Shakespeare died in 1616 and was buried in the Church of the Holy
Trinity.
Great [greit] gran, Writer [raita] escritor, to be born [tu bi born] nacer, accused [akiust]
acusado, illegal [iligal] illegal, commerce [komers] comercio, get married [guet merriet]
casarse, whom [jum] quien, tragedy [trayedi] tragedia, prince [prins]principe, Denmark
[denmark] Dinamarca, literary [literari] literario, to be buried [tu bi burit] ser enterrado, Holy
[joli] santa, trinity [triniti] trinidad.
161
Trigesima primera lección
¡Feliz cumpleaños!
1. William Shakespeare, el gran escritor, nacio en Stratford-upon-Avon Upon

avon en 1564.
2. Estudió en la escuela de su pueblo y tuvo una vida muy feliz hasta que su
padre fue acusado de Comercio ilegal y fue enviado a prisión.
3. Cuando tenía 18 años se casó con Anne Hathaway con quien tuvo 3 hijos.
4. Su obra la tragedia de Hamlet príncipe de Dinamarca mejor conocida como
Hamlet continúan siendo hoy una de las obras literarias más importantes de
todos los tiempos
5. William Shakespeare murió en 1616 y fue sepultado en la Iglesia de holy
Trinity.
Reading
1. Where was Shakerspeare born?

____________________________________________
2. Who did he marry with?
____________________________________________
3. What’s one of the most important literary work?
____________________________________________
4. When did Shakerspear die?
____________________________________________
162
Past simple
To call To travel To drop To play To fry

I Called Travelled Dropped Played Fried
You Called Travelled Dropped Played Fried
He Called Travelled Dropped Played Fried
She Called Travelled Dropped Played Fried
It Called Travelled Dropped Played Fried
We Called Travelled Dropped Played Fried
You Called Travelled Dropped Played Fried
They Called Travelled Dropped Played Fried
We make the negative form by adding did/didn’t in front of the verb.

I called you I did not call you
I didn’t call you
We make the interrogative form by adding did in front of the personal pronoun.
Affirmative form Negative form Answers

I called you Did you call me yesterday? Yeah, I did
No, I didn’t
Usage
We use the past simple to translate the “preterito perfecto” and the “preterito
imperfect” of the Spanish.
I went to school Yo fui a la escuela

Yo iba a la escuela
163
Writing
Escriba tu biografia. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Where did you go in your last vacations?
How was it?
What did you do in your last vacations?
With whom did you go?
How long were you there?
164
Thirtieth second lesson
An unforgetable trip
1. Dear mom and dad,

2. Yesterday I came back from Cancún. It was a fantastic trip, I did lots of
things and I met lots of nice people.
3. The first day I was there, I went to the beach. I swam and snorkelled all the
day. It was incredible. I got tan too.
4. Next day, I visited Chichenitza; that’s an amazing place. I went up to the top
of the pyramid and took some photos.
5. The last day, I went to a Mexican restaurant and ate Enchiladas, it was
delicious. Yesterday, I came back.
6. I hope to see you soon because I brought you some pretty gifts I’m sure
you’ll love.
7. Lots of love,
8. Sahra
Letter [leta] carta, to go up [tu gou op] subir, pyramid [pairamid] piramide, photo [foto] foto.
165
Trigesima segunda lección
Una carta
1. Queridos mamá y papa,

2. Ayer regrese de Cancún.
3. Hice muchas cosas y conocí a muchas personas.
4. El primer día que estuve ahí, fui a la playa. nade y snorkelie.
5. El siguiente día, visité Chichénitzá; es un increible lugar. subí a la cima de
la pirámide y tomé algunas fotos.
6. El último día, fui a un restaurante Mexicano y comí enchiladas, estaban
deliciosas.
7. Ayer regresé, espero verlos pronto por qué les compre unos regalos, estoy
segura de que les van a gustar.
8. Con amor,
9. Sahra
Reading
1. Where di she come from?

____________________________________________
2. What did she do on the beach?
____________________________________________
3. What did she do last day?
____________________________________________
4. Who did write the letter?
____________________________________________
166
We make the negative form by adding did/didn’t in front of the verb.

I called you I did not call you
I didn’t call you
We make the interrogative form by adding did in front of the personal pronoun.
Affirmative form Negative form Answers

I called you Did you call me yesterday? Yeah, I did
No, I didn’t
167
Writing
Escriba una carta a un amigo donde le digas que es lo que hiciste/no hiciste en tus
vacaciones pasadas. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Did you go to an exotic place in your last vacations?
Did you stay in a resort?
Did you eat something new?
Did you go with your friends?
Did you have fun?
168
Thirty third lesson
Memories
1. Tell us, grandpa, how were you when you were young?
2. When I was young, I was very different from I’m today.
3. I used to be stronger and more adventurous.
4. I could easily walk miles and I could run faster than you.
5. And how was the grandma?
6. You know, she was very attractive, she had a long brown hair I liked a lot.
She didn’t have wrinkles and she had fine lips. Also, she had some beautiful
small brown eyes and fine eyebrows.
7. And how were you?
8. I had straight hair, I didn’t have mostache and I was of medium weight.
9. And what happened?
10. I found out the snacks.
Youghsters [youngstas] jovenes, adventurous [adfvenchiurus] aventurado, cheerful

[chirful] alegre, to smile [tu smail] sonreir.
169
Trigesima tercera lección
Jovenes
1. Dinos abuelo, cómo eras cuando eras joven?

2. Cuando era joven era muy diferente a como soy hoy.
3. Era más fuerte y más aventurero.
4. Podía caminar fácilmente millas y podía fácilmente correr más rápido que
ustedes.
5. Y cómo era la abuela?
6. Ya sabes ella era muy hermosa, ella tenía un cabello café que me gustaba
mucho.
7. Ella era muy una ella era una persona muy alegre, ella siempre sonreía y
hacía a los otros alrededor de ella se sintieran felices
8. El problema era que tenía que dejarla en su casa antes de las 10.
9. Y a qué hora la llevabas a su casa a las 10:00 de la mañana.
Reading
1. How was he when he was young?

____________________________________________
2. What could he do?
____________________________________________
3. How was the grandma?
____________________________________________
4. What was she like?
____________________________________________
170
Modal verbs in the past simple
Affirmative form Negative form Interrogative form

I could run faster I could not speak English Could you speak
I couldn’t speak English German?
I had to wake up early I didn’t gotta wake up early Did you gotta wake up
early
The most of the modal verbs do not have a past form; the only modal verbs that
have a past form are can (could) and have/gotta and must that become (had).
171
Writing
Un amigo te ha enviado un mesaje preguntandote por tus vacaciones. Escriba le

un mensaje donde le digas que pudiste/no pudiste hacer en tus vaciones por el
clima. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Could you cycle when you were a kid?, Could you play the guitar?, Could you
speak English?, Did you gotta do the washing up?, What time did you gotta do
your bed?, Did you gotta wake up early?
172
173
Adverbs
Adjective Adverb
Strong Strongly
Happy Happily
Gentle Gently
1. General rule says that we build an adverb by adding –ly to the adjective.
Strong becomes strongly
2. When an adjective ends in “consonant + y”, we change the “y” for “ily”
Happy becomes happily
When the adjective ends in –le, we change the “e” for “y”.
Gentle becomes gently
Irregular adjectives
Adjective Adverb
Good Well
Fast Fast
Hard Hard
Early Early
Long Long
174
Thirty forth lesson
San Valentin’s day
1. How was your day, son?

2. It was good, my girlfriend and me walked through the city, we went to the
moviehouse, to the downtown and to the Santa Monica fair. We were gonna
go to the beach, but we thought it was late to go there.
3. What did you give to her?
4. I was gonna give a tree puzzle to her but at the end, I gave her a teddy
bear.
5. And what did she give you?
6. She made a pizza to me.
7. A pizza?
8. Yeah, because she knows my heart is hers, but my stomach is of the food.
Valentin [fvalentin] Valentin, To walk through [tu walk θru] pasear en, three [θri] arbol,
puzzle [putsel] rompecabezas, at the end [at di end] al final, teddy [tedi] de peluche, bear
[ber] oso, heart [jart] corazon, stomach [stomak] estomago.
175
Trigesima cuarta lección
14 de febrero
1. Cómo estuvo tú dia, hijo?

2. Estuvo bien, mi novia y yo anduvimos por la ciudad, fuimos al cine, al centro
y al Palacio de Buckingham. Ibamos a ir al rio pero pensamos que ya era
tarde.
3. Que le regalaste?
4. Le iba a regalar un rompecabezas en forma de árbol pero al final le di un
oso de peluche.
5. Y qué te dio ella?
6. Me hizo una pizza.
7. Una pizza?
8. Sí porque sabe que mi corazón es de ella pero mi estómago es de la
comida.
Reading
1. How was his San Valentin’s day?

____________________________________________
2. Where did they go?
____________________________________________
3. What did he give to her?
____________________________________________
4. What did she give to him?
____________________________________________
176
Personal Object Pronouns as indirect Object
The indirect object is the person, animal or thing that doesn’t receive the action of
the verb but that is beneficiated by the action of it.
Subject Verb Direct object Indirect object

My mom Bought A cake To the class
In the last sentences, we know that the indirect object is the class because the
action of the verb “buy” fall into the cake, her mum didn’t buy the class, but the
class was beneficiated by the action of the verb.
Sometimes we can omit the direct object, but we recognize it by the preposition (to)
I wrote to you (I wrote something to you)
I wrote you (I wrote in your body)
In informal speech this difference is disapering and people usually say I wrote you
in both cases.
177
Writing
Un amigo tuyo te pregunta como estuvo tu cumpleaños. Escribale un mensaje

donde le digas todo lo que hiciste incluyendo lo que te regalaron. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What time did you give to your couple last San Valentin’s day?
What did they give you?
What did they give you in your birthday?
Have you ever written a letter? To whom?
178
Thirty fifth lesson
Living the life to the full
1. Grandpa, tell us, what did you do when you were a kid?
2. Well, as in that time there wasn’t much money, my friends and me had to
work.
3. I remember we worked at the greengrocer’s that was opposite the church of
the town. I remember the owner gave us sweet potato that we used to eat
with honey and milk.
4. On the weekend, we went to the playground that was behind the market.
Also, we went to the forest where we liked to make campfires and to climb
trees. Once, my friends and me were telling scary stories when a bear
appeared, we were very scared. Fortunately, the bear went fast and let us
have a great time.
Money [moni] dinero, greengrocer’s [gringrousers] verduleria, owner [auna] dueño, sweet
potato [suit poteitou] camote, honey [joni] miel, milk [milk] leche, on the weekend [at
wuikend] el fin de semana, playground [plai graund] juegos, to fish [tu fish] pescar, to climb
[tu climb] trepar, tree [tri] arbol, once [uans] una vez, to tell [tu tell] contra, to appear [tu
apir] aparecer, fortunately [fortunateli] afortunadamente, to have a great time [tu jafv a greit
taim] divertirse (expression).
179
Trigesima quinta lección
Viviendo la vida al maximo
1. Abuelo, dinos, qué hacías cuando eras niño?

2. Bueno como en ese tiempo no había mucho dinero mis amigos y yo
teníamos que trabajar.
3. Recuerdo que trabajamos en una verdulería que estaba enfrente de la
Iglesia del pueblo. Me acuerdo que el dueño nos regalaba camote, el cual
comiamos con miel y leche.
4. El fin de semana íbamos a los juegos que estaban atrás del mercado.
Tambien íbamos al bosque donde nos gustaba hacer fogatas y escalar
árboles. Una vez mis amigos y yo estábamos contando historias de terror
cuando un oso apareció, estábamos muy asustados. Lo bueno es que el
oso se fue rapido y nos dejó pasarla bien.
Reading
1. What did his grandpa do when he was a kid?

____________________________________________
2. Where was the green grocers?
____________________________________________
3. What did his friends and him do on the weekend?
____________________________________________
4. What did appear?
____________________________________________
180
Used to
I used to study English at school We use “used to” with all people.
I didn’t use to soccer at park we use didn’t used to for negating
Did you used to 10 hours a day? We use Did … used to for asking?
Yeah, I did
No, I didn’t
Use
We use “used to” in general to translate the “preterito imperfecto” del español.
I used to drive long hours when I used to work as a taxi driver
“conducia largas horas cuando trabajaba de taxista”
We do not use “used to” with the expression “When I was/you were/etc”
When I was a kid, I used to play soccer at school team.
Not When I used to….
We can change used to for the past simple without change in the meaning”
I used to drive long hours when I used to work as a taxi driver
I drove long hours when I worked as a taxi driver
181
Writing
Escriba uno de los mejores recuerdos que tengas de tu infancia. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What time did you use to wake up when you were a kid?
What time did you use to go to school?
What did you used to do?
What time did you use to go to bed?
What did you use to do on the weekend?
182
Sixth Unit
The Future
183
 To talk about the future

 To talk about your future plans
 To talk about a polemic topic
 To do an essay.
Topics
 Future simple
 There will be
 Modal verbs in the future simple
 Substitution personal object pronouns
 To be gonna
 Present continuous and present simple for the future
 Future simple, gonna and present simple
 Connectors of addition and contrast
 Comparative and superlative of adverbs
184
Thirty-six lesson
At the supermarket
1. Dear, what do we need for lunch?

2. We need veggies for the soup and the salad. Take some carrots, potatos
and an onion.
3. How much do we buy?
4. One kilo of each one.
5. Done! What else do we need?
6. We need a can of pinapple, a melon and a packet of cherries for the fruit
salad.
7. Will we take grapes?
8. Yeah, take a bunch.
9. Do we need any cheese and eggs.
10. Yeah, take a half pound of cheese and a dozen of eggs.
11. Will we take a bottle of wine?
12. No, I think Brenda will take one.
13. Ok, what else?
14. That’s it.
In the checkout
15. Good morning, sir, have you found everything you were looking for?
16. Yes, how much are they?
17. 10 dollars and a cent.
18. Here you are!
19. Have a nice day, sir.
Supermarket [supermarket] supermercado, for dinner [for dina] para cenar, carrot [karrot]
zanahoria, tomato [tomeitou] jitomate, onion [onion] cebolla, soup [soup] sopa, what else
[uat else] que mas, banana [banana] platano, apple [epol] manzana, melon [melon] melon,
fruit [fruit] fruta, each one [ich uan] de cada uno, orange [oranch] naranja, That’s it [dat si]
eso es todo, checkout [chekaut] caja, dollar [paund] libra, cent [peni] centavo, to forget [tu
forguet] olvidar, wallet [gualet] cartera, to swear [suer] jurar, last time [last taim] ultima vez.
185
Trigesima sexta lección
En el supermercado
1. Queriza, que necesitamos para la comida?

2. Necesitamos vegetales para la sopa y la ensalada. Llevemos zanahorias,
papas y una cebolla.
3. Cuanto compramos?
4. Un pound de cada una.
5. Listo! Que más necesitamos?
6. Necesitamos una lata de piña, un melon y un paquete de cerezas para el
coktail.
7. Llevamos uvas?
8. Sí, toma un racimo.
9. Necesitamos queso y huevos?
10. Sí, lleva medio pound de queso y una docema de huevos.
11. Llevamos una botella de vino?
12. No, creo que Brenda va a llevar una.
13. Ok, que más?
14. Es todo.
15. En la caja
16. Buenos dias, señor, encontro todo lo que buscaba?
17. Sí, cuanto es?
18. 10 libras y un centavo.
19. Aqui tiene.
Reading
1. What did they take to dinner?

____________________________________________
2. What else did they need?
____________________________________________
3. How much did they buy of each thing?
____________________________________________
4. How much were they?
____________________________________________
186
Future simple
Personal subject pronoun will Verb in the base form

I Call
You Think
He Come
She will Eat
It Go
We Sleep
You Study
They Buy
Use
We use the future simple:
1. To talk about predictions on base we think, believe or imagine.
She'll probably be here tomorrow. (She didn’t that she was gonna come)
2. With on-the-spot decisions.

We've run out of milk; I'll go and buy some.
3. With promises.
I'll be on time, don't worry!
4. With offers and requests.

I'll do the wash the dishes after dinner.
Will you buy the milk when you come back home?
5. With threats and warnings.

I’ll kill you!
I won't speak to you again if you continue speking aloud.
187
Writing
Reescriba el dialogo cambiando la comida y las cantidades. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Where will you live in 10 years’ time?, what will you do?, will you have kids?, will
the man live on other planets? Will the society be the same?
188
Thirty seventh lesson
The future
1. I believe there will be flying cars in the future.

2. People will be able to teleport to far places in the universe.
3. Also, there will be cities on the moon and spaceships that will be able to
take us anywhere we want.
4. On earth, there won’t be hunger because the scientists will have developed
super seeds which will be able to grow in less time and resist any climate.
5. We’ll have medicines that will be able to heal any illness in days.
6. Sir.
7. What?
8. I think you’ve drunk too much, could you retire, please?
9. There isn’t any problem, there will be a bottle of whiskey waiting for me
home anyway.
Flying car [flaying kar] auto volador, to teleport [tu teleport] teletransportarse, universe
[iunifvers] universe, moon [mun] luna, earth [erl] tierra, hunger [junga] hambre, scientist
[saientist] cientifico, to develop [defvelop] desarrollar, super [sopa] super, seed [sid]
semillas, to grow [graou] crecer, to resist [resist] resistir, climate [klimate] clima, medicine
[medisin] medicina, illness [ilnes] enfermedad, to retire [ritair] retirarse, no problem [no
problem] no hay problema, whiskey [guiski] whiskey, any way [ani guei] de cualquier
modo.
189
Trigesima septima lección
El futuro
1. Creo que habrán autos voladores en el futuro.

2. Las personas serán podrán teletransporse a lugares lejanos en el universo.
3. También habrán ciudades en la luna y naves espaciales para llevarnos a
cualquierlugar que quedramos.
4. En la tierra no habrá hambre ya que los científicos habrán desarrollado
súper semillas que podrán crecer más rápido y resistirán cualquier clima.
5. a tendremos medicinas que podrán curar cualquier enfermedad en días.
6. Señor
7. Que?
8. Pienso que ya ha bebido demasiado, puede retirarse por favor.
9. No hay problema, de todos modos habrá una botella de whiskey
esperándome en mi casa.
Reading
1. What will there be in the future?

____________________________________________
2. What will people be able to do?
____________________________________________
3. What will we have?
____________________________________________
4. What will be waiting for him?
____________________________________________
190
There will be
We use there will be to talk about something that will exist.
There will be flying cars in the future
There will be fewer trees in the forest.
We use there will not/won’t be in negative sentences
There won’t be enough food for all.
There won’t be as many species animals as today.
We use will there be in interrogatives sentences
Will there be more poor people in the future?
Yeah, there will
No, there won’t
191
To be able to/ to be capable to
We use to be able to in the future, and perfect tenses instead of can
Say: I will able to do it
Don’t say: I can do it
We use to be capable to in the same way that in Spanish.
Writing
Escriba un articulo para una revista donde escribas como crees que será la vida
en 10 años. (100 palabras)
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What things will there be in the future?, will there be flying cars?, what other
intentions will there be in the future?, will there houses in others planets? what will
the human be able to do?
192
Thirty eighth lesson
Vacation’s plans
1. What are you gonna do this vacation, Mathew?

2. I’m gonna go with my cousins to Florida.
3. What are you gonna do there?
4. We’re gonna go swimming.
5. Cool!
6. Would you like to come?
7. I’d like but I gotta work.
8. Where do you work?
9. I work in a multimillionaire international company.
10. It must be a good place to work.
11. Yeah, if you like hamburgers.
12. C’mon!
13. I’m telling the truth, I work in the fasf-food restaurant that is next to the
newsagent’s.
14. How long are you gonna work there?
15. Only this vacation.
16. I gotta go, if you change your mind, call me!
17. Ok, see you!
18. See you!
Vacations [fvakeishions] vacaciones (periodo intersemestral), multimillionaire

[multimilioner] multimillonaria, international [internashional] internacional.
193
Trigesima octava lección
Planes de vacaciones
1. Qué vas a hacer en las vacaciones, Mathew?

2. Voy a ir con mis primos a Florida.
3. Qué van a hacer?
4. Vamos a ir a nadar.
5. Que padre!
6. Quieres ir?
7. Me gustaría pero tengo que trabajar.
8. Dónde trabajas?
9. Trabajo un empresa multimillonaria internacional.
10. Debe ser un buen lugar para trabajar.
11. Sí, si te gustan las hamburguesas.
12. Vamos!
13. Te digo la verdad, trabajo en un restaudante de comida rapida que esta
junto a la tienda de la esquina.
14. Cuanto tiempo vas a trabajar ahí?
15. Solo estas vacaciones.
16. Tengo que irme, si cambias de opinion, llamame
17. Ok, nos vemos.
18. Nos vemos.
Reading
1. What’s he gonna do in his vacations?

____________________________________________
2. What’s he gonna do in Florida?
____________________________________________
3. What did he say to Mathew?
____________________________________________
4. Where does Mathew work?
____________________________________________
194
Gonna
Personal subject Verb to be Gonna Verb in the base

pronoun form
I Am
You Are Gonna
He/she/it Is Eat
We/you/they Are
We make the negative and interrogative form of gonna in the same way we make it
with the verb to be.
I’m not gonna go to Hawaii
Are you gonna eat out?
Yeah, I am
No, I’m not
Usage
We use the structure to be gonna (ir a) to talk about:
1. Plans and intentions

I’m gonna major in law.
2. Predictions based on we can see or know

She’s gonna have a baby.
3. Ambitions that we have for the future

I’m gonna buy a new house
Note: In informal English, gonna is often pronounce /gona/. In informal texts, you
can find it written as “gonna” instead of “gonna”.
195
Writing
Haz una invitación para un amigo donde le preguntes si quiere ir de vacaciones

contigo. Escribale todo lo que hará (100 palabras)
Speaking
What are your plans for this year?, are you going anyplace?
196
Thirty-Ninth lesson
Environment
1. Good evening ladies and gentlemen and welcome to this conference about
environment.
2. As everyone knows, the global warming is a problem which has caused that
the level of the sea and the temperatures rise and the poles melt.
3. Despite the efforts of different institutions the levels of pollution continue
raising.
4. The main contaminants are the emissions of the companies, the trash, and
in the case of the see the oil spills.
5. Fortunately, we’ve seen that the recycling and consciousnesses campaigns
have paid dividends.
6. Another thing which has helped us is that the renewable energies have
become cheaper and cheaper and the persons worry more and more for
having a green life.
7. In all, there’s still a long way to go across, but we’re on the way.
Environment [enfvairoment] medio hambiente, lady [leidi] dama, gentlemam [shyenglemn]

caballero, global warming [global guarming] calentamiento global, to cause [tu kaus]
causar, level [lefvel] nivel, temperature [temperchia] temperature, to rise [tu rais] aumentar,
pole [poul] polo, to melt [tu melt] derretirse, effort [efort] esfuerzo, institution [institushion]
institucion, pollution [polushion] contaminacion, main [θrila] principal, contaminant
[kontaminant] contaminante, emissons [emishon] emission, rubish [robish] basura, case
[keis] caso, oil spills [oil spils] derrames gasolineeros, recycling [resaikling] reciclaje,
consciousnesses [konsiusneses] concientisacion, campaign [kampein] campana, pay
dividends [pei difvidents] dar frutos, renewable [riniubol] removable, energy [enershi]
energia, to go across [tu gou akros] atravesar.
197
Cuadragesima primera lección
Medio hambiente
1. Buenas noches, damas y caballeros y bienvenidos a esta conferencia sobre

el medio ambiente.
2. Como todos saben, el calentamiento global es un problema que ha causado
que el nivel del mar y las temperaturas suban y los polos se derritan.
3. A pesar de los esfuerzos de diferentes instituciones, los niveles de
contaminación continúan aumentando.
4. Los rincipales contaminantes son las emisiones de las empresas, la basura,
y en el caso del mar los derrames gasolineeros.
5. Sin embargo, hemos visto que las campañas de reciclaje y de
concientizacion han dado frutos.
6. También, algo que nos ha ayudado es que las energias renobables se han
vuelto cada vez más baratas y que las personas se preocipan más por
llevar una vida verde.
7. En conclusion, hay todavia un largo camino que recorrerm pero estamos en
el camino.
Reading
1. What’s the conference about?

____________________________________________
2. What does the global warmig cause?
____________________________________________
3. What are the main pollutants?
____________________________________________
4. What are cheaper?
198
Forty-first lesson
Meeting with friends
1. Hi, Steve!
2. Hi, Laura, how are you?
3. Good, what about you?
4. Great!
5. What are you doing tonight?
6. We’re gonna the moviehouse.
7. What movie are you gonna see?
8. We’re seeing Peaches’ Season.
9. What’s it about?
10. The plot said it was a man’s story that fells in love with a woman, while
hegot a passion with another one while hegot a girlfriend.
11. What story! I suppose that’s a romantic movie.
12. Actually, it said it was a thriller.
13. I don’t like thrillers, I find them boring, I prefer horror movies.
14. So do we, but this time we wanna see something different.
15. I see.
16. Would you like to come?
17. What time does the movie start?
18. At 8.
19. We can’t, at that time we’ll be busy.
20. Ok.
21. See you!
22. Bye!
Peach [pich] Durazno, season [sison] temporada, plot [plot] sinopsis, to fall in love [tu fol in
lofv] enamorarse, romantic [romantik] romantico, actually [in fak] de hecho, thriller [θrila]
pelicula de suspenso, horror [jorror] de terror, so do we [so du güi] a nosotros tambien,
busy [bizi] ocupado.
199
Trigesima novena lección
En el cine
1. Hola, Steve.
2. Hola, Laura, como estás?
3. Bien, y tu?
4. Bien.
5. Que vas a hacer este fin de semana?
6. Vamos a ir al cine.
7. Que película van a ver?
8. Vamos a ver Peaches’ Season.
9. De que se trata?
10. La sinopsis decía que era la historia de un hombre que se enamoro de una
mujer, mientras tenia una pasión con otra mientras tenia novia.
11. Que hostoria. Supongo que es una pelicula romantica.
12. De hecho, decia que era una pelicula de suspenso.
13. No me gustan las peliculas de sispenso, se me hacen aburridas, prefiero
laspeliculas de terror.
14. Nosotros tambien, pero esta vez queremos ver algo diferente.
15. Ya veo.
16. Quieren ir?
17. A que horas empieza la pelicula?
18. A las 8.
19. No podemos, a esa hora wstaremos ocupados.
20. Ok.
21. Nos vemos.
22. Adios.
Reading
1. What are they do this weekend?

____________________________________________
2. What movie are they seeing?
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
4. What do they prefer?
____________________________________________
200
Present continuous and present simple to express the future
In some cases we can use the present continuous and the present simple to talk
about future events
Present continuous
Personal subject pronoun Verb to be Gerund

I Am Going
You Are Playing
He/she/it Is Studying
We/you/they Are Dying
We use the present continuous to talk about fixed arrangements (cosas que estan
en la agenda)
I’m seeing the dentist on Monday (we’ve already make an appointment)
Present Simple
We use the present simple to talk about future with schedules and schedules.
The movie starts at 8 o’clock
The train leaves at 17.
201
Writing
Escriba un articulo para un periodico donde digas que te parecio una pelicula. (100
palabras)
Speaking
Ask your partner: What time does your favorite program start? What kind of movies
do you like? What’s your favorite movie?
202
Forty-second lesson
Guest list
1. So, Cathy, have you told your parents how many invitations they want?
2. My mom told me we reserved 4 for her and other fifty for her friends.
3. So, I’m gonna call to the buffet people to tell them that there’s gonna be a
hundred guests.
4. Are all of them getting to the church?
5. Some of them are getting to the church and others to the wedding hall.
6. What time is the civil registry judge getting?
7. At noon.
8. Have you talked to the pray?
9. No, I’ll call him this afternoon.
10. Right, have you talked to your bridesmaids?
11. Yeah, they’re wearing a purple dress. And have you talked to your friends?
12. They’re wearing a black suit.
13. Right, so see you later.
14. See you later, love.
15. I love you
16. Me too.
Guest [guest] invitado, list [list] lista, invitation [infviteishion] invitacion, to reserve [riserfv]
reservar, buffet [bufet] buffet, close [klous] cercano, wedding [guedind] boda, civil [sifvil]
civil, registry [reshyistri] registro, wedding hall [gueging jol] salon de bodas, pray [prei]
padre, bridesmaid [bridesmeid] dama de honor, see you later [si yu leita] nos vemos al
rato.
203
Trigesima novena lección
Lista de invitados
1. Entonces, Beth, ya le dijiste a tus padres cuantas invitaciones quieren?

2. Mi mamá dijo que le reservaramos para ella y otras cicuenta para sus
amigas.
3. Entonces, vamos a llamarles also del buffer para decirles que van a ser cien
invitados.
4. Invitamos a todos a la iglesia?
5. No se, que piensas?
6. Creo que va a ser mejor si solo invitamos a los más cercanos a la iglesia y
a los otros al salón bodas.
7. Va allegar el juezadel registro civil a la iglesiao al salon?
8. A la iglesia, ya hablé con él.
9. Ya le llamaste al padre?
10. No, le voy a llamar en la tarde.
11. Bien, ya hablaste con tus damas de honor?
12. Sí, van a llevar un vestido morado. Y tu ya hablaste con tus amigos?
13. Van a llevar un traje negro.
14. Bien, entonces nos vemos al rato.
15. Te amo.
16. Yo tambien.
Reading
1. How many people will there be?

____________________________________________
2. Are they gonna invite all the guest to the church?
____________________________________________
3. What time is the judge arring at the church ?
____________________________________________
4. What are his friends wearing?
____________________________________________
204
Present continuous, future simple and gonna
Sometime these three tenses can be confused, so we can analysis them by the
distance in the future and the probability something happen.
Tense Usage Example
We use the future The man will visit other galaxies in the future.
simple to talk about
things that will
happen in a long
future (more than
one year).
Future simple
When we are doing I will get married next year. (You do not have a girlfriend)
something to come
true we wanna do, I’m gonna get married next year (you’ve already got
we use gonna. girlfriend but you haven’t talk about it or you are talking
about it but you have not decided when.
We use gonna to I’m gonna buy a new car in March.

Gonna talk about things
that will happen in a
near future (less
than a year but
more than a week)
We use the future I will buy a car in march

simple when (you do not have money to buy it)
something is not
sure that will
happen
We use the present What are doing this weekend?
205
simple to talk about I’m meeting my friends
future events in a I’m getting married Saturday evening
Present very near future.
continuous (Maximum one
week)
When we have
already made the I’m getting married next year
appointment we can
use the present
continuous to talk
about longer future
events.
Writing
En una hoja escriba cuales son tus planes a corto, mediano y largo plazo. (100
palabras)
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What are you doing tonight? What are you doing this weekend?, are you moving
out this year? Are you looking fo a new work? Will you get married this year?
206
Seventh Unit
Subjunctive
207
 To talk about wishes

 To say how to get at a place
 To give instructions
Topics:
 Subjunctive present
 Subordinated conjunctions
 Personal object pronouns (two objects)
 Imperative
 Indefinite pronouns
 Relative pronouns
 Comparative and superlative of advebs
208
Forty third lesson
Health club
1. What’s matter with you, Roger?

2. I don’t know, I’m feeling dizzy and me got stomachache and diarrhoea.
3. Did you eat out yesterday?
4. No, I ate in, as usual.
5. I recommend you go to the GP.
6. I believe you’re right.
At doctor’s
7. Good morning, sir, how can I help you?

8. I feel very awful.
10. I got a terrible stomach ache, vomit and diarrea.
11. Can I take a look?
12. Sure!
13. Mm, looks like you have some inflammation in your stomach. It must be an
infection. Stay in bed for two days, take plenty of mint tea and eat only beef
or chicken steak with salad.
14. Could you put all that in the recipt?
15. Certainly!
209
Sexta leccion
En el centro de salud
1. Que tienes, Roger?

2. No se, me siento mareado, me duele el estomago y tengo diarrea.
3. Comiste en la calle ayer?
4. No, comi en mi casa como siempre.
5. Te recomiendo que vayas con al GP.
6. Creo que tienes razon.
En el GP
7. Buenos dias, puedo ayudarlo?

8. Me siento muy mal
9. Que tiene?
10. Tengo un terrible dolor de estomago, vomito y diarrea.
11. Puedo hechar un vistazo.
12. Seguro!
13. Mmm, parece que tiene algo inflamado el estomago. Debe ser una infección
14. . Quede en reposo dos dias, tome bastante te de hierbabuena y ckma bisteck o
pechuga de pollo con ensalada.
15. Puede poner todo eso en la rexeta?
16. Seguro!
Reading
1. What has John got?

____________________________________________
2. Where did he eat?
____________________________________________
3. What does the GP says hegot?
____________________________________________
4. What does the GP recommend to him?
____________________________________________
210
Subjunctive
We use the subjunctive to express wishes, desires, and hopes.
Main Subordinate clause

clause
Informal you go to tge doctor
(more use in I you don’t do it
UK) recommend that
he goes to the doctor
he doesn’t do it
Informal
Notice that it is said “I recommend that you ” and not “I recommend you that “
That can be omitted in the spoken language.
In informal speech, we can omit the “that”.
I recommend that you should go to the doctor. (formal)
I recommend you should go to the doctor. (informal)
Verbs with special constructions in the subjunctive
The verbs want, tell, ask, advise and the expressions would like to and “that’s time”
have a special construction
I want you to buy some chicken Quiero que compres pollo

He tells me to wait him Me dice que lo espere
We ask you to stay more time Te pidieron que te quedaras mas
tiempo
They advise us not to drink too much Nos recomiendan no tomar mucho
That’s time us to go Es hora de que nos vayamos
211
Writing
Un amigo tuyo no sabe si terminar su relacion o no. Escribale un mensaje donde le

digas tu punto de vista. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Do you go to the GP or to a private doctor?, how often do you get sick?, what are
the most commons illness that you have?, do you prefer normal medicine or
natural medicine?, is gonna the doctor cheap in your country?
212
Forty forth lesson
Looking for accomodation
1. Good morning, sir, how can I help you?

2. We want to see the houses you sell.
3. Okay, we have some luxurious houses with kitchen, living-room, two
bathrooms, master bedroom and child’s bedroom.
4. Yes but …
5. But if you like the country, we also sell lovely cottages.
6. We’re thinking of something less expensive.
7. Well, if you want something less expensive, we sell two-bedroom
apartments.
8. We were thinking of a small apartment, do you have?
9. I’m sorry, they sold out of all that we had. I recommend that you buy a
house in the suburbs, the payments are not very high and the worth of the
house will increase in next years.
10. What do you think, love?
11. I think we should continue looking for.
213
Cuadragesima cuarta leccion
Buscando alojamiento
1. Buenos dias, como puedo ayudarles?

2. Queremos ver las casas que vende.
3. Está bien, temenos algunas casas lujosas a 5 minutos caminando del
centro con cocina, sala, dos baños, recamara y recamara para niños.
4. Sí pero…
5. Pero si a ustedes les gusta el campo vendemos unas encantadoras
cabañas junto al lago.
6. Estamo pensanddo en algo menos caro.
7. Bueno, si quieren algo menos caro, tambien vendemos departamentos con
dos recamaras con balcon.
8. Estabamos pensando en un estudio, tiene?
9. Lo siento, se vendieron todos los que teniamos, pero si estan buscando
algo barato, les recomiendo comprar una casa en los suburbios, los pagos
no son muy altos y el valor de la casa subirá en los siguientes años.
10. Que piensas amor?
11. Pienso que debemos seguir buscando.
Reading
1. What do they want?

____________________________________________
2. Where are the cottages?
____________________________________________
3. What rooms do the apartments have?
____________________________________________
4. What does she think?
____________________________________________
214
Subjunctive conjunction
Because Ya que
Puesto que
Unless A no ser que
A menos que
Salvo que
Since Dado que
Desde que
So De manera que
So that De modo que
De tal suerte
In order for De forma que
In a way De tal modo que
De tal forma que
So that Para que
In order to A fin de que
That Que
Before Antes de que
Until Hasta que
While Mientras que
After Despúes de que
Whenever Siempre que
Without having to Sin que
For fear that Por miedo de que
Despite Pese a que
In spite of
215
Writing
Imagine que acabas de comprar una casa. Escriba una carta a un amigo donde le
digas como es tu nueva casa. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
How many rooms does your house have?, what are they? how’s your ideal
house?, would you like to have it in the city or in the country?, Where would you
like to be?
216
Forty-eight lesson
Planning a journey
1. Dear, are you sure we got everything what we need for the trip?
2. Yeah, we got the flight tickets, the reservation of the resort and the map.
3. Shall we exchange the money before flying?
4. Better there, I believe we can find better prices.
5. Dear, have you seen my trunks and my towel?
6. I gave you them, maybe they’re in your suit case.
7. Here they are. Let’s go.
At airport
8. Where are the depertures?

9. Over there, next to the baker’s.
10. Good afternoon! Where are you flying today?
11. Cancún
12. May I have your passport, please?
13. Here you are!
14. May I see your boarding passes?
15. Certainly
16. Are you checking any bags?
17. Just this one.
18. OK, please place your bag on the scale.
19. We have a connecting flight in Mexico City, do we need to pick up our
luggage there?
20. No, it’ll go straight through to Cancún.Your flight leaves from deperture gate
15A and it’ll begin boarding at 13:20. Your seat number is 26E.
21. Thank you!
217
Cuadragesima octava leccion
De vacaciones
1. Querida, estas segura que ya temenos todo para el viaje?

2. Si, temenos los boletos, la reservacion del hotel y el mapa.
3. Deberias cambiar el dinero antes de irnos o despúes?
4. Mejir allá, creo que Podemos encontrar mejores precios.
5. Querida, has visto mi traje de baño y mi toalla?
6. Esta en tu maleta.
7. Ok, vamonos.
En el aeropuerto
23. Buenas tardes, a donde van hoy?

24. A la Ciudad de México
25. Puedo ver su pasaporte, por favor
26. Aqui tiene!
27. Puedk ver su pase de abordar?
28. Seguro!
29. Algo que tengan que declarer?
30. Solo esta maleta.
31. Esta´bien, por favor coloque la maleta en la escala.
32. Voy a hacer escala en Nueva New York, tengo que recoger mi equipaje
allá?
33. No, llegará directamente a Mexico. Aqui tiene sus pases de abordar, su
vuelo sale del angar 15A y comenzarán a abordar el vuelo a las 13:20. El
numero de su asiento es 26 E.
34. Muchas gracias!
35. De nada!
1. When are they gonna exchange the money?

____________________________________________
2. Where ar they going?
____________________________________________
3. What does the policeman ask them?
____________________________________________
4. Where is the baggage getting?
218
Personal Object Pronouns (two objects)
Personal Verb Direct objet To Indirect object

pronoun
I Made A cake To You
Personal Verb Indirect object - Direct object
pronoun
I Made You - It
219
Writing
Reescriba el dialogo cambiando algunas cosas.
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
How often do you fly?, do you prefer driving, flying or taking a coach in your
vacations? Have you ever gone abroad? Where? When? Have you ever been to
another continent? What? What country would you like to visit?
220
Forty fifth lesson
A TV program
1. Good morning, ladies and gentlemen and welcome to another edition of our
program Cooking in Britain.
2. Today, we’re going to learn how to cook Cornish pasty.
3. First, place the flour, salt, and butter into a large bowl.
4. Using your fingertips, rub the butter into the flour and salt until the mixture
resembles fine breadcrumbs, working as quickly as possible to prevent the
dough from becoming warm.
5. Add the cold water to the mixture and, using a cold knife, stir until the dough
binds together, adding more cold water a teaspoon at a time if the mixture is
too dry.
6. Wrap the dough in plastic wrap and chill for a minimum of 15 minutes and
up to 30 minutes.
Start making the Cornish pasty.
7. Gather the ingredients. (onion, potato, rump steak)

8. Heat the oven to 220 C/425 F/Gas 7.
9. Divide the pastry into 4 equal pieces and roll each piece into rounds the size
of a tea plate - approximately 6 to 7 inches in diameter.
10. Place the onion, potato, swede and meat into a large mixing bowl and
combine thoroughly. Season well with salt and pepper.
11. Divide the meat mixture evenly among each pastry circle and place to one
side. Brush the edges with beaten egg.
12. Fold the circle in half over the filling so the two edges meet. Crimp the two
edges together to create a tight seal. Brush each pasty all over with the
remaining beaten egg.
13. Place the pasties on a greased baking sheet and bake for 45 minutes until
golden brown.
14. Serve hot or cold and enjoy!
221
Cuadragesima cuarta leccion
Programas de televisión
1. Buenos dias, dams y caballeros y vienvenidos a otra edicion de nuestro

program Cooking in Britain.
2. Hoy, vamos a aprender como hacer pastes.
3. Primero, coloque la harina, la sal y la mantequilla en un tazon grande.
4. Usando las puntas de los dedos, embarre la mantequilla en la harina y la
sal hasta que la mezcla quede como bolas, haciento esto lo más rapido
possible para que la masa no se caliente.
5. Añada agua fria a la mezcla y usando un cuchillo frio, corte la maza, añada
más agua fria, una cucharadita a la vez si la mezcla está demasiado seca.
6. Envuelva la masa en plastic para envolver y enfrie unos 15 minutos como
minimo y 30 como maximo.
Empezar a hacer los pastes.
7. Ingredientes necesarios. (cebolla, papa, bistek de cordero)

8. Caliente el horno a 200C/425F/Gas 7.
9. Divida los pastes en cuatro pieza y doble cada una, debe ser del tamaño de
un platito, aproxima’amnte de 6 a 7 pulgadas de diametro.
10. Coloque la cebolla, la papa, el rabano y la carne en un tazon para mezclar y
combine. Sasone con sal y pimienta.
11. Doble el circulo para juntar las dos puntas. Embarre cada paste con lo que
quede del huevo batido.
12. Coloque los pastes en una hoja encerada para hornear 45 minutos hasta
que queden doradas.
13. Sirva calientes o frias y disfrutelas!
1. What ingredients do you need?

____________________________________________
2. How long do you gotta ut in on the refrigerator?
____________________________________________
3. What other ingredients do you need?
____________________________________________
4. How long do you gotta bake it?
____________________________________________
222
Imperative
Verb Imperative
To do Do
We make the imperative by taking out to.
We make the negative imperative by adding do not/don’t to the affirmative

imperative.
Do
Don’t do
223
Writing
Escriba como hacer tu receta favorita. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What do you usually eat in your country?, what meals do you believe that are
famous abroad?, what ingredients does the most famous of your country have? do
you prefer healthy food or junk food?, what’s your favorite junk food?
224
Forty seventh lesson
A touristy city
1. There are many places to visit in Los Angeles.

2. The most famous place in Los Angeles is the Big Ben.
3. Another place to visit is the Buckingham Palace, place where United
States’s queen lives. There’s another place to visit in LA which is the LA
eye, also known as the “Millennium Wheel”, which is placed beside the
River Thames.
4. If you don’t have enough money to visit these places, don’t worry, LA has
many attractions which are free to visit, including the Victoria and Albert
Museum, Hyde Park and Kensington Yards.
5. If you come to LA, don’t forget to eat some Fish and French fries or take a
cuppa in one of its magnificent restaurants.
225
Cuadragesima sexta leccion
En Los Angeles
1. Hay muchos lugares que visitor en Los Angeles.

2. El más Famoso es el Big Ben, pero recuerda que es solo el reloj el que se
llama Big Ben, el nombre de la torre es Ann Tower.
3. Otro lugar que visitar es el palacio de Buckungham, lugar donde la reina de
inglaterra vive.
4. Hay otro lugar que visitor en Los Angeles que es el LA Eye, tambien
conocina como rueda del milenio, la cual se encuentra junto al rio Tamesis.
5. Si o tienes suficiente dinero para visitor estos lugares, no te preocupes, Los
Angeles está llena de atracciones que son gratis, incluyendo el Museo
Victoria y el Museo Albert, Hyde Park y los jardines Kensington.
6. Si vienes a Los Angeles, no olvides comer unos Fish and French fries o
tomar una tasa de té en uno de sus magnificos restaurantes.
Reading
1. What’s the Big Ben?

____________________________________________
2. Where does the king of The United States live?
____________________________________________
3. How is called the LA eye?
____________________________________________
4. What can you visit if you do not have enough money?
____________________________________________
226
Relative pronouns
Relative pronoun Usage Example
Who Que (when we refer to She is the girl who won

a person) the first prize.
Which Que (when we refer to It is the car which I sold

anything that should them
not be human)
When Que (when we refer to I won’t forget the day

time) when I met you
That Que (for joining to She told that she was

independent gonna be here
sentences)
Who and which means “(el) que, (la) que, ect.”
We can use that instead of who and which in informal style.
The girl who is wearing a white dress is my sister. (formal)
The girl that is wearing a white dress is my sister (informal)
227
Writing
Escriba un articulo de tu ciudad. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What are the most famous places in your city?, do you visit them?, what places
can a forenger to visit?, what’s your favorite part of your city? What place do you
prefer gonna?
228
Forty sixth lesson
An interesting story
1. It was a cold day of December. It had been a long day and the only thing I
thought was sleeping in. When I got home, I only had some cookies for
dinner and went to bed.
2. When I was about to fall sleep, I heard a noise that came from the
downstairs floor.
3. I got up and me went downstairs. I looked for everyplace, but I couldn’t find
out where the noise had come from. When I was in the dinning room, I
heard again the noise. It came from the bathroom.
4. As I thought that maybe a buglar had broken into the house, I took a knife
and went slowly to the bathroom. When I came in, there was no one,
suddenly, I heard a noise that came behind me, I turned the head fast and
when I saw it was only a kitten.
5. Then?
6. Nothing, that’s the cat I got today.
7. What an interesting story!
229
Cuadragesima sexta leccion
Una historia interesante
1. Era un dia frio de diciembre. Habia sido un largo dia y lo unico en lo que
pensaba era en dormir. Cuando llegué a mi casa, lo unico que comi fueron
unas galletas y me fui a dormir.
2. Cuando estaba apunto de dormirme, escuche un ruido que venia del piso
de abajo.
3. Me levante y bajé. Busque por todos lados pero no pude descubrir de
donde venia el ruido.
4. Cuando estaba en la cocina, escuche el rudio otra vez. Venia del baño.
5. Pensando que tal vez alguien habia entrado a la casa, tome un cuchillo y
me dirigi al baño.
6. Cuando entre, no habia nadie, derepente, escuche un ruido que venia de
atras de mi, voltie rapido la cabeza y cuando vi era solo un pequeño gato.
7. Y luego?
8. Nada, es el gato que tengo hoy.
9. Que interesante historia!
Reading
1. What did he heard?

____________________________________________
2. What did he do when he heard the noise?
____________________________________________
3. What did he think?
____________________________________________
4. What was the noise?
____________________________________________
230
Indefinite pronouns
People Things Places

Some Someone Something Someplace
(alguien) (algo) (en algun lugar)
No No one/No-one Nothing Noplace
(nadie) (nada) (en ningun lugar)
Any Anyone Anything Anyplace
(cualquiera) (cualquier cosa) (en cualquier lugar)
Every Everyone Everything Everyplace
(todos) (todo) (en todos lados)
Notice: Some and No becomes any in:
a. negative and interrogative sentences.
I do not know anyone Not I do not know no one
Do you know anyone? Not I do not know someone
b. With negative words in formal language.
I never go anyplace Not I never go someplace
c. With the conditional

Call me if anyone calls Not Call me if someone calls
Note: The world “one” can be change for “body. (somebody, anybody, nobody,
everybody)
231
Writing
Escriba una pequeña historia. Trata de usar la mayor cantidad de Indefinite

pronouns que puedas. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What would you feel if you were in a country where you know no one?, did you live
anything special when you were younger?, what?, have you ever have found
something on the street? What? When?
232
Forty lesson
Go camping
1. We could walk faster if you didn’t complain all the road.

2. I’m sorry, but the mosquitos are biting me and me can’t stand this tropical
weather. How long does it take us to get at the campsite?
3. About 10 minutes.
4. And what are we gonna do when we get at there.
5. Today, I could do with spending my time going swimming and
surfing.Tomorrow, I’m gonna kayak.
6. You really like warter sports.
7. Yeah, and you? What are you gonna do?
8. I’m gonna play bolleyall and ride a horse and tomorrow I’m gonna hike in the
rainforest.
9. That’s a good plan. Well, we’ve already got. We’d better look for a good to
put the tend.
To advance [tu adfvans] avanzar, overpopulation [ofverpopuleishion] sobrepoblacion, to

interview [tu interfviu] entrevistar, nowadays [noguadeis] actualmente, lack [lak] falta,
resource [risours] recurso, transport [transport] transporte, so much [so moch] tanto,
because of [bikous of] debido a, jam [shyam] embotellamiento, rush hour [rosh aua] hora
pico, several [sefveral] varios, mein of transport [min of transport] medio de transporte,
such as [soch es] como, exceed [eksid] exedido, quantity [kantiti] cantidad, main [mein]
materia.
233
Cuadragesima segunda lección
Ir de campamento
1. Podriamos caminar más rapido si no te quejaras todo el camino.

2. Lo siento, pero los mosquitos me estan picando y me choca este
clima tropical. Cuanto tiempo nos falta para llegar al campamento?
3. Como 10 minutos.
4. QUe vas a hacer cuando lleguemos allá?
5. Hoym, tengo muchisimas ganas de pasar el tiempo iendo a nadar y a
surfear. Mañana, voy a hacer kayak.
6. Realemte te gustan los deportes acuaticos.
7. Sí, y tú? Que vas a hacer?
8. Voy a jugar bolibol y montar a caballo y mañana voy a hacer
caminata en la selva
9. Ese es un buen plan. Bueno, ya llegamos. Será mekor que
busquemos un buen lugar para poner la tienda.
Reading
1. Who are they gonna interview?

____________________________________________
2. What’s the biggest problems in the big cities?
____________________________________________
3. What problem does she speak about?
____________________________________________
4. What mean of transport does LA has?
___________________________________________
234
Comparative and superlative of adverbs
Adverb Comparative Superlative

Strongly More strongly Most strongly
Fast Faster Fastest
9. We make the comparative by adding more to the adverb.

I walk more slowly than you (camino mas lento que tu)
10. The adverbs fast, hard, early and soon make the comparative by adding –
er.
I run faster than you
11. We make the superlative by adding the most to the adverb.

I walk most slowly (soy el que camina mas lento)
12. Adverbs which have the same form that the adjective add –est.
I run the fastest
13. The adverbs well has an irregular form.

I play the guitar the best
14. The adverbs which have an irregular form maintain the irregular form.
he eat least meat in our family
Irregular adverbs
Adverb Comparative Superlative

Well Better Best
Badly Worse Worst
May/much More Most
Little Less Least
235
Writing
Escriba una lista de los problemas que tiene tu colonia y escriba cuales son sus
posibles soluciones . (100 palabras)
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What problems does your city have?, is the transport in your city good? What
means of transport does your city have?, how can you get faster to your house, on
foot or by car? What can be done to improve the quality of live in your city?
British culture
Los Angeles, Birminham, Leeds, Glasgow y Shelfield son las cinco ciudades del
Reino Unido con mayor numero de habitantes. En total, Los Angeles cuenta con
una poblacion de 9388000 habitantes.
236
Eihth Unit
Education
237
 To talk about natural laws

 To make hypotheses
Topics:
 Conditional type 0
 Definite and non-definite clauses
 Infinitive
 Gerunds
 Past participle and present participle
238
Fifty seventh lesson
At junior high school
1. Good morning!
2. Good morning, Mister Rhodes.
3. Have you done your homework?
4. Yes, we have.
5. So let’s to see how much you’ve learned.
6. If anyone drops a stone from a 98-height building, how long does the stone
last in arriving at the floor?
7. I work out it can get to ….
8. Don’t speak in that way, you’re at school.
9. Ok, I reckon it arrives in the floor in 10 seconds.
10. You’re right, next. If you put a glass of water outside your house in winter, to
what temperature does the water become ice?
11. If that’s winter, it becomes ice at 0 degrees.
12. Correct, and the last question, If I sleep during the class, how much will the
teacher score me in the subject?
13. Zero.
14. It’s correct.
239
Quinquagesima septima lección
En la preparatoria
1. Buenos dias!
2. Buenos dias, señor Rhoder.
3. Hicieron su tarea?
4. Sí
5. Entonces vamos a ver que tanto han aprendido.
6. Si un hombre lanza una Piedra desde un edificio de 98 metros, cuanto
tiempo tarda la Piedra en llegar al suelo?
7. Calculo que puede llegar …
8. No hables asi, estas en la escuela.
9. Ok, calculo que llega en 10 segundos.
10. Tines razon. Siguiente. Si pones un baso de agua afuera de tu casa en
invierno, a que temperature se Vuelve hielo.
11. Si es invierno, se vuelve hielo a los 0 grados.
12. Correcto. Y la ultima, si duermo durante la clase, cuanto me pondrá el
maestro en la materia?
13. Cero.
14. ES correcto.
Reading
1. Where are they?

____________________________________________
2. What does the teacher told to his student?
____________________________________________
3. How long does a stone last in getting at the floor?
____________________________________________
4. What temperature does the water becomes ice?
____________________________________________
240
Conditional type Zero
If Present simple , Present simple

If You heat water , It boils
We use the conditional type zero to:
1. Talk about things that always happen.

If he drinks, he gets drunk.
2. Talk about natural laws.

If you take out a fish from water, it dies.
Note:
a. We can change the order of the sentence by putting the if-clause at the
final.
If you heat water, it boils = Water boils if you boil it
b. We can change in the conditional Zero if for when.

If you take out a fish from water, it dies = when you take out a fish from
water, it dies.
241
Writing
Write a letter for a university where you say why you wanna enter and the schools
were you have studied. (150 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What was the most difficul subject for you in the high school? Why? Do you believe
that maths are difficult? Why? Do you believe that is better that students learn to
write in a keyboard to write with a pencil? Why?
British Culture
La Received Pronunciation es el acento con la que se dan generalmente las

clases en el Reino Unido, de ahi su nombre literal “pronunciacion recibida”.
Actualmente, esta forma de hablar solo es usada por el 2 por ciento de la
poblacion en el Reino Unido.
242
Seventy forth lesson
Classmates
1. Hi, John!
2. Hi, Sahra!
3. Can you pass me your last week’s notes and homework?
4. Sure, the sociology professor let a project for next month, the history
professor asked us a slide presentation about Second War World. The
politics professor wrote down something on the whiteboard but I didn’t write
down it, but here are the photocopies he gave us and economics exam is
next week.
5. Well, I think I must study very hard if I wanna catch up in. Do you believe
you’ll pass the exam?
6. I don’t know, I failed last exam.
7. You should study harder if you wanna pass the exam.
8. No, I’m gonna drop out of uni and I’m gonna do again the test to come in the
university.
9. As you want. But, if you leave, you’ll lose a scholar year.
10. I don’t care.
11. Well, what’s that?
12. That’s a poster of a lecture on the policies that the government is applying in
health care.
13. Go!
14. Why bother, that’s only for post-graduated.
15. Damm!
243
Compañeros de clase
1. Hola, John.
2. Hola, Sahra.
3. Puedes pasarme tus apuntes y la tarea de la semana pasada?
4. Si, el maestro de sociologia dejo un proyecto para el siguiente mes, el
maestro de historia nos pidio una presentación sobre la segunsa guerra
mundial. El masstro de politica escribio algo en el pizarron pero no lo anoté,
pero aqui estan las fotocopias que nos dio y el examen de ecojomia es la
siguiente semana.
5. Bueno, pienso que tengo que estudiar muy duro si quiero ponerme al
corriente. Crees pasar el examen?
6. No se, reprobe el examen pasado.
7. Deberias estudiar más duro si quieres pasar el examen.
8. No, voy a dejar la universidad y voy a hacer otra vez el examenmpara
entrar a la universidad.
9. Como quieras. Pero, si dejas la universidad, perderás un año.
10. No me ikporta.
11. Bueno, que es eso?
12. Es un poster de la conferencia sobre las politicas que el gobierno esta
aplicando en el sector salud.
13. Vamos!
14. Para que, es solo para alumnos de maestria.
15. Demonios.
244
Conditional type one
, Future simple
If Present simple Gonna
Modal verbs
Imperative
If You do not save , You’ll forget where
your newspapers they are
in a specific place You can forget
where they are
Don’t forget where
they are
We use the conditional type one to:
5. Express a real or very probable situation in the past or in the future

If you don’t study, you won’t find a good job.
Note:
a. We can change the order of the sentence by putting the if-clause at

the final.
You won’t find a good job if you don’t study.
b. We can change in the conditional Zero if not for unless.

Unless you study, you won’t find a good job.
245
Writing
Write an article for a magazine where you say your opinion about the poaching and
its effects in the near future. (150 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner: What can we do to reduce the greenhouse gases? Is it a good
idea to use hydraulic energy? Why? Do you believe that the recycling help our
planet? Why? What do you do to help to reduce the trash?
246
Fifty ninth lesson
TV programs
1. Welcome again to another edition of our program “Knowing USA” the

phone-in most famous program about American culture. Today in the studio
we have Brenda.
2. Brenda, how do you feel today?
3. Very excited about being here, John.
4. Brenda, tell us, what would you do if you won the big prize?
5. If I won the big prize, I’d buy a car.
6. And what would you do with a car?
7. Well, If I had a car, I’d travel around the country.
8. Ok, Brenda to win the jackpot, you need answer correctly these questions.
What’s the first and second the most drunk drink in the United States?
9. The beer and the wine.
10. Right!
11. Is it true that in the United States rains more than in other American
countries?
12. False!
13. Right!
14. And last question, how many States are there in the United States?
15. 50, of which California and Texas are the most known.
16. Correct! Congratulations, Brenda, you win the jackpot.
247
Quinquagesima novena lección
Programas de televisión
1. Bienvenidos otra vez a otra edición de nuestro programa “conociendo

Ingalterra”, el programa de llamadas mas Famoso sobre cultura britanica.
Hoy en el estduio temenos a Brenda.
2. Brenda, como te sientes hoy?
3. Muy emocionada de estar aqui, John.
4. Brenda, di nos, que harias si ganaras el primer premio?
5. Si ganara el primer premio, lo primero que haria seria comprar un carro.
6. Y que harias con un carro?
7. Bueno, si tuviera un carro, viajaria por todo el pais.
8. Ok, Brenda, para ganar tu carro, necesitas contester correctamente
estaspreguntas. Cual es la primeray la segunda bebida más consumida en
el Reino Unido?
9. El té y la cerveza.
10. Correcto.
11. Es cierto que en el Reino Unido llueve más que en otros países europeos?
12. Falso!
13. Correcto!
14. Y la ultima pregunta, cuantos países hay en la gran Bretaña?
15. Cuatro, Inglaterra, Escocia, Gales e Irlanda del norte.
16. Correcto! Felicitaciones, Brenda, ganaste el primer premio.
Reading
1. What would she go if she won?

____________________________________________
2. What does she want a ship for?
____________________________________________
3. Does it rain more in the United States?
____________________________________________
4. Did she asnwear well all the questions?
____________________________________________
248
Conditional type Two
Would
If Past simple , Could
Might
If I had money , I’d buy a house
We can change the order of the sentence by putting the if-clause at the final.
If I had money, I’d buy a house = I’d buy a house if I had money
We can use were instead of was.
If I were/was you, I’d do another thing.
Usage
We use the conditional type two in the same way that in Spanish.
249
Writing
Write an articule for a newnewspaper where you say how you think Mexico would
be if Texas and California continued being of Mexico. (150 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner: If you were president, what would you change in your country?
What would you do if you were famous?, What would you do if you won 1 million
dollars? Would you change anything in your country if you could? What? If there
were more education in your country, would it change anything?
250
Sixtith lesson
How’s the weather?
1. I’m hungry, do you got any pizza?

2. Yeah, just look for it in the fridge.
3. There isn’t left. Lend me your bike to go for one.
4. Take it!
5. Do you know what time Anna’s plane gets to the airport?
6. I didn’t know she was gonna come.
7. Don’t you get on well with her?
8. Yeah, but I haven’t seen her since we were at uni.
9. Why don’t you call her, use my cell phone if you want.
10. Later, she must be still on the plane.
11. That’s just starting raining, you shouldn’t go for the pizza, you can catch a
‘flu. You’re right.
12. While, let’s see what’s on TV. There’s a soap opera, a documentary and an
old cartoon. Do you know what time the football matches start?
13. They start till the weather forecast finishes.
14. Ok, and did you buy the e-book you told me you were gonna buy?
15. Yeah.
17. That’s ‘bout IT.
18. I though it was on Hi-tech medical advances.
19. No.
20. Now that’s only drezzling, I’ll risk going go the pizzeria.
21. Bring some ice cream from the convenience store too.
22. Ok.
251
Sexagesima leccion
Como esta el clima?
1. Tengo hambre, tendrás pizza?

2. Sí, busca en el refri.
3. Ya no hay. Prestame tu bici para ir por una.
4. Agarrala!
5. Sabes a que hora llega el avión de Ann al aeropuerto.
6. No sabia que iba a venir.
7. No te llebabas bien con ella?
8. Sí, pero no la he visto desde que estabamos en la universidad.
9. Porque no le llamas, usa mi cellular si quieres.
10. Al rato, dede estar todavia en el avión.
11. Acaba de empezar a llover, no podrás ir por la pizza. Puedes resfriarte.
12. Tienes razón.
13. No te preocupes, vamos a ver la tele. Hay una telenovela, mm, sabes a que
horas empieza el Partido?
14. Creo que empieza hasta que termine el pronostico del tiempo.
15. Compraste el libro electronico que me dijiste que le ibas a comprar a tu
hermana?
16. Sí
17. De que es?
18. Es un libro de informatica.
19. Pensé que era sobre los avances médicos de alta tecnología.
20. No.
21. Esta chispeando. Me arriesgaré a ir a la pizzeria.
22. Trae helado de la tienda también.
23. Ok
Shortenings
Formal Shortenings
About ‘bout*
Advertisement Ad
Airplane Plane
Application App
Briton Brit
252
Exchange ‘Change
Goodbye Bye
Influence Flu/’flu
Okay Ok
Photography Photo
Popular Pop
Refrigerator Fridge
Technology Tech
University Uni
Until Till*
Vegetable(s) Veggies
Veterinary Vet
Bicycle Bike
Christmas Xmas (informal y escrito)
Electronic E-
Father Dad
Mother Mum
Grandfather Grandpa
Grandmother Grandma
Television TV
All right Alright (informal y escrito)

Cellular phone Cell phone
Curriculum RESUMÉ
High technology Hi-tech
Information technology IT
Of the clock O’clock
On-target earnings OTE (usada en el ambito comercial)
Personal assistant PA
Political party Party
Public relations PR
Thank you Thanks
University Degree Degree
United States US
Version original V.O.
*With these words, you can also use the forms “about”, “ice cream” and “until”
respectibily.
253
Writing
Reescriba el dialogo usando diferentes formas cortas . (150 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
In partners, make 3.5-minutes length dialog where you use at least 15 acotations.
254
Sixty first lesson
At elementary school
1. Do you bring the sheets, the scissors and the color pencils which the arts
teacher asked for us?
2. No, I haven’t.
3. Don’t worry, the last class is English.
4. Good morning, children.
5. Good morning, mister Smith.
6. Ok, today we’re going to see the non-personal forms of the verb.
7. Who can tell me what the non-personal forms of the verb are?
8. The infinitive, the gerund and the participle.
9. Correct!
10. And why are they non-personal?
11. Because they don’t tell us what the subject is.
12. Correct, Ann.
13. Who can tell me three examples of the infinitive?
14. To sing, running and sleep.
15. Very good, Oliver.
16. Who can tell me three examples of gerund?
17. Me, me, teacher. Eating, drinking and chewing.
18. Right, but why all of them are related with the food?
19. Because that’s already the lunch time.
20. You’re right, see you after lunch.
255
Sexagesima primera lección
En la primaria
1. TRaes las hojas, las tijeras y los colores que el maestro de artes nos pidio?
2. No.
3. No te preocupes, la ultima clase es inglés.
4. Buenos dias niños.
5. Buenos dias, señor Smith.
6. Ok, hoy vamos aver las formas no personales del verbo.
7. Quienuede decirme cuaes son las formas no personales del verbo?
8. El infinitive, el gerundio y el participio.
9. Correcto!
10. Y porque son no personales?
11. Porque no dicen cual es el sujeto.
12. Correcto. Ann.
13. Quien puede decirme tres ejemplos deinfinitivo.
14. Cantar, corer y dormir.
15. Muy bien, Oliver.
16. 4Quien puede decirme tres ejemplos de gerundio?
17. Yo, yo maestro. Comieno, bebiendo y masticando.
18. Correcto, pero porque todos estan relacionados con la comida.
19. ¨Porque ya es la hora del recreo.
20. Tienes razón, nos vemos regresando del recreo.
Reading
1. Where are they?

____________________________________________
2. Why are the infinitive, gerund and participle non-personal forms of the verb?
____________________________________________
3. Did all students answer correcly?
____________________________________________
4. Why doesn’t the class continue?
____________________________________________
256
Infinitive
The infinitive is the form of the verb which expresses an action without indicating
the person and the tense. In English exist three kinds of infinitive (the To Infinitive,
The bare Infinitive and the Ing- infinitive)
To Infinitive
Around 85 percent of the English verbs use the To Infinitive. We use the to
infinitive :
a. With most of the verbs

I wanna go to the park.
b. After the “would like” structure.

I would like to have a cup of coffee.
Bare Infinitive
We just use the bare infinitive with:
a. the modal verbs

I can do it
b. the verbs let and make.
Don’t let me go
Ing infinitive
We use the gerund:
1. When the verb is the subject of the sentence.

Painting is a good activity.
257
Writing
Write a letter for the academic coordinator of your degree where you say to him
what subjecs would be added to the new study plan. (150 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner: Why do you study your major? Do you believe is a good idea to
have a master degree? Why? Do you believe that is better study abroad than in
your country? Why?
258
Sixty first lesson
Likes and dislikes
1. Hi, guys, what are you doing?

2. We’re trying to decide what to do today?
3. What do you like to do?
4. I like to collec coins but he can’t stand doing it.
5. He likes to go playing bolleyball but I hate it.
6. So do I. Why don’t you look for an activity that you both like.
7. Why don’t you see a movie?
8. That’s perfect, seeing movies is my favorite hobby.
9. That’s mine too. But what kind of movie do we see?
10. A crime movie?
11. No, I don’t like. What about a western?
12. I love westerns, but today I wanna see something different.
13. What about a biopic, I’ve heard there’s one good now at the moviehouse.
14. Perfect! So let’s go.
259
Geround
To infinitive Gerund
Drink Drinking
Get Getting
Die Dying
The gerund is a verb form that is used:
1. to indicate that an action is in progress

I am drinking
Notice: gerunds can be used as adjectives.
2. We use the geround as noun.

Paiting is a relaxing activity.
3. After prepositions
I use the knife for cutting the meat
4. After the expressions hate and can’t help

I can’t help laughing at it
5. With just the verbs admit, appreciate, avoid, bother, consider, continue,
delay, deny, dislike, enjoy, finish, go (when we refer to activities), hate,
imagine, involve, keep, like, love, mind, miss, postpone, practise, prevent,
quit, resent, risk, save, spend, suggest and stop.
I can’t imagine being with you
260
Writing
Write an essay where you talk about the use of motorbikes in your city. (150
words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Does your city have problems of traffic? Why? Do you believe that in your city is
secure to drive? Why? Do you believe that there must be more sanctions to people
who do not respet the traffic regulations? Why? Do you believe that is a good idea
that there is more bus lines in your city? Why?
261
Sixty third Lesson
At elementary school II
1. Ok, let’s continue, who can tell me how many participles do we have in
English?
2. Two, teacher.
3. What are they?
4. Past participle and present participle.
5. Right!
6. Who can tell me two examples of past participle?
7. Me, me.
8. Gabriel
9. Cleaned, died and canceled.
10. Very good, and of present participle?
11. Loving, dying, frying.
12. Correct!
13. When do we use the past participle?
14. Me, me, teacher.
15. Steve
16. With the perfect tense.
17. Correct, Steve
18. I have a question.
19. Tell me, Bill.
20. What are the perfect tenses?
21. Don’t worry Bill, we’re seeing them next month, now have a nice weekend
and don’t forget to do your homework!
262
Sexagesima tercera lección
En la primaria II
1. Ok, vamos a continuar, quien puede decirme cuantos participios tiene el

inglés?
2. Dos, maestro.
3. Cuales son?
4. Participio pasado y participio presente.
5. Correcto!
6. Quien puede decirme dos ejemplos de participio pasado?
7. Yo, yo
8. Tom.
9. Limpiado, muerto y cancelado.
10. Muy bien, y de participio presente?
11. Amado, muriendo, friendo.
12. Correct!
13. Cuando usamos el participio pasado?
14. Yo, yo, maestro.
15. Steve.
16. Con los tiempos perfectos.
17. Correcto, Steve!
18. Tengo una pregunta.
19. Dime, Gabriel.
20. Caules son los tiempos perfectos?
21. No te preocupoes por eso, los veremos la siguiente semana, que tengan un
buen fin de semana.
Reading
1. Where are they?

____________________________________________
2. What did the teacher answer them?
____________________________________________
3. Did all the students answer right?
____________________________________________
4. Whay did not the teacher answer his question?
____________________________________________
263
Past Participle
Infinitive Past participle

General rule Work Worked
Ending in -e Like Liked
Ending in -l Cancel Cancelled
Consontant vowel Drop Dropped
consonant
Consonant + y Fry Fried
Irregular past participle
Been Sido/estado Told Dicho

Done Hecho Drunk Bebido
Taken Tomado Slept Dormido
Seen Visto Read Leido
Had Tenido Got Obtenido
Gone Ido Found Encontrado
Made Hecho Felt Sentido
Bought Comprado Put Puesto
Written Escrito Spoken Hablado
Thought Pensado Begun Inicidado
Come Venido Broken Roto
Said Dicho Brought Traido
Known Conocido Been able to Podido
Eaten Comido Run Corrido
Given Dado Woken up Levando
264
Writing
Write an article for a linguistics magazine where you say what are the most
common errors that people of your city make when they speak. (150 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Is knowing the grammar of your mum tongue important when you wanna learn a
forenger language? Why? Is important to kwong the grammar terminology for a
person who studies by himself? Why? Is it important to preservate the native
languages of your country?
265
Nineth Unit
Vacations
266
 To talk about your vacations

 To use the phrasal verbs
Topics:
 Present continuous
 Stative verbs
 Past continuous
 Phrasal verbs
 Future continuous
 Relative pronouns II
 Connectors of addition and contrast
Listening tips
From this point, it is necessary that you listen B1 English recordings. You can buy
them in languages libraries or on internet. Be sure they are for the level B1 and
that they have the symbol CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS.
267
Fiftieth lesson
Old friends
1. Hi, John!
2. Hi, Daniela, how are you?
3. Good, what about you?
4. All right.
5. I hadn’t seen you since we won the regional soccer cup.
6. Yeah, there were good times.
7. Do you go on playing soccer?
8. No, I changed it for the uni. Now, I’m studying architecture. And what about
you?, do you go on playing soccer?
9. No, I’ve never liked it a lot, now I play basketball and baseball.
10. Do you work or study?
11. I work.
12. Where do you work?
13. I work in a German corporate as manager, but it won’t be long because I’m
moving out next week to the United States to come true my dream to open a
fish and chips restaurant.
14. I’m sure you can do it.
15. Me too, that’s getting late, we’d better go.
16. You’re right, I hope to see you soon.
17. Me too!
18. Send me off a postcard. Of the Big Ben.
19. I’ll do it.
268
Quincuagesima lección
Viejos amigos
1. Hola, John!
2. Hola, Daniela, como estás?
3. Muy bien, y tu?
4. Bien.
5. No te habia visto desde que ganamos la copa de soccer regional.
6. Sí, eran buenos tiempos.
7. Sigues jugando soccer?
8. No, lo cambie por la Universidad. Estoy estudiando arquitectura. Y tu?
sigues jugando?
9. No, nunca me gusto mucho, ahora juego basketball y baseball.
10. Estudias o trabajas?
11. TRabajo.
12. Donde trabajas?
13. Trabajo en una empresa alemana como gerente de negocios
internacionales, pero no será por mucho porque la siguiente semana me
voy a mudar a Estados Unidos para Volver realidad mi sueño de ser
maestro de surf.
14. Espero que puedas Volver realidad tu sueño.
15. Yo tambien, se esta haciendo tarde, será major que nos vayamos.
16. Tienes razón, espero verte pronto.
17. Yo también
18. Enviame una postal y un diente de tiburón.
19. Un diente de tiburón
20. Sí, hay muchos tiburones blanco en California.
Reading
1. When was the last time that they see each other?
____________________________________________
2. What does the man do?
____________________________________________
3. Will he working there for long?
____________________________________________
4. Why is he moving out to California?
____________________________________________
269
Present Continuous
I Am
You Are
He
She Is Eating
It
We
You are
They
We make the negative and interrogative form of the present continuous in the
same way we make it with the verb to be.
You are not eating
Are you eating?
We use the present continuous to talk about:
1. Actions that are happening in a specific moment in the present.

I’m drinking water (at this moment)
2. Temporal situations.
We are eating less while I find another work.
3. For things that are changing or developing while we speak.

The global warming is becoming a topic each time more important.
The scientists are discovering new species every year.
4. With the adverb of frequency to express anger or irritation.

He is always making me mad.
5. With fixed arrangements in the near future.

I’m traveling to Barcelona next week.
270
Writing
Imagina que eres su amiga. Escribe una postal para tu amigo preguntandole como
le va en Estados Unidos y que planes tiene usted para las vacaciones.
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Do you practice a sport? why do you practice it?
Is it a good idea to practice a sport? why?
Should the schools give more time to their students so that they practice a sport?
why?
271
Fifty first lesson
Planing a vacation
1. Dear parents,
We’ve had a great time here in LA, at the beginning, it was difficult to get
used to people, the costumes and the climate but we no longer miss badly
Mexico. Actually, your grandchildren are happy to be here and they look to
get on well with the American kids. Now, we’re thinking of going on vacation.
We wanna go sightseeing to Europe. We wanna visit Portugal, Spain,
France and if we haven’t run out of money, by then, Germany and Italy.
We’ve been saving up money by cutting down some expenses, so we think
we’ll have enough money for doing the trip. María told me to book a hotel
room but I told her it wouldn’t be a good idea because most of the time, we’ll
stop over on the road. Anyway, I hope there isn’t a lot of traffic because the
car broke down last week and we’re not sure if it’ll be able to support the
long journey.
2. I hope you can visit us soon,
3. Your son Miguel
272
Quincuagesima primera lección
Un largo viaje
1. Queridos padres,
2. Hemos estado bien aqui en Los Angeles, al principio fue dificil
acostumbrarnos a la gente, a las costumbres y al clima pero ya no
extrañamos México. De hecho, tus nietos parecen estar felices de estar
aqui y parece que se llevan bien con os niños britanicos. Ahora estamos
pensando en irnos de vacaciones. Que remos hacer un viaje por toda
Europa. Quremos visitar Portugal, España y Francia y si no nos hemos
acabado todo el dinero para entonces, Alemania e Italia.Hemos ahorrado
dinero reduciendo algunos gastos, asi que pensamos que tendremos
suficiente dinero para hacer el viaje. María me dijo que reservará un hotel
pero le dije que no era una buena idea ya que la mayor parte del tiempo
nos estaremos deteniendo en hoteles que encontremos en nuestro camino.
Como sea, espero que no haya mucho trafico porque el carro se
descompuso la semana pasada y no estamos seguros de que pueda
aguantar el largon viaje.
3. Espero que puedan visitarnos pronto,
4. Miguel
Reading
1. What countries will they visit if they have not spent all the money?
____________________________________________
2. How did they save money?
____________________________________________
3. Why did he tell his wife that it was not a good idea to book a hotel?
____________________________________________
4. Why are they not sure if the car will support the trip?
____________________________________________
273
Stative Verbs
Some verbs cannot be used in a progressive structure; these verbs ones are called
stative verbs.
Stative verbs are:
a. The verbs which express sense (see, hear, smell, taste, touch), except feel.
b. Verbs related with the mind (know, believe, understand, realise, remember,
forget)
c. Verbs which express feelings, emotions, likes and dislikes (like, love, hate,
enjoy, prefer, detest, desire)
d. Some other verbs (be, contain, include, belong, fit, need, matter, cost, own,
want, own, weight, wish, have and keep)
Verbs which have a progressive form which change in the meaning
Simple form Continuous form

Think Creer Thinking Pensar
Have Posesion Having Tener
See Ver Seeing Verse con
alguien
274
Writing
Write a letter to a friend where you tell to him what your plans for the next
vacations are. (150 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What country would you like to visit?, Why? What mean of transport do you prefer
to travel, the car or the airplane? Why? Is it secure to travel in your cointry? Why?
Where do you like travelling? Why?
275
Fifty third lesson
Getting away
1. Hi, how are you guys?

2. Great, what about you?
3. Well. What are you guys gonna do when the semester breaks up?
4. I don’t know, I think I’ll stay in or maybe I’ll get away with my parents.
5. I’m gonna Philadelphia to drop in on Sally. Do you wanna come?
6. When are you gonna drop in on Sally?
7. Next week.
8. I can’t. I’m gonna my aunt’s wedding. Haven’t you got a costume that lend
me, I gotta dress up, by any change?
9. No, I haven’t. And You Tom, do you like to come?
10. Yeah. Anyway, I didn’t feel like being home.
11. Why not?
12. My mom punished me for turning up the radio to the maximum volume while
she had an online lesson.
13. Well, who else do we invite?
14. How about Mike?
15. No, he’s working at the present and his day-off is on Monday.
16. Well, I guess we’ll be only we two. What do we take to eat?
17. I’ll take a roast chicken, bangers and potatos.
18. Ok, I’ll take some beers and some crisps.
19. Perfect. I gotta go, if anyone changes his mind, give me a ring.
276
Quincuagesima tercera lección
Ir de vacaciones
1. Hola, como están?

2. Bien, y tu?
3. Bien. Que van a hacer cuando termine el semester?
4. No se. yo creo que estar en casa o ir de vacaciones con mis papas.
5. Voy a visitor a Sally en Philadelphia. Quieren ir?
6. CUando vas a visitarla?
7. La siguiente semana.
8. No puedo. Voy a ir a la boda de una tia. No tienen un traje que me presten
porque tengo que ir de gala.
9. No. Y tu Tom, quieres ir?
10. Sí, como sea, no tengo ganas de estar en mi casa.
11. Porque no?
12. Mi mamá me castigo por por subirle al radio a todo volume cuando estaba
en una clase virtual.
13. Bueno, a quien más invitamos.
14. A Mike?
15. No, esta trabajo y su dia libre es el lunes. Bueno, creo que seremos solo
nosotros dos. Que llevamos para comer?
16. Yo llevaré un pollo rostizado, salchichas y papas.
17. Yo llevaré la cerveza y las papas.
18. Perfdcto. Me tengk que ir. Si alguien cambia de opinion, llamenme.
Reading
1. Why did he go to France?

____________________________________________
2. Why wa he ashamed?
____________________________________________
3. Why was he embarrased?
____________________________________________
4. What did they do at the end?
____________________________________________
277
Phrasal verbs
A phrasal verb is a verb to which a preposition has been added to change its
meaning.
Come Venir
Come back Regresar
Come up Acercarse
Come around Volver a casa
Most of the phrasal verbs are informal.
I improve my habilities. (formal)
I pick up my habilities (informal)
End up, come in, wake up, get up, and find out are exeptions.
There are phrasal verbs that requires to put the object obliatory in the meiddle.
Three-part phrasal verbs never split.
278
Writing
Rewrite the text by using formal language. (150 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Do you believe in the love at first sight? Why?, Do you believe in the eternal love?
Why?, Have you ever had a uncommon relationship style? Why? Do you agree
someone can get married with two people?
279
Fifty second lesson
A frightening moment
1. It had happened weird things to me, but the weirdest of them happened a
snowy day of winter.
2. I was going back to the airport because I’d forgotten to pick up a packet that
my boss had sent off me when I saw a young woman walking along the
road.
3. As I was afraid of the poor woman was very cold, I decided to do a U-turn
and help the poor young woman. I came up her slowly and I pulled up the
car next to her, when I did it, she looked up, her face was covered by a
hood. I asked her if she needed some help, and she told me if I could give
her a ride to the city. I said yes to her and she got on.
4. After having pick up the package, we went on our way to the city. On the
way, I asked her if she wanted to call up someone but she said no. As I felt
a bit of fear, I turned on the radio but she told me immediately to turn it off.
5. When we were about to get to the city, the young woman suddenly
dissapeared. When I got to a gas station, I said what had happened to a
man that was there and he told me that that’s been a woman’s ghost that
had died in the road 20 years ago.
280
Quincuagesima segunda lección
Una momento horripilante
1. Me han pasado cosas raras, pero la cosa más rara ocurrio una noche
obscura de invierno.
2. Estaba regresando del aeropuerto porque habia olvidado recoger un
paquete que mi jefe me habia enviado cuando vi a una joven caminando en
el camino.
3. Temiendo que la pobre mujer tuviera frio, decidi hacer una Vuelta en U e ir
hacia la pobre chica. Me acerque lentamente y estacione el carro junto a
ella, cuando lo hice, subio su cara, su cara estaba cubierta por una
capucha. Le pregnte si necesitaba ayuda, y ella me diko si podia darle un
aventon a la ciudad. Le dije que si y se subio al carro.
4. Despues de recoger el paquete, Continuamos nuestro camino a la ciudad.
En el camino, le pregunté si queria llamar a alguien pero dijo que no.
Sintiendo un poco dermiedo, prendi la radio pero ella me dijo
inmediatamente que la apagara.
5. Cuando estabamos a punto de llegar a la ciudad la juven subitamente
desaparecio. Cuando llegué a una gasolinera, le conte a un señor que
estaba ahí lo que habia ocurrido. Él me dijo que ese era el fantasma de una
mujer que habia muerto en la carretera hace 20 años.
Reading
1. Why did he go to the airport?

____________________________________________
2. Why did he do a U-turn?
____________________________________________
3. What did he stop again?
____________________________________________
4. Who did he told what had happened?
____________________________________________
281
Past Continuous
I Was
You Were
He Eating
She Was
It
We
You were
They
We make the negative and interrogative form of the present continuous in the
same way we make it with the verb to be.
You were not eating
Were you eating?
Usage
We use the past continuous:
a. To talk about actions in the past in progress at the same moment

I was watching the T.V. while she was cooking.
b. to talk about things which were happening when we talk about a story.
It was raining, so I decided to take the bus.
In all the other cases, we use the past continuous in the same way than in
Spanish.
282
Writing
Escribe la historia más aterradora que hayas vivido. (150 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Do you believe in ghosts? Why?
283
Fifty forth lesson
On the road
1. Don’t worry dear, by this time tomorrow we’ll be lying down on a beautiful
sandy beach.
2. Yeah, I know, but the simple idea of being about 10000 meters over sea
level scares me.
3. I know dear, but you’ll see you’ll feel better as soon as the airplane has
taken off, try to calm down.
4. I believe you’re right
On the airplane
5. Are you continue feeling fear?

6. Not really, I believe the fear wore off after I took that Tequila.
7. I told you it was gonna help you.
8. Dear, what time have we got to check in?
9. At 3.
10. And the check out?
11. On Sunday at 11.
12. Did your friend book into the resort I’d told you?
13. Yeah, try to calm down, we’re about to land.
On land
1. At last, we’re here. What should we do now?

2. First, finding my boddy Carlos and after that I come up with we can go to the
downtown.
3. Ok!
4. So let’s to find my friend.
284
Quinquagesima cuarta lección
En el avión
1. No te preocupes querida, a esta hora mañana, estaremos acostados en la

hermosa y arenosa playa.
2. Lo se, pero me la idea de estar a 10000 metros sobre el nivel del mar me
asusta.
3. Lo se querida, pero ya verás que te sentiras major en cuanto el avión haya
despegado, solo trata de calmarte.
4. Tienes razon.
En el avion
5. Te segues sintiendo miedo?

6. No, creo que el miedo se me quito despúes de que me tome ese Tequila.
7. Te dije que te iba a ayudar.
8. Querida, a que hora temenos que registrar la entrada?
9. A la 1
10. Y a que hora temenos que registrar la salida?
11. El domingo a la 1.
12. Tu amigo reservo el hotel que te dije?
13. Sí, trata de calmarte, estamos a punto de aterrizar.
En tierra
1. Al fin estamos aqui. Ahora que hacemos?

2. Primero, encontrar a mi amigo Carlos. Luego, se me ocurre que podemos ir
al centro.
3. Ok!
4. Entknces, vamos a buscar a mi amigo.
285
Future Continuous
I
You
He
She Will be Eating
It
We
You
They
We make the negative and interrogative form of the future continuous in the same
way we do it in the future simple.
You will not be eating
Will you be eating?
We use the future continuous to talk about an action that will be in progress in the
future.
At this time tomorrow, we’ll be lying down on the beach.
Reading
1. Why is she scared?

____________________________________________
2. What did he tell her when she told him that she was scared?
____________________________________________
3. What did she do to not to be scared?
____________________________________________
4. What’s she happy?
____________________________________________
286
Writing
Write a similar story. Try to use as many indefinite pronouns as possible. (150
palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Do you like travelling by airplane? Why? What do you think is more secure,
travelling by car or by airplane? Why?
287
Fifty fifth lesson
On vacation
1. Morning, Carlos.
2. Morning, Simon, I haven’t seen you for a while.
3. Yeah, since I move out to the United States.
4. Yeah, and who’s the good-looking girl that is next to you?
5. Oh I’m sorry. Carlos, this is my wife Ann.
6. Nice to meet you!
7. Likewise.
8. Have you taken your baggage yet?
9. Yeah.
10. So, let’s go.
11. I’m sorry for being late, the plane fell behind because there was a
snowstorm.
12. It always happens at this part of the year. And what would you like to do?
13. We wanna go to the downtown, do you believe there are a lot of people?
14. I drove there this morning and it was crowed.
15. I see, Carlos, do you know a place to eat, we’re starving.
16. If you want, I can take you to the place where my wife and me eat. Do you
like Gorditas?
17. Are you joking?, that’s the reason that we’re here.
288
Quinquagesima quinta lección
De vacaciones
1. Hola, Carlos.
2. Hola, Simon, cuanto tiempo sin vernos.
3. Sí, desde que regresa a Inglaterra.
4. Sí, y quien esta hermosa joven que esta junto a ti?
5. Perdon! Carlos, ella es mi esposa Ann.
6. Gusto en conocerla!
7. Igualmente!
8. Ya agarraron su equipaje?
9. Sí
10. Entonces, vamonos.
11. Porque llegaron tarde?
12. Lo siento, nuestro avion se atrazo porque habia una fuerte tormenta de
nieve.
13. Sí, eso siempre pasa en esta parte del año.
14. Y que quieren hacer?
15. Queremos ir al centro a caminar, crees que haya mucha gente?
16. Pase en la mañana y estaba lleno.
17. Ya veo, carlos sabes a donde Podemos ir a comer, temenos mucha
hambre.
18. Sí quieres los puedo llevar a donde mi esposa y yo vamos.
19. Es una Buena idea.
20. Les gustan las Gorditas?
21. Bromeas, esa el la razon por la que estamo aqui.
Reading
1. What did he heard?

____________________________________________
2. How’s the downtown?
____________________________________________
3. Where are they going?
____________________________________________
4. Why are they in México?
____________________________________________
289
Relative pronouns II
Where Donde That is the house

where the girl I like
lives
Whose Cuyo (to indicate something or This is the man

someone belongs to someone) whose son is a
doctor
What Lo que That is what I was

thinking
Why Por la que (when we say the That was the reason
cause) why I was late
290
Writing
Reescribe el texto cambiando algunas cosas.
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
In what mean of transport do you like to travel the most? Why? What country would
you like to visit? Why? What do you take with you when you go on vacation? Why?
Do your prefer eating tradicional dishes or normal meal when you are on vacation?
Why?
291
Advanced technology
1. The computer will survive the smart age
2. This essay has been written in order to discuss about if computers will
survive to the existence of latest inventions as tablets and smartphones. It
considers the velocity in which these devices work and the quantity of RAM
memory that they can have.
3. In my opinion, computers will survivive to the existence of the smartphones
and tablets because they have more memory than these ones because their
hard-disk is much bigger than the internal memory that tablets and
smartphones have. Also, computers can be easily modify in order to raise
the space and RAM memory that they have, what it is very difficul to do with
nowadays notebooks and smartphones.
4. On the other hand, tablets, smartphones are becoming more and more
sofisticated and each time they have more internal memory and RAM
memory, what’s good because it let us have more files without being in front
of a screen.
5. In conclusion, I think that computers will be with us a long time because they
have more space than tablets and smartphones and because they can
become faster than these ones due to the capacity that computers have of
being modified easily , what’s very useful, mainly for persons and institutions
who requires to store and process a great quantity of data as gamers and
the army.
292
Tecnologia avanzada
1. Las computadoras sobrevivirán a la epoca inteligente
2. Este ensayo sido escrito para hablar sobre si las computadoras sobrevivirán
a la existencia de las nuevas invenciones como tabletas y telefonos
inteligentes. Este ensayo considera la velocidad en la cual estos
dispositivos trabajan y la cantidad de memoria ram qje estos puedan tener.
3. En mi opinion, las computadoras sobrevivirán a la existencia de los
telefonos inteligentes y las tabletas porque tienen mas memoria de
almacenamiento debido a que su disco duro tiene más espacio que la
memoria interna que las tablets y los telefonos inteligentes tienen. Tambien,
las computadoras pueden ser facilmente modificadas para aumentar el
espacio y la memoria ram que tienen lo cual es muy dificil de hacer con las
tablets y telefonos inteligentes de estos dias.
4. Por otro lado, las tablets y los telefonos inteligentes se estan volviendo cada
vez más sofisticados y cada vez tienen más espacio de memoria y memoria
ram lo cual es bueno porque nos permite disponer de más archivos sin
tener que estar en frente de una pantalla.
5. On the other hand, tablets, smartphones are becoming more and more
sofisticated and each time they have more internal memory and RAM
memory. What’s good because it let us carry out with more files withoout
being in front of a screen.
6. En conclusión, pienso que las computadoras estarán con nosotros un largo
tiempo debido a que tienen más capacidad de almacenamiento que las
tabletas y los telefonos inteligentes y a que pueden ser más rapidas que
estos debido a la capacidad que tienen las computadoras de ser facilmente
modificadas, lo cual es muy util, sobre todo para las personas que
necesitan almacenar y procesar una gran cantidad de datos como las
personas que juegan videojuegos y el ejercito.
293
Connectors of addition and contrast
Tough (informal) Aunque

Although (neutro)
Even tough (formal)
Even when Aun cuando
But Sino
However Sin embargo
Even so No obstante
To the contrary Al contrario
On the contrary
To the contrary Por el contrario
On the contrary
In spite of A pesar de
Despite
Even though Si bien
Despite that Con todo y eso
More like Mas bien
Rather (formal)
Instead En cambio
However Ahora bien
Regardless De todas maneras
Anyway De todas formas
In any case De cualquier forma
Neither Tampoco
Nevertheless Aun asi
On the other hand Por otro lado
In addition Ademas
Yet
In addition to Ademas (de)
As well as
Besides
Even Incluso
Equally Igualmente
By the same token
(formal)
Furthermore Es mas
What’s more
Therefore Por lo tanto
Whereas Mientras que
No matter how No importa como
Regardless Sin considerar
Or Ni
In all En conclusion
294
More importantly Otro elemnto importante
Writing
Escriba un articulo para tu periodico escolar donde digas que piensas del cambo
climatico. (100 palabras)
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What can you do for making a greener planet?, do you use reneable energies?,
what reneable energies do you use? Does your city do something against the
global warming?
295
Tenth Unit
The world
296
 To talk about the places you have visited

 To talk about your work experience
 to talk about what you wanna do before dying
 to use the correct form of the past tenses
Topics:
 Present perfect
 Already, yet, ever, never, since, for
 Past perfect
 Slang
 Future perfect
 Relative pronouns III
 Other comparative structures
297
Sixty forth lesson
A job interview
1. Hello, could I speak to William Gupta?

2. This is William Gupta speaking. Who is this?
3. My name’s James Mathew, I’m human resources manager at Travel &
linguas. I’d like you to come to an interview with our company.
4. When would you like to come?
5. As soon as possible.
Next day Bill goes to the interview
6. Tell me, mister Gupta, where do you live?

7. I live here in Los Angeles.
8. Are you single or married?
9. Single, but I’m in a relationship.
10. Where did you studied?
11. I studied at Massachussets Technologic. I graduated in administration.
12. Have you ever worked in the touristy field?
13. Yes, I worked for 6 years in a company which made tours in the Riviera
Maya, I was responsable of several resorts in Playa del Carmen and me
worked as tour guide for a short time in a travel agency in La Paz.
14. How much do you earn there?
15. They pay me 700 dollars per month. But after a small accident, they only
paid me 200 dollars.
16. Ok, thank you. I believe I’ve heard everything I need. If that’s necessay,
we’ll make contact with you.
298
Sexagesima cuarta lección
Una entrevista de trabajo
1. Bueno, me comunica con William Gupta?

2. Soy William Gupta, quien es?
3. Me llamo James Mathew, soy el encargado de recursos humanos de Travel
& linguas. Me gustaria que viniera a una entrevista a nuestra empresa.
4. Cuando le gustaria venir?
5. Tan pronto como sea possible.
Al siguiente dia Bill va a una entrevista
6. DIgame, señor Gupta, donde vive?

7. Vivo aqui en Los Angeles.
8. Es soltero o casado?
9. Soltero, pero estoy en una relación.
10. Donde estudio?
11. Estudie en Cambridge. Estudie administración.
12. Alguna vez ha trabajado en el sector turistico?
13. Si, trabaje 6 años en una empresa que hacia tours en la riviera Maya, fui
responsable de varios resorts en Playa del Carmen y trabajé como guia
turistico por un corto tiempo en una agencia de viajes en La Paz.
14. Cuanto ganaba ahi?
15. Me pagaban 700 libras al mes.
16. Ok, gracias. Yo creo que he escuchado todo lo que necesito. Si es
necesario, nos contactaremos con usted.
299
Present Perfect
Personal pronoun Have/has Past participle

I Have
You Have
He
She Has Eaten
It
We
You have
They
We make the negative form of the present perfect with have not/ haven’t
I have not/haven’t seen the movie
We make the interrogative form by inverted the have/has.
Have you been to Cancún?
Usage
We use the present perfect in the same way tan in Spanish, but there are some
cases that change. These cases are:
1. Past actions when we specified the exactly time.

I have gone to see the Doctor (when we do not know)
2. Things or situations that we can still do.

I have not gone to school (Maybe I can tak still one class)
3. When we talk about actions which passed in the past but whose result is still
visible in the present.
I have broken my arm (I fell in the past and broke my arm, my arm
continuous broken)
300
Writing
Escriba una carta a una empresa donde te gustaria trabajar donde digas tu
experiencia laboral. (150 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
How’s your ideal job?
Where would you like to work?
Where have you worked?
Do you prefer a part-time or full time job?
Do you prefer working in the morning or at night?
301
Sixty fifth lesson
A wild trip
1. Lenny, you’ve already been to England, right?

2. No, I’ve never been to that such as horrible place.
3. Lenny!
4. I’m sorry, but I don’t get on well with Brits.
5. Well, if you could travel, where would you like to go?
6. I’d like to go to Yucatan.
7. Why?
8. Because I’ve always liked the hot climate, last year, for example, I flew to
Brazil and me liked it a lot.
9. This year Ann and me are going backpacking there, what recommendations
would you give to us?
10. You definitely must take a pair of sunglasses and sun cream.
11. Should we take plenty of water?
12. Yeah, because that’s boiling hot. If you wanna walk in the rainforest, I
recommend you take an insect repellent and a compass case you get lost.
13. Is it all?
14. Yeah, the Amazon got plenty of dangerous animals, so I recommend you
take binoculars to see them from far.
15. Thanks for your recommendations Lenny.
16. You’re welcome.
302
Sexagesima quinta lección
Un viaje salvaje
1. Lenny, tú ya has estado en Estados Unidos, no?

2. No, nunca he estado en tan horrible lugar.
3. Lenny!
4. Lo siento, pero no me llevo bien con los estadunidenses, son gordos,
stupidos y presumidos.
5. Entonces, a donde te gustaria ir?
6. Me gustaria ir a Yucatan.
7. Porque?
8. Porque siempre me ha gustado el clima caliente, el año pasado, por
ejemplo, me fui de mochilero a Brasil y me gusto mucho.
9. Este año Ann y yo vamos a ir alla, que recomendaciones nos darias?
10. Deben llevar unos lentes de sol y creama solar.
11. Debemos llevar mucha agua?
12. Si´, porque hace mucho calor.
13. Si quieres caminar en la selva, les recomiendo que lleven repelente de
insectos y un compass en caso de que se pierdan.
14. Es todo?
15. Sí, el amazonas tiene muchos animales peligrosos, entonces les
recomiendo que lleven binoculars para verlos desde lejos.
16. Gracias por tus recomendaciones Lenny.
17. De nada, y saludenme a los canibales.
303
Writing
Escriba una carta a un amigo donde le digas cuales han sido las mejores
vacaciones que has tenido dandole detalles (alojamiento, actividades que
realizaste, comida, etc. (150 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
What has been the best place that you have visited? how long where you there?
What did you do there?
Where did you stay?
How was the climate?
Would you recommend that place?
304
Sixty-sixth lesson
Friendship
1. Grandpa, tell us again the story about how you met the grandma.
2. Ha, ha, It was a funny story that started 50 years ago.
3. I’d just been 24 years and me wanted to know another place, so I made
some applications for schoolarship. As I’d studied portuguese at high
school, I sent my applications to Brazil and soon I found myself walking
throught Rio’s streets.
4. One day, while I was at Ipanema neighborhood, I ran into, by hasard, my old
friend from school, Haide. I hadn’t seen her since I came back to The United
States. We talked about what we’d done in those years. When I asked her
why she’d gone to Rio, she told me that she did it because she was
following her love. I smiled to know that my old friend was still as I
remember her.
5. As it was getting dark, and she had still classes, I offered to go with her. She
acepted and we went to her classroom.
6. Grandpa, go to the most important thing!
7. Ok, I met your grandma because a jelly.
8. A jelly?
9. Yeah, a jelly that her grandma had given to me to save it while she was at
her class and that I’d already eaten before she went in to the classroom.
305
Sexagesima sexta lección
Amistad
1. Abuelo, cuentanos otra vez la historia de como conociste a la abuela.

2. Ja, ja. Es una historia divertida que comenzó hace 40 años.
3. Acababa de cumplir 24 y queria conocer otro lugar porque ya habia
conocido todos los rincones de Inglaterra, entonces hice una solicitud para
estudiar en el extranjero. En ese tiempo, habian becas para estudiar en
Brasil y como habai estudiado portugués en la escuela, envié mi solicitud y
en menos de lo que canta un gallo estaba caminando en las calles de Rio.
4. Un dia, mientras estaba en la colonia Ipanema, me encontre de casualidad
a mi amiga de la preparatoria, Haide. No la habia visto desde que me fui de
México. Estuvimos hablando de lo que habiamos hecho en esos años. Me
dijó que habia viajado a lo largo del mundo probando todo tipo de comida y
conociendo nuevas personas. Cuando le pregunte porque habia ido a Rio,
me dijo que lo habia hecho porque estaba siguiendo a su “love”. Sonrei al
saber que mi vieja amiga continuaba siendo como la recordaba.
5. Como era tarde y ella tenia clases, me ofreci a acampañarla a la
universidad donde ella estudiaba. Ella aceptó y fuimos a su salón.
6. Abuelo ve a lo importante.
7. Correcto, conoci a su abuela por una gelatina.
8. Una gelatina?
9. Sí, una gelatina que su mamá me habia dado para que la cuidadá porque
su professor no dejaba entrar con comida al salón y que yo ya me habia
comido antes de que entrara a su salón
306
Pretérito mais-que-perfeito Composto
O Pretérito Mais-que-perfeito composto forma-se com o auxiliar ter pretérito

imperfeito mais um particípio passado.
Pronome Ter -ar -er

Pessoal
No pretérito -ir
imperfeito
Eu Tinha
Tu Tinhas
Você, Ele, Ela. Tinha Amado Corrido
Nós Tínhamos Partido
Vocês, Eles, Elas Tinham
Usos:
Usa-se para falar duma ação no passado que aconteceu antes de outra ação no
passado.
O moviee já tinha empeçado quando eles chegaram.
307
Writing
Dejando solo los numeros 1 y 2. Reescriba el texto anterior cambiando la historia.

(150 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
What had you done before being 20 years?
Had you participated in any competition?
Had you been abroad?
What places of your country had you visited?
Where had you learnt English?
308
Eighty forth lesson
Gengers of music
1. Hi, Michael, what are you doing?

2. I’m playing Real Kings’s remastered album.
3. What album is it?
4. Things 'bout you.
5. Play it!
6. "I knows you already know this, but I wanna tell you that I've fallen in love
with you since the first time I see you, I've fallen in love with you since the
first the moment we talked, laughted and played.
I tell you this 'cause you and me will be one and there won't be nothing we
can't do together. There's lots and lots of things to do, there's lots and lots of
places to visit and I'm pleaseda be abla do this with you"
7. It sounds great.
8. Yeah, that’s one of his greatest hits.
9. Just play the next song.
10. Hi, my girl, I gotta tell you if you go away, I won't be blue, I'll be down 'cause
I love you and me don't wanna lose you ‘cause I can’t do without you. I know
I never did the things in the right way, but I know that with you to my side, I
can pick up and doin' this, we’re gonna be ok.
11. What other songs does the album have?
She done things I never expected
I ain't not him
I got no one
She don’t love as you
12. All those titles sounds good. I’ll buy the album tomorrow.
13. There isn’t left on sale, they sold out.
14. Well, it’ll be in another time.
309
One hundred and fourteenth lesson
Gengeros musicales
1. Hola, Michael, que estás haciendo?

2. Estaba a punto de poner el nuevo album que acabo de comprar.
3. Que algum es?
4. Cosas de tí
5. Ponlo!
6. Se que ya sabes esto, pero quiero decirte que me enamore de ti desde el
primer momento en que te vi, me enamoré de tí desde el momento en que
hablamos, reimos y jugamos.
Te digo esto porque tu y yo seremos uno y no habra nada que no podamos
hacer juntos. Hay muchas y muchas cosas que hacer, hay muchos y
muchos lugares que visitar y estoy feliz de hacerlo contigo”
7. Suena muy bien!
8. Pon la siguiente canción.
9. Hola, mi chica, tengo que confesarte que si tu te marchas, no estaré triste,
estaré deprimido porque no te quiero y no quiero perderte. Se que no hice
las cosas bien, pero se que contigo, puedo mejorar y haciendo esto, las
cosas van a estar bien.
10. Que otras canciones tiene el album?
11. Ella hizo cosas que no esperaba
Cantando una canción de amor
No tengo a nadie
No ama como tú
12. Todos esos titulos suenan bien. Voy a comprar el disco mañana.
13. Se acabaron.
14. Se acabaron!
15. Sí, fue porque este es una edición especial, tiene 3 canciones secretas.
16. Mm! Bueno, será en otra ocación
17. Hablando de canciones. Que canción vas a tocar para el concierto?
18. No se.
19. Porque no cantas “No soy nada sin mi guitarra”
20. La canté el año pasado. Creo que este año cantaré covers.
21. Es una buena idea.
310
Writing
Escriba en lenguaje informal los estractos de canción que aparecen en la lección.
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
What slang words had you known yet?
Why do you think that is important learning slang?
Where do you think that you’ll find the slang?
What slang words are there in your mum tonge?
What do they mean?
311
Sixty nineth lesson
Natural disasters
1. What’s wrong, darling?

2. Nothing, that’s just I feel scared about hurricanes.
3. Don’t worry, love, by the time we get there, the hurricane season will have
already finished.
4. You’re right, but what if there’s an earthquake.
5. Don’t worry love, there aren’t earthquakes in Hawaii.
6. But I’ve heard there has been a Tsunami recently.
7. Darling, it was in Asia, and it was only a minor flood. You shouldn't worry
about it.
8. Yeah, you’re right. I just muss sit and smell the flowers.
9. Yeah, above all, because when we get there, there will be a volcanic
eruption.
10. That’s not funny.
11. I’m kidding, just calm down, we’re about to land.
On the news
12. Good afternoon everyone, this is James Harrison, and this is today’s news.
13. This morning a lorry didn’t respect a red light causing a crash in Palmer
Avenue.
14. Talking about crashes, in Russia, 300 persons were killed after their
airplane suffered engine failure.
15. Across of Atlantic, in Florida, there was a shoot-out in a mall. After a long
time the shooter was arrested and interrogated by the police.
16. Those are all today’s news. See you tomorrow.
312
Sexagesima novena lección
Desastres naturales
1. Que pasa querida?

2. Nada, solo que estoy asustada por los huracanes.
3. No te preocupes, amor, para cuando lleguemos alla, la temporada de
huracanes ya habrá terinado.
4. Tienes razón, pero y si hay un terremoto.
5. No te preocupes, amor, no hay terremotos en Hawaii.
6. Pero escuche que ha habido un Tsunami recientemente.
7. Querida, eso fue en Asia, y fue una pequeña inundación. No te preocupes
por eso.
8. Creo que tienes razón. No deberia preocuparme por nada.
9. Sí, tienes toda la razón. Solo debo sentarme y relajarme.
10. Sí, sobre todo, porque cuando lleguemos, habrá una erupción volcanica.
11. No es divertido.
12. Estoy bromenado, solo relajate, estamos a punto de aterrizar.
En las noticias
13. Buenas noches a todos, mi nombre es James Harrison, y estas son las
noticias de hoy.
14. Esta mañana un camión se paso un alto en la Avenida Palmer causando un
choque.
15. Hablando de choques, en Rusia, 300 personas murieron despúes de que el
avion donde viajaban tuviera una falla en el motor.
16. Del otro lado del Atlantico, en Florida,hubo un tiroteo en un centro
commercial, el tiraddor fue arrestado e interrogado por la policia.
17. Esas son todas las noticias de hoy, buenas noches.
313
Future Perfect
I Called
You Thought
He Come
She Will have Aten
It Gone
We Slept
You Studied
They Bought
Usage
We use always the future perfect to talk about a future action that will happen
before other future action.
I’ll have finished the homework before Monday.
314
Writing
Escriba una carta a un amigo donde le digas que piensas que habrás hecho antes
de cumplir 30 años. (150 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
What have you done before being 30?
What will you have done before dying?
What countries will you have visited by 2040?
What will you have done by next week?
What things will you have done by tonight?
315
Sixty eighth lesson
Resumés
Arizona State University 28 August 2022

Foreing language department
Phoenex
Dear Sir or Madam,

1. I am writing in response to your recent advertisement for a Spanish
professor.
2. After graduating in foreign languages from the Nacional Autonomus
University of México two years ago, I worked as Spanish, English, French
and Italian teacher at Superteacher where I could positionate as the best
languages teacher in Los Angeles having until 10 new clients per week and
having in consecuence an incoming up 2600 dollars per month. Then, I
worked as freelance giving counsel to universities and developping
curriculums for the Bachelors of Languages and for Master of Translation.
3. I am a methodic person, focused in results and compromised with the
education and the learning process. Despite being a person to whom likes
working by himself, I get on well with people and me have exellent
teamwork skills.
Therefore, I consider myself as a good element for you and your institution.
4. Thank you for your time,
Yours faithfully, .
Miguel Martinez
5. P.S.: I enclosed a copy of my resumé.
316
Sexagesima octava
Curriculum vitae
Universidad de Cambridge 28 de Febrero de 2022

Departamento de lenguas extranjeras
Cambridge
A quien corresponda,
1. Escribo esta carta con motivo de su reciente anuncio de profesor de
español.
2. Después de graduarme en enseñanza de lenguas extranjeras de la
Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México hace dos años, trabajé como
profesor de español, inglés, francés e Italiano en Supertecher donde
pude posicionarme como una de los mejores profesores de lenguas en
Los Angeles teniendo hasta diez nuevos clientes por mes teniendo por
consiguiente un ingreso de 2600 libras sl mes. Luego trabaje como
trabajador independiente ayudando a universidades dando asesorías y
desarrolando planes de wstudio para la licenciatura en idiomas y para la
maestria en treaducción.
3. Soy una persona metódica, encofada a resultados y comprometida con
la enseñanza y el proceso de aprendizaje. A pesar de ser una persona a
la cual le gusta trabajar independiente, me llevo bien con la gente y
tengo exelentes habilidades de trabajo en equipo.
4. Por tanto, me cosidero un buen elemento para su institución.
Gracias por su tiempo.
Sinceramente suyo,
Miguel Martinez
5. Post data: Le anexo una copia de mi curriculum
317
Writing
Escriba una carta como la que aparece en la lección anterior. (150 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Where did you study? Do you have a university degree, master degree or
doctorate?
Where have you worked and how many years of experience do you have?
What skills do you have?
What can you tell me about yourself?
What are your plans for the future?
318
Forty lesson
A beautiful city
1. The more the time advance, the more we can see the effects caused by the
overpopulation.
2. Let’s to interview the specialist in environment Melanie Mateo.
3. Thank you, nowadays the overpopulation is one of the main problems in the
big cities and Los Angeles isn’t an exception.
4. Melanie, could you tell us what some of the problems that the
overpopulation causes are?
5. Of course! The main problems that overpopulation causes are the pollution,
the lack of resources and transport.
6. Melanie, could you tell us more about one of these problems that affect so
much to us?
7. Of course, we take the problem of the transport. Because of the traffic in the
city, we have reach the point where in some parts of the city at the rush
hour, you can arrive faster at your job by walking than driving.
8. Talking about the transport, that’s true that we count with several means of
transport such as the subway, the buses and the train in the city. However,
these are easily exceed because of there are more and more persons who
used them as an alternative to avoid the traffic jams.
9. In all, there’s still much to do in main of overpopulation
319
Cuadragesima segunda lección
Una hermosa ciudad
1. Entre más avanza el tiempo, más podemos ver los efectos causados por la
sobrepoblación.
2. Vamos a entrevistar a la especialista en medio ambiente, Melanie Mateo.
3. Muchas gracias, en estos dias la sobreoblación es uno de los proncipales
problemas en las grandes ciudades y Los Angeles no es la exepción.
4. Melanie, podrias decirnos cuales son algunos problemas que caisa la
sobrepoblacion?
5. Los principals problemas que la sobrepoblación causa es la contaminacion,
la falta de recursos y de transporte.
6. Melanie, puedes decirnos más sobre uno de estos problemas que afecta
tanto a los Londinenses?
7. Por supuesto, tomemos el problema de el transporte.
8. Debido al ttrafico y los embotellamientos, hemos llegado al punto donde en
algunas partes de la ciudad a la hora pico puedes llegar más rapido a tu
trabajo caminando que conduciendo.
9. Hablando del transporte, es verdad que contamos en la ciudad con varios
medios de transporte como el metro, los camiones y el tren. Sin embargo,
estos son facilmente exedidos por la enorme cantidad depersonas que los
usan cada dia.
10. En conclusion, todavia hay mucho que hacer en materia de sobrepoblación.
320
Proportional sentences
The more I learn, the less I know (entre mas aprendo, menos se)
321
Forty lesson
Asking for permision
1. Dad, can I go camping this weekend?

2. Who are you going with?
3. With the friends I went out last month.
4. Oh, with the guys you went to the moviehouse. Ok, you can go.
5. Do you need something?
6. I only need the tent, my sleeping bag and a piece of cord.
7. All that is in the garage. The piece of cord is next to the axe I cut the wood
with.
8. Thanks, dad.
9. And where are you camping to?
10. To the mountain.
11. And how long are you staying there?
12. Three days
13. The weather report that’s gonna rain a lot, you should take a raincoat an a
pair of boots.
14. OK, dad.
15. And what are you eating?
16. We’re gonna buy the meal in a takeaway which is in a campsite 10 minutes
driving from the place we’re staying.
17. Take 50 dollars, thanks dad, good night!
18. Good night!
322
Relative pronouns III
We use the preposition at the end of the relative sentence.
That is the woman (who/that) I saw him with.
This is the knife (which/that) I cutthe meat with.
The relative pronouns cannot be omitted when they are the subject of the relative
clause.
She showed me photos of the gorilas (which/that) she had studied.
She showed me photos of the gorilas which/that lived with.
323
Eleventh Unit
The city
324
* Prepositions of move outment

*Connectors of cause and effect
*Neither, either, both / Exclamations
*Slang II
*Would rather/would prefer
*Like, as / Modal verb might
*Other comparative structures
325
Forty ninth lesson
Childhood memories
1. I remember when I was a kid, I used to live in a small village by the sea.
2. I used to like to walk along the beach and sail in my boat. Once, I was on
my boat with my sister, I fell into the water. My sister laughted a lot.
3. In that time, there wasn’t a road, so we had to cross over an old bridge that
was outside of the village. I remember my friends and me used to like to go
there because we could fish and jumped into the water from it.
4. As I lived in a cliff, I used to like to look through the window how the ships
got to the port. I used to have a cat, I liked ‘er a lot, I can still remember how
she played onto my mom’s desk with its toy mouse. I found it very funny, but
my mom always told me to take the ‘er down.
5. There were good times.
326
Cuadragesima novena leccion
Recuerdos de la infancia
1. Recuerdo que cuando era niño, vivia en un pequeño pueblo junto al mar.
2. Me gustaba caminar por la playa y navegar en mi barco.
3. EN ese entonces, no habia camino, entonces tenias que cruzar un viejo
puente para salir del pueblo.
4. Me acuerdo que en ese entonces, no habia Carretera, asi que teniamos que
cruzar un viejo puente que estaba afuera del pueblo. Recuerdo que a mis
amigos y a mi nos gustaba ir allí a pescar y a saltar al agua.
5. Como vivia en un risco, me gustaba ver traves de la Ventana como los
barcos llegaban al Puerto.
6. Reecuerdo que tenia un gato, me gusta mucho, todavia puedo recordar
como le gustaba jugar en el escritorio de mi mamá con su ratón de juguete.
Se me hacia divertido pero mi mamá simpre me decia que lo bajara.
7. Eran buenos tiempos.
Reading
1. What happened when he was with her sister?

____________________________________________
2. What was not there?
____________________________________________
3. What did his friends and he do?
____________________________________________
4. What did he find funny?
____________________________________________
327
Prepositions of move outment
Into En
Onto En
Up Hacia arriva
Down Hacia abajo
Along A lo largo de
Through Atraves de
Toward Hacia
328
Writing
Escriba lo que hacias con tus amigos cuando ibas a la primaria. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Where did you live when you were a kid?, what did you do workdays? What did
you do on the weekend?, did you have pets?
329
A better city
1. Dear sir or madam,

2. I write this letter to you in order to inform you about the recent insecurity
problems that we have had in my neighborhood because of the lack of light.
3. A suggestion which I think so that resolve the problem is to put more
ilumination in the main streets and avenues with the purpose of there will be
fewer places where the criminals can act.
4. Another idea which could be useful would be sending 3 more patrols to the
zone, so the security raise and persons who live in the neigbourhood will
feel calmer.
5. All in all, there are solutions to resolve this problem and the sonner we take
action, he better the things are going to be for everyone. Thank you for your
time and me expect that you take these propouses in consideration,
6. David Smith
330
Connectors of cause and effect
To Para
In order to Para (formal)
So as to
In order not to Para no
So as not
So that Para + oracion
For Para (para que se usa algo)
In case + past tense Para que
Because of A causa de
In order to A fin de
So Así que
Even when Aun cuando
With the purpose of Con el fin de
On the occasion of Con motivo de
In case En caso de
In case En caso de que
Thanks to Gracias a
So Por lo tanto
Although Si bien
As a result (of) Como resultado (de)
Because of Por (debido a)
Consequently En consecuencia
331
That’s greek to me
10. Love, could you help me, I can’t start season.

11. That’s just enter your ID name and enter your keyword.
12. How intelligent you are!
13. C’mon, it was nothing.
14. Well, now I’ll be ble to look up the word that I can’t understand.
15. What diccionary do you use?
16. I use Cambridge’s e-diccionary.
17. Why don’t you just google it?
18. No.
19. Don’t you like it?
20. No, they both are good, but I prefer using Cambridge’s diccionary when I
look for the definition of a word.
21. Ok, have you hear the latest, Sahra is having a party next week in
Philadelphia.
22. What day?
23. I don’t know.
24. I hope that’s on Sunday, if not, none of us will be able to attend.
25. Anyway, neither you nor me has money to go.
26. You’re wrong. I got some money saved.
27. Ok, so, we expect we can go.
332
Cowboys v. Giants
1. Excuse me, sir, may I ask you a question?

2. Of course!
3. Do you agree with what they say about you’re a good fotball player?
4. Ma’am, I ain’t a good football player, I’m the best.
5. Do you think that you and your team are going to win the match?
6. We ain’t just gonna win the match. We’re gonna win the ligue.
7. What do you think about another team’s idea about your team doesn’t know
how to play?
8. What they know about being good at this game. Unfortunately, I never had
the opportunity to play against them last championship cause’ I was
recovering from a lesion but I’ve seen their captaina play and he play like a
newborn baby. So, I believe they should concentrate more in theirselves
instead of critizise other ones.
9. Do you believe this will be a great match?
10. I hope so, after all, there are lots of people what had attended looking
forwarda seeing a good game. Could you pass me them trainers?
11. Certainly! Another question.
12. I’m sorry, ma’am, but I gotta gama win.
333
Una entrevista
1. Disculpe, señor, puedo preguntarle algo?

2. Por supuesto!
3. Está de acuerdo con lo que dicen sobre que usted es un buen jugador de
soccer?
4. Señora, no soy un buen jugador de soccer, soy el mejor.
5. Cree que su equipo y usted van a ganar el partido?
6. No solo vamos a ganar el partido. Vamos a ganar la liga.
7. Que piensa de la declaracion del otro equipo sobre el hecho que no saben
jugar.
8. Que saben ellos de ser buenos en este juego. Desafortunadamente, no
tuve la oportunidad de jugar con ellos. El campeonato pasado, no pude
jugar porque me estaba recuperando de una lesion pero he visto a su
capitan jugar y juega como un bebe recien nacido. Entonces, creo que
deberian concentrarse más en ellos que incriticar a otros.
9. Cree que va a hacer un buen Partido?
10. Espero que si, despúes de todo, hay muchas personas que han venido
esperando ver un buen juego. Puede pasarme esos tenis?
11. Seguro! Otra pregunta.
12. Lo siento, señora, pero tengo un juego que ganar.
334
Standar form No-standard
Although Tough
Article [solo en la prensa] Story
A blue ship share A blue ship
Action Move out
Mad Annoyed
Anyone Anybody
Anyway Anyway
Around Round
Backside Bum [slang]
Baker’s Bakery
Bankruptcy Corporate failure
Beautiful Good-looking
Bookseller Book-seller
Bookstore Book store
Careless Absent-mind
Hire Rent
Movie Flick
Soccer Soccer
In the middle of Amid
Near (from) Close to
Happy Pleased
Noon Midday
Maybe (mas formal) Maybe
Pizza store Pizzeria
Production Output
Provided that As long as, so long as
Reputation Name
Soon Soon
Sound-bite Soundbite
Starving Dying of hungry
To be down in the dumps To be down in the mouth
To treat ____ with kid gloves To handle ____ with kid gloves
Turnover Sales
Lastly Finally
335
Seventy first lesson
A luxurious restaurant
1. Excuse me, could you bring us the menu, please!

2. Certainly! Here you are, ma’am.
3. What’s on the menu?
Seasoned baked lamb
Sweet and sour fried chicken
Juiced beef steak with boiled vegetables, and chilly grilled fish with salad.
4. Do you want the bittersweet chicken?
5. I’d rather eat something lighter.
6. Why won’t you have the fish.
7. No, I prefer meat to fish.
8. Can I take your order?
9. Yes, I’ll have the baked lamb.
10. And you, ma’am?
11. I’ll have the grilled fish.
12. Would you like something to drink?
14. Tonight, sir, we have wine, bear, juice, coke, mineral water, coffee and tea.
15. By hasard, do you have red wine?
16. I’m sorry sir, there isn’t red wine left, we only have white wine.
17. I’ll have the beer. And you, dear?
18. I’ll have a cup of white wine.
19. Later
20. I’m on the mood something sweet. Excuse me, waitress, do you have any
dessert?
21. We have only chocolate cake, will you have one?
22. No, I’d prefer not to have anything. Or well, I’ll have a cup of coffee!
23. Coming up!
336
Un restaurante de lujo
24. Disculpe, puede traernos el menu , por favor.

25. Si, aqui tiene, señorita.
26. Que hay en el menu?
27. Cordero al horno sasonado
28. Pollo frito agridulce
29. Jugoso bisteck con vegetales herbidos y pescado a la plancha chiloso con
ensalada.
30. Quieres el pollo agridulce?
31. Prefiero comer algo más ligero.
32. Porque no comes el pescado.
33. Jo, prefiero la carne al pescado.
34. Puedo tomar su orden?
35. Sí, quiero el cordero al horno.
36. Y usted, señorita?
37. Quiero el pescado a la plancha,
38. Quieren algo de beber?
39. QUe tienen?
40. Esta noche, señor, tenemos vino, cerveza, jugo, refresco, agua mineral,
cafe y te.
41. De casualidad, tendrá vino tinto?
42. Lo siento señor, ya no tenemos, solo tenemos vino blanco.
43. Quiero una cerveza, y tu querida?
44. Quiero una copa de vino blanco.
45. Mas tarde
46. Se me antoja algo dulce. Disculpe, mesera, tiene algun postre?

47. Tenemos solo pastel de chocolate, quiere uno?
48. No, prefiero que no me traiga nada. O bueno, traigame una taza de café.
49. Enseguida!
337
Sixty eighth lesson
Employment
1. There are several occupations in the United States.

2. You can be an engineer, a pilot or a farmer.
3. But all this depend on where you want to work. For example, if you want to
work in the health sector, you can work as nurse, psychologist, dentist or as
ambulance driver!
4. If you want to work in an office but you don’t want to work in a traditional
way, the jobs of graphic designer or architect would be a brilliant option for
you.
5. Some works such as accountant and economist require university
instruction, but other ones such as technician or flight attendant don’t need.
6. If you don’t want to work in an office, you can be a mason, carpenter or
even a firefighter.
7. You can work part-time or full time, in the private sector or in the public
sector, earning from the minimum wage until almost the President’s salary.
but remember, no matter where you want to work, don’t forget these simple
tips when you go to an interview:
8. Be early to your interview, better safe than sorry.
9. Review the contact details of your RESUMÉ.
10. Send a letter to interviewer saying how much you’re interested in the job.
11. If after following these simple tips, you don’t find a job, don’t worry, you can
always join to the thousands of unemployes that there are in the United
States.
338
Sexagesima octava lección
Empleo
1. Hay muchas ocupaciones en el Reino Unido.

2. Puedes ser doctor, abogado o ingeniero.
3. Pero todo depende de donde quieras trabajar. Por ejemplo, si tu quieres
trabajar en el sector salud, puedes trabajar como enfermera, psicologo,
dentista o como conductor de ambulancia!
4. Si tu quieres trabajar en una oficina pero no quieres trabajar dde una
manera tradicional, el trabjaao de diseñador grafico o arquitecto puede ser
Bueno para tí.
5. Alguos trabajos como el de Contador o economista requieren formación
universitaria, pero otros como el de tecnico o economista no.
6. Si no quieres trabajar en una oficina, puedes ser albañil, carpintero o
bomber.
7. Puedes trabajar medio tiempo o tiempo complete, en el sector privado o en
el sector publico, ganando desde el salario minimo hasta casi el salario del
primer Ministro, pero recuerda, no importa donde quieras trabajar, no
olvides estos simples consejos cuando vayas a una entrevista:
8. Lleguen temprano a la entrevista, major prevenir que lamenter.
9. Revisa tus datos de contacto en tu curriculum.
10. Envia una carta al entrevistador diciendo cuando te interesa el trabajo.
11. Si despúes de seguir estos simples consejos, no encuentras trabajo, no te
preocupes, siempre puees unirte aa los miles de desempelados que hay en
el Reino Unido.
339
Fifty sixth lesson
Neighbors
1. What do you think about the next door neighbors?

2. I think the Hensons are the simplest people I’ve ever known.
3. Yeah, and their son is the cleverest kid I’ve seen, he could resolve the
Rubik’s cube in just one minute!
4. Yeah, and their pup is the friendliest pup I’ve ever played with and meal
they’ve given us was the tastiest I’ve ever tried out.
5. By the way, where are they from?
6. Mistress Henson said she had grown up in Florida and Mister Henson is
from west coast.
7. We haven’t gone to Florida for a while. Why don’t we get away this
weekend?
8. That’s a great idea! On Friday is a holiday, it means that’s gonna be a long
weekend.
9. Perfect!
10. Are we driving or are we flying?
11. I’d prefer us to fly.
12. Ok! I’ll go to the travel agency to book the flights right now. Look, it kicks off
snowing.
13. Yeah, the weather forecast said it was gonna snow today.
14. I’ll have to go another day.
340
Quinquagesima sexta lección
Vecinos
1. Que piensas de los nuevos vecinos?

2. Pienso que los Hensons son las personas más simples que haya conocido.
3. Sí, y su hijo es el niño más listo que haya visto, él pudo resolver el cubo
Rubik en solo un minuto.
4. Sí, y su perro es el perro más amigable with el que haya jugado.
5. Sí, tienes razón y la comida que nos dieron ha sido la comids más rica que
haya probado.
6. Hablando de ellos, de donde son?
7. La señora Henson dijo que crecio en Florida y el señor Henson del norte.
8. No hemos ido a New York desde hace mucho, porque no vamos este fin de
semana?
9. Es una buena idea. El viernes es dia feriado, eso significa que será puente.
10. Perfecto!
11. NOs vamos en carro o en avión?
12. Prefiero irme en avión.
13. Ok. Voy a ir a la agencia de viajes para reservar los vuelos ahora mismo.
Mira, empezo a nevar.
14. Sí, el reporte del clima dijo que iba a nevar hoy.
15. Tendré que ir otro dia.
Reading
1. What does she think about the new neighbors?

____________________________________________
2. Why the neighbor’s kid is the clevest kid that he has seen?
____________________________________________
3. What does he think about the neighbor’s dog?
____________________________________________
4. Why would you like to go to the south?
____________________________________________
341
Other comparative structures
The adjectives clever, common, friendly, gentle, pleasant, polite, shallow, simple,
stupid and quiet have two comparative and superlative forms.
More simple = simpler
Most simple = simplest
We can use the expressions much with the comparative.
He’s richer than you
He’s much richer than you
Comparative and Comparative
The car is going faster and faster
342
Writing
Write an article the best place to where you’ve gone. (150 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Do you believe in ghosts? Why?
343
Twelfth Unit
Lifestye
344
 To speak about different topics
Topics:
 Present perfect continuous

 Order of the adjectives
 Past Continuous
 Plural of the comdollar nouns/ collective nous
 Future perfect continuous
 All, whole, every
 Past simple, used to and would
Listening tips
From this point, it is necessary that you listen B2 English recordings. You can buy
them in languages libraries or on internet. Be sure they are for the level B2 and
From this point is a good idea that you study the idioms list that is in the appendix
of this book.
For improve your reading, it is good idea you spend time only reading the lessons
of this book. If you want, you can buy a B2 literature book.
Warning
In some words we have put an apostrophe instead an “h” to indicate that the “h” is
not prononciated. This is common in the north of Britain.
345
Home, sweet home
1. Why so mad, David?

2. I’ve been looking for a place to live all the morning but I haven’t found one.
3. What are you looking for?
4. A spacious self-conteined ranch or a large furnished apartment, both with all
mod cons.
5. It sounds expensive. What if you move out to a apartment-share or a house-
share?
6. No, I don’t wanna live with other people.
7. Why not?
8. Because one ends up fighting with them.
9. You’re right. Why aren’t you look fo4 anything in small ads?
10. No, I’m sick and tired. I’ll do it tomorrow. Mm, That’s freezing.
11. Yeah, That’s been freezing all the week. Why don’t you turn on the heating?
12. It broke down last week and the technician hasn’t come to fix it.
13. What a pity! Why don’t we watch a flick?
14. You’re right, I’ve been working very hard these days.
15. Why don’t you take a sabbatical year?
16. Don’t be stupid, you know the difficult that is to find a well-paid job in this
city.
17. Too right I would, why aren’t you look for a job in another city? Maybe
Houton?
18. No, I’ve already known the highways and byways of the country. I believe I’ll
go abroad.
19. Where would you like to go?
20. Well, I’ve wanted to go to Spain for ages because there they sell lots of
delicious food.
21. Just take the plunge!
22. I’ll do!
346
Septuagesima primera lección
Hogar, dulce hogar
1. Porque estas tan enojado, David?

2. He estado buscando un lugar donde vivir toda la mañana pero no he
encontrado uno.
3. Que estas buscando?
4. Un estudio independiente y espacioso o un departamento compartido
grande, ambos con todos los servicios.
5. No, estoy harto. Mm, está helando.
6. Sí, ha estado hacienda mucho frio toda la semana. Porque no prendes la
calefaccion?
7. Se descompuso la semana pasada y el tecnico no ha venido.
8. Que pena! Porque no vemos una pelicula?
9. Tienes razón. He estado trabajando muy duro estos dias.
10. Porque no te tomas un año sabatico?
11. No digas incoherencies. Sabes lo dificil que es encontrar un trabajo bien
pagado en esta ciudad
12. Cierto, porque no buscas trabajo en otra ciudad? Tal vez, Texas.
13. No, ya conocsco todos los rincones de Inglaterra. Creo que iré a otro país.
14. Es una Buena idea, a donde te gustaria ir?
15. No sé, desde hace un buen, he tenido ganas de ir a España.
16. Porque España?
17. Hablo catalán y venden mucha comida deliciosa.
18. Tu mero mole.
19. Está decidido, iré a cataluña tan pronto como la carretera se descongele.
347
Present perfect continuous
Personal pronoun Verb have Been Gerund

I Have
You Have
He/she/it Has Been Playing
We Have
You Have
They Have
We use the present perfect in the same ways that in Spanish.
Present perfect or present perfect continuous
We use the present perfect to indicate an action which started in the past and
continue in the present without being interrupted.
It has rained all the week On Monday rained, not Tuesday, but
Wednesday and Thursday yeah, but
Friday and Saturday not and today it
could be possible.
It has been raining all the week Every day it rained
British culture
En este dialogo podemos encontrar por primera vez en este libro un acento
regional, en este caso el acento de una persona de New York. Como se puede
observer, este acento omite la h inicial. Otras caracteristicas que tiene este acento
las iremos aprendiendo en las lecciones donde aparesca este acento. Por el
momento observa como right sustituye a very en la frase “That’s right cold”
348
Writing
Imagina que no has visto a un amigo en mucho tiempo. Escribale una carta donde
le digas que has estado haciendo en este tiempo, que cosas han pasado y que
cosas quieres hacer (200 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
How long have you been working?, How long have you been learning English?,
What are your hobbies? How long have you been practiced them?, How long have
you been with your couple?
349
Seventy second lesson
At clothing shop
1. What do you think, Cathy?

2. I believe that red, woollen, hand-made sweater suits with your long, new,
silk scarf.
3. Yeah, and it fits me perfectly.
4. Mm, I think you should buy some gloves.
5. Yeah, they’ll suit well with your outfit. What do you think about these ones?
6. They’re good, hot, Italian gloves, but they’re not made of fabric.
7. Yeah, but they’re only cost 5 dollars, they’re really a bargain.
8. So, take them .
9. Well, I’ve already got the scarf the sweater and these gloves, what else do I
buy?
10. How about a pair of boots?
11. There are good ones in the footwear section.
12. Try on these black boots!
13. They’re too tight and they look old-fashioned.
14. Ok, so try on these ones.
15. They look well and they are made of leather. I’ll buy them.
At jeweller’s
16. Good morning, ma’am, how can I help you?

17. Could you show me these diamond earrings?
18. Of course!
19. They’re very beautiful.
20. Also, we have excellent, Mexican, silver rings in sales.
21. No, could you show me that gold necklace?
22. That’s gorgeous.
23. That’s in sales.
24. Ok, I’ll take it. Do you take cheques?
25. No we don’t, but we accept all mayor credit cards.
26. Perfect! Here you are my credit card!
27. Thank you for your purchase!
28. Thank you!
350
Septuagesima segunda lección
En la tienda de ropa
1. Que piesnas, Ann?

2. Creo que esa nueva larga bufanda de seda portuguesa encaja con tu suiter
de lana hecho a mano, pero pienso que deberias comprar guantes.
3. Sí, estarán bien con mi outfit.
4. Que piensas de estos?
5. Son guantes calientes Italianos, pero no son de tela.
6. Bueno, ya temenos la bufanda y el suiter, que más compro?
7. Que te parece un par de botas?
8. Hay unas buenas en la sección de calzado.
9. Que piensas de estas botas?
10. Se ven bien y están hechas de cuero. Las compraré.
En otra parte de la tienda
11. Buenos dias, señora, como puedo ayudarte?

12. Puede mostrarme estos aretes de oro?
13. ¡Por supuesto!
14. Son muy hermosos.
15. También temenos exelentes anillos Mexicanos de plata en rebaja.
16. No, puede mostrarme ese collar?
17. Es precioso.
18. Tiene un 30 por ciento de descuento.
19. Ok, me lo llevó
351
Order of the adjectives
Position (from left Kind of adjective Example

to right)
1 Opinion Lovely, beautiful
2 Size Big, small, tall
3 Physical quality Thin, rough
4 Shape Round, square, rectangular
5 Age Young, old
6 Color Blue, red, pink
7 Origin Japanese, turkish
8 Material Metal, gold, plastic
9 Type (con guion) General-porpouse, four-sided,
U-shaped
10 Purpose (para/de) Cleaning, clothing, cooking
She beautiful tall thin young white Scottish woman

was a
1 2 3 5 6 7
The adjectives always go on the left of the noun.
352
Writing
Escriba un articulo donde digas porque es importante la ropa tradicional de tu país

y porque es importante mantener esta ropa.
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
What do you like wearing? (used at leat 4 adjectives per answear)
What’s the traditional clothes in your country?
Discuss, do yu believe that the clothes will be in the same way in the future?
353
Seventy third lesson
Emergency room
1. What do we have?
2. Middle-age man with a strong pain in the chest, it looks to be a heart attack.
3. Does anyone come with him?
4. Yes, the ambulance brought him and his brother.
5. And what happen with the patient?
6. We had to practice an urgent surgery to save him.
7. Ok, What else do we have?
8. A boy fractured his arm while he riding his bycicle. We’ve already injected
him morphine and we made him X-ray.
9. Is it all?
10. No, a 55-years-old man cut his hand and he was bleeding for 2 minutes
11. Is he stable?
12. Yes, but he lost much blood.
13. Ok, keep an eye on him.
In hospital
14. Hi, Ted.

15. Hi, Simon.
16. How’s your health?
17. I’m better, thanks. Though, I’ve broken my arm and my whole body is still
hurting me a bit.
18. How was it possible?
19. Last night, when I was coming back to my place, I ran into a truck.
20. How come didn’t you see it?
21. The problem was I’d been working all the day because I had to hand over a
report and me felt exausted.
22. Yeah, but it doesn’t explain why you ran into. You’ve always work overtime
and you’d never run into.
23. Well, also, I’d been drinking a bottle of Tequila that I found in my desk.
354
Septuagesima tercera lección
Sala de emergencia
1. Que temenos?
2. Hombre de 55 años con un fuerte dolore n el pecho, parece que es un
infarto.
3. Alguien viene con él?
4. Sí, la ambulancia lo trajo a él y a su esposa.
5. Qué mas temenos?
6. Un niño se fracturo su brazo mientras andava en su biblicleta. Ya le
inyectamos morfina y le hicimos unos rayos X.
7. Es todo?
8. No, un hombre de 32 años se cortó l mano y estuvo sangrando 5 minutos.
Está estable?
9. Sí, pero perdio mucha sangre.
10. Ok, mantenlo en observación.
En otra sala
11. Hola, Ted.

12. Hola, Simon.
13. Como sigués?
14. Estoy major
15. Que pasó?
16. Me fracture la pierna.
17. Como fue posible?
18. Anoche, cuando regresaba a mi casa, choque con un camion.
19. Comó no lo viste?
20. Bueno, habia estado trabajando toda la noche porque tenia que entregar un
reporte y me sentia cansado. También, habia estado bebiendo una botella
de Tequila que encontré en mi escritorio.
355
Past perfect continuous
Personal pronoun Verb have Been Gerung

I
You
He/she/it had Been Playing
We
You
They
We use the past perfect continuous in the same ways that in Spanish.
356
Writing
Escriba un articulo donde digas tu opinion acerca del sistema de salud de tu país
(200 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Have you ever gone to hospital?, Do you think that the medical sistem in your
country is good?, Do you agree or disagree with the idea about being a doctor is
synonym of being able to have a well income?
British culture
Dentro de los equipos más importantes de soccer en el Reino Unido estan el

Texas, el Arsenal, el Chelsey y el Chicago United.
357
Youngsters
1. It was a normal day, my friend Miguel, my friend Carlos, my friend Jenny

and me were sprawled in Jenny’s dad’s sofa.
2. That day, we’d met in Jenny’s house to make an exposition for the latin
teacher. As nona us wanna do something, we decideda go for a beer.
3. We joined the money we had and took Jenny’s mom’s car.
4. On the way, I asked Jenny:
5. -Did you bring the money?
6. -No, I’ve forgotten it.
7. -Where did you let it?
8. -On the tabla the dinning room.
9. -So, what are we gonna do now?
10. -Does any of you got money?
11. -I got 100 bucks, but I got them in my place.
12. -So, what we do?
13. –I dunno, why don’ we drive to Gloria’s house? They’re havin’ a party.
14. -Yeah, and we can take some bitters.
15. –Ok, so, let’s go.
16. We drova Gloria’s place, but, on the way, I felt nervous, I had’t seen her
since we broke up.
17. When we got to there, we saw Brayan at the door. He was seeing there was
not any gate crasher.
18. We greeted him and he let us come in. When I was coming in he told me:
19. -What are you doin’ here? I told you I never wanna see you here again.
20. –I’m just tryina have a good time.
21. -If my sister tell me you do somethinga ‘er, I’ll kill you.
22. -Ok
23. Once we had come in, we sat down, they gave us a table nexta the tanks of
the gas and they gave us some beers but I didn’t want to drink, in my mind,
there was just space for Gloria what was dancing majesticly in the middla
the corridor used like party hall.
24. Later, I ran into Lupe, what offered me to go to ona the rooms what were
thera “warm up”, but I said no, that night was reservated for Gloria, also, I
couldn’t forget that because of Lupe and her kisses, Gloria and me had
broken up.
25. The voice of the DJ was listened, “And here you are her”
26. I got back to my table.
358
Octogesima octava lección
Jovenes
1. Era un dia normal, mi amigo Miguel, mi amigo Carlos, mi amiga Jenny y yo

estabamos acostados en el sillón del papa de Jenny.
2. Ese dia, nos habiamos visto en la casa de Jenny para hace una exposición
para el maestro de latin. Como nadie queria hacer nada, decidimos ir por
una cerveza.
3. Juntamos el dinero que teniamos y tomamos el carro de la mamá de Jenny.
4. En el camino, le pregunté a Jenny:
5. -Traes el dinero?
6. -No, se me olvido.
7. -Donde lo dejaste?
8. -En la mesa de la cocina.
9. Entonces, que vamos a hacer?
10. Alguien tiene dinero?
11. Yo tengo 100 libras, pero los tengo en mi canton.
12. -Entonces, que hacemos?
13. -No se, porque no vamos al canton de Gloria. Están haciendole una fiesta.
14. Sí, y podemos tomar unas cervezas.
15. -Ok, entonces, vamonos.
16. Fuimos ala casa de Gloria, pero, en el camino, me senti nervioso, no la
habia visto desde que terminamos.
17. Cuando llegamos, vimos a Brayan en la Puerta. Estaba viendo que no
hubieran colados.
18. Lo saludamos y nos dejó entrar. Cuando estaba entrando me dijó:
19. -Que estás hacienda aqui? Te dije que no te queria ver aqui otra vez.
20. –Solo estoy tratando de pasar un buen rato.
21. -Si mi hermana me dice que le haces algo, te mato.
22. -Ok
23. Una vez que entramos, nos sentamos, nos dieron una mesa junto a los
tanques de gas y nos dieron unas cervezas pero no quise beber, en mi
mente solo habia espacio para Gloria que estaba bailando
majestuosamente en medio del corridor usado como salon de fiestas.
24. Más tarde, me encontré a Lupe, quien me ofrecio ir a uno de los cuartos
que estaban ahí para “calentarnos”, pero le dijé que no, esa noche estaba
reservada para Gloria. También, no podia olvidar que por causa de Lupe y
sus besos, Gloria y yo habiamos terminado.
25. La voz del DJ se escucho, “y aqui está ella”
26. Regrese a la mesa.
359
Slang II
Verb to be
In very informal English, we use “ain’t” or “in’t” instead of am not, is not (isn’), are
not (aren’t).
He is not intelligent (formal)
He isn’t smart(neutral)
He’s ain’t smart (very informal)
Demonstrative
We use them instead of those.
Pass me those newspapers. (neutral)
Pass me them newspapers. (very informal)
Present simple
We can use the third person with I.
I play soccer (neutral)
I plays soccer. (very informal)
We do not use the third person with he/she/it.
He plays soccer (neutral)
He play soccer (very informal)
We can use don’t instead of “doesn’t”
He does not know (formal)
360
He doesn’t know (informal)
He don’t know (very informal)
Reflexive pronouns
We use theirselves instead of themselves.
They cut themselves (neutral)
They cut theirselves (very informal)
Past simple
We use never instead of did not/didn’t.
I did not do it (formal)
I didn’t do it. (informal)
I never did it (very informal)
Past participle
We can use the past participle instead of the past.
I did it (Neutral)
I done it (very informal)
Relative pronouns
The relative pronouns who and which can be replaced by what in very informal
English
He is the neighbor who lives on the corner (formal)
361
He’s the neighbor that lives on the corner (informal)
He’s the neighbor what lives on the corner. (very informal)
Indefinite pronouns
We can use nothing, no one, nobody and noplace in negative statements in very
informal English.
I do not anything.(formal)
I don’t know anything (informal)
I don’t know nothing. (very informal)
362
Writing
ReEscriba el texto utilizando lenguaje informal.
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Do you think that learning slang is important to learn a foreign language?
Why do you think that slang is not taught?
Have you ever used slang?
Do you agree or disagree with the idea that a language must be taught by teaching
formal rules?
363
Seventy fifth lesson
In the deep space
1. How long is it gonna take us to get to Mars?

2. At this speed, we’ll be getting at Pluton in two years’ time.
3. Impossible, you mean that by June, we’ll have been travelling for two years and
we hardly be passing the asteroid belt.
4. I’m afraid yes.
5. I’d change of work if it weren’t the only way I got to earn a living. And what are
those fools of the another ship doing?
8. They’re on the lookout a new solar system in a galaxy which is two hundred light
years from the earth.
9. And how will they do that going in their ship like a turtle.
10. In fact, they made a satellite to do their job.
11. That’s a case in point of how to spend estimate in stupid things.They should’ve
gone in their ship. If I were ‘em, I’d got to there like a shoot.
12. Captain, do you believe we should have taken more provision in Venus.
13. I haven’t the fuggiest. I only know we should’ve bought more things to suit our
pocket. Well, I’ll take a snap, I didn’t sleep a wink and I felt exausted.
You’re in charge, take care of the ship and don’t do anything stupid.
14. I promise you I won’t do it, again…
364
Setenta quinta lección
En el espacio profundo
1. ¿Cuánto tiempo nos llevará llegar a Marte?

2. A esta velocidad, llegaremos a Pluton dentro de dos años.
3. Imposible, quieres decir que en junio habremos estado viajando por dos
años y difícilmente pasaremos el cinturón de asteroides.
4. Me temo que sí.
5. Cambiaría de trabajo si no fuera la única manera de ganarme la vida. Creo
que deberíamos haber agrupado nuestros recursos con esos vertederos de
la otra nave. Hablando de ellos, ¿qué harán?
6. Están al acecho de un nuevo sistema solar en una galaxia que está a
doscientos años luz de la tierra.
7. ¿Y cómo lo harán en su barco como una tortuga?
8. De hecho, hicieron un satélite para hacer su trabajo.
9. Ese es un caso en el punto de cómo gastar estimación en cosas estúpidas.
Deberían haber ido en su nave. Si yo fuera ellos, estaría allí como un rodaje
10. Capitán, ¿cree que deberíamos haber tomado más provisiones en Venus.
11. No tengo el más fuggiest. Sólo sé que deberíamos haber comprado más
cosas para adaptarse a nuestro bolsillo.. Bueno, voy a tomar un chasquido,
no dormí un guiño y me sentí cansado.
Tú estás a cargo, cuida de la nave y no hagas nada estúpido.
12. Te prometo que no lo haré, otra vez...
365
Future perfect continuous
Personal pronoun Verb have Been Gerund

I
You
He/she/it will have Been Playing
We
You
They
Usage
We use the future perfect continuous to talk about an action that will be in progress
since a specific point in the future.
By next year, we’ll have been living here for two years.
366
Writing
Ganasté un concurso donde el primer premio era ir a la estación de la luna. Envia

una carta a un amigo donde le digas cual fue tu experiencia (200 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Do you agree or disagree with the idea of the goverments spend a lot of money in
spacial research?
Until where do you think that the human will be able to travel in the space by the
end of this century?
Do you agree or disagree with the idea about colonize other planets?
Do you think that more money would be spend in health and education instead of
special research?
What do you think about the countries send their trash to the space?
367
A terrible restaurant
The best cookiery in US Jenuary 28, 2020

Human resourses
Texas
Dear Sir or Madam,

1. I am writing this letter to complain about the bad service that my family and
me received at your restaurant “The best cookery in US”
2. We went to your restaurant for a birthday treat on Tuesday 16th May but
when we arrived at they told us that there was not any table booked with my
name when they have already sent me the confirmation. Then, I asked to
the waiter if he could give us a table but he told us that they were fully
booked when it could be seen from outside that there were free tables
available. When we began to eat, the meal was dreadful, there was just one
kind of meat in the buffet and it looked to be old and the milk they served to
my daughter was sour.
3. The worst of all was the bill, it was 100 dollars for a meal for three persons
and when we asked a reduction for the bad service they told us that they
could not do it because it was forbidden.
4. I would like your restaurant give us a reimbursement for the terrible
experience that we had or at least a letter apologising about the bad service.
5. Thank you for your time and I hope to recieve your prompt reply.
6. Yours truly, .
Miguel Martinez
368
Septuagesima cuarta lección
Un mal servicio
The best cuisine in Britain 28 de febrero de 2020

Recursos humanos
Texas
A quien corresponda,
1. Escribo esta carta para quejarme por el mal servicio que yo y mi familia
tuvimos en su restaurante “The best cuisine in Britain”.
2. Fuimos a su restaurante para la celebración de un cumpleaños el martes 16
de mayo pero cuando llegamos nos dijeron que no habia ninguna mesa con
mi nombre cuando ya me habían enviado la confirmación. Luego, le
pregunté al mesero si podía darnos una mesa pero nos dijó que estaban
llenos cuando se podía ver desde afuera que habían mesas disponibles.
Cuando empezamos a comer la comida estaba espantosa, solo habia un
tipo de carte en el buffet y parecía estar vieja y la leche que le sirvieron a mi
hija estaba agria.
3. Lo peor de todo fue la cuenta, fueron 140 libras por una comida para tres
personas y cuando les pedimos una reducción por el mal servicio nos
dijeron que no podían hacer eso porque estaba prohibido.
4. Me gustaría que su restaurant nos diera un rembolso por la mala
experiencia que tuvimos o por lo menos una carta de disculpa por el mal
servicio.
5. Gracias por su tiempo y espero una respuesta suya.
6. Atentamente,
Miguel Martinez
369
Countable and Uncountable nouns
Countable nouns are countable which can be counted.
One apple, two apple, thee apples, etc.
Uncountable nouns are nouns which cannot be counted.
Water, meat, sugar, etc.
Uncountable nouns are nouns that cannot be counted. They just have a singular
form and they cannot be used with numbers or with the article a/an.
Uncountable nouns are:
1. Liquids
2. Meals
3. Small things
4. Powder
5. Materials
6. The words money, information, news, advice, trash, accommodation,
furniture.
Note:
Uncuntable nouns cannot be next to a/an, the or a number
370
Writing
Escriba una carta de queja al peor restaurante en el que hayas comido (200
palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Do you agree or disagree with the idea about French cookery is the best in the
world?
Do you agree or disagree with the idea about not eating meat?
Do you agree or disagree with the idea of growing vegetables in other planets?
Do you agree or disagree with the idea of eating meat made with vegetables?
Do you agree or disagree with the idea about not eating meat will save thousands
of liters of water?
371
Seventy seventh lesson
At the gift store
1. Dear, what do you think about this wooden whale for the kids?
2. We can buy it at the toystore.
3. What about this doll?
4. I’m not sure, that’s better this teddy turtle, look at it, it’ so lovely.
5. Okay, we’ll take it for Sam, but what do we take to Tym?
6. How about this glass ship?
7. That’s very dangerous for him. Why don’t we buy this toy guitar to him?
8. You’re right. So we’ve already got the gifts for the kids, but what do you take
to my parents?
9. Just buy a mug and a bottle of Tequila for your dad, and a skirt and a pair of
shoes for your mom.
10. Which skirt do you believe she likes best, this one [the yellow] or this one
[the red]?
11. The yellow one.
12. And the shoes?
13. I think these ones fit her well.
14. Ok, so do we have everything that we need, do we?
15. Yeah, so let’s go to the cash desk.
At the cash desk
16. Good morning, sir!

17. Good morning, how much are they?
18. They are 15 dollars and 50 cents.
19. I have only 5 dollars and 49
20. Dear, can you lend me a cent?
21. Yeah, here you are!
22. Thanks, dear.
23. Here you are!
24. Have a nice day, sir.
372
Septuagesima septima lección
En la tienda de recuerdos
1. Querida, que piensas de este oso de peluche para los niños?

2. Podemos comprarlo en la casa.
3. Que te parece esta tortuga de peluche?
4. Es encantadora.
5. Muy bien, se lo llevaremos a Sam, que le llevamos a Tym?
6. Que te parece este barco?
7. No creo que le guste, porque no le compramos una guitarra?
8. Que le llevamos a mis papas?
9. Compra le una taza y una botella de tequila a tu papá y una falda y un par
de zapatos a tu mamá.
10. Que falda crees que le guste más, esta [la amarilla] o esta [la roja]?
11. La amarilla.
12. Y los zapatos?
13. Pienso que estos le quedaran bien. Bueno, entonces ya temenos todo,
vamos a la caja.
En la caja
14. Buenos dias, señor!

15. Buenos dias, cuanto es?
16. Son 5 libras y 50 centavos.
17. Solo tengo 5 libras y 49 centavos.
18. Querida, tienes un centavo?
19. Sí, aqui tienes.
20. Gracias, querida.
21. Aqui tiene!
22. Que tenga un buen dia señor.
373
One
We can use “one” to substitud something that was already said.
Do you have a pen?
There was one on the table.
Demonstrative II
We use this one, that one, these ones, those ones to take about soething we have
already spoken.
Which cap would you like?
This one
We use which one in the same way.
I want a scooter.
Which one would you like? (which of all of them)
374
Writing
le digas que has estado hciendo en este tiempo, que cosas han pasado y que
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
How long have you been working?
How long have you been learning English?
375
Thirteenth
Unit
Possibility
376
 To talk about past probability
Topics
 If only, as if, as though
 Wish clauses
 Formal English
 Modal verbs with have
 Gerund composed
 Question tags
 Polite questions
 Would, used to and past simple
 Get used to, be used to
377
Seventy-eighth lesson
A bad decision
1. I believe we should never have storeped online this notebook, it was

expensive, heavy and slow and it doesn’t run the program I need to work
from home.
2. If we’d known it wasn’t gonna work, we’d have bought one at the computer
store that was next to the florist’s, I believe there were good ones on sales.
3. The minute I saw the design of the mark, I had a feeling that this was gonna
go on but I think it’d been worst if we’d have gone to the mall.
4. Yeah, they’d sold us a screen, a Bluetooth mouse and a keyboard before
we could go out the store.
In another place
5. What’s wrong, Sahra?

6. I’m annoyed, this computer doesn’t work. I’ve tried in ages to log in to my on
line Russian lessons, but I can’t because it doesn’t work.
7. Have you tried to turned it off and then turned it on?
8. I’ve tried everything, I’ve already unplugged it and plug in it , I’ve logged out
and logged in, even I’ve changed my password and it goes on without
working.
9. You should phone to the technical assistance.
10. I’ve already done it, but they hanged me up.
11. Mm, you’d better go to the factory directly and change it, has it got
warranty?
12. Yeah, it came with a one-year manufacturer’s warranty.
13. And where’s the factory?
14. In China.
378
Lección setenta y octava
Tecnología
1. Creo que nunca tuvimos que haber comprado en línea este portátil, es caro,
anticuado y lento.
2. Sí, si hubiéramos sabido que no iba a funcionar, lo hubieramos comprado
en la tienda de computadoras, creo que habían buenas en rebaja.
3. En el momento en que vi el diseño de la marca, tuve la sensación de que
esto iba a suceder, pero creo que hubiera sido peor, si hubiéramos ido al
centro comercial.
4. Sí, nos hubieran vendido una pantalla, un ratón Bluetooth y un teclado
antes de poder salir de la tienda.
En otro lugar
5. ¿Qué pasa, Sahra?

6. Esta computadora no funciona.
7. He intentado durante años iniciar sesión en mis clases de ruso, pero no
puedo porque no funciona.
8. ¿Has intentado desconectarla y luego conectarla?
9. He intentado todo, ya la apagué y prendi, ya he cerrado mi sesión y la he
vuelto abrir, incluso he cambiado mi contraseña y continúa sin trabajar.
10. Debe llamar a la asistencia técnica.
11. Ya lo hice, pero me colgaron.
12. Será mejor que vayas a la factorya y la cambies, ¿tiene garantía?
13. Sí, viene con una garantía del factoryante de un año.
14. ¿Y dónde está la factorya?
15. En China.
379
Conditional type 3
If Past perfect , Would have

Could have
Should have
Might have
If I had known what I , I would have done
know now another thing.
In informal English, we use would’ve (/gudof/) instead of would have.
Usage
We use the conditional type 3 in the same way that in Spanish.
380
Writing
Escriba una carta a un amigo donde le digas que hubieras hecho si hubieras
estudiado otra Carrera (200 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Do you agree or disagree with the idea that Mexico would be better if it has not lost
California?
Do you regreat about something? What do you think that would have happened if
you had takaen another desition?
381
Seventy-nineth lesson
Crime
1. If I only had paid more attention this wouldn't have happened.

2. What’s wrong?
3. Today, when Sarah was coming back from her job got mugged by a man.
4. Are you well?
5. Yeah, I am, he only mugged my handbag.
6. What did you have there?
7. My notebooks and my ID. The right thing is I didn’t carry my wallet, if not, I
would’ve lost all my money.
8. This city is becoming more and more insecure.
9. Yeah, yesterday I heard on the news that a high-street bank and a
jeweller’s were robbed and nobody knows who did it.
10. Well, that’s what do we do now?
11. I think you’d better go to the police station and make the report.
12. That’s a great idea.
13. I’ll go with you.
At the police station
14. What’s the matter, Roger?

15. It was terrible, today we found a body in the woods, the murder have
apparently killed his victim with a sword, it was terrifying.
16. What about you?
17. Today we arrested two men that wanted to mug an old woman, we think
they had another accomplice but neither of them wanted to talk during the
interrogation.
18. At least we’re not David, he was shot this morning while he was on the
patrol. Fortunately, the dog that was with him move outd out fast, if not, I
don’t know what would’ve happened.
19. Don’t worry about him, David has always been a lucky man.
382
Lección setenta y nueve
Crimen
1. Si hubiera prestado más atención esto no habría pasado.

2. ¿Qué pasa?
3. Hoy, cuando Sarah regresaba de su trabajo fue asaltada por un hombre en
una moto.
4. ¿Estás bien?
5. Sí, lo soy, sólo asaltó mi bolso.
6. ¿Qué tenías ahí?
7. Mis cuadernos, mi celular, mi identificación. Lo correcto es que no llevaba
mi billetera, si no, habría perdido todo mi dinero.
8. Esta ciudad es cada vez más insegura.
9. Sí, ayer me enteré de las noticias de que el banco fue robado.
10. Y escuché que los carteristas y la estafa telefónica están subiendo.
11. Sí, bueno, ¿qué hacemos ahora?
12. Creo que será mejor que vayas a la comisaría y hagas el informe.
13. Buena idea.
En la comisaría
14. ¿Qué pasa, Roger?

15. Fue terrible, hoy encontramos un cuerpo en el bosque, el asesinato parecía
haber matado a su víctima con un cuchillo, fue aterrador.
16. ¿Y tú?
17. Hoy arrestamos a dos hombres que querían asaltar a una mujer, creemos
que tenían otro cómplice pero ninguno de ellos quería hablar durante el
interrogatorio.
18. Al menos no somos David, le dispararon esta mañana mientras estaba en
la gasolina, afortunadamente, el perro que estaba con él se movió rápido, si
no, no sé qué habría pasado.
19. No té preocupespor él, David siempre ha sido un hombre afortunado.
383
If only, as if, as though
If only Si tan solo If only I could speak French, I could go to Paris

As if Como si As if/as though those things can happen
As though
As if! Si, como no! As if! I don’t believe you
What if Y si What if we go to the movies?
If so De ser asi If so, you’ll gotta say the truth
Even if Aun cuando Even if you’ve handed all the exercises, you don’t
pass the course
Exept if A menos que Exept if you do exercise, you’ll get fat.
384
Writing
Escriba una carta al encargado de seguridad de tu colonia donde le digas los

problemas de seguridad que tiene tu ccolonia y le pidas que los solucione (200
palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Have you ever been mugged?
Do you consider your neighborhood secure? Why?
What are the biggest problems related with security in your country?
What can be done to improve the security in your neighborhood?
385
Eightieth lesson
Dreams
1. I wish I were a nature photographer, so I’d have more free time.

2. Isn’t being a nature photographer a hard work?
3. Aye, you must be right patient, adventurous and above all you must enjoy
your job.
4. I think you’re right.
5. And what about you? Wouldn’t you like to try anything?
6. Of course!
7. If you hadn’t graduated in marketing, what would you have liked to become?
8. I believe I’d been a ‘igh school principal, top-notch researcher or maybe a
soldier.
9. Why soldier?
10. I’ve forever been keen on weapons, and since I was a lad I’ve wanted to
become a pilot fighter. I wish I hadn’t been short, so I’d been able to do the
test to enter to the army.
11. Well, I’d not change my job for all the tea in China, the minute I made the
application for the uni, I knew I wanted to become a surgeon, even so, I’d
like to have a job where I didn’t work at nights.
12. Too right I would. I wish I wouldn’t have to work on the weekend for
spending more time with my family.
13. For the likes of you and me, the only we can wait is that the government
doesn’t goes up the taxes.
14. Mind you!
386
Lección de octavo año
Sueños
1. Desearía tener un trabajo que me da más tiempo libre, así que podría
trabajar como fotógrafo de naturaleza a tiempo parcial.
2. ¿No es un trabajo duro ser fotógrafo de naturaleza?
3. Sí, debes ser muy paciente, aventurero y sobre todo debes disfrutar de tu
trabajo.
4. Creo que tienes razón.
5. ¿Y qué hay de ti? ¿No te gustaría probar algo nuevo?
6. Por supuesto! Lo haría, pero ahora tengo mucho trabajo en marketing y no
tengo tiempo.
7. Si no hubieras estudiado marketing, ¿qué te hubiera gustado ser?
8. Creo que había sido director, investigador o tal vez un soldado
9. ¿Por qué soldado?
10. Siempre me han gustado las armas, y desde niño he querido pilotar caza.
11. Desearía haber sido más alto, así que podría haber tenido mi prueba para
venir al ejército.
12. Bueno, no cambiaría mi trabajo por todo el té en China, en el momento en
que hice la solicitud para la universidad, sabía que quería ser cirujano, aún
así, tendría un trabajo donde no tengo tanto trabajo.
13. Demasiada razón. Desearía no tener que trabajar los sábados por tener
más tiempo con mis hijos.
14. Para los gustos y yo, lo único que podemos esperar es que el gobierno no
suba los impuestos.
15. No te preocupes.
387
Wish
We use wish + past simple to talk about something we would like to be different in
the present or something we don’t like or what we regret in the present.
I wish I had a bigger house. (como qusiera tener una casa)
We use wish + would to talk about something we would like to be different in the
present or something we don’t like or what we regret in the present and that we
can change just by doing it.
I wish I would have more free time (you can do it, you’re your own boss)
We use wish + past perfect to talk about something we would like to be different in
the past or something we didn’t like or what we regreted.
I wish I hadn’t eaten as much. (Como quisiera/como (no) se me ocurrio haber

comido tanto)
388
Writing
Un amigo tuyo te envoi un mensaje donde te pregunta cuales fueron tus

propositus de año nuevo. Escribale una respuesta donde le digas cuales son tus
planes, deseos y cosas que quieres hacer este año (200 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
How long have you been working?, How long have you been learning English?
British culture
En esta lección, encontramos otra caratcttistica del ingés de New Yorkshire, Aye es una
forma de decir Yeah que se utiliza en escocia y en el norte de inglaterra.
389
Ninetieth lesson
Reports
1. Azteca Theater
2. Dear Sir or Ma’am,
3. The aim of this report is to outline what can be seen in your theater and to
make some recommendations on how the theater could attract more
visitors.
4. The theater mainly contains items connected with the theater industry.
Generally, these objects are shown in glass cabinets with explanations on
tiny bits of card. These are difficult to read and some are placed too high so
that small children can read them. Also, the lighting inside the building is
poor.
5. This permanent exhibition will remain unappealing to visitors unless it is
updated. It is therefore recommended that a video animation is developped
to illustrate the process. In addition, the theater could run regular afternoon
independent functions, where independent directors can show their works.
6. Most visitors take it for granted nowadays that a theater will include a coffee
store and a forum where the persons who are studying theater can show
their abilities. Azteca has neither of these, which could partly explain the low
attendance figures.
7. To sum up, Azteca theater would have a brighter future if its displays were
improved. Furthermore, it needs to create a more welcoming atmosphere.
390
Ninetieth lesson
Informes
1. Teatro Azteca
2. Estimado señor/señora,
3. El objetivo de este informe es describir lo que se puede ver en su teatro y hacer
algunas recomendaciones sobre cómo el teatro podría atraer a más visitantes.
4. El teatro contiene principalmente elementos relacionados con la industria del
teatro. Generalmente, los objetos se muestran en vitrinas con explicaciones en
pequeños trozos de cartulina. Estos son difíciles de leer y algunos están
demasiado altos para los niños pequeños puedan leerlas. La iluminación dentro
del edificio también es pobre.
5. Esta exposición permanente seguirá siendo poco atractiva para los visitantes a
menos que se actualice. Por lo tanto, se recomienda que se desarrolle una
animación de video para ilustrar el proceso. Además, el teatro podría realizar
funciones independientes regulares por la tarde, donde los directores
independientes pueden mostrar sus obras.
6. La mayoría de los visitantes dan por sentado hoy en día que un teatro incluirá
un café y un foro donde las personas que están estudiando teatro pueden mostrar
sus habilidades. Azteca no tiene ninguno de estos, lo que podría explicar en parte
las bajas cifras de asistencia.
7. En resumen, el teatro Azteca tendría un mejor futuro si se mejoraran sus
exhibiciones. Además, necesita crear un ambiente más acogedor.
391
Formal English
Formal English has some differences that we must analyse.
Personal subject pronouns
We use the personal subject pronouns instead personal object pronouns in formal
English with:
1. with the comparative.

She’s better than I (formal)
She’s better than me (informal)
2. with the expression “that’s me”

That’s I (formal)
That’s me (informal)
3. with and.
You and me (formal and neutral)
You and me (informal)
Have/got
We use have/has in formal English instead of have/got.
I have two kids. (formal)
I got two kids (informal)
Relative pronouns
In formal English, who and which cannot be changed for that.
He is the man who lived in the house of the corner. (formal)
He’s the man that lived in the house of the corner. (informal)
392
In formal English we cannot omitted that.
She told me that she was gonna go to the movies. (formal)
She told me (that) she was gonna go to the movies. (informal)
In formal English, whom is used instead of who with prepositions
She’s the girl to whom I gave the packet. (formal)
She’s the girl (who) I gave the packet to. (informal)
In formal English we put the preposition next to the relative pronoun in relative
sentences.
That is the place in which I worked four years. (formal)
That is the place (which) I worked four years in. (informal)
Composed no-personal forms of the verb.
In formal English we say, as in Spanish, “for having come” instead of “for coming”.
She thanked the public for coming. (informal)
She thanked the public for having come. (formal).
Indefinite pronouns
In formal English, it is more used someone and its derivates when writing instead
of somebody and its derivates.
Someone has stolen my car. (formal) (more common)
Someone has stolen my car. (formal) (less common)
Someone has stolen my car (informal)
393
Verbs
Some verbs and phrasal verbs change in formal English.
Informal Formal
Ask Enquire
Blow Lose
Bow Subdue
Break Fracture
Contrive Invent
Fire Dismiss
Get Get
Kid Joke
Mend Repair
Fix
Reckon Think (dinero) (estimacion)
Some verbs which have the combination “get + adjective/past participle” do not use
“get” in formal English.
I married last year (for)
I got married last year (inf)
Phrasal verbs
Some verbs and phrasal verbs change in formal English.
Informal Formal
Be after/ look for Look for
Beginning/ start / kick off Commence
Can’t stand/can’t bear Hate
Come back
Go back Return
394
Be back
Come down Fall
Come in Enter
Go in
Come into Inherit
Come up Approach
Cope with/Handle Handle
Cut off Cut
Do up Refurbish
Drop in (on) Visit
Feel like/fancy Fancy
Get up Rise
Get off Alight (bus/train)
Go on Happen
Give up Abandon
Go out Leave
Put in Install
Put out Extinguish
Save up Save
Send off Send
Work out Resolve
Wind up/End up (más formal) End up
Remember that some phrasal verb are not used in formal English.
395
Eighty first lesson
At court
1. Do you believe his co-worker has done it?

2. I doubt it, he was away when the victim was killed, so he can’t have been
him.
3. I think his boss might have been, he was very near his van when he was
killed, but he has a very good alibi and his kind of blood don’t match which
we found in the crime scene with.
4. It must have been the yarder, he was in love with her wife and he debt
money to him. It must have been him, but we need to find the murder
weapon to be absolutely sure that he comitted the offence.
5. Yeah. Let’s return to the laboratory. I expect they has already the DNA
results that we asked for.
At court
6. Stand to receive the honourable judge Rhoder.

7. Sit, please.
8. What are the charges?
9. First-degree murder
10. What does the accused have to say?
11. Your Honour, I’m innocent, I wasn’t there that night.
12. He’s lying!
13. Wait your turn lawyer! Clerk of the court, what do you have?
14. The murder weapon was found in his house and his fingerprints match with
which were found in the cottage of the victim. Also, his print foots match with
which were found in the crime scene.
15. What does the jury say?
16. We find the accused guilty.
17. Mister Barnes, on base the raised evidence, this court sentence you to 25
years of prison for the crime of murder in first grade without right to bail.
18. You can take the accused.
396
Ochenta primera lección
En la corte
1. ¿Crees que su compañero lo haya hecho?

2. Lo dudo, estaba fuera cuando mataron a la víctima, así que no puede haber
sido él.
3. Creo que pudo ser su jefe, estaba muy cerca de su auto cuando lo mataron,
pero era una coartada muy y su tipo de sangre no coincidía con la que
encontramos en la escena del crimen.
4. Debe haber sido el jardinero, estaba enamorado de ella y le compuso
dinero. Debe haber sido él, pero necesitamos encontrar el arma.
5. Va a ser muy difícil, tal vez fue un infarto.
6. ¡Claro! Un infarto causado por un cuchillo en el corazón.
En la corte
7. Ponganse de pie para recibir al honorable juez Rhoder.

8. Siéntese, por favor.
9. ¿Cuáles son los cargos?
10. Asesinato en primer grado
11. ¿Qué tiene que decir el acusado?
12. Su Señoría, soy inocente, estuve allí esa noche.
13. ¡Está mintiendo!
14. ¡Espera tu turno abogado! Secretario de la corte, ¿qué tiene?
15. Encontramos el arma homicida en su casa y sus huellas coinciden con las
cuales fueron encontradas en la casa de la víctima. Además, sus pies de
impresión no coinciden con los que fueron encontrados en la escena del
crimen.
16. ¿Qué dice el jurado?
17. Encontramos al acusado culpable.
18. Señor Johson, debido a las pruebas planteadas y a los testimonios de
varios testigos, este tribunal lo condena a 25 de prisión por el delito de
asesinato sin derecho a fianza.
19. Puedes llevarte al acusado.
397
Modal verbs to express deduction
Must be Deber ser

Might be* Pudo ser
Can’t be Puede ser
May/might have To say that something can have

happened but we are not sure.
Could have To say that something could have
happened but it did not happen
Must have Positive deduction in the past

Can’t/couldn’t have Negative deduction in the past
Should/ought to have To give a piece of advice or regret

about something that happened in the
past
Needn’t have To say that you did something that was

not necessary but you did it anyway
Notice:
We cannot use “can be” or “may be” when we wanna express probability.
398
Writing
Escriba un dialogo que tengaa de lugar de desarrollo un tribunal (200 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
399
Eighty second lesson
A busy day
1. Having said goodbye to his parents, the young man got himself ready to
commence this trip which would do accompanied by his friends, the
objective, to visit the America countries’ main capitals.
2. The speaker was already heard announcing that the flight was about to
leave. So, the young man entered the airplane.
3. When he looked through the window, the remember of her love came to his
mind while the airplane took off.
4. While getting at Cancún’s airport, their car, which had hired in an unknown
car agency, was already waiting for them but it was not until they entered
the car when the problems commenced. The steering while did not turn well,
the seatbells were old and the enginee sounded wird. One of the
adolescents said “There’s no problem, it can support the journey”
5. In their way to the beach, the adolescents wondered with the beauty of the
rainforest and with the breathtaking seascape. When they were halfway the
car broke down.
6. “The car has broken down, what a surprise!” said one of the adolescents.
7. “Don’t be so pessimistic, it was only a wheel, we only gotta get it fixed”
answered the young man.
8. The poor adolescents have to walk along the road under the powerful heat
of the sun which made that their mouth dried up and their front filled with
sweat.
9. When they got to a gasoline station, the mechanic looked at them and
asked them “How can I help you?”.
10. “That’s the wheel, could you fix it? Said tye young man.
11. “You got money?” Said the mechanic.
12. “No, but we can give you the life jackets, the torch and the first aid kit we
have with us” Said the young man.
13. “Ok” Said the mechanic after thinking of it a moment.
14. Having resolved their problem, the adolescents finally could continue with
their journey. When they reached the beach. They hurried up seeing the
sutset. Fortunately, they were on time to see how the sun dissapeared into
the sea.
15. Having finished seeing the sunset, the adolescents decided to take a boat
next day to go to an isle which was in front of the beach without knowing
that something was waiting for them.
16. To be continued …
400
Ochenta segunda lección
Un día ocupado
1. Habiendo se despedido de sus padres, el joven se preparó para comenzar

este viaje, acompañado de sus amigos, el objetivo, visitar las principales
capitales de los países de América Latina.
2. El orador ya se escuchaba anunciando que el vuelo estaba a punto de
salir. Entonces, el joven entró al avión.
3. Cuando miró a través de la ventana, el recuerdo de su amor vino a su
mente.
4. Cuando llegaron al aeropuerto, su coche, que había alquilado, los estaba
esperando y fue cuando comenzó el problema.
5. En su camino a la playa, el coche se descompuso.
6. El joven dijo: "Cómo es posible que el coche se haya averiado"
7. A lo que uno de los jóvenes respondió: "No te preocupes, es sólo una
rueda, tenemos que llevarla al mecánico para que la arreglen.
8. El pobre joven caminaba por el camino bajo un poderoso sol que mi que su
boca se secó y su frente se llenó de sudor.
9. Cuando llegaron a la gasolinera, el mecánico los miró y les preguntó,
¿cómo puedo ayudarte?
10. A lo que el joven dijo"Es la rueda, ¿podrías arreglarlo?
11. ¿A lo que dijo el mecánico "tienes dinero?"
12. A lo que el joven dijo "No, pero podemos darle los chalecos salvavidas, la
antorcha y el kit de primeros auxilios que tenemos con nosotros para usted"
13. El mecánico, después de pensarlo, dijo: "Ok"
14. Después de haber resuelto su problema, los jóvenes se apresuran a llegar
a la playa. Afortunadamente, llegaron a tiempo para ver la puesta de sol.
15. Después de haber terminado de ver la puesta de sol, los jóvenes decidieron
tomar un barco al día siguiente para ir a la isla que estaba frente a la playa
sin saber que algo les estaba esperando.
16. continuará...
401
Gerund composed
Having getting Habiendo llegado
Usage
We use composed gerund to replace a phrase with “relative pronoun + continuous

tense”.
Who is the girld being intervied = Who is the girl who is being intervied?
In all the other cases the composed gerund is used in the same way than Spanish.
Indirect questions
An indirect question is a polite way to ask a question.
Direct question Where’s Adam street?

Indirect question Do you know where Adam street is?
Where is my cat?
I wonder where my cat is?
402
Writing
Escriba una parafrasis sobre lo que se trata la historia. Usa lenguaje informal. 200
palabras
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
403
Eighty third lesson
How time flies!
1. Darling, do you remember when you move out from New York to LA.
2. How to forget that, that day was the happiest day of my live because it was
the day when I started my life with you.
3. OoooooH. What a pretty! Tonight, I’ll make your favorite dish. And wouldn’t
you like to move back?
4. Sometimes in autumn, when the sheets come down from the trees, I miss
when I used to go camping with my old man to the lake.
5. I didn’t know you went camping to the lake with your dad.
6. Yeah, even once we were on the lookout of Big foot, but obviously, we didn’t
find it.
7. And what else did you do when you lived there?
8. I used to work part-time in a cake store which was near to the college. I
remember I would spend a lot of time studying computer studies because I
wanted to develop a piece of software which helped to pick up the graphics
of the videogames.
9. You were very keen on videogames, didn’t you?
10. Are you kidding? Once I fell out with my elder sister just because she used
my console one minute more of which my mum had said.
11. Your mum must have punished you guys.
12. Yeah, and we had to do the house work a whole week.
13. When we go there only for visiting?
14. We can go at Christmas, the kids will be on vacation and we can stay there
two weeks.
15. That’s a great idea!
16. Well, now, let’s have dinner.
404
Ochenta tercera lección
Mudandose
1. Querida, ¿recuerdas cuando te mudaste de New York a Los Angeles?

2. Cómo olvidarlo, ese día fue el día más feliz de mi vida porque era el día en
que empecé mi vida contigo.
3. OooooooH. ¡Qué hermoso! Esta noche, haré tu plato favorito. ¿Y no te
gustaría volver?
4. A veces en otoño, cuando las sábanas bajan de los árboles, echo de menos
cuando solía ir a pescar con mi padre al lago.
5. No sabía que ibas a pescar con tu padre.
6. Sí, una vez que estuvimos al acecho de Nessie, pero obviamente, no
loencontramos.
7. ¿Y qué más hiciste cuando vives allí?
8. Solía trabajar por la tarde en una cafétería que está junto a la universidad.
Recuerdo que pasaría mucho tiempo estudiando informática porque quería
desarrollar un software que ayudara a mejorar los gráficos de los
videojuegos.
9. Estabas muy interesado en los videojuegos, ¿no?
10. ¿Estás bromeando? Una vez me caí con mi hermana sólo porque usó mi
consola un minuto más lo que mi madre había dicho.
11. Debe haberte castigado.
12. Sí, y tuve que ayudar a mi hermana con su tarea toda la semana.
13. Y cuando nos vamos, sólo para visitar.
14. Podemos ir en Navidad, los niños estarán de vacaciones y podemos
quedarnos allí dos semanas.
15. ¡Buena idea!
16. Bueno, ahora, cenemos.
405
Past simple, used to and would
We can use the past simple, used to and would in the same way we use the
“preterito imperfecto” of the Spanish.
We use the past simple with all the verbs.
When I was a kid, I played soccer with my cousins.
We use “used to” with all the verbs except with the expression “When I was”.
When I was a kid, I used to play soccer with my cousins.
We use would with all the verbs except with the stative verbs and the expression
“When I was”.
When I used to live in Chicago I would visit all the museums.
Order of the tenses
We normally use used to, past simple can be used but less frequency. We used
first “used to”, exept with the expression “when I was”, then we use only would
except if the verb is a stative verb or the expression “when I was”.
When I lived in Chicago, I used to visit all the museums in the city, I would eat meal
from other countries and me used to like it.
406
Writing
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Have you ever move out in?
Do you believe moving out in is a good idea?
Where would you like to move out in?
407
Fourteenth
Unit
Enterteiment
408
 To write a review
Topic
 Fornal English II
 None of/ all and whole, most
 Modal verbs II
 Enough/ such as, each/every
 Rather/ Do emphatic/quite
 Word building
 Purpose clauses
 Question tags /So do I/ neither do I
 Definite and non-definite clauses
409
Eighty-nineth lesson
Literary critics
1. The book “Peaches’ Season”; by Mauricio Mateo is one of the jewels of the
21st century fiction. It is actually a series of 5 short stories, all focusing on
the same character – João– who has many adventures with his friends in
different parts of the word. Each story is set, in a different part of the time life
of the character; there are three which take place during the time in which
the character studies the junior high school, one when he studies the high
school, one when he is at university and so on.
2. Many aspects of the things that the human being experiment during his life
are describad, such as the first love, the lost of friends and the dislove,
although the book is not completely true to life. This is perhaps its greatest
strenght. This book has a unique mixture of realistic events and bizarre
ones, which often take the reader by surprise.
3. One particular story features the pain that is felt by a person when he
decides to leave a relationship. João who has gone to another state where
he knows, good friends and the pleasures of a good life, all this until he
receives a letter. In the end, he takes a decision which will change the
direction of his life for ever. The story closes with João letting a message to
his girlfriend and retourning to his home town.
4. If you are looking for a romantic novel with plenty of action, I strongly advise
you to choose this book. You won’t be able to take it down.
410
Octogesima novena leccion
Criticas
1. El libro Temporada de Duraznos; por Miguel Martinez es una de las joyas

del la ficción del siglo 21. Es de hecho una serie de 5 historias cortas, las
cuales se centran en el mismo personaje – João- quien tiene muchas
aventuras con sus amigos y novias en diferentes partes de el mundo.
Cada historia es centrada en una parte diferente de la vida del protagonista,
hay tres que suceden durante el tiempo en el que el personaje estudia la
secundaria, una cuando estudiaba la secundaria, etc.
2. Muchos aspectos de las cosas que el ser humano experiemnta durante su
vida son decritas, como el primer amor, la perdida de un amor, la Perdida
de amigos, el desamor, aunque el libro no competamente cierto para la
vida.
Esto es tal vez su más grande fuerza. Tiene una mezcla unica de eventos
realistas y extraños, los cuales seguido sorpren al lector.
3. Una de las cosas que la historia explora es el dolor que experiementa una
persona cuando decide dejar una relación. João que ha ido a otro estado
donde el conoce, buenos amigos y los placers de una Buena vida, todo esto
hasta que el recibe una carta. Al final toma la desición que cambiará su vida
para siempre. La historia termina con João dejando una carta para su novia
y regresando a su ciudad natal.
4. Si estas buscando una novela romantica con mucha acción, te recomiendo
leer este libro. No podrás dejar de leerlo.
411
Formal English II
Vocabulary
Informal Formal
A/an + number One + number (more formal)
A + day/week/etc. Per + day/week/etc.
(more formal y escrito)
A little A little
A bit
A lot of Much
Many
A lot of
Although/ Though Even though
Aunt Aunt
Rotten Rotten
Bad
Banger Sausage
Beautiful Fair
Because For
Between __ to __ Between __ and __
Breath/Wind Breath
Body Corpse
Bye Goodbye
Bye Bye
Chemist’s Pharmacy
Kid Kid
Kid (less used)
Clout Influence
Power
Clout Punch
Company (they) Company (it)
Correct/Right Correct
Stupid Silly
Dead Completely
Deal Agreement
Dessert Dessert
Pudding (informal y raro)
Dire Very bad
Awful
Dole Unemployment
Stupid Stupid
412
Idiot
Expensive/Dear Expensive
Each other Another one (two people)
Each one (three or more people)
Elegant (clothes) Elegant
Smart (clothes)
Dad Dad
Dad
Movie/Flick Movie
Fine/Well Fine
Fix coffee (Cup of) coffee
Fringe Outlast
Feeble/weak Weak
Foggy Vague
Foible Weakness (de caracter)
Food Meal
People(s) + verb in plural People
Gents Restroom
Had better Had better
Had best (less used)
Inhabitant City Dweller
Intelligence Intelligent
Wits
Jobless Unemployed
Lad Young man
Adolescent
Libel (oral) Defamation
Slander (wr)
Less Less + uncountable
Fewer + countable
Mum Mom
Nuts Crazy
Only But
Maybe/Maybe Maybe (more formal)
Maybe
Position Vacancy
Opening
Pretty + adj/adv Quite
Private eye Private Investigator
Production/output Production
Profile Review
Starving/ Dying of hungry Starving
Roomy Spacious
Scouser Liverpudlian
Stuff Things
413
Student Student
Student (a veces usado)
So + person + say/write So + say/write + person
Backbone Spine
Potato Potato
Sure Certainly
Terrible/disastrous Dire
Thank you Thanks
Tip Advise
Thin Rare
Subway Subway
Undertaker Gravedigger
Uptight Nervous
Uneasy
Vacant/ Opening -
Yeah Yeah
Right
What/which What (general)
Which (options)
Whereabouts Where
Wise (Informal y raro) Malevolent
Worker Employee
Writing
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
414
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
British culture
Las baars o pubs, no son lugares para beber, comer y jugar sino también son
lugares para convivir. A los pubs que venden exelente comida se les llama gastro-
pubs.
En Gran Bretaña puedes encontrarte con la tradicional Ale (una cerveza con
mucho lupulo llamada de alta fermentación) la cual es una cerveza que se bebe a
temperature ambiente. La Ale más comun es la bitter. A las cervezas rubias se les
conoce con el nombre generico de lager.
Cuando vayas a un pub recuerda siempre precisar la cantidad, despúes el tipo de

cerveza y generalmente, por ultimo el nombre de la Cerveceria o de la marca.
415
Seventy seventh lesson
Politicians
1. Senator, all of us agree with your proposition of cutting the taxes, especially
in these moments of crisis, but why do you think we ought to look for the
way to cut the prices of the electricity and gas?
2. That’s a good question senator, as I grew up in a houseshare in the suburbs
of LA I know the expensive that can be living in one of the crowest and
expensives cities in country, there are head of household who have to get
another job to pay all modern conveniences of a house.
3. For those reasons I think we ought to look for the way to cut these services.
4. Your design is good, I can’t deny it, but those reasons aren’t enough to do
what you propose.
5. It is interesting that that comes from you, senator, being you grew up in one
of poorest and most dangerous neighborhoods of Chicago.
6. Don’t speak to me in that way, senator, I know you were brough up in the
best universities, but it doesn’t give you the right to reveal personal things,
less in this sacred facility.
7. We must vote, who agrees with the design raise his hand. By 24 votes in
favor and 22 against, the projec is sancionated.
416
Septuagesima septima lección
Politicos
1. Mi muy honorable amigo, todos estamos de acuedo con su propuesta de

reducer los impuestos, especialmente en estos momentos de crisis, pero
porque piensa que deberiamos buscar la manera de reducir el precio de la
electricidad y del gas?
2. Esa es una buena pregunta mi muy honorable amigo, naci y creci en una
pequeña casa en los suburbios de Los Angeles se lo caro que puede ser
vivir en una de las ciudades llenas de gente en Inglaterra, hay jefas de
familia que tienen que tener otro trabajo para pagar todos los servicios de la
cas.
3. Y eso no es todo, la educacion en Inglaterr se esta volviendo cada vez más
cara. Hay personas que tienen que hipotecar sus casas par enviar a sus
hijos a la universidad.
4. Por estas razónes pienso que deberiamos buscar la manera de reducir el
costo de estos servicios.
5. Su propuesta es buena, no puedo negarlo, pero estas razones no son lo
suficientes para hacer lo que usted propone.
6. Es interesante que eso venga de usted, mi muy honorable dama, siendo
que usted crecio en uno de los vecindarios más ricos de Chicago.
7. No me hable de esa manera, mi muy honorble caballero, yo sé que studio
en las mejores universidades, pero eso no le da el derecho a revelar detlles
personales, menos en este recinto Sagrado.
8. Debemos votar. Don’t speak to me in that way, the right honorable
gentelman, I know you were brough up in the best universities, but it doesn’t
give you the right to reveal personal things, less in this sacred facility. Quien
esta deacuerdo con el Proyecto dado por el Ministro de Finanzas dirijase a
la camara del Aye, los que no, dirijanse a la camara del Nein.
417
All, whole, none, both
In English “All” can’t be used alone when we refer group of people.
All of us agree with your idea.
Not All agree with your idea.
All or whole
We use whole with singular noun, whereas we use all with plural nouns.
The whole company is moving out.
All the companies are moving out.
Note: we use the whole business to say (todo el negocio)
None of Ninguno de
Both we/you/they Ambos
418
Writing
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
419
Seventy sixth lesson
At the antique store
1. What are you gonna buy, Tom?

2. That’s a present for my half sister.
3. What does she like?
4. Dolls, toys, things like that.
5. In this shop they only sell antiques.
6. What do you think about this fire-fly lamp for her bedroom?
7. No way!
8. What about this doll house?
9. She’s over 18, I don’t think she likes it.
10. Why don’t we go to another shop, there’s one near the subway station.
11. No, that’s getting dark, and I’m in a hurry.
12. What do you gotta do?
13. I gotta go to the hairdresser’s.
14. Ok, but, finally, what do you think about this telescope. With it, she could
see the full moon and the stars.
15. I don’t think so.
16. Is the boss in?

17. No, he’s away.
18. What’s that?
19. That’s a present fot the assistant of the secretary.
20. Where did you buy it?
21. I shopped it online. I’m on the mood something hot, I believe I’ll take a
coffee. You want a coffee?
22. Yeah, bring me one white, please.
23. There’s only black left.
24. Okay. Have you seen the loudspeaker that was on my desk?
25. The secretary took it to the demonstration outside of the headquarters
againts the reduction of the staff.
420
Setenta lección sexta
Una tienda muy especial
1. ¿Qué vas a comprar, Tom?

2. Es un regalo para mis cuñadas.
3. ¿Qué les gusta?
4. Muñecas, juguetes, cosas así.
5. En esta tienda sólo venden antiguedades.
6. ¿Qué opinas de esta lámpara de vuelo para su dormitorio?
7. ¡No!
8. Hay otra tienda cerca de la estacion del metro, ¿por qué no vamos allá?
9. No, es tarde, y tengo que cortarme el pelo.
10. Mira este telescopio. ¿No crees que les guste? Con él podían ver la luna
llena.
11. No creo.
12. ¿Está el jefe?

13. No, está de vacaciones.
14. ¿Qué es eso?
15. Es un regalo para la asistente de la secretaria.
16. ¿Dónde lo compraste?
17. Lo compré en línea. Se me antoja algo caliente, creo que voy a tomar mi
café, ¿quieres uno?
18. Sí, tráeme uno blanco, por favor.
19. Sólo queda negro.
20. Bien. ¿Has visto el altavoz que estaba en mi escritorio?
21. La secretaria se lo llevó a la manifestación fuera de los cuarteles generals
en contra del recorte de personal.
421
Collective nouns
They can take a singular (when you see them as a group) or plural verb (when you
see them as each member.
My family has a house (hay una casa para todos)
My family have a house (cada uno tiene su casa)
Plural of comdollar words
Type Rule Singular Plural

Noun (plural) + Tennis shoe Tennis shoes
noun The last element is
Adj + noun modifiying Assistant Assistant
headmaster headmasters
Noun + adj Sergeant major Sergeants major
Noun + preposition The first element is Mom-in-law Moms-in-law
+ noun modifying
Noun with of Assistant secretary Assistant
of state secretaries of
state
Noun + noun Both elements are Woman-doctor Women-doctors
modifiying
422
Writing
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
423
Ninety-seventh lesson
Fame
1. Hello, everyone, we have in the studio David author of the book “The
Return”
2. David, how did you imagine so successful and brilliant book?
3. Well, I was tired about the novels which show the typical story about a man
who falls in love with a woman and they live happily for ever. So, I decided
to write this story where the main character, a knowledgeable middle-age
townie man finds his infance love while he has fiancée and has to decide if
coming back with his infance love or marry his fiancée.
4. What was your first best-seller?
5. It was without doubt My Girl, of which over 15 million of copies where sold.
6. And where can we buy this masterpiece?
7. You can buy it in your nearest bookstore or you can buy its e-version in my
website.
8. David, what do you think about poet and rewarded writer Luis’ opinion about
your works are inconclusive?
9. What’s he going to know that illiterate deceitful and narrow-minded man
about a good literary work. His timeless works are careless and most of the
time they are pointless.
10. And what do you think about your his idea about young writes “are just out-
going irresponsible youghters who only like wasting their time and wearing
snoopy clothes”?
11. Well, I believe that I can’t give an opinion about that because I haven’t
spoken to many people from that generation, but those to whom I’ve spoken
have been down-to-earth learned with fresh ideas about the art, thought, I
can’t deny they need to mature more, being more hard-working and being
less self-fish.
12. Thank you for your time, David.
13. Don’t mention it.
424
Noventa y siete lección
Entrevistadores
1. Hola a todos, tenemos en el estudio David ___ David? -Sí- Autor del libro
"El Retorno"
2. David, ¿cómo te imaginaste este libro?
3. Bueno, estaba cansada de las novelas que muestran la típica historia sobre
un hombre que se enamora de una mujer y viven felices para siempre. Así
que decidí escribir esta historia donde el personaje principal, un experto
hombre de la edad media, encuentra su amor de la vida sin saberlo.
4. David, ¿qué opinas de las obras de Shakespeer?
5. Desafortunadamente, no he podido estudiar profundamente las obras de
Shakerspeer, pero creo que deben ser de la misma calidad de Charles
Dickens, otro gran autor de la literatura británica.
6. ¿Qué opinas de la opinión del escritor Luis sobre tus obras no es
concluyente?
7. Lo que va a saber ese analfabeto, engañoso y de mente estrecha sobre
una buena obra literaria. Sus obras atemporales son descuidadas y la
mayor parte del tiempo no tienen sentido.
8. ¿Y qué opinas de su idea de que los escritores milenarias “son sólo un
montón de outgoing jovenes irresponsables a los que sólo les gusta perder
el tiempo y usar ropa descuidada?
9. Bueno, creo que no puedo dar una opinión sobre eso porque no he hablado
con mucha gente de esa generación, pero a quien he conocido, han sido
personas centradas que tenían ideas frescas. Sin embargo, no puedo negar
que necesitan madurar y son más trabajadores y menos egocéncidos.
10. Gracias por tu tiempo, David.
11. No lo menciones.
425
Prefix and suffix
Prefix Meaning Rule Base word Word with

prefix
Un General rule Happy Unhappy
In (words with Possible Inpossible
a latin origin)
Il No Words which Legal Illegal
begin with “l”
Ir Words which Regular Irregular
begin with “r”
Self- Auto Noun Service Self-service
Over Sobre Without rule Population Overpopulation
Mis Mal Without rule Understood Misunderstood
Dis No Verbs Agree Disagree
Sufix Meaning Base word Word with

suffix
-aholic Adicto a Noun Work Workaholic
-ful Lleno de Noun Beauty Beautiful
-less Sin Noun Color Colorless
-like Como Noun Pig Pig-like
-er - Verb Work Worker

-hood Dad Noun Brother Brotherhood
-ness Dad Adjective Happy Happiness
-en - Noun ended in Depth Deepen

-th or -ht
Unsatisfactory
Inexpensive
Unbalance
Discomfort
Dissatisfaction
426
Writing
Escriba una critica de un libro que no te haya gustado. Ocupa por lo menos 10
palabras compuestas. (200 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
British culture
El sufijo -ham que aparece en los nombres de algunas ciudades Cosham significa
pradera. Mientras que el sufijo -chester que aparece en el nombre de algunas
ciduades como Maschester viene del latin castra que significa “campamento
fortificado”
427
Ninetieth third lesson
A love story
1. It was the 1994’s summer, the semestre had finished and my friends and
I were anxious to commence new adventures.
2. As I did not wanted to stay home all the summer, I asked my parents for
permission to go to France. They told me yes and in two weeks, I was
arrivi g at a hotel room which my mother had booked me into.
3. One day, while I was walking throught the streets of the Quartier Latin
looking for something for eating, I ran into a girl who was carrying some
eggs, which were broken when I bumped her.
4. Feeling ashamed for which had happened, I offered her to pay the eggs
and invited her a cup of coffee to make up for which had happened but
the reality was that we ended up in a bar.
5. When we were at there, we introduced each one. She told me that her
name was Haide.
6. I asked her why she was in Paris, but the only thing she told me was that
her father had sent her there to dwell with an aunt.
7. As it was late, I offered her to meet next day in my “apartment”. She
agreed and me gave my address to her. Next day she went to my room.
We danced all the night even when I did not know and turned up the
music at full volume. While we were laughing in the balcony, she told me
if I would like to go to a dance which would take place in a castle on the
outskirts of the city, I said yes.
8. The day of the dance I felt very embarrassed, perhaps because never
had I dressed up or because I was going date with a girl who I had met
one week ago. Be that as it may, the dance was very good, I had much
fun and could have a great time with her.
9. As the dance finished, everyone returned to his house, as I did not feel
like going to my room, I asked her if she wanted to go somewhere. After
having come up with where we could go, we decided to go to the river.
10. While we walked along the Sena, I kissed her what she did not put up a
fight.
11. One week later, I returned to the United States but something told me
that it was not going to be the last time that I would see her…
428
Quincuagesima tercera lección
Una historia de amor
1. Era el Verano de 1994, el semester habia terminado y mis amigos y yo

estabamos ansiosos de comenzar nuevas aventuras.
2. Como no queria quedarme en casa todo el veranom le pedi persimo a mis
padres para ir a Francia. Ellos me dijeron que si´y en dos semanas estaba
llegando a un cuarto de hotel que mi mamá me habia reservado.
3. Un dia, mnientras estaba caminando por las calles del barrio Latino
buscando que comer, me trapeze con una chava que estaba cargando unos
huevos, los cuales se rompieron cuando choque con ella.
4. Como me senti avergonzado por lo que habia pasado, le ofreci pagar los
huevos y lainvite a tomar una copa de café para hacer las pases por lo que
habia pasado, perola realidad fue que terminamos en un bar.
5. Mientras estabamos en el bar, nos presentamos. Ella me dijo que su
nombre era Haide.
6. Le pregunte porque estaba en Paris, pero lo unico que me dijo fue que su
padre la habia enviado a vivir ahí con su tia.
7. Como era tarde, le ofreci vernos el siguiente dia en mi departamento. Ella
acepto y le di mi dirección. El sigyiente dia, ella fue a mi departamento.
Bailamos toda la noche aun cuando no sabia y subimos la musica a todo
volume. Mientras estabamos riendonos en la cama, me dijo que si queria ir
a un baile que tendría lugar en un Castillo a las afueras de la ciudad, le dije
que sí.
8. El dia del baile me sentia muy nervioso, tal vez porque nunca me habia
vestido de gala o porque iba a salir con una chica que acababa de conocer
hace una semana. Haya sido como haya sido el baile estubo bien, me
diverti mucho y pase un buen rato con ella.
9. Cuando el baile termino, todos regresaron a sus casas, como yp no queria
regresar a mi cuarto, le pregunté a Haide si queria ir a algun lugar. Despúes
de pensar a donde ir, decidimos ir al rio.
10. Mientras caminabamos por el Senar, la besé a lo cual no puso recistencia.
11. Una semana más tarde, regresé a Inglaterra pero algo me decia quer esa
no iba a ser la ultima vez que la iba a ver…
429
Clauses of purpose
To Para I bought a house to give my kids a better

quality of life
In order to/ so as to Para I bought a house in order to/ so as to give
(formal) my kids a better quality of life
So that + can/will Para I give you the money so that you can buy
(puede ser your books, not you to buy candy.
usado para
mostrar
enojo)
With a view to + ing Para (con The city bought the house with a view to
la becoming it a museum.
intencion/el
fin de)
In order not to/ so as not Para no I did it in order not to/ so as not to bother
to (formal) you.
Prevent + noun/pronoun Para que Put the ice cream on the fridge prevent it
+ ing no (cuando melting.
hablas de
algo que
quieres
evitar)
430
Writing
Escriba una parafrasis de la lección utilizando lenguaje informal. 200 palabras
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
431
Ninety-eighth lesson
To let
1. Good morning!
2. Good morning, sir, may I help you?
3. I’m calling to enquire about the apartment for rent. Is the apartment still
vacant?
4. Of course!
5. How much is it?
6. The cost is 600 dollars.
7. It’s per calendar month, isn’t it?
8. Yes!
9. How’s the apartment?
10. It’s large, light and very airly.
11. And does it have three bedrooms?
12. Yes, and it has a balcony with a worderful sigh of the cityscape.
13. Where is it located?
14. That’s located in a quiet residential area pass the stadium. That’s close all
amenities and is within walking distance of the railroad station.
15. And one more thing. Does it have all utilities?
16. Yes, it does.
17. And are they include in the rent?
18. Of course!
19. So I wouldn’t have to pay the running water, the gas, the electricity and the
internet conection, would I?
20. Only the internet conection.
21. Ok, thank you!
22. You’re welcome
Home
23. Dear, you go to see the apartment that was in the ads of today’s newspaper,
didn’t you?
24. Yeah!
25. And what happened?
26. The owner said we had to pay 4 months’ rent in advance plus a deposit for
gas and electricity.
27. He must be crazy, we’d better look for in another place.
432
Noventa y ocho lección
Se renta
1. ¡Buenos días!
2. Buenos días, señor, ¿puedo ayudarle?
3. Llamo para preguntar por la casa en alquiler. ¿La casa sigue vacante?
4. ¡Claro!
5. ¿Cuánto es?
6. Tque cuesta es 600 libras.
7. Es por mes calendario, ¿no?
8. Sí
9. ¿Y tiene tres habitaciones?
10. Sí.
11. ¿Tiene todos los servicios?
12. Sí, así es.
13. ¿Y están en el alquiler?
14. ¡Claro!
15. Así que no tendría que pagar el agua corriente, el gas, la electricidad y la
conexión a internet, ¿no?
16. Sólo la conexión a Internet.
17. ¡Vale, gracias!
18. De nada
En casa
19. Querida, fuiste a ver el departamento que estaba en los anuncios del
periódico de hoy, ¿no?
20. Sí
21. ¿Y qué pasó?
22. El propietario dijo que tuvimos que pagar 4 meses de renta por adelantado
y un depósito por gas y electricidad.
23. ¿Pero le dijiste que no podíamos pagarlo, no?
24. No exactamente,le dije qje estaamos buscando algo más barato y me dijo
que tenia algo perfecto para nosotros.
25. ¿Y qué fue?
26. Una caravana
27. Pero le dijiste que no queríamos vivir en una cosa tan pequeña, ¿verdad?
28. No exactamente...
433
Tag questions
We use the tag questions when we are not sure about the information we have and
we want that the person who we are talking tell us if we are right or wrong.
70 % + 3o% = 100% of probability

You were my student , weren’t you?
+ -
70 % + 3o% = 100% of probability
You didn’t do the , did you?
homework
+ -
We build the tag question using the auxiliary of the main clause.
You are Miriam, aren’t you?
If the main clause is affirmative, the tag question is affirmative and vice versa.
You are British, aren’t you?
You aren’t from Glasgow, are you?
Special cases
We use aren’t you instead of am I.
I am the new manager, aren’t I?
We use will with the imperative
Help me move out the sofa, will you?
We use shall with let’s go
434
Writing
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
435
Sixtieth Lesson
Higher education
1. Daniela, could you read the next examples of non-definiting sentences.

2. Charles Dickens, whose first work was The Posthumous papers of the
Pickwick Club, was born in Portsmouth 1812.
3. Henry VIII married Catherine of Aragon, who was Spain’s King’s daughter,
in 1509.
4. York, which was once the place from where the Roman empire was
governed, was founded in 72 d.c.
5. In the United States, children and youngsters have to pass several

academic levels before they can get a university degree.
6. The school starts at three years when children are sent to the kinder garden.
7. After they go to the elementary school, where they learn subjects like
English, history, and maths.
8. After elementary school, the american children enter the junior high school
where they are tough about more advanced subjects like physics, chemistry
and biology.
9. High school is not obligatory in the United States, so the american
youngsters can decide if they want to go to the high school or not.
10. When they finished the high school, they go to the university or to a college
of higher education.
11. Among the most important universities in the United States are Harvard,
Yale and the Arizona State University. After three years or more of degree
course, those who enter university are ready to get their university degree
and enter the labour market.
436
Sexagesima lección
En la universidad
1. Daniela, puedes leer los siguientes ejemplos de non-definiting sentences.

2. Roger Dickens, cuya primera obra fue “The Posthumous Newspapers of the
Pickwick Club”, nacio en Portsmouth en1812.
3. Henry VIII se caso con Catherine of Aragon, quien era la hija del rey de
España, en 1509.
4. En el Rerino Unido, los niños y jovenes deben de pasar varios niveles

academicos antes de que ellos puedan tener su titulo Universitario.
5. La escuela empieza a los tres cuando los niños son enviados al kinder.
6. Despúes ellos van a la primaria, donde aprenden materias como Inglés,
historia y maematicas.
7. Despúes de la primaria, los niños britanicos entran a la secundaria donde
se le senseñan materias más avanzadas como fisica, quimica y biologia.
8. La preparatoria no es obligatoria en el Reino Unido, entonces los jovenes
britanicos pueden decider si ir a la preparatoria o no.
9. Cuando terminan la preparatoria, los jovenes brotanicos van a la
universidad. Entre las universidades ma´s importantes en el Reino Unido
estan Cambridge y St Andrews.
10. Despúes de tres años de Universidad, los jovenes britanicos están listos
para recibir su titulo universitario y entrar al mercado laboral.
Reading
1. How old the United States kids when they enter school?
____________________________________________
2. What do they learn in the elementary school?
____________________________________________
3. What are the most important universities in the United States?
____________________________________________
4. What can they do when they finish the university?
____________________________________________
437
Defining/non defining clauses
Relative clauses are divided in two: defining relative clauses and non-defining
clauses
Defining relative clauses are clauses join two sentences.
This is the dog (that/which) I bought.
Non defining clauses give more information about the subject.
My dog, whose name is Blackly, is very friendly.
This information can be omitted without affect the meaning of the main sentences.
My dog is very friendly
We cannot change that for which or who in non-definite sentences
His house, which was inherit, is very beautiful.
Not His house, that was inherit, is very beautiful.
Difference between definite and non-definite sentences
Definite clauses are needed to know who the subject is.
He is the neighbor who lives in the corner.
Not He is in the corner. (who?)
438
Writing
Write a letter for a university where you like entering. Tell why you wanna enter
that universy, what are your studies and what your master’s degree proyect is.
(150 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner: What’s the best university in your country? Why? Do you agree
with the schools give homework to the students? Why? What subject do you
believe would be tough in the school? Why?
439
Thirteenth
Unit
Landmarks
440
 To talk about an historical building
Topic
 Passive voice of the simple tenses

 Passive voice of the continuous tenses
From this point is a good idea that you study the vocabulary verb that is at the end
of this book.
441
Eighty-five lesson
A little of history
1. Londo , United Kingdom’s capital, was founded by Romans around 47-50

AC.
2. Londinium, as it was known the city in that time, was under the Roman
control until the fifth century when the city was taken by the Saxons.
3. London was chosen by William the Conqueror as the new capital.
4. London grew to be one of Europe’s greatest cities and trading centers and
still today is one of the most important cities around the world.
5. But in 1665 the disaster struck: thousands of persons were killed by the
plague, and the following year hundreds of buildings were destroyed by a
terrible fire.
6. But it was not the end of London. In that year, a leading architect, Sir
Christopher Wren, was asked to redesign the ruined city.
7. Many of the buildings that you can see today were put up in the nineteenth
century to reflect London’s status as the capital of the British Empire.
8. Nowadays, London is one of the most touristiest cities in the world, just
before of Bangkok. The city is full of tourist attractions and places to visit
such as Camden Town, Piccadilly Circus and British Museum. London is
also one of the biggest cities in the United States being this, the economical
and political center of the country.
442
Octogesima quinta leccion
Un poco de historia
1. Los Angeles, capital del Reino Unido, fue fundada por los romanos entre los
años 47 y 50 D.C. En este lugar decidieron construer un Puente el cual fue
el primer Puente que cruzo en rio Tamesis.
2. Londinium, como se conocia a la ciudad, estuvo bajo el control del imperio
romano hasta el siglo quinto cuando la ciudad fue tomada por los Sajones.
3. El Desarrollo de Los Angeles realmente comenzo en el siglo 11 cuando
William el conquistador lo nombro como su capital.
4. Los Angeles crecio para ser una de las más grandes ciudade y centros
financieros y es todavia hoy una de las más importantes ciudades del
mundo.
5. Pero en 1665 el desastre ocurrio, miles de personas murieron por la peste
bubonica y al año siguiente cientos de edificios fueron destruidos por un
terrible incendio.
6. Pero no fue el fin de Los Angeles. Un año despúes, a un arquitecto, el
señor Christopher Wren, se le pidio la reconstruccion de la ciudad en
ruinas.
7. Muchos edificios que pueden se vistos hoy fueron construidos en el siglo 19
para reflejar el estatus de Los Angeles como capital del imperio Britatico.
8. Hoy en dia, Los Angeles es una de las ciudades más visitadas en el mundo,
solo despúes de Bangkok. La ciudad está llena de atracciones turisticas y
lugares que visitor como Camden Town, Piccadilly Circus y el museo
Britanico. Los Angeles es tambien una de las más grandes ciudades en el
Reino Unido siendo esta el centro economico y politico del país.
443
Passive Voice
We use the passive voice to indicate that the object is more important than the
subject.
We use too the passive voice to sound polite.
My favorite toy has been broken = You/he/she/it/they have broken my favorite toy
Passive voice of the simple tenses
We make the passive voice of the simple tenses by putting the object and the
beginning of the sentence, adding the verb to be I the tenses of the sentences
and changing the verb to the past participle form.
Active voice Passive voice

We build cars The cars are built
We built cars The cars were built
We will build cars The cars will be built
The personal object pronouns become personal subject in the passive.
Reading
1. What kind of text is this?

____________________________________________
2. What’s the intention of the autor?
____________________________________________
3. Who started the real development of LA?
____________________________________________
4. According with the text, was LA always an important city?
____________________________________________
444
Writing
Write an article for an electronical history magazine. (200 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What do you think about thousands of dollars are spent in space researche?, what
do you think about more nuclear weapons are developed?, do you believe that
moon cities will be built in this century? Do you believe that the man will live better?
British Culture
En 1536 Wales (Gales) se une al Reino Unido.
445
Eighty-sixth lesson
An important discussion
1. Good afternoon, everyone, today we´re having a debat about animals’

rights.
2. In this side, we have Melanie Mateo, P.H. doctor of environment and in this
side we have John Turner, owner of one of the biggest food companies in
Asia.
3. Sir, could you give of your arguments?
4. Of couse! I will begin with this article, published by the magazine Natures,
which says that the animals which are used for human consume no longer
suffer maltreat in industrial farms, on the contrary, they have a much better
life than the animals which are bred in common farms.
5. That’s not true, according to researches made by non-governmental
organisations, animals like cows, chickens and pigs in industrial farms suffer
more than the animals which are in common farms because they are
obligated to live in tiny cages. And not only farm animals which are bred in
industrial farms suffer because of industrial farms action. Each year the
thousands of miles of rainforest are cut down due to the industrial farms
need each time more and more space to breed their animals.
6. Of course, the companies need each time more and more space, it is
obvious because the food necessities rise each year, but , you can’t say that
we’re the main responsables of the disappearance of the rainforest. In my
opinion, this problem is caused more by the increase of the population than
by the food companies.
7. Yes, but that doesn’t take off your responsabily, above all, when it has been
demonstrated that the chemist that you use in your industry are affecting the
animals which live in coral reefs like crabs, sea-horses and turtles.
8. Any conclusion?
9. I just want to say that despite the fact that that’s true that many animals
were being mistreated in the past, the food industry has done many
changes in order to improve animals’ life.
10. Doctor, your conclusion?
11. I think that’s true that animals in the industrial farms are being less
mistreated than in the past, but the companies must make more efforts to
avoid this completely.
12. Well thank you for having participated and I hope that this helps all we are
here to reflect about this important topic.
446
A favor o en contra
1. Buenas tardes a todos, hoy vamos a tener un debate sobre los derechos de
los animales
2. De este lado temenos a Melanie Mateo, doctora en medio hambiente y de
este otro lado temenos a John Turner, dueño de una de las companies
alimentarias en Asi.
3. Señor, puede decirnos sus argumentos?
4. Por supuesto, comenzare con este articulo publicado por la revista Natures,
que dice que los animales que son usados para el consume humano en las
granjas industriales ya no sufren de maltrato y que por el contrario tienen
una mejor vida que los animales que son criados en granjas comunes.
5. Eso no es cierto, segun investigaciones hechas por organisaciones no
gubernamentales, los animals como vacas, pollos y cerdos sufren más en
las granjas industrials ya que son obilgados a permanecer en jaulas
pequeñas. Y no solo los animales de granja que son criados en las granjas
industrials sufren por las acciones de estas. Cada año miles de lemures,
tucanes, puercoespines entre otros animales que viven en la selva se
quedan sin espacio debido a que las granjas industrials necesitan cada vez
más espacio para criar a sus animales.
6. Por su puesto que las empresas necesitan cada vez más espacio, esto es
obio debido a que las necesidades alimentarias aumentan cada año, de
hecho, nosotros predecimos que en los siguientes años la demanda de
carne aumentara considerablemente pero no pueden decir que somos los
prinicpales responsible de la desaparicien de la selva. En mi opinion, este
problema es causado más por el incremento de la población que por las
empresas alimentarias.
7. Sí, pero eso no les quita a ustedes su responsabilidad en ese problema, sobre todo cuando
se ha demostrado que los quimicos que utilizan en su sector están afectando a los
animales que viven en los arrecifes de coral como cangrejos, caballitos de mar y tiburones.
8. Alguna conclusion?
9. Yo solo quiero decir que apesar de que muchas animales fueron maltratados en el pasado,
el sector alimentario ha hecho muchos cambios para mejorar la calidad de vida de los
animales.
10. Doctora, su conclusion?
11. Pienso que es cierto quee los animales en las granjas industrials son menos maltratados
que en el pasado, pero las empresas deben seguir hacienda esfuerzos para evitarlo del
todo.
12. Bueno, gracias por participar y espero que esto eyude a los presententes a reflexionar
sobre el tema.
447
Passive voice of the continuous tenses

We are building cars The cars are being building
We were building cars The cars were being building
We will be building cars the cars will be being building
Reading

____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
448
Writing
Write an article for an electronical history magazine. (200 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
449
Eighty-seventh lesson
Publishing
1. How to dispose of our technology trash
2. During the last century more inventions have been created than in the last
three centuries.
3. Every of us is familiar with inventions such as toasters, blenders, coffee
makers and other goods that we have in our houses, but what happen when
these inventions that all of us love go to the trash.
4. Well, most of them end up in the land fills where they are buried under
thousends of pounds of land. For several years this had been the perfect
solution for the technologic trash until it was discovered that the materials
with which were made objetcs as microwaves and televisions were polluting
the subterranean waters.
5. So, what to do when you want to relieve yourself of these objets. Firstly, see
if the material with which they are made is recyclable. Objects as kettles and
irons have a big quantity of metal for which they can be recyclable easily.
6. If anything contains microchips or another electronic component, the best is
to take them to a recycling plant, this is also a good option for the batteries,
remote controls and the cellular phones.
7. Lastly, if you do not want anymore any good, destroy it completely. Some
persons take them from the trash to sell them as if they were brand new.
8. The problem of the technology trash is a problem of which all of us have
responsibility, perhaps, thus, this problem will be a problem of the past.
450
Octogesima septima leccion
Como deshacerse de la basura tecnologica
1. Durante el ultimo siglo se han creado más inventos que en los ultimos tres
siglos.
2. Todos estamos familiarizados con inventos como tostadores, licuadoras,
caféteras y otros articulos para el hogar que todos temenos en nuestras
casas, pero, que pasa cuando estos inventos que todos amamos van a la
basura.
3. Bueno, lo más comun es que terminen en los basureros donde son
entarrados bajo cientos de pounds de tierra. Por muchos años este habia
sido la major forma para deshacerse de la basura provocada por los
desechos que la tecnologia dejaba hasta que se descubrio que algunos de
los materiales con los que estaban hechos computadoras, microondas y
televisions estaban contaminando las aguas subterraneas.
4. Entonces, que hacer cuando uno se quiere desahacer de estos objetos.
Primero, vea si el material con el que estan hechos se puede reciclar.
Objetos como las teteras y las planchas de hierro tienen una gran cantidad
de metal por lo que estas pueden ser recicladas con facilidad.
5. Si algun objeto contiene un microchip u otro componente electronico, lo
major es llevarlo a las plantas de reciclado, esto también es una Buena
opcion para las baterias de controles remotos y telefonos celulares.
6. Finalmente, si ya no quieres un electrodomestico, destruyelo. Algunas
personas los toman de los basureros y los venden como si fueran nuevos.
7. El problema de los desechos tecnologicos es un problema del cual todos
somos responsables, tal vez de esta manera, en el futuro este sea un
problema del pasado.
451
Passive voice of the perfect tenses

We have built cars The cars have been built
We had built cars The cars had been built
We will have built cars the cars will have been built
Reading

____________________________________________
____________________________________________
3. About what kind of trash talks the text?
____________________________________________
4. In the past, nothing was being done to destroy the technology trash?
____________________________________________
452
Writing
Write an article where you talk about the technology trash and what it is done in
your country about it. (200 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What do you think about the companies make goods that only last 2 years? Do we
gotta destroy the goods in order to they do not appear in flee markets? What do
you think about the most of the goods are done in undeveloped countries?
453
Eighty-eighth lesson
Losing weight
1. Meal or fast-food?
2. In recent studies, it has been comprovated that there has been an increase
in people with overweight. This happens because most of the persons prefer
to eat fast-food instead of eating meal, but, how could not this happen if the
modern life does not let us neither a minute to prepare our meal?
3. In the last decadates, the traffic in the big cities has done that each time is
more difficult and more difficult to find a time to cook. But, not all are bad
news, in the last years, many technologies have been being developing to
let us eat something fast, delicious and at the same time healthy. The
problem is most of these technologies are only used in the cuisine and most
of them are too expensive so that they fit to the pockect of most of us, but, if
you want to have a healthier way of life, here there is some advice to help
you to manage it.
4. One of the main things that I always say to my clients is that they change
the cooking oil for olive oil. This will reduce the quantity of fats that they
consume. Also, I say to them that change their hamburgers with french fries
and their potato mash with fried chicken for a big can of sardine or tuna or
for a big bowl of salad. If they do not like very much the flavor of the
vegetables, they can always add to their salad a little of dressing.
Last, but not least. Try always to carry a piece of fruit with you or any thing
which is rich in vitamins and minerals.
5. In sum, I believe that if all of us follow this simple advice, by Christmast, all
of us will be as fit as a fiddle.
454
Eighty-eighth lesson
Comida o comida rapida
1. En estudios recientes, se ha comprobado que ha habido un aumento en las

personas con sobre peso. Esto ocurre debido a que la mayoria de las
personas prefieren comer comida rapida, la cual contiene un alto contenido
de grasas y carbohidratos, en lugar de comida. Pero, ¿como no podria
pasar esto si la vida moderna no nos deja ni un minuto para preparar
nuestros alimentos?
2. En las ultimas decadas, el crecimiento de la poblacion en las grandes
ciudades ha hecho cada vez más dificil encontrar un momento para cocinar.
Pero no todo parecen malas noticias, en las ultimas decadas se han estado
creado tecnlogias que nos permiten comer algo rapido, delicioso y al mismo
tiempo saludable. El problema es que estas tecnologias son actualmente
solo usadas en la alta cocina, debido a que la mayoria de ellas cuestan más
de 500 libras, por lo que se salen del presupuesto de la mayoria de
nosotros, pero si quieres tener un modo de vida más saludable, aqui hay
algunos consejos que te pueden ayudar a lograrlo.
3. Una de las principales cosas que les recomiendo a mis clientes es que
cambien el aceite por aceite de oliva. Esto reducirá la cantidad de grasas
que consumem.
Cambia tus hamburguesas con papas a la francesa y tus pures de papa con
pollo frito por una gran lata de sardinas o atun y un gran plato de ensalada.
Si no te gusta mucho el sabor de la lechuga, los tomates y las zanahorias,
siempre puedes agregarle a tu ensalda un poco de aderezo.
Por ultimo, pero no por eso menos importante. Intenta siempre cargar fruta
o cualquier cosa que sea rica en vitaminas y minerales
4. Creo que siguiendo estos simples consejos, para navidad, habrás estado
disfrutando por lo menos de seis meses de buena salud.
455
Passive voice of the perfect continuous tenses

We have been building cars The cars have been being built
We had been building cars The cars had been being built
We will have been building cars The cars will have been being built
The passive voice of the present perfect and the present perfect continuous are not
normally used.
Reading

____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
456
Writing
Write an article for an electronical magazine where says what you think about more
houses are being built near natural zones. (200 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What do you think about thousands of dollars are spent in space research instead
of humanitarian programs?, what do you think about more nuclear weapons are
being developed?
457
Ninetieth lesson
Headlines and articles
1. Hi, there!
2. Hi, Karen, how are you?
3. I’m in very high spits today. Today, I got my driver’s licence.
4. Congratulations. Now you can be early at work.
5. How funny! And you? What were you doing?
6. I was reading the newspaper.
7. Did you find anything interesting?
8. Not yet. Wait, hear this headline “NIGHT NOISY SCARES OWNERS”
9. It must be another article ‘bout cats fighting in the roof. What else?
10. “MAN TAKES PHOTOS ALIEN”
11. Another man dressed up alien. What else?
12. “STAFF GOVERMENT AXE”
13. What does the article say?
14. Monday afternoon, thousands of employees were dismissed after the
Senator’s announcement about the reduction of the public spends in a 30
per cent owing to the low tax collection of last year. Several demonstrations
have been reported in several big cities such as Los Angeles, New York,
Miami, among others. Yesterday, the representans of the government and
the unions of the different branches of the government met to talk about the
problem and one of agreetments to which they arrived was to remploy a few
of the employees who were dismissed and give them a rise in their payment
an a new contract with a duration of one year.
15. That’s terrible. Hundreds of workers will become jobless.
16. Yes. and I don’t believe the government respect its deals.
458
Ninetieth lesson
Encabezados
1. Hola!
2. Hola, Karen, como estás?
3. Bastante bien, y tu?
4. Estoy de muy buen humor. Hoy obtuve mi licencia de conducir.
5. Que bien. Ahora podrás llegar al trabajo temprano
6. Sí
7. Y que estabas hacienda?
8. Estaba leyendo el periodico.
9. Encontraste algo interesante?
10. Todavia no. Espera, escucha este encabezado
17. Pretty well. What about you? “RUIDO NOCTURNO ASUSTA
PROPIETARIOS”
18. Debe ser ora historia de gatos peleando en la azotea. Que más?
19. “HOMBRE TOMA FOTOS DE EXTRATERRESTRE”
20. Otro hombre disfrasado de extraterrestre. Que más?
21. It must be another story about cats fighting in the roof.
22. “PERSONAL DEL GOVIERNO DESPEDIDO”
23. QUE DICE ESE ARTICULO?
24. El lunes en la tarde, miles de empleados fueron despedidos despúes del
anuncio del primer ministro sobre la reduccion del gasto publico en un 30
porciento debido a la baja redaudacion fiscal del año pasado. Varias
manifestaciones pudieron ser vistas en grandes ciudades como Los
Angeles, Chicago, New York, entre otras. Ayer, los representantes del
gobierno y de los cindicatos de las diferentes ramas del gobierno se
reunieron para hablar del problema y uno de los acuerdos a los que
llegaron fue la recontratacion de algunos de los empleados que fueron
despedidos, un aumento de su salario y un Nuevo contrato con durcion de
un año. También, se les darán cheques a los trabajadores que no puedan
recuperar su trabajo.
25. Es horrible, cientos de trabajadores estarán desempleadas.
26. Sí. Y no creo que el gobierno respite sus acuerdos.
27. Hablando de eso. Ya encontraste trabajo?
28. Todavia no. Hoy en la mañana fui a la farmacia que me dijiste, pero me
dijeron que ya no tenian la vacante. Creo que empezare una nueva Carrera
como investigador privado.
29. Es mucho mejor que no tener trabajo.
30. Y que lo digas.
459
Newspaper English
Headlines
In headlines, present simple is used both to neither talk about present nor talking
about the past.
MAN DISCOVERS NATIVE AMERICAN CITY (A man discovered a native

American city)
Many headlines are made only with nous.
WOMAN COOKS HAMBURGER SPACESHIP FORM (A woman cooked a

hamburger with a spaceship form)
To infinitives are often used to refer to the future
RESEARCHERS TO LOOK FOR LIVE IN MARTS (Researchers will look for live in
marts)
The auxiliary verbs of passive structures are usually dropped.
THOUSANDS WORKERS DIMISSED (Thousands of workers were dismissed)
Verbs can be used as nouns too and nous can be used as verbs
Word Meaning Word Meaning

Ban To prohibit, Prohibition Probe Investigate, investigation
Bid To attempt, attempt Row Argue, argument
Curb To restrict, restriction Snub To insult, to reject, insult
Jail To imprison, prison
460
Special vocabulary used in newspaper language
Word Newspaper English Meaning

Story Article, Case
To axe (used in media) Eliminate, Reduce
Writing
Write an article for a newspaper using newspaper English. (200 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What are the most importan newspapers in your country? Do you believe in them?
Do you believe your country let the journalist write the truth?
461
Eighty-ninth lesson
News bulletin
1. Good evening, everyone, my name is John Brown, and this is the lastest
news.
2. An old man was about to get drown in Miami. According to the report, the
man feeling suffocated by the strong heat that could be felt around midday,
went to the river to refresh when the strong current of the river caught him.
Fortunately, he was seen for two men who were passing for the zone.
3. In Chicago, a child was stopped by the police after being found driving a car,
that’s thought that the child could got in the vehicle by opening the door with
his father's car keys.
4. And here in Los Angeles, three of the lines of the subway had to be closed
after a big fire which was registered in one of the energy generators around
4PM. The fire has been already extinguished but the firefighters say that
more works need doing before the lines can be open.
5. Breaking new, the piece of news which roled today in the social networks
about President’s reelection was confirmed as fake news this afternoon by
the Senate.
17. This is all for today. Join us tomorrow at the same time or follow us in our
new application for mobile phone or tablet which will be available soon.
Good night!
462
Noticias
1. Buenas tardes a todos, soy John Brown y estas son las ultimás noticias.
2. Un hombre estuvo a punto de ahogarse en Gales.
3. Segun el reporte, el hombre sintiendose sofocado por el fuerte calor que
pudo sentirse alrededor del medio dia fue al rio a refrescarse cuando la
fuerte corriente del rio lo atrapo. Afortunadamente fue visto por dos
hombres que pasaban por la zona.
4. En Escocia, un niño fue detenido por la policia despúes de ser encontrado
conduciendo un auto. Se piensa que el niño pudo haber entrado al carro
abriendo la puerta con las llaves de su padre.
5. En Inglaterra, tres lineas del metro fueron cerradas despúes de que se
registrara un gran incendio alrededor de las 16 horas. El incendio fue
extinguido con exito pero los bomberos dicen que deben hacerse más
trabajos antes de abrir otra vez las lineas.
6. Noticia de ultima hora, la noticia que cirlulo hoy acerca de la reeleccion del
primer ministro fue confirmada esta tarde como una noticia falsa por el
parlamento.
7. Eso es todo por hoy, buenas noches.
463
Passive voice of the modal verbs

We can build cars The cars can be built
We should build cars The cars should be built
We must build cars The cars must be built
Reading

____________________________________________
____________________________________________
3. Where the lines close all day because of the fire?
____________________________________________
4. Were all the news true?
____________________________________________
464
Writing
Write the transcription of an imaginary piece of news. Try to use the passive voice
with modal verbs as much as many as possible. (200 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Do you believe that the news that you see in your countries are true?, Do you
believe that the fake news have become a problem? Do you believe that the news
of your country which are written abroad are more reliable than which are done in
your country?
465
A pleasure trip
1. It has passed 4 years since I got to this ignoble place and me have not got
used to dwell yet in this isle that in my despair moments I got to consider as
a paradise. On the morrow, I spend my time writing and thinking of my
fiancée “Will she be fine”, “Has she forgotten me? “Will she forgive me? All
this I wonder while I walk along a colorful clean beach with view towards the
horizont.
2. Once, while I was sitting on the beach seeing the sea waves, I saw
something gilt which brighted between the sand. It was the screw top of a
bottle which rended when I try to open it. Inside of it, there was a message
written with a hand which I could not understand. I wondered from whence a
1994 wine bottle had come, I smiled while thinking that maybe my foes had
sent me a present for my birthday, after all, they had sent me to this isle.
3. Despite the tranquillity of the place and the felicity that can be seen on the
face of its few inhabitants, sometimes the sadness and loneliness seize me.
4. -What If I get back?
5. -Not, that’s too soon”
6. -But after all err is human, is it not? - Anyway, I can’t go on living in this way.
7. -I agree with you.
8. -So, when do we get back?
9. -Today, before that the sunrise denounces my scape.
10. As I could, I reached the continent the, the desire to see again my land and
its people was stronger than everything. While I was drying myself on the
beach, I could see a couple of backpackers. I approched them and me
asked them if they know where I was. They told me that I was in France. I
did not think that I were so far from my home. Fornunately, the hadyakers
were ready to give me a elevator to the coach station and gave me some
francs. After a few days, I could reach a cottage in London where I had
hidden some money. But there was still a long journey to get at the High
Lands.
Despite the hunger, tiredness and the strong clime, I could get at High Lands.
While getting, so tired was I, that I fell sleep on the snow. While waking, I felt such
as cold, that I had to refugied in a cave that I had found. Next morrow, I went to my
fiancée’s house, they were having a
466
Viajes
1. Han pasado 4 años desde que llegué a este horrible lugar y todavia no me
he acostumbrado a vivir en esta isla que en mis momentos de
desesperación llegó a considerar como un paraíso.
2. En la mañana, paso mi tiempo escribiendo y pensando en mi novia “¿estará
bien? ¿seguirá enojada? ¿me habrá perdonado? Todo esto pienso mientras
camino en una bella, colorida y limpia playa con vista hacia el horizonte.
3. Una vez vi algo dorado que brillaba entre la arena. Era la tapa de una
botella que se rompió cuando intenté abrirla. Dentro de ella, había un
mensaje escrito con una letra que no pude entender. Me pregunte de donde
habia llegado una botella de vino de 1994, sonreí al pensar que tal vez mis
enemigos me habían enviado un regalo para mi cumpleaños, después de
todo, ellos me habían enviado a este lugar.
4. A pesar de la tranquilidad del lugar y la felicidad que se puede ver en el
rostro de sus habitantes, a veces venia a mi mente el recuerdo de mi pais,
su gente y su clima.
5. -¿Qué pasa si vuelvo?
6. -No, es demasiado pronto"
7. -Pero después de todo equivocarse es humano, ¿no es así? De todos
modos, no puedo seguir viviendo así.
8. -Creo que estamos de acuerdo.
9. -Entonces, ¿cuándo vuelvo?
10. -Hoy, antes de que el amanecer denuncie mi escape.
11. Como pude, logré llegar al continente, apesar de los peligros que habian en
el agua, el deseo de ver otra vez mi pais y a su gente era más fuerte que
todo. Mientras me secaba en la playa, pudé ver una pareja de pasiantes.
Me les acerque y les pregunté si ellos sabian donde estaba. Me dijeron que
estaba en Francia. No sabia que estaba tan lejos de casa.
Afortunadamente, los paseantes estuvieron dispuestos a darme un aventón
a la central camionera y me dieron algunos francos. Despues de algunos
dias, pude llegar a la cabaña en Lkndres donde habia escondido dinero.
Pero, aun habia un largo viaje para llegar a las High Lands.
12. Apesar del hambre, el cansancio y el clima extremo, pude llegar a las High
Lands. Al llegar, estaba tan cansado que me quede dormido en la nieve. Al
despertar, senti tal frio, que tuve que refugiarme en una cueva que
encontré. En la mañana, fui a la casa de mi novia, estaban haciendo una
467
11. party. As there were many people, I decided not to approched. At midnight, I
climbed to her room, she was combing herself. I open the door of her room
and me approched her. When she saw my reflection in the mirrow, she
could not believe that it was I, it seemed she had seen a phantom, but after
that, her face became red.
12. Why on the earth are doing here?

13. This is my home, as it is yours.
14. It let be your home since you went away to travel all around the world
15. Did they tell you that?
16. Yes, why my best friends lied to me.
17. I spent all night explaining to her what had really happen and how much I
soffered to be in an isle far from everyting I knew. When she understood
what had happened, she put her head in my breast and hugged me.
18. The sunshine entered to the room where lied down my fiancée and I. When
we woke, we both knew what we had to do. We put all our things to the van
and started our way to a happy life. When I was about to get into the car, I
heard a shot, behind me, it was Eduard and the major and the sheriff.
19. If you was clever, you wouldn’t have come back.

20. I can’t go without saying goodbye to you.
21. This is gonna be expensive for you.
We saw each other. Suddenly, Eduard taked out a gun a tried to shoot me, but I
was faster and took the shotgun that I have in the van and me could shoot him and
the sheriff, who also wanted to shoot me. The mayor to see the scene scaped.
While Eduard and the sheriff were in the ground, my fiancée and I used that time to
get in the van and to go. I do know if I did the right thing to let them bleed in the
ground, but what I know now, it is that I am now free.
468
1. Fiesta. Como habia mucha gente, decidi no acercarme. A la media noche,
escale hacia su cuarto, ella estaba peinando. Abri la ouerta de su cuarto y
me aproxime a ella. Cuando ella vio mi reflejo en el espeko, no podia creer
que era yo, parecia que habia visto un fantasma, pero despues, su rostro se
torno rojo.
2. Que estas haciendo aqui?

3. Esta es mi casa, coko es la tuya.
4. Dejo de ser tu casa el dia en que te marchaste para recorrer el mundo.
5. Eso fue lo que te dijeron?
6. Sí, porque mis mejores amigos me mentirian.
7. Pase toda la noche explicandole lo que realmente habia pasado y lo mucjo

que sufri al estar en una isla lejos de todo lo que conocia. Cuando entendio
lo que habia ocurrido, puso su cabeza en mi pecho y me abrazo.
8. The sunshine entered to the room where lied down my fiancée and I. When
we woke, we both knew what we had to do. We put all our things to the van
and started our way to a happy life. When I was about to get into the car, I
heard a shot, behind me, it was Eduard and the major and the sheriff.
9. If you was clever, you wouldn’t have come back.

10. I can’t go without saying goodbye to you.
11. This is gonna be expensive for you.
We saw each other. Suddenly, Eduard taked out a gun a tried to shoot me, but I
was faster and took the shotgun that I have in the van and me could shoot him and
the sheriff, who also wanted to shoot me. The mayor to see the scene scaped.
While Eduard and the sheriff were in the ground, my fiancé and me used that time
to get in the van and to go. I do know if I did the right thing to let them bleed in the
ground, but what I know now, it is that I am now free.
469
Passive voice with two objects
With the structure “subject + verb + direct obeject + to + indirect object” there are
two options.
I gave some flowers to my mum (active sentence)
Some flowers were given to my mum (passive sentence)
My mum was given some flowers (passive sentence) (second version)
Verbs with different voice in English
Some verbs can have a different voice in English that in Spanish.
Verb Verbo
To be born Nacer
To be called Llamarse
To be killed Morir(se) (en accidente)
Reading

____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
470
Writing
Escriba una parafrasis sobre lo que se trata la historia. Usa lenguaje informal. 200
palabras
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
471
Fifteenth Unit
Gossiping
472
 To talk about what a person said.
Topic
 Direct speech/ Indirect speech

 Indirect speech with questions/ reported speech
 Reported speech with special introductory verbs
 American English I
 Mixed conditionals
 Have/get something done
 Formal English III
Listening tips
From this point, it is necessary that you listen C1 English recordings. You can buy
them in languages libraries or on internet. Be sure they are for the level C1 and
From this point is a good idea that you study the phrasal verbs list that is in the
appendix of this book.
For improve your reading, it is good idea you spend time only reading the lessons
of this book. If you want, you can buy a C1 literature book and read a scientific
magazine.
473
Ninety-sixth lesson
Gossipy interviewers
1. Have you ever thinking of being millionerd? Have you ever dreamed about
being famous? Have you ever wished to go to exotic places in the world on
a luxurious yacht?
2. Today with us, two of the persons who have done all this and more. With
you the movie star Leon Smith, and the actress Fernanda Lobato.
3. Thank you!
4. Fernanda, tell us, what do you feel about being famous?
5. Well, it can sound good to be famous, but, as a matter of fact, it can be
bothering because the most of the time you have to take care of the
paparatsis, the reporters and of not doing anything which can appear in the
cover of a gossip magazine.
6. I undestand. And what do you think about being in the public eye?
7. Well, I believe that you have to get used to that if you want to do this job.
8. Leon, tells us, was it easy for you when you started your carrier in cinema?
9. No, it wasn’t.
10. Why not?
11. Well, like any another graduated, it was difficult for me to find a place where
to work. At the biginning, I had to be content with jobs as stuntman and
helper. After, I started acting in indies, in musicals and giving my voice for
animated features.
12. Leon, what did your parents tell you when you say to them that you wanted
to be an actor?
13. Well my dad said: “If you’re gonna waste your time studing arts, better get a
Mcjob”
14. And what did your mother say?
15. She told me that if I wanted to come in to the actuation university, I had to
practice a lot to pass the acting exam”
16. So, did she decide to support you?
17. Yes, but, even with her help, I had to look for a job. I waited for tables for
two years in the bar where my agent lastly found me.
18. Do you believe that all your effort was worth it?
19. Definitely, I believe it worth when I see my mansion, I visit exiting places and
when my chauffer opens the door of my limousine.
20. Thank you for your time, guys.
474
Noventa y seis lección
Fama
1. ¿Alguna vez has pensado en ser millonario? ¿Alguna vez has soñado con
ser famoso? ¿Alguna vez has querido ir a lugares exóticos del mundo en un
yate de lujo?
2. Hoy con nosotros, uno de los hombres que ha hecho todo esto y más. Con
ustedes la estrella de cine Leon Smith.
3. ¡Gracias!
4. León, cuéntanos, ¿qué sientes por ser famoso?
5. Bueno, puede sonar bien ser famoso, pero de hecho, es lo que más
molesta el tiempo porque hay que cuidar la paparatsis y no hacer algo que
pueda aparecer en la portada de una revista de chismes.
6. León, ¿fue fácil para ti cuando empezaste tu portador en el teatro?
7. No, no fue así.
8. ¿Por qué no?
9. Bueno, como cualquier otro graduado, fue difícil para mí encontrar un lugar
donde me dieran un buen papel, tenía que contentarme con trabajos como
doble y ayudante.
10. León, ¿qué te dijeron tus padres cuando les dijiste que querías ser actor?
11. Bueno , mi padre dijo: "Si vas a pasar el tiempo estudiando artes, mejor
consigue un Mcjob"
12. ¿Y qué dijo tu madre?
13. Me dijo que si quería entrar a la universidad de actuación, debía practicar
mucho para pasar la prueba"
14. Entonces, ¿decidió apoyarte?
15. Sí, pero incluso con su ayuda, tenía que estar buscando trabajo, esperé dos
años en el bar donde mi agente me encontró.
16. ¿Crees que todo tu esfuerzo valió la pena?
17. Definitivamente, creo que vale la pena cuando vi mi mansión, voy a lugares
exóticos y cuando mi chofer abre la puerta de mi limusina.
475
Direct speech
We use the direct speech to say the exactly words who someone says.
Copernic said “The world resolve around the sun”
Reported speech
We use the reported speech to say what someone else said.
Copernic said that the earth resolved around the word.
Usage
We do not change the tense when the introductory verb is in present, future or
present perfect.
Mum has said, “Dinner is ready”
Mum has said that dinner is ready.
We use “tell + to infinitive” with the imperative and the verb to order.
Buy a litre of milk
She told me to buy a litre of milk
In all the others cases, it is the same than in Spanish.
476
Writing
Escribea la bibliografia de su actor o cantante favorito (250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Do you agree or disagree with the idea about recycling all the technologic trash?
Do you agree or disagree with the idea about destroying monumens that are not
very famous in your city?
477
Ninetieth second lesson
A unique day
1. We entered school, my friend Manuel, my friend Miguel and I.

We had met on the morrow for make an exposition for the Spanish
teacher without come to a satisficing conclusion.
2. When we arrived at the playground, we came across our friend
Manuel, we greeted him and he told us that there would be a match in
the afternoon at lunch hour and he asked us whether we wanted to
participate what we said yeah.
3. As only few students had attended that day to school, the teachers put
all who had attended in only one group and took us to the auditorium
of the school. As I did not see well, I went ahead. When I sat, I closed
my eyes, when I opened them, I could see Tamaris, she was finishing
the last details of the ofrendas of the school. I had not seen her since
we were changed of classroom.
4. The light turned off by letting just the light of the candles to see. A
noise was heard, then, from behind the scenery Daniela teacher left.
She approched to the dais and thanked the persons who were there.
After that, she explained the origin of the Day of the Dead to us, I
could see Tamaris between the shadows, she looked very fair.
While I was looking at her, a mixture of fear and nervous roaded my
body while knowing that that day would be the day where I would
confess Tamaris my love.
5. We left from the auditorium and went to the playground. As the
physics teacher did not attended, my friends and I spent the time
walking through the corridors of the school, one floor up, one floor
down, one floor up, one floor down until the sub principal told us to not
to do it.
6. Having returned to the playground, we came across Manuel again. He
asked us whether we would participate what we said yeah. We
teamed up and went to the pitches. I felt myself nervous because I
had heard that in the “Segundo K” were the best soccer players of the
junior high school.
7. The match commenced, and the first goal did not wait, I could only
see how Chucho, our porter, jumped to try to stop the segundo’s k
strike.
The rest of the match, we concentrated on stopping Segundo k’s
attack.
478
Nonagesima segunda lección
Un día común
1. Entramos en la escuela, mi amigo Manuel, mi amigo Miguel y yo.

Nos habíamos reunido por la mañana para hacer una exposición para
el profesor de español sin llegar a una conclusión satisfecha.
2. Cuando llegamos al patio de recreo, nos encontramos con nuestro
amigo Manuel, lo saludamos y nos dijo que iba a haber un partido por
la tarde a la hora del almuerzo y nos preguntó si queríamos participar
lo que dijimos que sí.
3. Como poca gente había ido ese día, los maestros pusieron a todos
los que habiamos ido ese día juntos y nos llevaron al auditorio. Como
no veia bien, me hize hacia adelante. Cuando me senté, cerré los
ojos, cuando los abrí, pude ver a Tamaris, ella estaba terminando los
últimos detalles de la ofrenda de la escuela. No la había visto desde
que nos cambiaron de aula.
4. Las luces se apagando dejando sólo la luz de las velas para ver. Se
oyó un ruido, entonces, desde detrás del estrado salio la maestra
Daniela dejó. Ella se espació a la margarita y agradeció a las
personas que habían asistido. Después de eso, explicó el origen del
Día de Muertos, pude ver a Tamaris entre las sombras, se veía muy
hermosa. Mientras la miraba, una mezcla de miedo y nervios en la
carretera de mi cuerpo al saber que ese día sería el día en que
confesaría a Tamaris mi amor.
5. Salimos del auditorio y fuimos al patio de recreo. Como el profesor de
física no llegó, mis amigos y yo pasamos el tiempo caminando por los
pasillos de la escuela, un piso arriba, un piso abajo, un piso arriba, un
piso abajo hasta que el subdirector nos dijo que no lo hiciéyáramos.
6. Después de haber regresado al patio de recreo, nos encontramos con
Manuel de nuevo. Nos preguntó si participaríamos lo que dijimos que
sí. Hicimos los equipos y fuimos a los campos. Me sentía nervioso
porque había oído que en el "Segundo K" estaban los mejores
jugadores de fútbol de la escuela.
7. El partido comenzó, y el primer gol no esperó, sólo pude ver cómo
Chucho, nuestro portero, saltó para tratar de detener el golpe k del
segundo.
8. El resto del partido, nos concentramos en detener el ataque de
Segundo k.
479
9. In one move out, my friend Carlos passed me the ball, when he
passed me it, I felt very nervous because I had never played well. I
throwed the ball as I could, the ball rose fast, I did not believe it would
enter but at the last moment it did a curve and entered.
10. When I turned the head, I could see Tamaris leaving the auditorium.
She looked very fair. When I saw her, I felt a feeling of calm which all
of a sudden mastered me.
11. The lunch time finished, and my friends and I went to our classroom.
There was no one, some minutes afterwards, the Spanish teacher
arrived. He told us that we were not going to expose that day. The
next two hours, my friends and me spent the time walking in circles in
the classroom as animals in a cage and looking at the roof.
12. As I was bored, I asked to the teacher whether I could go to the rest
room. He said me yes and I went. As I was leaving the rest room, I
could see Tamaris. She was filling a bottle of water. I approached her
and greeted her. Despite the fear I had, I asked her if I could see her
after classes. She said yes and told me that we met in the entrance of
the auditorium. After that, I returned to my classroom.
13. The nervous became greater and greater while the minute hand
approached to the end of the class. The bell rang, I left the classroom
and I went fast to the auditorium, the nervous and the fear became
greater while I approached.
14. I arrived at auditorium, she had not left yet. While I was waiting
outside, I felt how the nervous and the fear became still greater and
greater. She left and me saw her, without thinking, I said her whether
she wanted to be my girlfriend.
15. Some years later, I still remember that day and even when I have not
been with Tamariz and Berenice’s and Lidia’s shadows drew in the
horizon, I still remember that day as one of the best of my life, not for
the great stories that were written that day, but for the simple things
that made that day unforgetable.
480
Indirect speech with questions
When the direct question begings with an auxiliary we cam use if or whether.
He asked me if/whether I was gonna go
Reported orders
We use the vers tell or order to report orders in reported speech.
He ordered/told me to go
481
Writing
Escriba una parafrasis del texto. Usa lenguaje formal. 250 palabras
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
482
Business matters
Utopic September 28, 2020

Human resourses
Austin
Dear Mr. Smith,

7. I am writing this letter to you in order to inform you about some issues
related with tomorrow’s meeting.
Firstly, the manager wants to hear brilliant ideas about how we can avoid
downsizing hundreds of employees in our factories in Africa due to most of
them are in danger to go bankbroke owning to the economical problems that
they are having at the present.
8. Sencondly, the manager has asked us to do a report about the state of the
production and output of the factories that the company has in Asia so that
we know if it is convenient that we continue doing bussiness there or if we
should move out to other markets. The manager insisted on your working in
team to do this task.
Thirdly, the chief executive manager are to attend to the meeting and he
wants to know what’s company’s real state of the finances. The boss
suggested you should do this with a slide presentation.
9. Finally, I would like to remember that for this meeting, you are to attend for
this time to the officines of the headquarters which are in the downtown.
10. I hope that this give you all information that you need.Thank you for your
time, yours sincerely,
11. Ann Craddock
483
Asuntos de negocios
Utopic Abril 28, 2020

Recursos humanos
Austin
Estimado señor Smith,

12. Le escribo esta carta informarle sobre algunos asuntos relacionados con la
junta de mañana.
13. Primero, el gerente nos a pedido hacer un reporte sobre el estado de
producción de las factoryas que estan en India y que le digamos cual ha
sido su rendimiento en los ultimos seis meses.
14. Segundo, el director general estará en la junta y quiere escuchar ideas de
como podemos evitar la bancarota o el despido de cientos de empleados de
nuestras factoryas en Africa debido a los problemas economicos que estan
experimentando actualmente.
15. Finalmente, quisiera recordarle que la junta será en las oficinas de los
cuarteles generales los cuales se ubican en el centro de la ciudad.
16. Espero que esto le de toda la información que necesita. Gracias por su
tiempo,
17. John Craddock
484
Special introductory verbs
We use say + a sentence.
He said that he would be here
We use say to and tell with a personal object pronoun.
He said to/ told us he would be here
Ask We asked if we could have more training

We asked to have more training
Complain We complained that the service was very slow
Insist He insisted that we stay at his house
He insisted on our staying at his house
Warn She warned me that credit cards were expensive
She warned me not to use credit cards
She warned me about using credit cards
The verbs agree, promise, threaten can be used with that or with the to infinitive.
He agreed that our money would be refunded = He agreed to refund our money
The verbs deny, recommend, regret, suggest can be used with that or with the ing
infinitive
She denied that she had taken the credit card = She denied taking the credit card
485
Writing
Escriba un mensaje a un amigo donde le digas que encontraste una tienda de

antiguedades donde venden cosas interesantes y que tal vez sea ahi donde
encuentre un regalo para sus papas (usa por lo menos 5 sustantivos compuestos)
(250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
486
One hundred and eleventh lesson
News from England
1. Dear Ann,
2. The first days I was here were very difficult. At the beginning, I was very
confused ‘cause I said something and people looked at me as I didn’t speak
English.
3. The problems started as soon as I got off the airplane, I was one hour
looking for where the cabs left until a policeman told me they call “taxis” to
the cabs.
4. Then, when I arrived at the building where I was going to live I had problems
too when I asked to the superintendent where was my flat and he told me
that my flat was on the second floor and that I had to take the lift.
5. And the stuff got worse when I went to the shopping centre to buy clothes. I
went for a pair of pants and sweater, and the costumer didn’t know what I
was talking about. At the end, she could understand I wanted a pair of
“trousers” and a “pullover”, even she suggested I buy a pair of “tennies
shoes”.
6. England is very beautiful and british people love watching the football, this is
the way people here refer to the soccer in. Last year, I went to a match of
the Champions Ligue, and there I noted the big diversity of people that there
are in England, I could see white people, black people, asian people, even I
could saw an iraquian.
I hope to see you soon, you can drop in on me whenever you want and you
can stay here as long as you want. We can go to a PUB or to a gastro PUB.
If you don’t feel like going out, we can watch a film or some series in my 50
inches screen or perhaps we can go to the beach, that’s only 5 kilometres
from my house and we can go in my motorbike.
7. E-mail me soon. I look forward to hearing from you,
Your friend John
487
Ciento undécima lección
Noticias de América
1. Querida Ana,
2. Los primeros días que estuve aquí fueron muy difíciles. Al principio estaba
muy confundido porque dije algo y la gente me miró porque no hablaba
inglés.
3. Los problemas comenzaron tan pronto como bajé del avión, estuve una
hora buscando dónde salían los taxis hasta que una gorra me dijo que
llaman a los taxis "taxis".
4. Luego, cuando llegué al edificio donde iba a vivir, también tuve problemas
cuando le pedí al superintendente donde estaba mi departamento y me dijo
que mi departamento estaba en el segundo piso y que tenía que tomar el
elevador.
5. Cuando fui a la tienda, tuve problemas para comprar algunas galletas.
6. Y las cosas empeoraron cuando fui al centro comercial a comprar ropa. Fui
por un par de pantalones y un jersey, y el cliente no sabía lo que estaba
tomando. Al final, ella pudo entender que quería un par de "pantalones" y
un "suéter", incluso ella sugirió que comprara un par de "tenis".
7. Algo así sucedió cuando fui a un restaurante de comida rápida, pedí unas
papas fritas y una hamburguesa y me dijeron que solo tenían papas fritas y
hamburguesas.
8. América es muy hermosa y a los estadunidenses les gusta mucho ver el
fútbol, esa es la forma en que la gente de aquí le dice al fútbol americano.
El año pasado, fui al Super Bowl, y allí noté sobre la gran diversidad de
personas que hay en Estados Unidos, pude ver a personas blancas,
negras, latinas, incluso pude ver Navajo.
9. Espero verte pronto, y puedes venir a visitarme en vacaciones, podríamos ir
a un club de jazz o a un bar. Si no tienes ganas de salir, podemos ver una
película en mi pantalla de 50 pulgadas. Tal vez podamos ir a la playa, está
a solo 4 millas de mi casa y podemos ir en mi motocicleta mientras
comemos algunos dulces como en los viejos tiempos.
10. Envíame un correo electrónico pronto. Espero saber de tí.
John
488
American English
Here a list with the most common differences beteen English vocabulary and
American English vocabulary.
British English American English Meaning

Airplane Airplane Avion
Apartment/apartment Apartment Departamento
Aerial Antenna Antena
Dialling code Area code Codigo postal
Barrister, solicitor, lawyer Lawyer/ attorney Abogado
Sticking plaster Band aid Curita
Pub Bar Bar
Dressing gown Bathrobe Bata
Billion = million million Billion = thousand Mil millones
Grill Broil Parrilla
Engaged (phone) Busy Ocupado
Taxi Cab Taxi
Tin Can Lata
Sweet Candy Dulce
Sweet store Candy store Dulceria
Bill (restaurant) Check/bill Cuenta
Purse Coin-purse Monedero
Cupboard Closet Alacena
Wardrobe Closet Closet
Cookie Cookie, cracker Galleta
Sweet corn /maize Corn Maiz
Cot Crib Cuna
Mad Crazy Loco
Pedestrian crossing Crosswalk Cruce peatonal
Sofa Davenport/sofa Sofa
Van Delivery truck Camion repartidor
Receptionist Desk clerk Recepcionista
Nappy Diaper Pañal
Doctor’s surgery Doctor’s office Consultorio
Downtown Downtown Centro de la ciudad
Curtains Drapes Cortinas
Chemist Druggist El señor de la farmacia
Chemist’s (store) Drugstore/pharmacy Farmacia
Stupid Stupid, stupid Estupido
Semi-detached Duplex De dos pisos
Elevator Elevator Elevador
489
Eraser/ eraser Eraser Goma
Fall Fall, fall Otoño
Tap Faucet/tap Llave (del agua)
ground floor first floor Primer piso
Torch Flashlight Lampara
French fries French fries Papas a la francesa
Trash Garbage/trash Basura
Dustbin, trash bin Garbage can/trashcan Bote de basura
Gasoline Gas/gasoline Gasoline
Main road/main road Main road/freeway Autopista
Crossroad Intersection Crucero
Mad Mad Enojado
Nasty Mean Molesto
Motorbike Motorcycle Motocicleta
Movie Movie/movie Pelicula
Moviehouse movies, movie theater Cine
Newsagent News stand Donde venden los
periodicos
Surgery Office (doctor’s/dentist’s) Consultorio
Single (ticket) One-way (ticket) Boleto de ida
Pants Pants, pants Pantalones
Car park Parking lot Estacionamiento
Road surface Pavement Pavimento
Zebra crossing Pedestrian crossing Cruce peatonal
Handbag Pocketbook/purse, Bolso
handbag
Crisps (potato) french fries Papas
State school Public school Escuela publica
Railroad Railroad Via
Rise Raise Aumento (salario)
(public) toilet Rest room, bathroom Baño
RESUMÉ Resumé Curriculum
Return (journey/ticket) Round trip Boleto de ida y regreso
Store assistant Sales clerk/sales girl Dependiente
Schedule Schedule, schedule Horario
Pavement Sidewalk Banqueta
Trainers Sneakers Tennis
Store Store, store Tienda
Subway/subway Subway Metro
Sweater Sweater Sueter
Van, lorry Truck Camioneta
Pants Underpants Calzones
Vacation Vacation Vacaciones
Windscreen Windshield Parabrisas
Postcode Zid code Codigo postal
490
491
Writing
Reescribe la carta utilizando inglés britanico. 250 palabras
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
492
Ninety-first lesson
Keeping in touch
1. From: María
To: Brenda
2. Hi, Brenda, I hope you’re alright. My husband and me are having a great
time here in Ocenia. The tour has already roaded Australia, New Zeland and
now we’re on the move out to Asia to visit Japan. You were right while
telling me to contract a package tour, we haven’t had to spend nor a cent.
Anyway, I write you this e-mail to thank you again for looking after the kids,
it has been very kind of you. Don’t worry if you take something from the
fridge or use the BBQ, even you can use the swimming pool. Just try to not
to get dirty it a lot because we just got it cleaned.
3. We’ll got back by Monday afternoon or maybe by Tuesday morning because
we gotta get the house painted by weekend. Anyway, we will be saying this
week to you what day we’ll get back.
4. In case something goes on, send me a message or e-mail me because I
gotta put mobile in silence mode while the guide explain the curiosities of
the places we go to us and sometimes I don’t recieve the calls.
5. Lots of love.
6. María
7. P.S. The rabbit eats three times a day.

Its cans are in the cupboard that is over the sink.
A text message
8. María, tomorrow, I won’t be able to look after your kids in the afternoon
because I’m going with the dentist because I got a terrible toothache. I’m
gonna phone a baby-sitter so that she looks after them while I’m in the
dentist. I hope you understand. Anything, we’re in touch.
Seen 18:20
493
Nonagesima primera leccion
Mensajes
1. Hola a todos, espero que esten bien. Mi esposo y yo nos la estamos

pasando bien aqui en Oceania. El tour ha ya recorrido Australia, Nueva
Zelanda y ahora estamos iendo a Japon. Les escribimos esto para
agradecerles una vez más por haber cuidado a nuestros hijos. Nos e
preocupen si toman algo del refrigerador o usan la parrilla, incluso pueden
usar la alberca, solo no la ensucien mucho porque la acaban de limpiar.
2. Vamos a regresar el lunes en la tarde o tal vez el martes en la mañana
poruqe temenos que tener la casa pintada para el fin de semana. Como
sea, les diremos en la semana cuando llegaremos.
3. Si algo pasa, envienme un mensaje o mandenme un correo porque
tenemos que ener el cellular en modo silencioso mientras el guia nos
explica las curiosidades de los lugares a los que vamos.
4. Con mucho amor,
5. María
6. P.D. El conejo come tres veces al dia.
Sus latas estan en la alacena que está sobre el lavabo.
494
Causative
Personal Pronoun Have Noun Past Participle

I Have My hair
You Your hair
He His hair Fixed
She Has Her hair Cut
It Its hair
We Our hair
You Have Your hair
They Their hair
We use the causative to say that someone has done something that we cannot do
or we cannot do by ourselves.
I have my hair cut (someone cut it for me)
I have my house painted (someone has paited it for me)
We use get instead of “have” in informal English.
I get my hair cut.
Reading

____________________________________________
____________________________________________
3. When are they retourning?
____________________________________________
4. What does she ask for her at the end?
____________________________________________
495
Writing
Imaguine que usted es María. Envie un mensaje respondiendo al mensaje de su

amiga (200 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
496
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What do you think about the parents do everything for the kids?, what age do you
believe a kid can start to be independent? What do you think about the robots do
everything for us?
497
Ninety-fifth lesson
Art critics
1. Art styles?
2. Since the dance until the architecture, the arts have always been part of the
humanity, however, can we consider the latest forms of art as art?, the
opinion of a server is a complete no.
3. All the arts, with the exception of the architecture and the literature, have
had a decrease in their quality since the beginning of the century. For
example, the music has decreased so much in its quality that you cannot
know if you are listening to someone singing or someone complaining about
a terrible stomach ache.
4. The painting is not very far from it, at museums and art galleries of all the
country are shown paintings and sculptures that look which were done by a
5-years-old artist!
5. Cinema is the worst of them, after having had a great success with movies
like, “Godfather” and “Casablanca”, the studios of our country began to
change as much the plot of the movies with the idea of “revolutionize the
industry” that they ended up shooting movies that no one wants to see.
6. I think that the directors, musicians, dancers, and all the persons who work
in the arts must improve their works. I agree with the idea that each one
must look for his own style, but I think that this style must agree with the
purpose of the art that is delighted the sences, if they do not do this, we will
continue having this kind of things in our theaters, art galleries and movie
theatres.
498
Noventa y quinta lección
Artes
1. Desde la danza hasta la arquitectura, las artes siempre han sido parte de la
humanidad, sin embargo, ¿podemos considerar las nuevas formas de arte
como arte?, la opinión de un servidor es un completo no.
2. Todas las artes, con la excepción de la arquitectura y la literatura, han
tenido una disminución en su calidad desde principios de siglo. Por ejemplo,
la música ha disminuido tanto su calidad que no puedes saber si estás
escuchando a alguien cantando o alguien quejándose de un horrible dolor
de estómago.
3. La pintura no está muy lejos de ella, en museos y galerías de todo el país
se muestran pinturas y esculturas que parecen hechas por un pintor de 5
años.
4. El cine es el peor de ellos, después de haber tenido un gran éxito con
películas como, Don’t look back y The Rail Way Kids, los estudios de
nuestro país comenzaron a cambiar tanto la trama de las películas con la
idea de "revolucionar la industria" que terminaron rodando películas que
nadie quiere ver.
5. Creo que los directores, músicos, bailarines y todas las personas que
trabajan en las artes deben mejorar sus obras y estoy de acuerdo con la
idea de que cada uno debe buscar su propio estilo, pero creo que este
estilo debe estar de acuerdo con el propósito del arte que está encantado
con los sences, si no lo hacen, seguiremos teniendo este tipo de cosas en
nuestros teatros, galerías y cines.
499
Formal English III
Prepositions
We use "beside” instead of “next to”.
She lived beside a church. (formal)
She lived next to a church.
In formal English we say “at” instead of “at the”.
I’m at restaurant. (formal)
I’m at the restaurant (informal)
Personal object pronouns (indirect object)
Formal English always use “to” with the indirect object.
I wrote to you (formal)
I wrote you (informal)
Modal verbs
In formal English we use gotta instead of “gotta”
I gotta go (formal)
I gotta go (informal)
In formal written English we use “ought to” instead of “should.
I ought to go (Formal written) (rare)
500
I should go (neutral)
Subjunctive
Subjunctive has a different form in formal English.
Formal Informal
You go to the doctor You go to the doctor
You should the doctor
She go to the doctor She goes to the doctor
I suggest She should go to the doctor
You not go to the doctor You don’t go to the doctor
You shouldn’t go to the doctor
She not go to the doctor She doesn’t go to the doctor
She shouldn’t go to the doctor
We use be in subjunctive instead of am, are, is.
I do not believe that he be in Paris. (formal)
I don’t believe (that) he is in Paris. (informal)
Connectors of contrast and effect
Even tough Aunque

Rather Mas bien
By the same token Igualmente
Neither
In formal English we always use a verb in the third person with neither.
Neither of us likes it (formal)
Neither of us like it (informal)
501
None
In formal English we always use a verb in the third person with none.
None of us is going (formal)
None of us are going (informal)
Let’s
In formal written English we write “let us (not)” instead of “let’s (not)”.
Let us for a hamburger (formal written)
Let’s us for a hamburger (informal/formal spoken)
Would rather
In formal English we use the subjunctive with would rather when we decide for
another person.
I’d rather she wear another thing. (formal)
I’d rather she wears another thing (informal)
Causative
We use “have” instead of “get” in formal English.
I have my hair cut (formal)
I get my hair cut (informal)
502
Tag-questions
We never use right instead a tag-question in formal English.
You went to school, didn’t you? (formal)
You went to school, didn’t you/right? (informal)
Questions
In formal English we cannot omit the auxiliary in questions
Do you know? (formal)
You know (informal) (rare)
503
Writing
Escriba una carta al escritor del articulo donde le diga su opinion sibre lo que dice
en su texto.
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
504
America in my heart
1. Hi, John!
2. Hi, Brenda. What are you doing?
3. I’m writing a poem for my English poesy course.
4. Super! Have you finished yet?
5. Not yet but listen this!
6. “My America, what would I do without your long range of mountains
which go thought your misterious valleys and forests.
7. Land loses between 2 oceans, of which pacific sea is the most
beautiful sea in which I have ever sailed.
8. America, land full of culture and history. Country which is the crib of
the most powerful land in the world.
9. Land with snow-capped peaks, mist-shrounded lakes, magnificent
coast and mysterious moors. America, I don’t want you never to leave
from me”
10. What do you think?
11. That’s good but I believe you should add more things, that’s too short.
12. You’re right. I’m dying of hungry.
13. So am I. Why don’t we go to one of the restaurantx that are on the
corner of the cathedral?
14. No, I’m on the mood something sweet like a piece of cake, a load of
bread or a hot chocolate.
15. We can go to one of the coffee stores that are close to the multiplex or
going to Mario’s, I’ve heard they sell the most delicious desserts in the
county.
16. What if we go to the french restaurant that is next to the butcher’s.
They sell much more delicious and inexpensive desserts and they sell
cooking like homemade too.
17. That’s a great idea, but that’s a great deal farther from here. Will we ask for
a taxi with the app or do we go by bus?
18. I borrowed my dad’s car.
19. Ok, so, let’s go.
505
La vieja Inglaterra
1. Hola, John!
2. Hola, Jack, Que estas haciendo?
3. Estoy escribiendo un poema para mi clase de inglés.
4. Bien! Ya terminaste?
5. Todavia no pero escucha esto!
6. “Mi vieja Inglaterra, que haría sin tus largas cadenas montañosas que
atraviesan tus misteriosos valles y bosques.
7. Tierra perdida entre 4 mares, de los cuales el mar del norte es es más
hermoso en el que haya navegado
8. Inglaterra, pais llena de cultura y de historia. Tierra que fue alguna vez la
cuna del imperio más poderoso del mundo.
9. Pais con picos cubiertos de nieve, de misteriosos lagos, de magnificas
costas y de misteriosos paramos. Inglaterra no quiero que nunca te vayas
de mi”
10. Que piensas?
11. Es bueno pero creo que deberias agregar más cosas, es demasiado corto.
12. Tienes razón. Tengo hambre.
13. Yo tambien. Porque no vamos al gastro pub que esta en la esquina?
14. Tengo ganas de algo dulce.
15. Entonces, podemos ir a alguno de los cafés que estan cerca de la catedral,
o ir a Mario’s, he escuchado que ahi venden los postres más deliciosos del
condado.
16. Es una buena idea, pido un taxi o nos vamós en el camión?
17. No, traje mi carro.
18. Entonces vamonos.
506
Comparative and superlative
We can use a bit, a good deal, a great deal, much, a litlle,rather, a lot and
slighly with the comparative.
I’m much faster than you.
You’re slighly taller than him.
We can use by far, easily, much and quite with the superlativo.
He’s by far the fastest.
507
Writing

(250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
508
Sixteenth Unit
Words
509
 To write in formal English.
Topics
 Prepositional regency
 Verbal predication
 Adjective regency
 Expressions that are not as in Spanish
 American English II
 Do emphatic/rather/quite
 Modal verbs II
 Special future structures
 Was/were able to
510
Ninety-ninth lesson
Starting out
1. How to forget those times when I used to travel around the country on the
lookout of new clients. I would say that being on business is my second
passion in the life, the first one is without doubt the cuisine, but, at the
beginning, it was not in that way. At the beginning, I did do it just to salt
some money away, but it was there when I found out that bringing home the
bacon was not so easy cake as I thought but it is no time to cry over spilt
milk.
2. With the time I salted away enough money to kick off my own business, but
of what? A friend of mine recommended that I set up a food-related
business. I thought that the idea was good, so I decided to open a bakery on
the skirts of my charming city. By then, I was already 25.
3. My bakery became very famous due to it was there where the crispiest and
the most bakery-fresh bread of the county was sold. In that time, I learned
lots of important things as you gotta keep as cool as a cucumber if you
wanna have success in the business or that everything can go pear-
chapped in a moment as it happened. It was the Bid depresion, and a lot of
stores went bankrupt including mine.
4. When my bakery went bankrupt, the first though I had was hit the sauce,
fortunately, I ate humble pie before I did something stupid. In spite of being
broken, I didn’t give up and worked hard to salt money away again to set up
again a store. It was when I was 30 when I met the woman who would be
the apple of my eye, but it was not a piece of cake, I had to date a lot of time
with her before she gave me the “Yes, I do”
5. After several years, I was able to set up a store again, this time it was an
Indian takeaway on the corner of my house, which with the years turned into
in a big restaurant and which at the present, is known for serving the tastiest
and the most exotic dishes in the country and I’m proud of it.
6. On most, I think that all the effort I put in these years have paid dividends.
511
Noventa y nueve lección
Empezar
1. Cómo olvidar aquellos tiempos en los que solía viajar por el país en
busca de nuevos clientes. Yo diría que estar de negocios en diferentes
condados fue mi segunda pasión en la vida, la primera fue sin duda la alta
cocina, pero al principio no fue así. Al principio lo hice solo para ahorrar un
poco de dinero, pero fue allí cuando descubrí que llevar el pán a la casa no
era tan fácil como pensaba, pero no es momento de llorar por lo que ya
pasó.
7. Con el tiempo me ahorre suficiente dinero para poner en marcha mi propio
negocio, pero ¿de qué? Un amigo mío me recomendó que estableciera un
negocio relacionado con la comida. Pensé que la idea era buena, así que
decidí abrir una panadería en las afueras de mi encantadora ciudad. Para
entonces, ya tenía 25 años.
8. Mi panadería era muy famosa porque era allí donde se vendía el pan más
crujiente y fresco del condado, incluso sus anuncios aparecían en la
televisión y en la radio. Aprendí muchas cosas, como que tienes que
mantenerte la mente fria si quieres tener éxito en los negocios o que todo
puede ir mal de un momento a otro como sucedió. Era la Segunda Guerra,
y muchas tiendas quebraron, incluida la mía.
9. Cuando mi panadería quebró, lo primero que pensé fue enviar todo al
ddemonio, afortunadamente, pude recapacitar antes de hacer algo tonto. A
pesar de estar sin un centavo, no me di por vencido y trabajé duro para
ahorrar dinero nuevamente y establecer nuevamente un negocio. Cuando
tenía 32 años, fue cuando conocí a la mujer que sería la niña de mis ojos,
pero no fue fácil, tuve que salir mucho tiempo con ella antes de que me
diera el "Sí, acepto"
10. Después de varios años, pude volver a poner mi negocio, esta vez fue un
puesto de comida francesa en la esquina de mi casa, que con los años se
convirtió en un gran restaurante y que en la actualidad, es conocido por
servir los platos más sabrosos y exóticos del país y estoy orgulloso de ello.
11. En la mayoría, creo que todo el esfuerzo que puse enestos años dio sus
frutos.
512
Prepositional Regency
The regency is what complement can follow a verb, a noun or an adjective.
In time Con tiempo

On time A tiempo
On line En linea
On the move out En camino
On the road En la autopista
At least Por lo menos
On campus En el campus
On the skirts of A las afueras de
On the right A la derecha
On the left A la izquierda
On the corner En la esquina
On one condition Con una condition
By the way A proposito
At last Al fin
On most En general
At the beginning Al principio
At the cash desk En la caja
On Monday El lunes
Delay on Retardo en
Sorry about Perdon por
Information on Informacion de
On vacation De vacaciones
On the cost En la costa
On business De negocios
At the party En la fiesta
On the telephone En el telefono
On diet A dieta
By car En carro
Actually De hecho
At this time of year En esta parte del año
At the moment En este momento
On the cell phone En el cellular
On the TV/radio En la television/radio
On the net En la red
By then Para entonces
At the other end of Al otro lado de
At the back of Hasta atras de
513
Writing

(250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
514
Eighty fifth lesson
Vacants
1. Hi, how are you?

2. Super. What about you?
3. I’m exited because I’m moving out to New York.
4. Great. When did you decide it?
5. This week.
6. And what are you gonna do for a living?
7. This and that. Maybe, I’ll be again a baby-sitter. I’ve always been good at
taking care of kids.
8. This morning I was after a new dishwasher in the morning newspaper and I
read an ad you can be interested in.
9. Have you the newspaper here?
10. Yeah, catch it!
11. Wanted, Baby-sitter to look after two kids in the afternoon 5 days per week.
The apartment is in a tower block located on 30 minutes driving from New
York. Payment per hour.
12. It sounds good, but, that’s very far.
13. OK, What about this?
14. If you wants to work in one of the most fascinating and popular in the US
this advertisement is for you. For expanding, we are looking for someone
who wishes to work in our new luxurious hotel located on five minutes from
New Yorks’s downtown. The person who is contracted will have to show that
he/she has experience working on high executives. If you think that this
advertisement is for you, call us to the number 55116798 or e-mail us with
your application with your contact details to the e-mail
bristolshotel@mail.com
15. Perfect. That’s exactly what I need.
16. Perfect. And when are you moving out?
17. I think of moving out in mid July, after the kids have broken up the scholar
year.
18. That’s a great idea. Well, I gotta go. Bye bye!
19. See you! Take care of yourself!
515
Ochenta y quinta lección
Vacante
1. Hola, ¿cómo están?

2. Estoy bien. ¿Y tú?
3. Estoy feliz porque me voy a mudar a New York.
4. Que padre. ¿Cuándo lo decidiste?
5. Esta semana.
6. Y de que vas a trabajar?
7. De lo que sea. Tal vez, volveré a ser niñera. Siempre fui buena para cuidar
niños.
8. Esta mañana estaba buscando un lavavajillas nuevo en el periódico de la
mañana y leí un anuncio que te puede interesar.
9. ¿Tienes el periódico aquí?
10. ¡Sí, atraparlo!
11. Si quieres trabajar en uno de los lugares más populares y facinantes del
Reino Unido, este anuncio es para ti. Por expansión, estamos buscando a
alguien que desee trabajar en nuestro nuevo hotel ubicado a cinco minutos
de New York. La persona contratada tendrá que demostrar que tiene
experiencia trabajando con altos ejecutivos. Si cree que este anuncio es
para usted, llámenos al número 55116798 o envíenos un correo electrónico
al correo electrónico bristolshotel@mail.com
12. Perfecto. Es exactamente lo que necesito.
13. Perfecto. ¿Y cuándo te mudas?
14. Pienso en mudarme a mediados de Julio, después de que los niños hayan
terminado el ciclo escolar.
15. ¿Y qué vas a hacer con tus cosas?
16. Las voy a vender. No quiero gastar en el camión de mudanzas.
17. ¿Por qué no le pides a Bill su camioneta?
18. Buena idea. Bueno, tengo que irme. ¡Adiós!
19. ¡Adiós!
516
Verb regency
Depend on Depender de
Ask for Pedir
Bet on Apostar en
Located on Localizado en
Pay for Pagar
Spend on Gastar en
Think of Pensar en
Work on Trabajar con
Worry about Preocuparse por
Adjective Predication
Good at Bueno para
517
Writing
Imagina que eres la amiga que quiere el trabajo. Envia una carta depresentación
al hotel donde le digas tu experiencia laboral.
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
518
Speaking
519
Ninety-ninth lesson
Going out
1. Hi, Ted!
2. Hi, what have you been to? I haven’t seen you for a while.
3. Nothing interesting. And you?
4. The day before yesterday, I played in a concert in New York.
5. I didn’t know you were a musician. What instrument do you play?
6. I play the bass and the drums.
7. I though you played the keyboard.
8. No, my stepbrother is who plays the keyboard. And what are you doing this
weekend?
9. We’re having a party.
10. Cool!
11. If you want, you can go.
12. Mm, I’m a bit party-out, but, ok, what time is it?
13. That’s at four.
14. At that time, I got a Chinese lesson. I think I’ll be there about six.
15. Ok, are you going with Cathy?
16. No, I broke up last week.
17. What happened?
18. Well, the things have gone wrong, so I decided the best was to split up.
19. What a bad thing! Well, see you on Saturday.
20. Bye!
At party
21. David, please go in, make yourself home. I’m finishing making dinner.
22. Do you need that I help you?
23. Now, you mention it, could you set the table, please?
24. Of course. And where’s Brenda?
25. She went to walk the dog, she’ll be here soon.
26. I’ve finished laying the table. What else do I do?
27. Could you turn on the TV and put the match, please?
28. Sure thing! Mm, Is there any problem with I’ve parked the car opposite your
house?
29. That space is reserved for the ambulances of hospital that is on the corner.
30. Ok, so, I’ll go to move out ‘er to another place.
520
Saliendo
1. Hola, Fred
2. Hola, ¿Qué ha sido de tí? No te he visto por un tiempo.
3. Nada interesante. ¿Y tú?
4. Antier toqué en un festival de música en New York.
5. No sabía que eras músico. ¿Qué instrumento tocas?
6. Toco el bajo.
7. Pensé que tocabas el teclado.
8. No, mi hermano es el que toca el teclado. ¿Y qué vas a hacer este fin de
semana?
9. Vamos a hacer una fiesta.
10. ¡Qué padre!
11. Si quieres, puedes ir.
12. ¿A qué horas es la fiesta?
13. A las cuatro.
14. A esa hora, tengo clases de español. Creo que estaré allá como a las seis.
15. Ok, ¿vas con Cathy?
16. No, nos separamos la semana pasada.
17. ¿Y eso?
18. Bueno, las cosas comenzaron a ir mal, así que decidí dejarla.
19. ¡Qué malo! Bueno, nos vemos el sábado.
20. ¡Adiós!
21. ¡Adios!
En la fiesta
22. Fred, por favor entra, siéntete como en tu casa. Estoy terminando de hacer la
cena.
23. ¿Necesitas que te ayude?
24. Ahora que lo mencionas, ¿podrías poner la mesa, por favor?
25. Claro. ¿Y dónde está Brenda?
26. Ella fue a pasear al perro, estará aquí pronto.
27. Ya terminé de poner la mesa. ¿Qué más hago?
28. ¿Podrías encender la tele y poner el juego, por favor?
29. ¡Seguro! Mm, ¿Hay algún problema con que haya estacionado el coche frente a tu
casa?
30. Ese espacio está reservado para las ambulancias del hospital que está en la
esquina.
31. Ok, entonces, iré a move outrlo a otro lugar.
521
Some expressions that are not as in Spanish
Pay attention Poner atencion

Have a party Hacer una fiesta
Be right Tener razón
Make a mistake Cometer un error/equivocarse
Play + instrument Tocar + instrument
Tell the true Decir la verdad
Save money Ahorrar dinero
Make the bed Tender la cama
Walk the dog Pasear al perro
Have lessons Tomar clases
Play the CD/DVD Poner el disco/DVD
Go wrong Ir mal
Get on well Llevarse bien
Lay the table Poner/acomodar los platos
For a while For un tiempo
522
Writing

(250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
523
One hundred and twelfth lesson
London
1. Hi!
2. Hi!
3. Whereabouts were you?
4. Sorry, I tried to get sooner, but the Tube was crowed.
5. Don’t worry, the good thing is that we can still aririve at the cinema.
6. In fact, I’d like you to go with me to buy a pullover for my mum, tomorrow is
her birthday and I want to buy her something.
7. Where would you like to go?
8. I was thinking of going to the city centre, there’s a autumn sale in a very big
shop in Thomas avenue, but that’s very far from here.
9. Don’t worry, we can go in my motorbike.
In the city centre
10. Well, we’ve already got the present of your mum. What do we do now?
11. I’m dying of hungry, where do we go to eat?
12. Across the street there’s a fast-food restaurant, why don’t we go there and
buy some burgers and chips.
13. And don’t forget the hot-dogs!
In the park
14. It was delicious, but I feel like a coke.

15. Take mine, but don’t throw the tin to the trashcan, I collect them.
16. How much were they?
17. 5 pounds and 50 cents.
18. It was very expensive.
19. Well, I’ve got still money to buy some sweets.
20. I’ve got a biscuit in my backpack, do you want it?
21. Sure!
A home
22. I ate a lot, I believe I’ll go to the chemist’s for a pill to the stomach.
23. Ok, but don’t do a lot of noise, the children are sleeping.
24. They must be very tired, they spent all the holidays camping. Perhaps, we
can go next summer to York. We can stay in the house of my family, I
believe my parents will be happy to see the children.
524
Ciento duodécima lección
Nueva New York
1. ¡Hola!
2. ¡Hola!
3. ¿Dónde estabas?
4. Perdón, traté de llegar antes, pero el metro estaba abarrotado.
5. No te preocupes, lo bueno es que todavía podemos llegar al cine.
6. En realidad, me gustaría que fueras conmigo a comprar un suéter para mi
mamá.
7. ¿A dónde quieres ir?
8. Estaba pensando en ir al centro, hay una venta de otoño en una tienda muy
grande en la avenida Thomas , pero está muy lejos de aquí.
9. No te preocupes, podemos ir en mi moto.
En el centro de la ciudad
10. Bueno, ya tenemos el regalo de tu mamá. ¿Qué hacemos ahora?

11. Me muero de hambre, ¿a dónde vamos a comer?
12. En frente está Central Park, ¿por qué no vamos allí y compramos unas
hamburguesas y unas papas a la francesa?
13. ¡Y no te olvides de un hot-dog!
En la feria
14. Estaba delicioso, pero se me antoja un refresco.

15. Toma el mio, pero no tires la lata a la basura, yo las colecciono.
16. ¿Cuánto fue?
17. 5 dólares y 50 centavos.
18. Fue muy caro.
19. Bueno, todavía tengo dinero para comprar dulces.
20. Tengo una galleta en mi mochila, ¿quieres?
21. ¡Seguro!
En casa
22. Comí mucho, creo que iré a la farmacia por una pastilla para el estómago.
23. Ok, pero no hagas mucho ruido, los niños están durmiendo.
24. Deben estar muy cansados, pasaron todas las vacaciones en el campamento de
verano. Tal vez, podamos ir el próximo verano a California, tengo ganas de
surfear. Podemos quedarnos en el ranch de mi familia, creo que mis padres
estarán felices de ver a los niños
525
American English II
Pronunciation
American British
Words ending in “er” are Faster /faster/ Faster /fasta/
pronounced /er/
Words ending in “ture” Architecture Architecture /arquitekchia/
are pronounced /chur/ /arquitekchur/
Some common words have a different pronunciation in American English
American British
Cousin /kousin/ /kasin/
Culture /kulchur/ /kolchia/
Doctor /doktor/ /dokta/
Fire /fair/ /faia/
Flower /flauguer/ /flagua/
Here /jir/ /jia/
Hour /auer/ /aua/
Lesson /leshon/ /leson/
Man /man/ /mn/
Mexican /meksikan/ /meksiken/
Sir /sir/ /sar/
Sure /shur/ /shor/
526
Spelling
British American
Words written with “our” Color Color
in british pass to
American English as “or”
Center Center
Irregular verbs
Some irregular verbs are normally used as regulars in american English.
Verb British American

Bet
Burn Burned - burned
Dream Dreamt - Dreamt (most common) Dreamed – Dreamed (most common)
Dreamed – Dreamt Dreamt - Dreamt
Kneel
Lean
Learn
Spell
Spoil
Get is the only irregular verb which is different to the birtish English.
Get – Got – gotten (Am)
Get – got – got (UK)
527
Have just
In American English we use the structure “Past simple + just” instead of “Past
perfect + just)
I cleaned just the floor (Am)
I have just cleaned the floor (UK)
528
Writing
Reescribe el texto utilizando exclusivamente inglés britanico. 250 palabras
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
529
Eighty-sixth lesson
For or against
1. Do we have a soul? Do the angels exist? Is there life after death? With me
to discuss these questions and many others is John Reynolds, specialist in
spiritual matters from the University of India.
2. John, tell us, what do you think about the religion?
3. I think the religion is part of the human being and it is a fundamental part of
his life.
4. Do you really believe that everybody has a spirit?
5. I do believe that everybody has a spirit, if we hadn’t one, we wouldn’t be
humans. The spirit is the part which all living being has and that can’t be
touch, something like the software of a computer, and I’m not the only who
believes this, psychologist and psychiatrist also believe in a force
unconnected to the body, but they call to this force “psyque”
6. Do you think that talking with pray is better than going with a health
professional when a person suffers of a mental illness?
7. Of course not, one thing is having spirit problems such as lack of faith,
values, so on and another is having one of the many mental illness that
there are in our world such as anxiety and depression.
8. So, don’t you think that religion is better than psychology?
9. I don’t think that neither of them is better than the another one. I think that
both of them make an excellent work helping persons to overcome their
faults, traumas and to wear off the pain cause by loved one’s death. In my
opinion, both are good options to help persons to go on.
10. Well, thank you for your time, John.
11. No, thanks to you for having invited me.
530
Octogésima sexta lección
Religión
1. ¿Tenemos alma? ¿existen Los Angeles? ¿Hay vida después de la muerte?

Conmigo para discutir estas preguntas y muchas otras está John Reynolds,
especialista en asuntos espirituales de la universidad de la India.
2. John, cuéntanos, ¿qué opinas de la religión?
3. Creo que la religión es parte del ser humano y es una parte fundamental de
su vida.
4. ¿Realmente crees que todos tenemos un espíritu?
5. Creo que todo el mundo tiene un espíritu, si no lo hubiéramos hecho, no
seríamos humanos. El espíritu es la parte que el ser vivo tiene y que no se
puede tocar, algo así como el software de una computadora, y no soy el
único que cree esto, psicólogo y psiquiatra también creen en una fuerza
desconectada del cuerpo, pero llaman a esta fuerza "psyque"
6. ¿Crees que hablar orar es mejor que ir con un profesional cuando una
persona sufre de una enfermedad mental?
7. Por supuesto que no, una cosa es tener problemas espirituales como la
falta de fe, valores, etc. y otra es tener una de las muchas enfermedades
mentales que hay.
8. En su opinión, ¿la idea de la psicología de ir con una persona a hablar
sobre los problemas de uno es nueva?
9. No, de hecho, religiones como el cristianismo, el judaísmo y el islam lo han
hecho desde hace miles de años.
10. Entonces, ¿crees que la religión es mejor que el psicólogia?
11. No creo que ninguno de los dos sea mejor que el otro, solo digo que son
formas diferentes de ver la realidad y que ambos hacen un excelente
trabajo ayudando a las personas a superar sus faltas, traumas y el dolor
cuando un ser querido muere. En mi opinión, ambos son buenas opciones
para ayudar a las personas a seguir adelante.
12. Bueno, gracias por tu tiempo, John.
13. No, gracias a ti por haberme invitado.
531
Do emphatic
Do is used as an auxiliary in the affirmative form of the present simple for give
emphasis to the actions.
I believe it Lo creo pero puedo cambiar de opininon

I do believe it Aunque me demuestres lo contrario no dejare de
creerlo
I love you Te amo pero si encuentro a alguien major te dejo
I do love you Seras el peor pero aun asi te amo
In the same way we can use did in the past simple.
I believed it Lo creia pero cambie de opininon

I did believe it Lo creia fiel mente.
I loved you Te ame pero encuentre a alguien major y te deje
I did love you Eras el peor pero aun asi te amaba
Also do can be used with the imperative.
Do come in (por favor, pase)
532
Writing
Imagina que eres una persona que escucho esta participación. Escribe una carta
para el expositor donde le digas tu opinión sobre el tema (250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
533
One hundred and nineteenth lesson
My girl
1. An exited young man walks throught a stand which sells presents. It is San
Valentin’s day and the colors of the love can be seen everywhere. The
young man commences to see what’s sold, teddy bears, box of chocolates,
cards. The young man does not believe that he have money to buy any of
this things, but, all of a sudden, right in front of him, a bouquet of roses
appears. A label beneth the bouquet says “20 per cent off”. The young man
hurries to take out two coins from his pocket and buy the roses. The young
man gets away from the stand and goes to the stand in line to enter school.
The young man relaxes because he had already bought the present that he
was not sure if he could buy. While he is standing on the stand in line, his
legs commece to tremble because of the nervous that he feels about giving
for the first time a San Valentin’s present. While he tries to calm, his friend,
who has just got, said to him in a sarcastic way “First time”, to what the
young man says “Yeah”. The young enfuriates because of the sarcastic
comentary of his friends, but after, he remembers that thanks to his friend
and his “He’s a bit dumb, but he does love you” he and his girfrield have a
week together after having been separated because of a misunderstood that
they had. The caretaker opens the door of the school and the youngsters
commence to enter one by one. When the young man enters, he goes to the
tree where he usually meets with his girlfriend. When he arrives at there, he
finds her girlfriend with her back facing to him. He approches to her and
huges her. When she feels that she is huged, she feels fear, but when she
hears her boyfriend’s voice she relaxes, turns happily and huges him
strongly. The young man separates from her and gives her her roses, the
face of his girlfriend illuminates. After that, he takes off his schoolbag and
from there he takes out a teddy bear that he had brought from his house. He
does not believe she like it, but the face of his girlfriend illuminates still
more, all of a sudden, she lets her presents on one side, she jumps to him
and kisses him. The young man thinks “Mission complete”
534
Mi novia
2. Un joven emocinado camina hacia un puesto ambulante que vende rosas y

chocolates. Es el 14 de febrero y los colores del amor se ven en todas
partes. El joven comienza a ver que venden, osos de peluche, cajas de
chocolates, cartas. El joven no cree que tenga dinero para comprar alguna
de estas cosas, pero, de repente, justo en frente de él, aparece un ramo de
rosas. Una etiqueta debajo de él dice “20 por ciento de descuento” el joven
se apresura y lo compra. El joven se aleja del puesto y se dirije a la fila para
entrar a la escuela. El joven se relaja porque pudo comprar el ragalo que el
pensaba que no iba a alcanzar a comprar. Mientras esta en la fila, sus
piernas comienzan a temblar por los nervios de dar un regalo de 14 de
febrero por primera vez.. mientras trata de calmarse, su amigo, quien acaba
de llegar, le dice de forma sarcastica “Primera vez”, a lo cual el joven dice
“Sí” el joven se enoja por el comentario sarcastico de su amigo pero luego
recuerda que gracias a su amigo y a su “Está un poco tonto, pero te ama”,
el y su novia estaban cumpliendo una semana juntos despues de haber
terminado por un mal entendido que tubieron. El conserje abre la puerta de
la escuela y los jovenes comienzan a entrar uno a uno. Cuando el joven
entra, se dirige al arbol donde normalmente se reune con su novia. Cuando
llega ahí, la encuentra de espaldas. Se acerca a ella y la abraza. Cuando
ella siente que la abrazan, siente miedo, pero al oir la voz de su novio se
relaja, se da la vuelta felizmente y lo abraza fuertemente. El joven se
separa de ella y le da sus rosas, la cara de su novia se ilumina. Despues de
eso, se quita su mochila y de ahí saca un oso de peluche que habia traido
de su casa. El no cree que le guste, pero la cara de su novia se ilumina aun
más, de repente, ella deja sus regalos a un lado, salta hacia él y lo besa. El
joven piensa “Misión cumplida”
535
Subjunctive II
There are two other forms of the subjunctive. They both are formal.
Should
Main clause Subordinate clause

You should go to the doctor
I recommend You shouldn’t do it
that
He should go to the doctor
He shouldn’t do it
You should go to the doctor

I You shouldn’t do it
recommended That
He should go to the doctor
He shouldn’t do it
This structure is the second most common form of the subjunctive.
Present subjunctive
Main clause Subordinate clause

You go to the doctor
You not do it
I recommend that He go to the doctor
He not do it
You go to the doctor

I You not do it
recommended That He go to the doctor
He not do it
This structure is the third most common form of the subjunctive. It uses the bare
infinitive of the verb.
536
Writing

(250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
537
Ninety-ninth lesson
The media
1. What are you doing, David?

2. I’m reading the newspaper, they say that the Secretary of Economy has left
from his party.
3. Let me see! SECRETARY QUIT PARTY He was a big cheese in the party,
why did he leave?
4. According to the article, he kept a finger in many pies related with
corruption.
5. Well, he’d better find a good lawyer, otherwise, he’ll be for a long time in
prision. What other headlines are there?
6. They’re all the important headlines.
7. The day before yesterday, the Secretary of education gave a speech in the
House of Commons to speak about the changes that there are to be in the
basic and high education of our country.
8. “I’m glad to announce that, from now on, the students will not have to worry
about the quality of his or her studies. With this project, the estimate which
is given to schools and universities are to rise, and with this, they are to be
able to buy better equipements and they are to be able to rise the payment
of their teachers and professors”
9. The day after tomorrow, the Secretary is to give another speech in the
House of Lords to speak about this important topic.
10. Both the Senator and the Queen agree with this project and it is expected to
be santionated this mproject both by the House of Commons and by the
House of Lords this Wednesday”
11. Turn it out. It doesn’t matter me.
12. So, what do we do?
13. Turn on the subway, maybe that Mexican opera soup is. I’ve heard that
today it started its new season.
538
Los medios de comunicación
1. ¿Qué estás haciendo David?

2. Estoy leyendo el periódico, dicen que el ministro de Economía se salió de
su partido.
3. ¡Déjame ver! MINISTRO DE ECONOMÍA RENUNCIA A PARTIDO Era uno
de los meros meros del partido, ¿por qué se saldría?
4. Según el periódico, estaba metido en varios asuntos relacionados con
corrupción.
5. Bueno, será mejor que encuentre un buen abogado. ¿Qué otros titulares
hay?
6. Pues en la primera plana aparece "SINDICATOS CHOCAN JEFES"
7. Debe ser otro caso de falta de pago. ¿Qué más?
8. Son todos los titulares importantes.
9. Estoy aburrido, enciende la radio para ver que hay.
10. A Continuación en la BBC “Noticias para ti”
11. Hola a todos "Este es John Brown dándoles las últimas noticias.
Pasado mañana, el ministro de Educación va a dar un discurso ante la
cámara de los comunes y otro ante la cámara de los Lores para hablar de
los cambios que va a haber en la educación básica y superior de nuestro
país.
12. "Me complace anunciar que, a partir de ahora, los estudiantes no tendrán
que preocuparse por la calidad de sus estudios. Con este proyecto, el
presupuesto que se les da a las escuelas y universidades aumentará, y con
esto, estaspodrán comprar mejores equipos y podrán aumentar el salario
de sus maestros y profesores"
13. Tanto el primer ministro como la reina están de acuerdo con este proyecto y
se espera que se apruebe tanto por la cámara de los comunes como en la
cámara de los Lords este miércoles".
14. Apeguala. No me importa.
15. Entonces, que hacemos?
16. Prende la télé, tal vez ya este esa telenovela Mexicana, escuché que hoy
va a empezar la nueva temporada.
539
To be infinitive
We use “be + infinitive” in formal speech:
1. In rules
Employees are to clean the equipment that they use in the laboratory.
2. In instructions
The human recourses department of the company is to organise employees’
schedules.
3. In official plans
The president is to visit Europe next week.
This structure is manly found in news reports.
Was/were able to
We use “was/were able to” to:
1. Talk about an achievement

He was able to climb the Himalayas.
2. Talk about something was done with difficulty

After a long time, he was able to walk again.
3. Express that someone could do something in an specific situation

Were you able to go to the graduation with Katy?
540
Writing

(250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Do you agree or disagree with the idea about the midia can’t say all the time the
true?
British conture
Dentro de los medios de comunicacion el periodico The Gardian y la televisora BBC son de los más
recocidos a nivel mundial.
541
Unit
seventeenth
Business
542
Was/were able to/ would rather have/ would prefer to

Passive voice (advanced points) / Other passive structures/ Special uses of the
passive voice
Interpreting and comparing
Very formal English
Connectors of cause and propose II
Participle clauses
Lenguage of persuasion/ Hypotesing
543
Eighty-seventh lesson
Contrats and laws
1. Hi, there!, how are you?

2. Terrible.
3. What’s the matter?
4. The owner of the house that Lenny is renting didn’t tell him that he had to
pay five months of rent in advance, and now he doesn’t know what to do.
5. How come didn’t you read all the clauses? Let me take a look:
6. This agreement between Lenny (hereinafter “the Lessor”) Julio (hereinafter
“the Lessee”) applies to the rental or hire of a three-room apartment and it
shall come into effect at the signature date.
7. The apartment shall be used primarily for personal purposes but may, under
certain circumstances, be used commercially.
8. Where the apartment is used as shop, the fare of the rent will be increased
in 20 percent.
9. The Lessee shall have the right to use the apartment as dwelling and/or as
a shop.
10. The Lessee shall pay for normal wear and tear and other incidental
expenses regardless of whether such damage is superficial or structural.
11. Both parties agree and intend that the terms of this agreement are governed
by the principle of good faith.
12. This agreement is subject to the English legal system and disputes shall be
referred to the commercial tribunal.
13. However, should either of the parties find that the other party is not fulfilling
some or all of its obligations hereunder or if a party is caught in breach of
the terms hereof it may apply to a higher court to have the other party fined
and seek damages.
14. I believe you’ll gotta kick off saving up money. Well, I’m off, I got an
interview.
15. Break a leg!
544
Octogésima séptima lección
Ley
1. Hola, ahí!, ¿cómo estás?

2. Terrible
3. ¿Qué pasa?
4. El dueño de la casa que Lenny está alquilando no le dijo que tenía que
pagar cinco meses de alquiler por adelantado, y ahora no sabe qué hacer.
5. ¿No te dijo que leyeras todas las cláusulas?
6. Si me lo hubiera dicho, no estaría furioso.
7. Permítanme echar un vistazo,
8. Este acuerdo entre Lenny (en adelante "el Arrendador") Julio (en adelante
"el Arrendatario") se aplica al alquiler o alquiler de un piso de tres
habitaciones y entrará en vigor en la fecha de firma.
9. El piso se utilizará principalmente para fines personales, pero puede, en
determinadas circunstancias, utilizarse comercialmente.
10. Cuando el piso se utilice como tienda, la tarifa del alquiler se incrementará
en un 20 por ciento.
11. El Arrendatario tendrá derecho a utilizar el piso como vivienda para él o su
familia y/o como tienda.
12. El Arrendatario deberá pagar el desgaste normal y otros gastos
incidentales, independientemente de si dichos daños son superficiales o
estructurales.
13. Ambas partes acuerdan y pretenden que los términos de este acuerdo se
rijan por el principio de buena fe.
14. Este acuerdo está sujeto al sistema legal inglés y las disputas se remitirán
al tribunal comercial.
15. Sin embargo, si cualquiera de las partes encuentra que la otra parte no está
cumpliendo con algunas o todas sus obligaciones en virtud del presente o si
una parte es sorprendida en incumplimiento de los términos del presente,
puede solicitar a un tribunal superior que la otra parte sea multada y busque
daños y perjuicios.
16. Creo que tendrás que empezar ahorrando dinero. Bueno, me voy, tengo
una entrevista.
17. Buena suerte.
545
Mixed conditionals
If + Past perfect Would + bare infinitive

If I had got the job ,I would not be looking for one
To talk about something that did not happen in the past and it is the reason for
something happening in the present.
Past simple Would have

If I had a job ,I would not have asked you for money
To talk about a past action that would not have happened if something in the
present were different.
Other form of conditional
Future
Present simple Gonna
Present continuous Modal verb
Imperative
You will go to the party
If you have money You are gonna go to the party
You should go to the party
Go to the party!
Would
Past simple/ Could
Past continous Should
Might
If I had money , I’d buy a house
546
Writing
Rescriba el texto (250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Do you agree or disagree with people is desalogated when they don’t have paid
the rent because they loose their job?
British culture
Al sistema juridico que se utiliza el el Reino Unido se le llama Common law. En Escocia, a diferencia
de México y del resto del Reino Unido, existe una categoria más para las personas que a las que no
se les ha comprobado que han cometido un acto pero que tampoco esta comprovado que no lo
relaizarón, esta es not proven (no provado).
547
Situacions vacant
1. Hi, David, what are you doing?

2. I’m looking for a another job.
3. Don’t you like working as policeman?
4. Not at all. I wanna try something new as translator, cook or maybe private
investigator. Also, I don’t earn much money as police officer.
5. And what have you found?
6. Hear these ads!
7. We are looking for new talent who wants to work with us in our headquarters
located on Chicago. We are looking for a person having knowledge of data
processing and website development. The successful applicant must have
good teamwork skills. Competitive basic wage plus overtime. After the
training period, there is a two-months trial period.
8. We are looking for sales executives having worked in Bed and Breakfast.
The candidate must speak English and German fluently or being native
speaker of one or both languages. Also, the candidate who wants to work
with us must have driver’s license and must be articulate, outgoing with
excellent interpersonal skills. Part-time and full-time positions are available.
Wage: 720 dollars per month plus commitions
We have an opening for a website designer to start working at once. The

person who wants to work with us must be a team player. Our officines are
in Los Angeles for which the person who wants to apply for this position
must live in Los Angeles. The salary will depend on qualifications and
experience.
Master degree required. Two days off per week. Commissions and company
car
9. All of them sound good.

10. Yeah, I believe I’ll call all of them first thing tomorrow, I’m boring about
sitting around.
11. Well, if you wanna start not feeling bored, I got the perfect activity for you.
12. Which one?
13. Cleaning up the kitchen of the apartment.
548
Ciento decimocuarta lección
Ofertas de empleo
1. Hola, David, ¿haces?

2. Estoy buscando un nuevo trabajo.
3. ¿No te gustó el trabajo de periodista?
4. No del todo. Quiero probar algo nuevo como traductor, cocinero o soldado.
5. ¿Y qué has encontrado?
6. Escucha estos anuncios.
7. Estamos buscando nuevos talentos que quieran trabajar con nosotros en

nuestra sede ubicada en Chicago. Estamos buscando una persona que
tenga conocimientos de procesamiento de datos y desarrollo de sitios web.
El candidato seleccionado deberá tener buenas habilidades de trabajo en
equipo. Salario básico competitivo. Después del período de entrenamiento,
hay un período de prueba de dos meses.
8. Estamos buscando ejecutivos de ventas que hayan trabajado en resorts. El

candidato debe hablar español y francés con fluidez o ser hablante nativo
de uno o ambos idiomas. Además, el candidato que quiera trabajar con
nosotros debe tener una licencia de conducir del Reino Unido y debe ser
articulado, extrovertido con excelentes habilidades interpersonales. Hay
puestos disponibles a tiempo parcial y a tiempo completo.
Salario: 720 libras al mes. Comisiones y coche de la empresa.
9. Tenemos una oportunidad para que un diseñador de web comience a

trabajar de inmediato. La persona que quiere trabajar con nosotros debe
tener buenas habilidades para trabajar en equipo. Nuestros officinas están
en Los Angeles, por lo que la persona que quiera solicitar este puesto debe
vivir en Los Angeles. El salario dependerá de la experiencia y de las
cualidades. Se requiere maestría.Dos días de descanzo a la semana.
10. Todos ellos suenan bien. Sí, creo que los llamaré a todos a primera hora de
mañana, me aburre estar sin hacer nada.
11. Bueno, si quieres empezar por no sentirte aburrido, ¿por qué no empiezas
por limpiar el baño del departamento?
549
Participle clauses
Participle clauses are used above all in written text, particulary formal, journalistic,
academic and literary style. They are used to:
• to replace a time clause (when, while, after, etc. + subject +verb).
Looking through the things in my drawer, I came across some old photographs(= While I
was looking ... )
• to replace a clause of reason (because, as, since+ subject +verb).
Feeling extremely tired, I decided to rest under a tree. ( = Because I felt ... )
• to replace a relative clause.
The girl talking to Jim is my sister. (= ... who is talking ... )
The past participle is used:
•Passive Voice. Shocked by the tragedy, they didn't know what to say. (=They were
shocked by the tragedy and didn't know ... )
• to replace a relative clause in the Passive Voice.
Clothes made in France and Italy are very elegant. (=Clothes which are made ... )
• to replace the if-clause in a conditional sentence containing Passive Voice.
Stored in the fridge, the pudding will keep for up to one week. (=If it is stored in the fridge
... )
Sometime the participle clause can mean “como” o “porque”
It being too late, I couldn’t find a taxi anyplace.

(como era muy tarde, no pude encontrar un taxi)
550
Writing

(250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
551
Sixty second lesson
Pros and cons
1. Living in the city is correct
2. This essay discusses the advantages and disadvantages of dwelling in the

city instead of the countryside. It considers the time it takes a person to get
at his office, the savings which can be made in transportation and the
pollution of the city.
3. Nowadays, there are many people who have to take the bus, the subway or
even the train to get at their offices. This journey can make that many of
these people suffer stress at levels unbelievable, above all, when it is the
rush hour. So why don’t they leave their ways of life in the city and they
decide to go to the countryside instead? Well, perhaps, some persons argue
that is because in the city you can have a better quality of life but I don’t
agree! You end up having a worse quality of life because you breathe the
polluted air that the factories and the cars of the city produce. Also, you end
up paying more because the cost of the transportation in the city is more
expensive than in the countryside because you have to take more means of
transport to go to one place to another one.
4. On the other hand, finding a job is absolutely much easier in the city
because most of the companies and factories are in the big cities. I guess
for this reason it is preferable to dwell in the city to dwell in the countryside,
but only if you can avoid spending more than 2 hours a day in the public
transport.
5. In conclusion, yes, it is better dwelling in the city than in the countryside.
However, not enough is being done to improve persons’ quality of life of
whom dwell in the city and this need to be addressed urgently.
552
Sexagesima segunda lección
Puntos de vista
1. Este ensayo discute las ventajas y desventajas de vivir en la ciudad en

lugar del campo. Considera el tiempo que tarda una persona en llegar a su
oficina, los ahorros que se pueden hacer en transporte y la contaminación
de la ciudad.
2. Hoy en día, hay mucha gente que tiene que tomar el autobús, el metro o
incluso el tren para llegar a sus oficinas. Este viaje puede hacer que
muchas personas sufran estrés a niveles increíbles, sobre todo, cuando
conducen sus coches en la hora punta.
Entonces, ¿por qué no dejan sus formas de vida en la ciudad y deciden ir al
campo en su lugar?
Bueno, tal vez, algunas personas argumentan que es porque en la ciudad
se puede tener una mejor calidad de vida, ¡pero no estoy de acuerdo!
Acabas teniendo una peor calidad de vida porque respiras el aire
contaminado que producen las fábricas y los coches de la ciudad. Además,
terminas pagando más porque el costo del transporte en la ciudad es más
caro porque tienes que tomar más medios de transporte para ir de un lugar
a otro.
3. Por otro lado, encontrar trabajo es absolutamente mucho más fácil porque
la mayoría de las empresas y fábricas están en las grandes ciudades.
Supongo que por esta razón es preferible vivir en la ciudad quee vivir en el
campo, pero solo si se puede evitar pasar más de 2 horas al día en el
transporte.
4. En conclusión, sí, es mejor vivir en la ciudad que en el campo. Sin
embargo, no se está haciendo lo suficiente para mejorar la calidad de vida
de las personas que viven en la ciudad y esta necesidad debe abordarse
con urgencia.
Reading
1. Why are the peoplke stressed?

____________________________________________
2. Why don’t people wanna go to the country?
____________________________________________
3. What are the advantages of living in the city?
____________________________________________
4. Why is better dwelling in the city?
553
Reason, result and propouse
So as to Con el objetivo de
Because of Por
Owing to Debido a
To have led to Haber llebado a
Will result in Resultará en/dará como
resultado
To steam from Se origina en
To be based on Basarse en
The aim of El objetivo de
The reason why La razón por la cual
As result of Como resultado de
With the result that Teniendo como resultado
554
An ambitious plan
1. What’s on the TV today?

2. Where’s the remote control?
3. That’s underneath those magazines.
4. The best year of the century to invest or tumbled economy? Here’s our
business correspondant, Roger Gupta, to explain.
5. This year the raise of the importations and the investments have done that
the economy in the country is in the best moment of its whole history but
some people fear that after this moment of buoyant economy comes a
period of slowdown.
This morning, when I speak to Sir Michel Barnes, stockbroker and economy
analyst, this was he told me:
6. “Although is true that the exportations are beginning to go down because of
a low in the output, we’re prerared to face this and any problem. For this
reason, we’re trigging some measures to incentivate the american
companies to export, unfortunately, we’ll hardly know if these measures are
working until next year”
7. Sir Barnes, could tell us about any of these measures?
8. “As first move out, we’ve reduced the cost of exportations by buying the bulk
of materials here in the United States. With this, we expect that our
companies become more competitive and that they can sell their products
overseas without soar the cost of these”
9. A last question. Do you believe that that’s a good moment to invest in the
stock exchange?
10. “Absolutely, even I’d dare to say that if one don’t buy blue chip shares at his
moment, that’s because one don’t want his money to grow”
11. Thank you for your time.
12. “You’re welcome!”
13. Despite this, an ever growing number of investors and big companies are
changing his money for foreign currencies as the euro and the yuan owing
to the specialists expect that the prices of oil tumbles. That’s all the
economic news we have for you today. Join us again at the same time
tomorrow for another edition.
14. Well, I think that’s time to save up money.
555
Noticias de economia
1. Que hay en la tele hoy?
2. Donde está el control?
3. Está abajo de esas revistas.
4. El mejor año del siglo para invertir o economia caisa? Aqui esta nuestro
corresposal de negocios, Roger Gupta, para explicarnoslo.
5. Este año el aumento de las importaciones, las inversiones y el producto
interno bruto han hecho que la economia del pais este en mejor momento
de la historia pero algunas personas tienen miedo de que despues de este
momento de crecimiento economico venga un periodo de reduccion del
crecimiento.
Esta mañana, cuando hable con el señor Michel Barnes, corredor de bolsa
analista economico, esto fue lo que me dijo:
“Aunque es verdad que las exportaciones estan comenzando a disminuir
debido a la baja en la producción, estamos preparados para hacer frente a
este y a cualquier problema. Por esta razón, hemos puesto en marcha
algunas medidas para incentivar a las empresas britanicas a exportar,
desafortunadamente, dificilmente sabremos si estas medidas estan
funcionando hasta el siguiente año”
6. Señor Michel, podria decirnos alguna de estas medidas?
7. “Como primer medida, hemos reducido el costo de las exportaciones
comprando la mayoria de las materias primas aqui en el reino unido. Con
esto, esperamos que nuestras empresas se vuelvan mas competitivas y
puedan vender sus productos en el extranjero sin elevar el costo de estos”
8. Una ultima pregunta. Usted cree que sea un buen momento para invertir en
la bolsa de valores?
9. Absolutamente, incluso me atreveria a decir que si no compras acciones de
una gran empresa, es porque no quieres hacer que tu dinero crezca”
10. Gracias por su tiempo.
11. “De nada”
12. A pesar de esto, muchos inversionistas y empresas estan cambiando su
dinero por divisas extranjeras como el dolar y el euro debido a que los
especialistas esperan que caigan los precios del gasolineeo.
13. En noticias internacionales. Del otro lado del Atlantico, la FED anuncio que
aumentaria la taza de interes en 10 puntos. Estas son todas todas las
noticias sobre economia que tenemos para usted hoy. Sintonicenos otra
vez mañana a la misma hora para otra edición.
14. Bueno, pienso que es momento para ahorrar dinero.
556
Very formal English and correct English
In grammatically correct English we put the preposition next to the wh-question.
In what classroom are you? (very formal/grammatically correct)
What classroom are you in? (informal)
In grammatically correct English we use did not use/didn’t use to in negative

sentences and Did + personal pronoun + use to? In interrogative sentences.
I didn’t use to walk along the beach.
Did you use to eat much pizza?
If
In correct English we use “whether” instead of “if” in the reported speech.
He told us whether we wanna play. (correct)
He told us if/whether we wanna play. (formal)
Tag-questions
In formal English we do not use the contractions in the questions tags.
We’re gonna the party, are not we? (culto)
We’re gonna the party, aren’t we (neutral)
We’re gonna the party, right? (informal)
557
Vocabulary
Neutral Culto
Self-taught Autodidactic
Disgusting Ignoble
A lot/lots of Much
Much Many
Many
I, we One
To use (proceso) To employ
More formal Formal

Maybe Maybe
Someone Somebody
A little + comparative A bit + comparative
558
The retourn
1. Under the shadow of a huge apple tree did a man lie down without fretting
about anything more than enjoying the wonderful view that the forests and
the mountains of his land offered to him. Beside him, it was his fiancée,
Marían, to whom he had known in his childhood and with whom, for
questions of the life, he had refound to married her. While both lied down, a
sound in the distance interrupted their tranquillity, it was the lout of their
servant, who brought an important message to the man.
2. The man said “What happen, Ted, you know I detest being bothered”
3. The servant looked down and replied “A letter has arrived, my Lord”
4. Furious the man said to him “For this reason you bother me”
5. To what the servant said “That’s a letter from Athens, the messenger said
that it was important”
6. The man said “Ok, retourn to the mansion”
After his servant gave the letter to him, the man commenced the difficult
work to find out who had sent the letter to him.
“Who will have sent this letter?” Wondered the man.
After a long time thinking of it, the man realised that the letter had been sent
in a such tiny, dirty and simple envelop that no one of the royal family in his
sane juice would have sent it, for which the man said “That’s been my uncle
who has sent the letter, That’s the only relative who still lives in that land.”
The man opened the letter and effectively it was one of his uncle’s letters.
7. “Dear, nephew, if you’ve received this letter it means that I’ve already died,
but as I’ve told you umpteen times when I was alive, “the life goes on”. As
you will know, I’ve never had kids which I decided to come into all me
enormous fortune to you for. Also, I let you me collection of guns, memories
when I were a private investigator. You can find all the papers that you need
to come into me fortune under the giant whale statute that I got built by the
sea where your dad and me fished. I expect that you can have a long,
beautiful, calm life as I had and that you can be as hard as the steel after
having reading this letter, see you later,
Your uncle David.”
8. After having reading this, the man did not say anything, he only said “ have
my ship ready, we will commence a voyage”. While the man sailed with
direction to Greek Isles, the man remembered when he went to his uncle’s
house while he saw a ruined city which was on the top of a mountain. As he
reached his uncle’s house, the man felt exhausted and starving, for which
he ordered to the servants to bring meal. After having dinner, the man went
bed to one of the rooms of the mansion, when he looked through a window,
the memories of his infancy came to his mind, specially, the memories of
someone came to his mind…
9. To be continued
559
Ciento diecinueve lección
El regreso
1. Bajo un enorme manzano se acostaba un hombre sin preocuparse por nada
más que disfrutar de la maravillosa vista que los bosques y las montañas de
su tierra le ofrecían. A su lado, estaba su prometida, Marían, a quien había
conocido en su infancia y con quien por cuestiones de la vida se había
reencontrado para tener los días más felices de su vida. Mientras ambos se
acostaban, un sonido en la distancia interrumpió su tranquilidad, fue el
amante de su sirviente, quien trajo un mensaje importante al hombre.
2. El hombre dijo : "Qué pasa, David".
3. A lo que el sirviente respondió "ha llegado una carta, señor"
4. Furioso el hombre le dijo" Por esta razón me molestas"
5. A lo que dijo el sirviente "Es una carta de Atenas, el mensajero dijo que era
importante"
6. El hombre dijo "Ok, vuelve a la mansión"
Después de que su sirviente le dio la carta, el hombre comenzó el difícil
trabajo para averiguar quién le había enviado la carta.
"¿Quién me habrá enviado esta carta? Dijo el hombre.
Después de mucho tiempo pensándolo, se dio cuenta de que la carta había
sido enviada en un sobre tan pequeño y sucio que nadie de la familia real
en su jugo cuerdo la había enviado, por lo que el hombre dijo "ha sido el tío
de mi padre quien ha enviado la carta, era el único pariente que todavía
vivía en esa ciudad.
El hombre abrió la carta y efectivamente era una de las cartas de su tío.
7. "Querido, sobrino, si has recibido esta carta significa que ya he muerto,
pero como te he dicho enésimas veces cuando estaba vivo, "la vida
continúa". Como sabrás, nunca he tenido hijos por los que decidí entrar en
toda mi enorme fortuna para ti. Además, te dejo mi colección de armas,
recuerdos cuando era detective privado. Podras encontrar todos los
papeles que necesitas para entrar en mi fortuna debajo del estatua del
perro gigante que me construi frente al mar donde tu padre y yo solíamos
pescar. Espero que puedas tener una larga y hermosa vida tranquila como la
que yo tuve y que puedas ser tan duro como el acero después de haber leído esta
carta, hasta luego,
Tu tío David
Después de haber leído esto, el hombre no dijo nada, solo pidió tener su caballo
listo para comenzar el viaje a la casa de su tío. Mientras navegaba en dirección a
las islas griegas, el hombre recordó cuando fue a la casa de su tío mientras veía
las ruinas de una antigua ciudad en la cima de una montaña. Cuando llegó a la
casa de su tío, el hombre se sintió agotado y hambriento, por lo que ordenó a los
sirvientes que trajeran comida. Después de cenar, el hombre se fue a la cama a
una de las habitaciones de la mansión, cuando miró por una ventana, le vinieron a
la mente los recuerdos de su infancia, especialmente, los recuerdos de alguien
vinieron a su mente.
Continuará
560
Easy confused words
Word Meaning Word Meaning

Examen Exam Examen escrito Test Examen
estandarizado
Policia Policeman La persona Police La institución
Politica Politics La ciencia Policy Las acciones
que se hacen
Seguridad Safe Seguridad de Security Seguridad de
una persona equipos e
instalaciones
Salario Salary Salario de un Wage Salario de
profesionista cualquier otra
persona
Viaje Trip Viaje Journey Viaje (trayecto)
561
In my opinion or according to you
1. Have we dug our own grave? Are we responsible of the extinction of the
species? Can we do anything to resolve this? With me to discuss these
questions and many others is John Reynolds owner of an oil plant and John
Rosenverd, environment activist , researcher and doctor of prehistoric
animals.
2. Mister Reynols, could you tell us what you think about if we have caused the
last global extinction?
3. I think that is ridiculous. It is normal that there is a global extinction now and
then due to extraordinary situations, like the meteorite which fell 65 millions
of years ago in Mexico and caused the extinction of the dinosaurs, or
something so insignificant as a slight change in the sea currents.
4. Of course!, that’s true that animals can become extinct, but what do you say
about the evidence which show that since the human being is on the earth,
he has been responsible of the extion of animals so ancient such as the
woolly mammoth and the sabre-toothed tiger until animals so moderns like
the Tasmanian Tiger, whose last specimen died last century.
5. That’s true that some fossil and archeological evidence show that human
being’s arrival is related with the extinsion of some animals, but the
evidence that has been found is not enough to conclude that the human
being was the only responsible of these extincions. Also, those data omitte
the evidence which suggest that the climatic changes could have been the
maactuallyors which contributed to these extintions.
6. Well, I believe this discussion is going take us a long time, we’re going have
a rest.
562
Entrevistas
1. ¿Hemos cavado nuestra propia tumba? ¿Somos

responsables de la extinción de las especies?
¿Podemos hacer algo para resolver esto? Conmigo
para discutir estas preguntas y muchas otras está John
Reynolds doctor en animales prehistóricos y, John
Rosenverd, activista ambiental e investigador de la
Universidad de Philadelphia.
2. Doctor Reynols, ¿podría decirnos qué piensa acerca de
que hemos causado la última extinción global?
3. Creo que es ridículo. Es normal que haya una extinción
global de vez en cuando, ya sea por situaciones
extraordinarias, como el meteorito que cayó hace 65
millones de años en México y provocó la extinción de
los dinosaurios, o algo tan insignificante como un ligero
cambio en las corrientes marinas.
4. ¡ Por supuesto!, es cierto que los animales pueden
extinguirse, pero qué dices de la evidencia que
demuestra que desde que el ser humano está en la
tierra, ha sido responsable de la extinción de animales
tan antiguos como el mamut lanudo y el tigre dientes de
sable hasta animales tan modernos como el tigre de
Tasmania, cuyo último ejemplar murió el siglo pasado.
5. Es cierto que algunas evidencias fósiles y
arqueológicas muestran que la llegada del ser humano
está relacionada con la extinción de algunos animales,
pero la evidencia que se ha encontrado no es suficiente
para concluir que el ser humano fue el unico
responsable de estas extinciones. También, esos datos
omiten la evidencia qu sugiere que los cambios
climáticos podrían haber sido los principales factores
que contribuyeron a esas extinciones.
6. Bueno, yo creo que esta discusión nos va a llevar
mucho tiempo, vamos a tener un descanso.
563
Language of persuasion
564
Ing infinitive II
1. After the phrases “that’s no use, that’s worth, that’s no good, be busy,
what’s the use of, have difficulty (in)”.
565
Unit
eighteenth
Styles of life
566
One Hundred and thirteenth lesson
An elegant party
1. Tell me, senator, how are you today?

2. One feels delight, the party has been pleasant.
3. One thinks the same. Would you like something to eat?
4. One would much rather a beverage.
5. Waitress, could you bring us two cups of champagne, please?
6. Certainly, sir.
7. Senator, what are you going to do on vacation?
8. One wishes to go to an art gallery in Paris. They say that it has the most
modern and beautiful paintings in whole Europe. And you, my senator, what
are you going to do?
9. One wishes go to Africa, one has never been there. Have you ever been to
Africa, senator?
10. Yes, last year, one was in Egypt. one enjoyed much the warm climate, the
pyramids and the camels. Definitely, riding camels was the best part of the
trip.
11. You must speak Arabic very well.
12. Actually yes.
13. How do you learnt it?
14. One is autodidactic, so one learn by reading books with their translations,
listening to the radio and by using applications for learning languages.
15. Senator, do you mind if one asks you another question?
16. Later, it seems that the chairman of our political party is going to give a
speech.
17. Ladies and gentlemen, one wishes to inform you that our political party has
won the elections. It seems that the persons of the another political party
believed that they were better than we were. But at the end, they have learnt
that no one is as strong as we are.
567
Ciento trece lección
Una fiesta elegante
1. Buenas noches, mi muy honorable amigo.

1. Buenas noches, primer ministro. ¿Cómo está?
2. Muy bien, la fiesta ha sido agradable.
3. Uno piensa lo mismo. Primer Ministro, ¿Y qué va a hacer usted, en
vacaciones?
4. Deseo ir a un museo de arte en París. Dicen que tiene las pinturas más
modernas y bellas de toda Europa. Y usted, mi muy honorable amigo, ¿qué
va a hacer?
5. Quiero ir a África, nunca he estado en el desierto del Sahara. ¿Alguna vez
ha estado en Egipto?
6. Sí, disfruté mucho del clima cálido, las pirámides y los camellos.
Definitivamente, montar en camello fue la mejor parte de mi viaje.
7. Debe hablar muy bien árabe.
8. De hecho sí.
9. Debe haber ido a la mejor escuela de idiomas del país.
10. De hecho no.
11. Entonces, ¿cómo puede hablar tan bien árabe?
12. Soy autodidacta. Aprendo leyendo libros con sus traducciones, escuchando
la radio y usando aplicaciones para el aprendizaje de idiomas.
13. Primer ministro, ¿podría hacerle una pregunta?
14. Más tarde, parece que nuestro muy honorable amigo va a dar un discurso.
15. Damas y caballeros, les informar que nuestro partido político ha ganado las
elecciones. Parece que la gente del otro partido político creía que eran
mejores que nosotros. Pero al final, han aprendido que nadie es tan fuerte
como nosotros.
568
Very formal English
Might
We use “might” to ask for permission in very formal English.
Might one go to the bathroom? (very formal)
May I go to the bathroom? (formal)
Can I go to the bathroom? (informal)
Wish
“wish” instead of “wanna” in more formal situations.
I wish to go to your party. (very formal)
I wanna go to your party (formal)
Vocabulary
Neutral Very formal

If it was not for But for
Please If you please
Who Whom
569
Writing

(250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
570
571
Going shopping
1. What do you think about this strypped multi-color sweat shirt and this pair of
broken jeans ?
2. They fit me perfectly but I can’t wear sloppy clothes, that’s a formal dinner. I
gotta be smartly dressed.
3. Here they only sell second-hand clothes.
4. And some of them look badly-made and faded.
5. And to add insult to the injury, they are dear.
6. We’d better go to another place.
7. What do you think about the boutique that is across the shop.
8. That’s a great idea, but we’d better hurry up because the boutique closes at
9:00.
At boutique
9. Good afternoon, ma’am, how can I help you?

10. I’m looking for something smart for a formal dinner.
11. Certainly, ma’am, we have silk hand-knitted evening dresses. We have
them in bright colors. Also, we have designer colorful hats which suit
perfectly with these dresses.
12. How much does the dress cost?
13. It cost 100 dollars.
14. That’s costly.
15. What do you thing?
16. Take the plunge and try it on!
17. OK, where’s the fitting room?
18. What do you think?
19. You look very outrageous and sophisticated.
20. Yeah, but, that’s a bit baggy.
21. Do you have this dress in another size?
22. Certainly, ma’am, what size do you take?
23. Twenty-two.
24. Much better, I’ll take it!
25. Perfect, ma’am.
26. Well, now I gotta buy some casual black shoes, a short-sleeved V-neck shirt
and a pair of casual pants to my husband.
27. Why don’t you buy a long-sleeved polo neck shirt to him?
28. No, V-neck shirts make him look old and they’re not his thing.
572
Interpreting and comparing
573
Eighty fifth lesson
Films
1. Darling, what movie do we see?

2. I take a fancy of a crime movie or a block-buster.
3. I’m not sure. What does the LA listings guide recommend us?
4. Let me see. It says there’s a free classical concert in the concert hall today,
an open-air abstract art exibition in Golden art gallery and hear this article.
5. Read it out aloud!
One of the best films that I have arguably seen is Peaches’ Season: Iris
Flower, starring Miguel de la Torre. His performance as João Gilberto is
frightening realistic and cleverly illustrates how a young man’s behaviour is
at university. Alongside him, newcomer Fernanda Lobato displays some
excellent acting skills as the young Brazilian João’s love, who is studying
graphic design in Brazil at the same time that the protagonist is reading law
and who eventually becomes his lover.
6. Brazil has some amazing landscapes and the film's interesting location
show us the real beauty of the country. The fascinating storyline based on a
novel by journalist Mauricio Mateo, blends fact and fiction in a very clever
way, sweeping us along with the events which lead the protagonists to leave
his girlfriend. There are a number of scenes of shocking tension and the film
is frequently disturbing because of this, but at the same time it is totally
gripping, highly recommended.
7. Last but not least, there is a tremendous soundtrack with a wide range of
Brazilian music that will have you dancing in your seat at times.
8. It seems to be a good film.
9. Ok, so we’ll see that.
10. The showing starts at 9. So, we’d better hurry up, otherwise, we’ll be late.
11. So, let’s go.
574
Ochenta y quinta lección
Peliculas
1. Querida, ¿qué película vemos?

2. Tengo ganas de ver una película policica o una película comercial.
3. No estoy seguro. ¿Qué nos recomienda la revista?
4. Déjame ver. Escucha esto:
Una de las mejores películas que sin duda he visto es Peaches’ Season:
Iris Flower, protagonizada por Miguel de la Torre. Su actuación como João
Mateo es aterradoramente realista e ilustra hábilmente cómo es el
comportamiento de un joven en la universidad. Junto a él, la recién llegada
Fernanda Lobato muestra excelentes habilidades de actuación como el
amor del joven brasileño João, quien estudia diseño gráfico en Brasil al
mismo tiempo que el protagonista está estudiando derecho y que
finalmente se convierte en su amante.
5. Brasil tiene algunos paísajes increíbles y las interesantes localizaciones de
la película nos muestran la verdadera belleza del país. La fascinante trama
basada en una novela del periodista Mauricio Mateo, mezcla realidad y
ficción de una manera muy inteligente, barriéndonos junto con los
acontecimientos que llevan a los protagonistas a dejar a su novia. Hay una
serie de escenas de tensión impactante y la película es a menudo
perturbadora debido a esto, pero al mismo tiempo es totalmente
apasionante.
6. Por último, pero no menos importante, hay una tremenda banda sonora con
una amplia gama de música brasileña que te hará bailar en tu asiento a
veces.
7. Parece ser una buena película independiente.
8. Ok, entonces veremos esa película.
9. Lo mejor es que nos apresuremos, si no, no llegaremos al cine.
10. Amor, será mejor que te pongas un suéter. Hace frío afuera.
11. No te preocupes por eso. El pronóstico decía que no iba a nevar hoy.
12. Ok, entonces vámonos.
575
Hipotesing
576
Writing
Escriba una reseña de tu pelicula favorita.
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
577
A good adviser
1. Dear, María, I hope you have had a great time in your tour around in Asia.
I’m writing to ask you advice.
2. Ted and me had been fighting for a while because he quite often gets home
late from work and when he gets early, he prefers to watch TV or to play
videogames than spend time with me. Other thing we discuss for is because
he’s always using my notebook when he knows he may not use it because
that’s company’s notebook.
The final strike was when we fought because he got away with his friends
without saying anything to me and he told me he was boring about giving
explanations and he told me it was over.
3. Now, we’re getting divorse, but I continue without understanding how he can
forget 2 years of engagement and 2 years of marrige only for a stupid fight.
I’d been so depressed than I haven’t taken a shower for days and me
continue without knowing how to fix this.
What should I do?
4. Dear Cathy,
5. Thanks for your letter. I was sorry about hearing that you and your husband
are getting divorse. I got a couple of ideas which I hope can help you.
6. Firsly, don’t speak each other until it has passed some time. Now, he must
be furious, so, even if there’s a solution for your problem, he’s not gonna
hear it. For this reason is a better that you wait until he calms down.
7. Secondly, take this time that you’re gonna be alone to reflect if you really
wanna stay with him because you’ve been fighting for a while. Also, last
time we met, you told me you were sick and tired about he were an
irresponsable kidish and unconcious man and you said you hated he were a
gambler and an alcoholic. I believe that’s a good moment to think about
what you want.
8. Well, I gotta go now because I gotta pick up my kids from school, I hope
these ideas help. Write me or send me a message if there’s anything else
that I can do.
Best wishes,
María
578
Modal verbs III
Can’t
Can’t is used to talk about a thing that is wrong in the present based on
evidence.
This ticket can’t be right, it says 10 dollars for a cup of coffee.
Can’t have
Can’t have is used to talk about a thing that is wrong in the past based on
evidence.
This ticket can’t have been right, it says 10 dollars for a cup of coffee.
Can/could
We use can/could is used to talk theoretically/hypothetically.
Our company can/could produce 1000 cars in a month.
May/might/could be
We use “may/might/could be + ing” to speculate about events or situations in the

present or the future.
That’s 7. They can be watching the T.V. (son las siente, deben estar veindo la
television)
579
Writing
Imagina que tu eres la amiga a la que le envió Ann la carta. Escriba una carta
donde le aconsejes que hacer (250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
580
Breaking the ice
1. What are you doing, Ted?

2. I’m filling in a page with my personal information to enter to a website for
looking for a couple, look, I could enter.
3. Hi, my name is Elizabeth but my friends call me Beth. I’m 24 years and I live
in LA. In my free time, I like to paint and to take photos. I think they’re very
relaxing free time activities. I’m looking for an easygoing handsome
generous and above all loyal man. If you got all or some of these
characteristics me let me know and maybe we can take a beer someday.
4. 33-years-old thin black woman looks for a hansome of medium height man
with beard and short curly black hair. I’m a very funny and extrovertive
woman. My favorite hobby is watching music videos on the net. I love jazz
music, blues music and indie music. I’m looking for a smart kind man with a
good sense of humor and that likes to go to stand-up shows and to go to
music festivals.
By the way, I detest jelaus lazy and rude men.
5. Hi, my name is Samantha, I’m from Sacramento, on the west coast, and I’m
not a typical woman. First of all, I’m an animal activist, for this reason I
usually attend to meetings that talks about this important topic. Secondly,
I’m crazy about doing outdoors activities. In my spare time, I always practice
windsurfing or I hike and now and again I go camping. I’m looking for an
adventurous brave non-smoker man that likes extreme sports and to camp.
If you like the same as me, I wait for you to chat.
6. Who are you gonna choose to, Ted?

7. I believe the first one, she was the woman I liked the most.
8. Ok, so, send her a message.
9. Let me come in to her profile and done! Now, we just gotta wait.
581
Connecting words
582
Writing
Imagine que es Ted. Escriba un mensaje a la mujer que más le agrade diciendole
como es usted fisica y emocionalmente, diciendole cuales son tus hobbies y
explicandole el porque deberian de verse. (250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
583
On the force
1. It was 1993’s winter. I found myself drinking my morning coffee in a café

when it was heard on the radio that the favorite candidat to win the
presidencial elections has been assassinated. While I saw persons’
confused face around me, I could not avoid thinking that the person who
had shot had been I. I left from the café to go to pick my children to school,
while I did it, I remembered my first days in the academy. It was 1994’s
winter, I had just returned from Rio and I was looking for work. While I was
walking along a street, I saw a sign which said “We’re hiring people to enter
our forces, over 18”. As it seemed a good job, I decided to attend next day
to an interview and in two shakes of a lab’s tail I was patroling the streets of
the city. One day, while my couple and me were having lunch, we saw how
a young woman been mugged, we went fast to help the girl and put out
down the alleged agressor. The young woman thanked us and she invited
us to her house. I did not know if going or not, but before my couple’s
insistence and the young woman, who hold my hand tenderly, I accepted to
go. Next day, my couple and I went to the adress who the young woman
had given us. It was a brazilian-style large elegant house with large stairs in
the middle from whence the young woman appered. The young woman,
who has already identified last day as Rosalba Luna, was a fair slim woman
with a wavy long brown hair. She looked very similar to Tamaris. The young
woman greeted us and she invited us to enter his father’s officine. It was
there when I met mister Smith, a strong of middle-height man commissioner
of the public safty. He thanked for having saved her daughter and he told us
that he would give us a reward for our exellent work last day. While he was
saying this, I could see that the young woman looked me out of the corner of
her eye.
They have passed several months since we rescued that beaufitul girl from the
hands of those muggers and that they had transfered me to SWAT team. By then, I
dated with mister Smith’s daughter. It was very pretty to date with her, she was a
tender girl that in some way filled with cheerfulness my broken heart. One day,
while we were in a party that mister Smith has organized, mister Smith approched
me and he told me:
-João, you know that I appreciate you, since you started going out with my
daughter, I consider you as a son, for this I need that you make me an special
584
Era el invierno de 1993. Me encontraba bebiendo mi café de la mañana en una
cafétería cuando se escuchó en las noticias de la televisión que habían asesinado
al candidato favorito para ganar las elecciones presidenciales. Mientras veía la
conmoción de la gente que estaba alrededor al escuchar la noticia, no pude evitar
pensar que quien habría dado ese disparo hubiese sido yo. Mientras salía de la
cafétería, para recoger a mis hijos de la escuela, recordé mis primeros días en la
academia. Era el invierno de 1971, acababa de regresar de Rio y estaba buscando
trabajo. Mientras caminaba por la calle, vi un letrero que decía “estamos
contratando gente, para unirse a nuestras fuerzas, 18 años en adelante”. Como
parecía un buen empleo, decidí presentarme al día siguiente y en menos de lo que
canta un gallo ya estaba patrullando las calles de la ciudad. Un día mientras mi
pareja y yo estábamos comiendo tacos en un puesto de la calle, vimos como una
joven estaba siendo asaltada, rápidamente fuimos en su ayuda y sometimos al
agresor. La joven nos agradeció y nos invitó a su casa. Yo no sabía si ir, pero ante
la insistencia de mi pareja y de la joven quien me miraba con una mirada especial,
acepté ir. Al día siguiente mi pareja y yo nos presentamos en la dirección que nos
había dado aquella chica que habíamos salvado el día anterior. Era una casa
grande elegante de estilo brasileño con unas grandes escaleras en el medio de
donde la chava apareció. La joven quien ya se había identificado como Rosalba
Luna el día anterior, era una joven guapa, delgada de cabello café muy similar a
Paula. La joven nos saludó y nos invitó a pasar al despacho de su padre. Fue ahí
donde conocí a Don Aduufo, un hombre alto, fuerte, comisionado de seguridad
pública. Don Aduufo, nos agradeció por haber salvado a su hija y nos dijo que nos
daría una ratificación por nuestro excelente actuar el día anterior. Mientras decía
esto, pude ver que la joven me veía de reojo.
Habían pasado varios meses desde que rescatamos a aquella bella joven de las
manos de aquellos rateros y de que me habían otorgado el cargo de Capitán de
equipo de investigaciones. Para entonces, salía con la hija de Don Aduufo. Era
muy lindo salir con ella, era una chava muy dulce-tierna que de cierta manera
llenaba de alegría mi dolido corazón. Un día mientras estábamos en una comida
que Don Aduufo había organizado, Don Aduufo se me acerco y me dijo:
-João, tú sabes que te aprecio, desde que empezaste a salir con mi hija te
considero como un hijo, por eso te pido este
585
favour. I need that you capture the lider of a drug band who is workind in the area
of my dear Guzman. I want you to catch him, but remember, I don’t want him in jail.
I would rather have desired that mister Smith asked me any another thing, but I
apreciated mister Smith, not only for having given the job in the SWAT team, but
for having let me go out with her daughter, for which I did not doubt in make what
he had asked me for. Next day, my men and I commenced with the preparatives
for the operation. We were planning it for a week and at last we had found out a
way to raise to the mountain where mister Smith have told me that the leader of the
band operated. It was a small street which raised along the mountain until the back
part of a house which faced to the square where mister Smith told me that there
would be a drug exchange.
My men had the strict order of descharge to discreation while hearing the first shot.
When the persons who we indentified how the persons that mister Smith had
discribed us, I waited a moment to identify the leader, afterwards, I took my
weapon and I did the first shot, to which my men’s shots followed it. The sound of
the shots resounded in the walls of the houses round the square. At the end, the
result was of 8 persons dead and a injuried policeman. When I was about to get at
mister Smith’s house to tell him the results of the operation, I could see how some
stretcher-beared took out mister Don Aduufo’s and Rosalba’s corposes, someone
had informed to the criminals that mister Smith had given us the information. After
mister Aduufo’s and Rosalba’s death, I left the police and I moved out to the north
without knowing that the biggest challengers which I faced were about to
commence.
586
favor. Jõao necesito que agarres al líder de una banda que está operando dentro
del área de mi querido Guzmán. Por eso quiero que lo atrapes pero recuerda: no
lo quiero en la cárcel. Hubiera preferido que Don Aduufo me pidiera cualquier otra
cosa, pero apreciaba a Don Aduufo no solo por haberme dado el cargo de
Capitán, sino por haberme permitido salir con su hija, por lo cual no dudé en
realizar lo que me estaba pidiendo. Al día siguiente mis hombres y yo empezamos
con los preparativos para la operación. Estuvimos planeando la por una semana y
por fin habíamos descubierto una manera de subir al cerro en el cual me había
dicho Don Aduufo que operaba el líder de la banda. Era una pequeña calle que
subía por todo el cerro hasta la parte trasera de una casa que daba hacia la plaza
donde Don Aduufo nos había dicho que iba a haber un intercambio de droga. Mis
hombres tenían la estricta orden de disparar a discreción después de que
escucharan el primer disparo. Cuando llegaron las personas que Don Aduufo nos
había dicho que eran los encargados de distribuir droga en esa zona, realice el
primer disparo, al cual le siguieron los disparos de mis hombres. El sonido de las
balas resonaba en las paredes de las casas que rodeaban la plaza. Al final, el
saldo fue de 8 personas muertas. Cuando llegaba a casa de Don Aduufo para
contarle los resultados del operativo, pude ver como camilleros sacaban dos
cuerpos de la casa Don Aduufo, eran los cuerpos de Don Aduufo y Rosalba,
alguien les había avisado que Don Aduufo nos había dado el soplo.
587
Would rather have/would prefer have
We use “would rather + Subject + Present simple/past simple” when we decided

for sone one else.
I’d rather she doesn’t/didn’t dress it.
Past simple is more formal.
We use “would prefer + it if + Subject + Past simple” when we decided for some
one else.
I’d prefer it if she didn’t dress that dress. (preferiria que no vistiera ese vestido)
Past simple is more formal.
We use “would rather + have + past participle” to say that we had preferred to do
another thing.
I’d rather have gone there instead of here. (preferiria haber ido)
588
Writing
Escriba una parafrasis de lo que se trata la historia. Usa lenguaje formal. 250
palabras
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
589
Fifty eighth lesson
At lecture theater
1. Good evening everyone and welcome to XIV conference about the

environment. Tonight, we’re going to speak about the nature, but first, we’re
going give a warm welcome to Melanie Mateo, specialist in wild fauna.
2. Thank you, thank you, and thank you for having invited me to give this
conference.
3. As all of you know, in the last 15 years, the poaching has done that most of
the animal species have reduced, mainly the species which was already in
danger as such the Mexican wolf, the koala bear and the white rhinoceros. If
we continue thus, in 5 years’ time, we’ll have lost the 30 percent of their
population.
4. This is not the only problem which has made that the populations of the
animals have decreased.The wildfires produced by the persons joined to the
illegal logging have contributed this problem become larger. Above all the
that legal logging that each year is responsable that thousands of trees are
cut down reducing significantly the space which has animals like monkeys,
jaguars and foxes to breed their offspring. If this continues, we’ll lose more
than 50 per cent of the rainforest and forest of our planet.
5. And the problem is more visible in the poles where the melting of the ice
caps has made that polar bears have to approach to the cities on the
lookout for food because there isn’t in their natural habitats.
6. In short, we must make policies to protect the animals and natural habitants
if we want to have them with us in the future.
590
Quinquagesimaoctava lección
Medio hambiente II
1. Buenos dias a todos, y bienvenidos a la XIV conferencia sobre el medio

ambiente. Esta noche, hablaremos de la naturaleza, pero primero, vamos a
darle una calida bienvenida a Melanie Mateo, especialista in fauna silvestre.
2. Gracias, gracias y gracias por haberme invitado a esta conferencia.
3. Como todos saben, en los ultimos 15 años, la caza ilegal ha hecho que la
mayoria de las especies hayan reducido su numero, principalmente
especies que ya estaban en peligro como el lobo Mexicano, los koalas y los
rinocerontes blancos. Si continuamos de esta forma, en cinco años,
habremos perdido el 30 porciento de sus poblaciónes.
4. Esto no es el unico problema que ha hecho que las poblaciónes de los
animales hayan decrecido.
5. Los incendios producidos por las personas unido a la tala ilegal de arboles
han sido otros factores que han causado este problema. Cada año miles de
arboles son talados para contruir casas y muebles reduciendo
significativamente el espacio que tienen animales como los monos, jaguars
y zorros para criar a sus crias. Si esto continua, habremos perdido más del
50 porciento de las selvas y bosques de nuestro planeta.
6. El problema es aun más fuerte en los polos, donde el derretimiento de las
capas de hielo ha hehco que los osos polares hayan tenido que acercarse a
las ciudades en busca de comida porque no hay en sus habitats naturales.
7. En conclusion, debemos hacer politicas para proteger a los animales y sus
habitat naturales si queremos tenerlos con nosotros en el futuro.
Reading
1. What species have reduced its number?

____________________________________________
2. What other problems have affected the animals?
____________________________________________
3. What animals have been affected for the cutting down of trees?
____________________________________________
4. Why have the polar bears approached dto the cities ?
591
Writing
Escriba en una carta a la persona que dio la conferencia donde le digas cuales tu
opinion sobre lo que expuso (250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
592
Unit
nineteenth
Literature
593
*Invertion
*Literary English
*Literary English II
*Enphasis / Emphatic do
*Range of grammar structures
*Connecting words / Complex sentences and adverbial clauses
594
A learned man
1. What are you doing, Steve?

2. I’m reading a magazine.
4. It’s about diferent topics, sports, arts, IT.
5. Let me see it!
6. After a difficult game and despite any forecast Giants win. We interviewed
Lenny Gallagher, Giants captain and super start and this was he told us:
How do you feel about having won the game. “I’m really surprised, when I
came out onto the field, I never believed we were gonna win but at the end,
we won by a nose”. Do you believe that other’s team lack of experience
helped your team to win? “I don’t think so. I believed the mistake of the
another was to sent its most brilliant player to the pavilion. That gave us the
advantage in the game. And what’s the next step in your carrier? I’ll
continue trainin’ till winnin’ the Super Bowl”. Thank you very much for your
time “You’re welcome”
7. One of the worst movies which I have ever seen has been without doubt the
“Funny Tiger” helmed by Teddy Gupta. The comedy is poorly plotted,
hammily acted and excruciatingly unfunny. I could not stand staying in my
seat more than necessary. The feable script combined with a cast mainly
composed by beginner actors such the actress Paula Smith, who was
miscasted as the forest queen, was another factor which makes you cannot
enjoy the movie. The only think which made I did not leave from the
moviehouse in the first 30 minutes was actress Fernanda Lobato’s cameo.
In summe up, I believe that its director ought to think of retiring once and for
all from movie-making before he shoots another movie which makes his
carrier sinks still more.
8. The new sofware system will be available and bring a new interface wich will
be more friendly with people who is not computer-literated. The box also will
come with a new graphic card which will let watch videos in ultra HD. The
packet will have a free US maindland delivery, for which the most of us will
not have to worry to pay and extra fee for delivery.
9. You really are a learned man!
595
Complex and adverbial clauses
596
Writing
Escriba un articulo donde hables de la situación laboral en tu país. (150 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
What do you do and why did you decide to be it?
What are the most studied mayors in your country?
What are the most dangerous jobs in your country?
What befefits the companies in your country give to the employees?
What another profession would you like to have?
597
Small heros
1. Once upon a time, a major and affluent kingdom that was ruled by a wise
king, his beautiful wife and their two kids, Charles prince and her little sister
Princess Brenda. Everything went well in their life until the war came. An
enemy that had come from the Middle East commanded by a powerful
magician attacked the kingdoom. To protect their kids, the king ordered to
one of his servants to take them to a tiny secret passage so that they could
get away. But the servant turned out to be a traitor. The queen realized this
and go to help her kids. After the queen saved them, she told them to go to
another passage that take them to a waterfall where they would have to wait
for his cousin. The prince didn’t wanna go because he has always been
scaredy-cat, but his mum told him to not be afraid.
2. After several hours walking almost in the darkness, the kids reached the
waterfall. They waited for his cousin during days and just when they were
abou to give up on, his cousin got with a huge army.
The prince came up him and told him the situation. His cousin wanna attack
inmediatly but the prince took into him to plan the attack. They thought of
the plan and after thinking of it, they thought the best was to go ahead his
plan that night. When midnight got, the three cousins and his army got
around to not to be detected.
3. The battle lasted little. The prince decided to finish everything went uptairs
till the top of a tower where he found the magician that has turned into a
dragon.
4. After a long battle, the prince was able to win the dispute. After this, the
peace came back to the kingdom and the three kids tourned into heros and
were remembered for ever. The end
598
Phrasal verbs II
Some phrasal verbs do not change the meaning of the verb. In other cases, the
phrasal verbs expand the meaning of the verb.
Bit Morder Bit off Morder (arrancar)

Clean Limpiar Clean out Limpiar (a profundidad)
Cut Cortar Cut off Cortarm(completamente)
Cut Reducir Cut down, cut Reducir
back
Eat Comer Eat out Comer (todo)
Save Ahorrar Save up Ahorrar
Start Empezar Start out Empezar (enfasis en el
inicio)
Write Escribir Write off Escribir (para pedir algo)
Phrasal verb with two positons.
Some phrasal verbs can be split or not.
Two-position phrasal verbs always split with personal object pronouns.
599
Writing
ReEscriba el texto en lenguaje formal.
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
600
Writing
Reescriba el texto utilizando exclusivamente lenguaje formal.
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
601
One hundred and fifteenth lesson
International matters
1. Good morning!
2. Good morning, with whom do you wish to speak?
3. I’m looking for the Senator.
4. Who is looking for him?
5. The Ambassador of the United States.
6. The Senator is in a meeting. Should you want, you may take a sit here while
the Senator leaves.
7. Thank you very much!
8. Senator, good morning, how are you today?

9. Good. Thank you very much. And you?
10. Good. Senator, could we speak tomorrow about the international
commercial treaty between our two nations?
11. I’m very sorry, but tomorrow, I’m returning to my home town.
12. Might I ask you from where you are?
13. I’m hail from Austin, Texas .
14. Austin is a modern and charming city. I’ve been to there three times.
15. Should you wish that we speak, if you please, go to my office and tell my
secretary to make you an appointment for next week.
16. Good afternoon, might I help you?

17. I wish make an appointment for next week to speak to the Senator.
18. Certainly, mister ambassador.
19. Might it be on Thursday morning?
20. I’m very sorry, the Senator has a meeting at that hour. Would Wednesday
afternoon be convenient?
21. I can’t at that hour. Could it be Friday morning?
22. Certainly, mister Ambassador. Your appointment is for next Friday morning.
23. Thank you very much!
602
One hundred and fifteenth lección
Politicos
1. Buenos dias, busco al primer ministro.

2. Quien lo busca?
3. El embajador de Estados Unidos.
4. El primer ministro está en una reunion. Si lo desea, puede tomar asiento
mientras el primer ministro sale.
5. Muchas gracias.
6. Primer Minsitro, Buenos dias, como se encuentra el dia de hoy?

7. Estoy bien. Muchas gracias. Y usted?
8. Me encuentro bien. Primer Ministro, podemos hablar mañana sobre el
nuevo tratado commercial entre nuestras dos naciones?
9. Lo siento, pero mañana, regreso a mi ciudad natal.
10. Puedo preguntarle dde donde es usted?
11. Soy de Texas.
12. Texas es una ciudad moderna y hermosa. He estado haya tres veces.
13. Si quiere que hablemos, por favour, vaya a mi oficina para que le hagan
una cita para la siguiente semana.
14. Con quien tengo que hablar.
15. Con mi secretaria.
16. Buenas tardes, como puedo ayudarlo?

17. Quiero haacer una cita para la siguiente semana para hablar con el primer
ministro.
18. Quien es usted, señor?
19. El embajador de los Estados Unidos.
20. Seguro, señor embajador.
21. Podría ser el jueves en la mañana?
22. Lo siento, el primer ministro tiene una reunion a esa hora.
23. Podria ser el Jueves en la tarde?
24. Seguro, señor. Su cita es el siguiente Viernes en la mañana.
25. Muchas gracias.
26. De nada.
603
Special uses of if
We use “if + will” in polite request.
If you will wait for Mister Roger, he’ll get in 5 minutes.
We can use “would” instead of “will to sound more polite.
If you would wait for Mister Roger, he’ll get in 5 minutes.
We can change “for” for “should in very formal and literary English. This can be
done only when “if” is at the beginning of the sentence.
Should we go to New York, we’ll get at there at midday.
We use “if + was/were + to infinitive” to talk about imaginary future situations.
If the machines were to be more intelligent, they could conquest the world.
We can use given, otherwise and provided instead of if.
Given the enormous quantity of people who attended to the concert, the band
decided to open other dates.
604
Writing
Escriba un texto como el que aparece en la lección. Utiliza por lo menos 10

caracteristicas del lenguaje muy formal (250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
605
One hundred and sixteenth lesson
Peaches’ Season
1. First day of school, everyone’s felicity to return to the school could be seen
in the middle of the atmostphere accompanied by the heat of the sun and
the fresh breeze of the summer. Forth semester of the university, one step
more to our life together, I though, while Lidia and I entered school. Never
have I thought to be so long with someone and there we were after four
semesters, it is incredible what a jelly can do.
2. We entered school and as all the semesters I went with her to her
classroom. After having let her in her classroom, I went mine. There, I came
across my friends Julian and Hernan, I had not seen them in ages, but it
was good, the adventure was about to commence …
3. That day, as most professors were absent, Lidia and I went to my house.
When we arrived at there, we realised that my mother and my sister were
not, on a table, they had let a note which said that they had gone to the
supermarket.
4. There was a silence, our faces found one to the another, she stooped her
face letting me see her love, her sensibility and her loyality. I approached
her, I took her from the waist and kissed her, the love appeared, we went to
my parent’s room, and there, we dedicated to express our love physically.
5. The sandy of the beach burnt my feet while I went to the edge of the sea.
That day, my friends and I had left early from the university and as we did
not have anything to do, we decided to go to the beach. When we arrived at
there, we devoted to play soccer and eating. Luis made a grill with some
steams that he had foundon the beach and cooked some delicious fish. It
was a good time. It was nearly four, and everyone was preparing his things
to go. As I wanted to see the sunset one last time, I decided to stay. I went
to some rocks which were over there. The view was stupendous. When I
realized, I could see a young woman who was watching the sunset too. She
was very fair, with an exceptional body. I approached shily to her. She saw
me with those eyes which made my legs trembled. I asked her name. She
told me that her name was Paula and that she attended at the same school
as I. I was not good at talking girls, but as I could, I asked out her. She
accepted and we arranged to meet next day at Veloso’s coffee store
606
One hundred and sixteenth lección
Temporada de Duraznos
1. Primer día de clases, la felicidad de todos, de regresar a la escuela, se

hacía notar en el ambiente acompañado por el calor del sol y la brisa fresca
del verano.
2. Cuarto semestre de la universidad, un paso más hacia nuestra vida juntos
pensé, mientras entrábamos Lidia y yo a la escuela. Nunca pensé durar
tanto con alguien, y ahí estábamos después de cuatro semestres, es
increíble lo que una gelatina puede hacer.
3. Entramos a la escuela y como todos los semestres la acompañe a su salón.
Llegando allá me despedí de ella y me fui a mi salón. Allá encontré a Julián
y a Hernán, no los había visto desde hace un tiempo, pero estaba bien, el
desmadre iba a estar bueno.
4. Ese día como no habían asistido todos los profesores, Lidia y yo nos fuimos
a mi casa. Cuando llegamos, advertimos que mi mamá y mi hermana no
estaban, en la mesa, habían dejado una nota que decía que habían ido al
supermercado.
5. Hubo un silencio, nuestras caras se encontraron la una a la otra, ella bajo
su cara haciendo un gesto que me hacía entre ver su sensibilidad, su amor
y las ganas de estar conmigo. Me le acerque, la agarre de la cintura y la
bese, el amor se hizo presente, nos fuimos a la habitación de mis papás, y
ya ahí, nos dedicamos a expresar nuestro amor físicamente.
6. La arena de la playa quemaba mis pies mientras me dirigía a la orilla del

mar. Ese día mis amigos y yo habíamos salido temprano de la escuela y
como no teníamos nada que hacer, decidimos ir a la playa. Llegando allá,
nos dedicamos a jugar footenis y a nadar. Eran casi las cuatro, y todos ya
se estaban yendo. Decidí quedarme un poco más porque quería ver una
última vez el mar, así que me dirigí a unas piedras que estaban por ahí. La
vista se veía estupenda. Cuando me di cuenta, pude ver a una chava que
estaba viendo también el atardecer, era muy guapa, de cuerpo excepcional.
Tímidamente me le acerque. Ella me miro con esos ojos que hacían que me
temblaran las piernas. Como pude le pregunté su nombre. Me dijo que se
llamaba Paula y que iba a la misma escuela que yo. Yo no era muy hábil
para el ligue pero como pude, la invite a salir. Ella acepto y quedamos de
vernos al día siguiente día en el café Veloso.
607
6. It was almos six and Paula did not arrive and it was late, I decided to go.
When I was leaving from the coffee store, Paula appeared running. While
recovering, she told me that she was late ,for her sister had asked her to
help her to do some things at their house. Being late, and being the
afternoon stupendous, I told her that we went to walk. We traversed whole
Ipanema until arriving at an ice-cream parlour. We talked about many
things, as she was studying photography and that she wanted to work in a
museum. She also told me that her favorite flower was Iris, unknown flower
for me by then. In the afternoon, we said goodbye, she said goodbye with a
kiss in the cheek and I went.
608
7. Ya eran casi las 6 y como no llegaba, decidí irme. Cuando salía del café,
Paula apareció corriendo. Agitada, me dijo que había llegado tarde porque
su hermana le había pedido que se quedara a ayudarle con algunas cosas.
Como ya era tarde y la tarde estaba estupenda, decidí llevarla a pasear,
recorrimos todo Ipanema hasta llegar a una heladería donde le compré un
helado. Hablamos de muchas cosas, que estaba estudiando fotografía y
que quería trabajar en un museo. También me comento que su flor favorita
era Iris, flor desconocida para mi hasta entonces. Ya en la noche nos
despedimos, ella se despidió con un beso en la mejilla y me fui.
609
Inversion
We use the inversion to emphasise a phrase. This structure has the same form
that the interrogative form.
Never in my life had I felt so embarrassed.
Noplace did he find peace.
The inversion can go in the middle of a sentence.
He had been in prison but rarely did he mention it.
With the words never, never before, rarely, seldom, hardly (ever), no sooner ___
than, the inversion is obligatory.
Never thought I that he did that.
With the words no sooner ___ than, only, not only ___ but also, not (even) once,
not until, on no account, under no circumstances, by no means, in no way,
noplace, little can be used or not the inversion.
Under no circumstances can he go. = Under no circumstances he can go
The expression “it is/was” can be omitted in the inversion when it is used with only
Only after I had kids that could I understand my parents. (formal and literary)
It was only after I had kids that I could understand my parents. (neutral)
The expressions so + adjective _ that, only after and not only have a special order.
So happy was he that we gave all her money to the town.
Only after he grew up could he understand his parents.
610
Writing
Realiza una parafrasis verbal de esta parte de la historia. Usa lenguaje formal. 250
palabras
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Do you agree or disagree with there should be more money to support writers?
611
One hundred and seventeenth lesson
Peaches’ Season II
1. They were March vacations and as in all March vacations, I had gone to
Lidia’s house. I did not have problems with it, I got on well with her mother
and her sister, even I was teaching Spanish to her niece. The only problem
was her stepfather who always watched me with a suspicious view, but,
exept that, everything was going well in my life with her. That day, we
decided to go to a party which would take place in the square in front of the
municipal building. So we hurried to let her niece slept and we went: Lidia, I,
her sister and her boyfriend. When we arrived at there, we separated, Lidia
and I went to the hoops games where I won a teddy snake, to which we
decided to baptize as our reptilian daughter. Later, we went to the square
where there was a fireworks display. All the sky illuminated with the colors of
the flag. At midnight, the major appeared from a balcon of the municipal
building and pronounced a speech, of which I only understood “Live the
heroes of our patry”. After this, everyone returned to his houses. When we
arrived at Lilia’s mother’s house, I installed my bed in the couch, Lidia so
brought me some sheets that I slept better. Before climbing to her room, she
gave me a kiss.
2. Next day, Lidia rose early to give me a morning surprise. When we had
breakfast, I dared to tell her that I had fallen in love with someone else.
When I said it to her, she infuriated, and she told me that I had got bored of
her, which hurt me. I told her that I had not let love her, just I had fallen in
love with another person and I asked her whether she wanted to be with me.
Next time that I was with Paula, I feared that the things with Lidia were not
the same, but for my surprise, next weeks were like honey on flakes with
Lidia and I descending from the top of a hill which gave towards the Pão de
Acuçar and my “Corazón”, with whom I liked to stay at night until she went
to bed.
612
One hundred and seventeenth lesson
Temporada de Duraznos II
8. Eran las vacaciones de marzo, y como todas las vacaciones de marzo,

había ido a la casa de Lidia. No había problema, me llevaba bien con su
madre y con su hermana, incluso le estaba enseñando español a su
sobrina, el único problema era su padrastro, quien me veía siempre con una
mirada de desconfianza, pero, exceptuando eso, todo iba bien en mi vida
con ella. Ese día decidimos ir a la fiesta del pueblo, así que nos apuramos
a dejar a su sobrina dormida y partimos; Lidia, yo, su hermana y el novio de
esta. Llegando allá, nos separamos, Lidia y yo fuimos al juego de aros
donde gané una serpiente de peluche, a la cual decidimos. Más tarde,
fuimos a la plaza a ver como lanzaban cuetes. El espectáculo era
magnifico, todo se iluminaba con los colores de los cuetes en el cielo y todo
el mundo se divertía. A la media noche salió el alcalde al balcón del palacio
municipal y pronuncio su discurso, del que solo entendí “que vivan los
héroes de la patria”. Después de esto todo el mundo regreso a sus casas.
Llegando a la casa de Lidia, instale mi cama en el sillón, y me prepare para
dormir. Lidia me había bajado unas cobijas para que durmiera mejor, y
antes de subir a su cuarto me dio un beso.
9. Al día siguiente desperté, Lidia había bajado para darme el “mañanero”.
Mientras desayunábamos, me atrevi a contarle que me habia enamorado
de alguien más, a lo cual se mostró muy enojada diciendo que ya me había
aburrido de ella, lo cual me dolió. Le dije que no me había dejado de
quererla, simplemente me gustaba alguien más y le pregunte si quería
seguir conmigo. La primera vez que estuve con Paula sentía miedo de que
la relación con Lidia no fuera la misma, más para mi sorpresa, las
siguientes semanas fueron como miel sobre hojuelas, con Lidia y yo
rodando desde lo alto de una colina, y mi “corazón”, en la noche, con quien
me gustaba quedarme despierto hasta que se iba a dormir.
613
Literary English
Vocabulary
Informal Literary
Calm Tranquillity
Chest Breast
Climate Clime
Country Land
Enemy Foe (used in poesy)
From now on Forth
Golden Gilt
Handwriting Hand
Letter
Happiness Felicity
Heavens Sky (used in the religion)
Heaven Paradise
In this way Thus
In the morning On the morrow
Island Isle
Disgusting Ignoble
Horrible
Awful
Morning Morrow
Tomorrow
Peak Fullness
Royal Kingly
Secular Unhallowed
So that So ____ that
To break To rend
To renovate To furbish
To delight To wonder
To worry To fret
Where from Whence
614
Latin words
Informal Formal
Adolescent Teenager
Kidhood Infance
Kidish Infantile
Devilish Diabolical
Friendly Amicable
Inner Internal (body)
Lower Inferior
Lying Mendacious
Momly Maternal
Dadly Paternal
615
Writing
Escriba una parafrasis de lo que se trata la historia. Usa lenguaje formal. 250
palabras
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
616
Speaking
Do you agree or disagree with is important that kids read at school.
British culture
Tanto el inglés literio como el inglés formal utilizan muchas palabras de origen
latino, esto se debe a los años que estuvo conquistada Inglaterra por extranjeros
despues de la conquista normanda de inglaterra.
Normalmente las palabras latinas se utilizan en el lenguaje formal, mientras que

las palabras de origen germanico se utilizan en los registros informal y vulgar.
Como para los anglofonos es dificil entender las palabras de origen latino, han
existido campañas como la Plain English que buscan que los politicos, los juristas
y las empresas utilizen palabras germanicas en lugar de latinas cuando realizana
un discurso al public en general.
617
One hundred and eighteenth lesson
Peaches’ Season (The end)
1. It was almost the middle of the semester and the exams were close, but the
most important is that was Paula’s birthday, 28th April, I remember well it
because that day Vanessa also tourned years, I saw that my two loves
reached the same day as a signal from the sky. That day, Paula and I had
arranged to meet in the bridge which was between the language building
and the stairs before entering the Italian class, in which we were together, to
give her birthday present, so I hurried to shower and to dress and I left.
When I arrived at there, she had not got yet, I waited a while and she got. I
took out her letter from my schoolbag and me gave it to her, it was a small
letter involved in a small envelope, with a wax stamp with three poem
sheets inside with purple petals, with an Iris flower in the middle. As I felt
embarrased, I decided to go. In the distance, I could see how Paula read my
letter and how suddenly she move outd out her hand to her chest giving me
to understand that my letter had got to the deepest of her soul. In the
classroom, Paula sat beside me, as I felt very nervous, I decided to go to
buy some candy. When I returned to the classroom, I gave a piece of candy
to Lidia and another piece of candy to Paula, when I gave hers to Paula, she
applauded as a girl when they gave a present that she has expected for a
long time, I liked it much. The class terminated, Paula had left earlier
because she had to do a project, what made me sad. We left from the
classroom, Lidia and I. On the way, I told her that I had given a letter to
Paula, which made that she infuriated. I let her in her classroom and I went
mine. Later, as we were on the bus to return to our houses, I felt her a little
distant, but for my surprise, when we were on the subway, she gave a letter
to me which said:
“Looooooove:
2. I know you do love me, you always show me it, I don’t know how you make
it but every day, each day that passes, you demonstrate me all your love
and that’s very beautiful ‘cause I never imagined there was somebody that
loves me so a lot, that takes care of me, protects me, support me and that is
always with me in the bads and the goods, I LOVE YOU like you’re, I don’t
wanna
618
One hundred and eighteenth lección
Temporada de Duraznos (El final)
1. Era ya casi mitad de semestre y los exámenes estaban próximos, pero

lo más importante es que era el cumpleaños de Paula, 28 de abril, lo
recuerdo bien porque ese día cumplía años Vanesa, yo lo veía como
una señal del cielo que mis dos amores cumplieran años el mismo día.
Aquel día, me había quedado de ver con Paula en el puente que
quedaba entre el edificio de idiomas y las escaleras antes de la clase
Italiano, en la cual estábamos los tres, para darle su regalo de
cumpleaños, así que me apure a bañarme y a vestirme y me fui. Cuando
llegue todavía no llegaba, espere un poco y llego. Saqué su carta de mi
mochila y se la di, era una pequeña carta envuelta en un sobre
pequeño, con un sello de cera con tres hojas de poema y pétalos
morados, con una flor de Iris en medio.
Como me dio pena, decidí irme, desde lo lejos pude ver como Paula leía
mi carta y como súbitamente movió su mano hacia su pecho dándome a
entender que mi carta le había llegado a lo más profundo de su ser.
En el salón, Paula se sentó junto a mí, como me daba nervios tenerla
junto de mí, decidí ir a comprar unos dulces. Ya de regreso en el salón,
le di un dulce a Lidia y uno a Paula, cuando le hube dado su dulce a
Paula, ella aplaudió como una niña chiquita cuando le regalan algo en
su cumpleaños, me gustó mucho.
Acabo la clase, Paula había salido antes porque tenía que hacer un
proyecto de la escuela, cosa que me entristeció. Salimos de la clase,
Lidia y yo. En el camino a su salón le conté lo de la carta de Paula, lo
cual provocó el enojo de ella. La deje en su salón y me fui. Más tarde,
cuando íbamos de regreso en la micro, la sentí un poco distante, más
para mi sorpresa, cuando íbamos en el metro, me dio una carta que
decía así:
“Amooooor:
2. Yo se que me amas demasiado, me lo demuestras siempre, no se como

le haces pero diario, cada día que pasa me demuestras, me expresas,
me trasmites todo tu amor y es muy bonito porque nunca imagine
encontrarte, nunca imagine que te cruzarías en mi vida y formarías parte
de ella, no imagine que existiera alguien que me ame tanto, que me
cuide, proteja, apoye, consuele, que este siempre a mi lado tanto en los
momentos buenos como en los malos. TE AMO como eres, no kiero
619
change you anything ‘cause I love you in that way, I LOVE YOU so. I try to
understand you, to understand that with our love is possible that you wanna share
it with other people that we’re and we’ll be happier but it is difficult for me this
‘cause I’ve always thought that the couples are of two, I’ve never thought that you
could try to be happy not only with one person but with many people. I liked you
had said to me you wanna be with more people ‘cause you got the courage,
confidence and honesty to tell me what you really want. I believe this got more
worth ‘cause it talks me ‘bout you and thought that’s hard to me I wanna support
you, I wanna accept this, I know that in this way you’ll be happier and by sharing
this with me we’ll be very happy, I just want you to know that I really Iove you, I
LOVE YOU I LOVE YOU I LOVE YOU I love you a lot and I’m very happy with you.
When I finished reading her letter, I felt aims to throw it thought the window of the
subway, huge her and tell her that I already knew it and that I love her too. But I did
not do it. When I arrived at home, I lied down on my bed looking at the roof feeling
satisfaction about what had happened in the day.
3. The sun illuminated my room while I was keeping a teddy bear that I had
bought to Paula. It was already the end of the semester and everyone
was nervous for the exams, but I was more nervous because that day
would be the day when I would confess my love to Paula. I had arranged
to meet her at Science Faculty beside the fountain. I was scared about
the weather was bad but for my surprise the day was stupendous with a
wonderful blue of the sky and an extraordinary view. I was a long time
seeing the sea until Paula appeared. We were a long time talking and
while we were watching how the first star appeared in the firmament I
confessed my love to Paula what she answered me that she had already
boyfriend, it destroyed me. That night, I could not sleep, the pain seized
me every time that I remembered the moments that I spent with her, the
time when I gave her letter to her and how I had met her at the rocks. I
could not continue. Next day, I took my things and took the bus to
Leblón, place where my “Amor” dwelled. While I was on the bus, I saw
how the sun hid into the sea while I was going an uncertain destiny. I
arrived at her house and I rang the bell. When she opened the door, I
was prepared to end the relationship when she jumped crying and
hugged me strongly. She was in that way a long time until I felt that she
had cried all she had inside of her. Still wetted by her tears, she
separated from me, she looked me straight in my eye and said “I’m
pregnant”.
620
cambiarte nada porque así me gustas, así TE AMO, soy muy feliz contigo. (patita
de gato) Yo trato de entenderte, de entender que con nuestro amor es posible que
tu kieras compartirlo con mas personas que así somos y seremos mas felices pero
me cuesta trabajo aceptar que y seremos mas felices pero me cuesta trabajo
aceptar que puedo compartirte con alguien mas, me cuesta adaptarme a esto
porque siempre he pensado esto, (el que las parejas sean de dos) nunca me paso
por la cabeza que puedes intentar ser feliz no solo con una persona sino que
compartir tu amor con mas personas, pero también pienso que es mejor que sea
así, que tu tengas el valor, confianza y honestidad de decirme lo que realmente
quieres con esto me dices como eres, no me lo ocultas creo que a veces es mejor
esto a que seas engañado o engañada, creo que eso cuenta mas porque me
habla de ti y aunque me cueste trabajo quiero apoyarte, quiero aceptar esto, se
que así serás mas feliz y al compartirlo conmigo seremos muy felices, solo quiero
que sepas que te amo TE AMO TE AMO DEMASIADO TE AMO DEMASIADO y
soy muy feliz a tu lado. Cuando la leía, me dieron ganas de aventar su carta por la
ventana del metro y decirle que ya lo sabía y que yo también la amaba, lo cual no
hice. Llegué a mi casa y me acosté mirando al techo sintiendo satisfacción de lo
que había pasado en el día.
3. Los rayos del sol iluminaban mi recamara mientras guardaba en mi mochila

un oso de peluche que había comprado para Paula. Era ya final de
semestre y todos estaban nerviosos por los exámenes, pero más nervioso
estaba yo porque ese día sería el día en que le confesaría a Paula mi amor.
Había quedado de verla aquel día en la Facultad de Ciencias junto a la
fuente. Tenía miedo de que el clima estuviera feo más para mi sorpresa el
día se mostraba estupendo con un azul del cielo hermoso y una vista
extraordinaria. Estuve largo tiempo viendo el mar hasta que Paula apareció.
Estuvimos platicando hasta que oscureció y mientras mirábamos como la
luz de la primera estrella aparecía en el firmamento le confesé mi amor a lo
que ella respondió que ya tenía novio desde hace un mes, me destrozo.
Aquella noche no pude dormir, el dolor se apoderaba de mi cada vez que
recordaba los momentos que pasamos, la vez que le di su carta y como la
había conocido ese día en las rocas. No podía más, al siguiente día tome
mis cosas, agarre un camión y me dirigí hacia Leblon. Mientras iba en el
camión, veía cómo el sol se ocultaba en el mar mientras me dirigía hacia un
destino incierto. Llegue a su casa y toque el timbre de su departamento.
Cuando salió, me dispuse a terminar la relación, cuando salto llorando y me
abrazo. Estuvo así un largo rato hasta que sentí que ella había vaciado todo
lo que tenía adentro. Aun mojada por sus lagrima se separó de mí, me miro
a los ojos y me dijo “estoy embarazada”
621
Literary English II
Shall
In literary English we use “shall” instead of will with I and we
I shall go to the party. (very formal/literary)
I will go to the party. (formal)
I’ll go to the party. (informal)
If
In very formal and literary English we can change “if” for “should” at the beginning
of the clause.
Should you go to the party, I’ll go. (very formal/literary)
If you go to the party, I will go (formal)
If you go to the party, I’ll go. (neutral)
In formal and literary English, we can invert the verb instead of using if.
Come you, tell me! (lit)
If you come, tell me! (neutral)
In this cases negative are not contracted.
Had I not gone, this wouldn’t have happened.
Inversion
In literary English, we sometimes use the inversion with as, than and so +
adjective.
622
So tired was I that I got to home and me fell sleep. (literary)
I was so tired that I got to home and me fell sleep. (formal)
People are stronger than do you think so. (literary)
People are stronger than you think so. (formal)
We often use the invention with the verbs said, asked, suggested etc when these
follow a direct speech (exept when the subject is a pronoun)
What did you think? Asked Henry. But What did you think? He asked.
We often the inversion with adverbial expressions of place.
Under the tree sat I. (lit)
I sat under the tree (formal)
I sat down under the tree (inf)
623
Writing
Transforma la lección a lenguaje formal. (250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Do you agree or disagree with modern literature is better than old literature?
624
The confession
1. I shall tell you a story that maybe you have already heard but perhaps not. It
is a story between you and I. I consider that everything commences when I
meet you. When I enter throught the door and I see you for the first time,
you do not generate any special feeling on me, I just enter and sit beside
you. The class finished and I left from the classroom and when I realized
that you are looking at me, but I do not tell you anything. The weeks pass
and I commenced feeling something for you, perhaps it was your brown
eyes as mountains, your white skin as the snow or your such a magnificent
way of being, whatever has been, something on you made that I absolutely
fell in love with you, the problem was that when I was about to tell you what I
felt for you, as a huge wall which has been built all of a sudden between us,
you tell me that you have a boyfriend. I think that there is not any problem,
however, there is a story with another young woman which has not been
told until now. The months pass and everything goes in the same way, the
semesters begin and break up, you are still with your boyfriend and I make
another month with my girlfried, even I commenced thinking of what we are
going to do for our third anniversary. All of a sudden, one day, you tell me,
during our dairy conversation, that you have left your boyfriend. I must
confess that I do not remember much of this part, the only thing which I
remember is that little by little you commenced opening the door of you to
me, I think that that conversation about you ought not to feel guilty about I
have a girlfriend pay dividents. Little by little you commenced accepting the
beautiful nickname that I put you and you commenced answering my good
night huge and your front kiss that I sent to you. By this point, I decide to tell
my girlfriend that I have fallen in love with you. At the begining, she
enfurated but she ended up accepting it and she tells me that she does love
me. The proper drama commences when is moment to tell you that I did
really love you, I tell you stupidly, and this has been probably the reason
why you have gone, that you were not as importat as my girlfriend was. As a
matter of fact, you were more important for me than she was because with
you I felt a proper deep love that I never felt for her. I imagined with you a
life that never did I think with her. Now that I have told this, and even when I
feel sad and lonely without you, I only can say to you that it is wonderful that
you has found someone so generous brave and honest as you say that your
boyfriend is and that I am just very happy for you.
625
La confesión
1. Te contaré una historia que tal vez ya hayas oido pero tal vez no. Es una
historia entre tú y yo. Considero que todo comienza cuando te conosco.
Cuando entro atraves de la puerta y te veo por primera vez, no generaste
algo especial en mi, solo entro y me siento a tu lado. La clase termina y
salgo del salón de clases y cuando me doy cuenta, me estás mirando, pero
no te digo nada. Las semanas pasan y comienzo a sentir algo por ti pero
cuando estoy a punto de decirtelo, como un muro que se ha construido de
repente entre los dos, me dices que tienes novio. Pienso que no hay
problema, como sea, hay una historia con otra chica que no se ha contado.
Los meses pasan y todo sigue igual, tu estás todavia con tu novio y yo
cumplo otro mes con mi novia incluso empieso a pensar en que vamos a
hacer para nuestro tercer aniversario. De repente, un dia, me dices, durante
nuestra conversación diaria, que has dejado a tu novio. Debo confesar que
no recuerdo mucho de esta parte, lo unico que recuerdo es que poco a
poco comienzas a abrir la puerta que da hacia a tí a mi, pienso que esa
conversación de que no deberias sentirte mal de que tenga novia dio frutos.
Poco a poco comienzas a aceptar el apodo que te puse y comienzas a
responder mi abrazo de buenas noches y el tu beso en la frente que te
enviaba. Para este punto, decido decirle a mi novia que me he enamorado
de ti. Al principio, se enoja pero termina aceptandolo y le digo que la amo.
Pero es aqui donde el problema comienza, cuando el momento de decirte
que te amo llega, te digo, y tal vez esta sea la razón por la que te fuiste, que
no eras tan importante como ella. Diciendo la verdad, eras más importante
que ella. Y ahora que he dicho esto, puedo irme sabiendo que estas con
alguien que te pudo decir esto.
626
Emphasis
There are many ways to emphasis in English. Some of them are:
1. Using so and such with adjectives.
“He’s such a nice man, you should marry him?
I’m so happy to see you
2. Using exaggerated vocabulary.
We’re starving.
3. Using intensifying adverbs.
She’s absolutely wonderful.
4. Using simile.
Her eyes as blue as the sky.
10. Changing the order of the words.
My brother cut down the apple tree (without emphasis)
It was my brother who cut down the apple tree (emphasis in the brother)
It was the apple tree that my brother cut down (emphasis in the tree)
11. Using the expression “on Earth”
Why on Earth did you say that?
12. Using invertion

Under the apple tree did a boy play with his brother.
627
Writing
ReEscriba el texto de la lección agregando por lo menos diez ejemplos de enfasis.

(250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Do you agree or disagree with people is speak using words of other languages?
628
Appendix
629
Idioms
That’s his bread and butter Es su mero mole

To be born and bread Crecer en un lugar (toda la vida)
For dankey’s years Desde hace un buen
Last but not least Por ultimo (pero no menos importante)
Don’t blow your own trumpet No cantes victoria antes de tiempo
Don’t be stupid No digas mamádas
Like a shoot Devolada
If x is your thing Si x es lo tuyo
Too right I would Sin duda alguna
To be on the look out Estar en la busqueda
To pool our resources Unir fuerzas
A case in point Un buen ejemplo
To have your say on Decir tu opinion de
As the old saying goes Como dicen
To coin a phrase
For the likes of you and me Para la gente como nosotros
Mind you Eso si
Wrong Pues no
What a marvellous No mames
Wait a minute aguanta
To be keen on Ser aficionado a
To be on the mood Atojarse
I didn’t sleep a wink No pude dormir
I didn’t get a wink of sleep
Nonsence No digas mamádas
No importa
To hit on hike Pedir aventon
Damn Que la chingada (como cuando se te
cae algo)
O que su puta madre (como cuando se
te cae algo)
Otherwise know as Tambien conocido como
The so-called Denominado
To suit your pocket Que se adapte a tu presupuesto
I haven’t the fuggiest no tengo la menor idea
you’re warm, but not quite here Cerca pero no tanto
To take the lead Ponerse a la cabeza
I got a clue No tengo idea
What a pity Que pena
money can’t buy everything El dinero no compra la felicidad
To earn a living Para ganarse la vida
To do a living Para vivir
630
To take a sabbatical year Tomar un año sabatico
The minute Desde el omento en que
For all the tea in China Ni por todo el oro del mundo
That’s (just) Greek to me Esta en Chino
Here and there De aqui y de alla
Know what I mean Sabes a lo que me refiero
A real chip off the old block De tal palo tal astilla
Don’t cross your bridges before Todo a su tiempo
A picture is worth a thousand words Una imagen vale mas que mil palabras
Better safe than sorry Mas vale prevenir que lamentar
You live and learn Todos los dias se aprende algo nuevo
Whatgot with Brian? Y ahora que tiene Brian?
To be in very high spirits Estar de muy buen humor
To be on cloud nine Andar bien emocionado
Can’t take Chocar
To be off his rocket Perder la cabeza
What’s all this about? Y eso de que
To tell you umpteen times Decirlo un millon de veces
Here catch Toma
What time are you off? A que horas te vas
Last drink Ultima copa
What’s is name Como se llame
631
Irregular verbs
Here a list of the most common irregular verbs in British English.
 be (am, is, are) – was, were – been

 bear – bore – borne
 beat – beat – beaten
 become – became - become
 begin – began – begun
 bend – bent – bent
 bet – bet – bet
 bind – bound – bound
 bite – bit – bitten
 bleed – bled – bled
 blow – blew – blown
 break – broke – broken
 breed – bred – bred
 bring – brought – brought
 build – built – built
 burn – burnt/burned – burnt/burned
 burst – burst – burst
 buy – bought – bought
 can – could – (been able to)
 catch – caught – caught
 choose – chose – chosen
 cling – clung – clung
 come – came – come
 cost – cost – cost
 creep – crept – crept
 cut – cut – cut
 deal – dealt – dealt
 dig – dug – dug
 do – did – done
 draw – drew – drawn
 dream – dreamt/dreamed – dreamt/dreamed
 drink – drank – drunk
 drive – drove – driven
 eat – ate – eaten
 fall – fell – fallen
 feed – fed – fed
 feel – felt – felt
 fight – fought – fought
632
 find – found – found
 Fit – fit/fit – fit/fit
 flee – fled – fled
 fling – flung – flung
 fly – flew – flown
 forbid – forbade – forbidden
 forget – forgot – forgotten
 forgive – forgave - forgiven
 forsake – forsook – forsaken
 freeze – froze – frozen
 get – got – got
 give – gave – given
 go – went – gone
 grow – grew – grown
 hang – hung/hanged – hung/hanged
 have – had – had
 hear – heard – heard
 hide – hid – hidden
 hit – hit – hit
 hold – held – held
 hurt – hurt – hurt
 keep – kept – kept
 know – knew – known
 lay – laid – laid
 lead – led – led
 lean – leant/leaned – leant/leaned
 learn – learnt/learned – learnt/learned
 leave – left – left
 lend – lent – lent
 let – let – let
 lie – lay – lain
 lose – lost – lost
 make – made – made
 mean – meant – meant
 meet – met – met
 pay – paid – paid
 prove – proved – proved/proven
 put – put – put
 quit – quit – quit
 read – read – read
 rend – rent – rent
 ride – rode – ridden
 ring – rang – rung
633
 rise – rose – risen
 run – ran – run
 saw – sawed – sawn/sawed
 say – said – said
 see – saw – seen
 seek – sought – sought
 sell – sold – sold
 send – sent – sent
 set – set – set
 shake – shook – shaken
 shoot – shot – shot
 show – showed – shown
 shrink – shrank – shrunk
 shrive – shrove – shriven
 shut – shut – shut
 sing – sang – sung
 sink – sank – sunk
 sit – sat – sat
 sleep – slept – slept
 sling – slung – slung
 slink – slunk – slunk
 smell – smelt/smelled – smelt
 speak – spoke – spoken
 spell – spelled/spelt – spelled/spelt
 spend – spent – spent
 Spill – spilt/spilled – spoil/spilt
 Spoil – Spoilt/spoiled – Spoil/spoiled
 spread – spread – spread
 spring – sprang – sprung
 stand – stood – stood
 stave – staved/stove – staved/stove
 steal – stole – stolen
 stink – stank – stunk
 strike – struck – stricken
 swear – swore – sworn
 swim – swam – swum
 swing – swung – swung
 take – took – taken
 teach – taught – taught
 tear – tore – torn
 tell – told – told
 think – thought – thought
 throw – threw – thrown
634
 thrust – thrust/thrusted – thrust/thrusted
 wake – woke – woken
 wear – wore – worn
 weep – wept – wept
 win – won – won
 wring – wrang/wrung – wrung
 write – wrote – written
635
Verbs
Here are the 400 most common English verbs.
Verb Meaning
Ta abandon Abandonar
To embrace Abrazar
To open Abrir
To bore Aburrir
To accept Aceptar
To advise Aconsejar
To remember Acordar
To act Actuar
To accuse Acusar
To guess Adivinar
To admire Admirar
To accept Admitir
To adore Adorar
To warn Advertir
To affect Afectar
To affirm Afirmar
To thank Agradecer
To drown Ahogar
To love Amar
To announce Anunciar
To appear Aparecer
To separate Apartar
To applaud Aplaudir
To contribute Aportar
To lean Apoyar
To appreciate Apreciar
To learn Aprender
To approve Aprobar
To pull Arrastrar
To repair Arreglar
To regret Arrepentir
To arrest Arrestar
To risk Arriesgar
To murder Asesinar
636
To assassinate
To secure Asegurar
To attend Asistir
To scared Asustar
To attack Atacar
To attract Atraer
To catch Atrapar
To cross Atravesar
To increase Aumentar
To advance Avanzar
To shame Avergonzar
To help Ayudar
To dance Bailar
To bath Bañar
To whip Batir
To drink Beber
To kiss Besar
To tan Broncear
To fall Caerse
To calm Calmar
To change Cambiar
To walk Caminar
To cancel Cancelar
To tire Cansar
To sing Cantar
To marry Casar
To dig Cavar
To hunt Cazar
To close Cerrar
To earn Cobrar
To cook Cocinar
To fuck Coger
To place Colocar
To color Colorear
To combine Combinar
To begin Comenzar
To eat Comer
To share Compartir
To complete Completar
To repair Componer
To behave Comportar
To buy Comprar
To understand Comprender
To compete Concursar
To trust Confiar
637
To confirm Confirmar
To drive Conducir
To conjugate Conjugar
To know Conocer
To conquer Conquistar
To get Conseguir
To maintain Conservar
To consider Considerar
To build Construir
To count Contar
To answer Contestar
To continue Continuar
To control Controlar
To copy Copiar
To correct Corregir
To run Correr
To cut Cortar
To cost Costar
To create Crear
To grown Crecer
To believe Creer
To cover Cubrir
To recover Curar
To damage Dañar
To give Dar
To say Decir
To tell
To decide Decidir
To declare Declarar
To dedicate Dedicar
To defend Defender
To let Dejar
To spell Deletrear
To demonstrate Demostrar
To disappear Desaparecer
To develop Desarrollarse
To unplug Desconectar
To describa Describir
To discover Descubrir
To neglect Descuidar
To destroy Destruir
To wish Desear
To disobey Desobedecer
To detest Detestar
To undress Desvestir
638
To draw Dibujar
To apologize Disculpar
To discuss Discutir
To enjoy Disfrutar
To design Diseñar
To provide Disponer
To distinguish Distinguir
To amuse Divertir
To hurt Doler
To divorce Divorciar
To donate Donar
To sleep Dormir
To doubt Dudar
To last Durar
To choose Elegir
To push Empujar
To bewitch Encantar
To find Encontrar
To deceive Engañar
To anger Enojar
To enrich Enriquecer
To practice Ensayar
To teach Enseñar
To understand Entender
To give Entregar
To train Entrenar
To send Enviar
To climb Escalar
To choose Escoger
To listen Escuchar
To write Escribir
To wait Esperar
To hope
To study Estudiar
To avoid Evitar
To dig Excavar
To exist Existir
To experiment Experimentar
To explain Explicar
To explore Explorar
To express Expresar
To miss Extrañar
To import Importar
To fail Fallar
To form Formar
639
To fry Freír
To work Funcionar
To smoke Fumar
To win Ganar
To guarantee Garantizar
To spend Gastar
To shout Gritar
To keep Guardar
To guide Guiar
To like Gustar
To talk Hablar
To do Hacer
To make
To boil Hervir
To injure Herir
To bake Hornear
To flee Huir
To sink Hundir
To identify Identificar
To imagine Imaginar
To begin Iniciar
To register Inscribir
To inspire Inspirar
To try Intentar
To interest Interesar
To interrogate Interrogar
To flood Inundar
To invent Inventar
To research Investigar
To go Ir
To invite Invitar
To pull Jalar
To play Jugar
To swear Jurar
To regret Lamentar
To hurt Lastimar
To wash Lavar
To read Leer
To clean Limpiar
To call Llamar
To get Llegar
To fill Llenar
To cry Llorar
To rain Llover
To achieve Lograr
640
To fight Luchar
To maltreat Maltratar
To send Mandar
To order Mandar (dar
órdenes)
To drive Manejar
To support Mantener
To mark Marcar
To cheaw Masticar
To kill Matar
To measure Medir
To improve Mejorar
To memorize Memorizar
To lie Mentir
To mix Mesclar
To put Meter
To look Mirar
To wet Mojar
To bother Molestar
Mirir Morir
To show Mostrar
Move out Move outr
To swim Nadar
To need Necesitar
To negate Negar
To snow Nevar
To obligate Obligar
To watch Observar
To hide Ocultar
To hear Oír
To forget Olvidar
To order Ordenar
To tidy Ordenar (poner en
orden)
To hate Odiar
To organize Organizar
To offer Ofrecer
To pay Pagar
To stop Parar
To participate Participar
To split Partir
to leave Partir (irse)
To pass Pasar
To ask Pedir
To beat Pegar
641
To attach Pegar
(pegamento)
To comb Peinar
To fight Pelear
To think Pensar
To loose Perder
To forgive Perdonar
To allow Permitir
To put Poner
To prefer Preferir
To ask Preguntar
To worry Preocupar
To present Presentar
To borrow Prestar
To lend (a alguien)
To prevent Prevenir
To prove Probar
To produce Producir
To prohibit Prohibir
To promise Prometer
To pronounce Pronunciar
To protect Proteger
To stay Quedar
(permanecer)
To complain Quejar
To burn Quemar
To want Querer
To take Quitar
To receive Recibir
To reject Rechazar
To protest Reclamar
To collect Recoger
To recommend Recomendar
To recognize Reconocer
To remember Recordar
To laugh Reír
To give Regalar
To repair Reparar
To distribute Repartir
To repeat Repetir
To rescue Rescatar
To resist Resistir
To resolve Resolver
To answer Responder
To review Revisar
642
To steal (general) Robar
To mug (en la
calle o en el
transporte publico)
To rob (banco)
To break Romper
To know Saber
To jump Saltar
To leave Salir
To greet Saludar
To save Salvar
To dry Secar
To follow Seguir
To sit Sentar
To feel Sentir
To ask Solicitar
To sound Sonar
To smile Sonreír
To dream Soñar
To blow Soplar
To support Soportar
To surprise Sorprender
To survive Sobrevivir
To raise Subir
To highlight Subrayar
To happen Suceder
To suffer Sufrir
To suggest Sugerir
To suppose Suponer
To throw Tirar
To call Telefonear
To finish Terminar
To touch Tocar
To play Tocar
(instrumento)
To take Tomar
To work Trabajar
To translate Traducir
To bring Traer
To try Tratar
To use Usar/utilizar
To see Ver
To sell Vender
To come Venir
To win Vencer
643
To dress Vestir
To travel Viajar
To visit Visitar
To live Vivir
To fly Volar
To become Volver (se)
644
Phrasal Verbs
Here are the most common phrasal verbs in English.
Ask out Inviter a salir I asked out Rachael

Be off Irse (en el momento) I’m off
Estar de vacaciones
Be over Acabar That’s over
Be up Ser de
Book into Reservar (para alguien mas) The agency travel booked us
into a hotel on the beach
Break down Descomponerse The car broke down
Break into Entrar (a una casa (robar)) The robber broke into the
house
Break up Salir de las escuela (terminar las I break up the semester in
clases) november
Terminar el semestre
Cortar (relacion) Ann broke up with his
boyfriend yesterday
Break off Poner fin a the treaty broke off several
years of conflicts
Call back Llamar (regresar la llamada) I gotta go. I call you back later
Call for Requerir I call for you send me the
documents
Call off Cancelar (un evento The concert was called off
preprogramado) because of the rain
Call up Hechar una llamada Call up Ann to know if she’s
coming
Carry off Sacar adelante He carried off his family by
himself
Carry on Seguir (haciendo algo)
Carry out Cumplir I always carry out my
promises
Carry Llevar acabo The police carried thought an
through operation agains the crime
Bring about Provocar He tried to bring about David
to fight with him
Bring Reanimar The doctors could bring
(a)round (a)round the man
645
Bring up Educar (un niño) I was brought up in
Sacar el tema de/hablar de Cambridge
Jennifer brought up my new
job
Calm down Calmarse Calm down!
Catch up on Ponerse al corriente
Catch up Alcanzar (igualar)
with
Check in Registrarse (un hotel)
Check out Registrarse de salida (de un hotel)
Check up on Comprobar (informacion)
Investigar (algo o a alguien)
Close down Clausurar
Come Encontrarse (alguien o algo por
across accidente)
Come down Caer
Come down Estar enfermo de
with Tener (una enfermedad)
Come in Entrar
Come into Heredar
Come out Salir
Salir a la venta
Come round Volver en si
Come up Acercarse
Come up Sugerir/pensar/encontrar/proponer
with una idea, un plan o una solucion
Cut down Talar
Reducir (+ verbo)
Cut down on Reducir (+ sustantivo)
Hacer recortes en
Cut off Cortar (completamente) I cut off mi finger
Die down Calmarse/tranquilizarse The wind died down
(viento/fuego/ruido)
Do up Remodelar We’re doing up my apartment
Do with Se me antoja
Do without Vivir sin
Drag along Arrastrar
Draw back Hacerse para atras
Dress up Vestir (de gala) I dressed up for Mary’s
wedding
Drop in (to) Visitar (a) I drop in (on) my parents on
vacations
Drop out Dejar (de estudiar) I dropped out when I was 22
End up Terminar I ended up going on foot
Face up with Afrontar
646
Fall apart Desacerse The robber tried to fall apart
of the evidence
Fall behind Atrasarse The plane fell behind
Fall out Pelear(se) The two men fell out outside
the house
Feel like Tener ganas de I feel like a cup of coffe
Fill out Llenar (un espacio en blanco/una
forma)
Find out Descubrir
Fit in Caber The sofa doesn’t fit in the
living-room
Fit with in Encajar
Get ahead Salir Adelante
Get around Move outrse (desplazarse de un
lugar a otro)
Get away Escapar (de un peligro) (salirse de
un lugar incomodo)
Irse de vacaciones
Get away Salirse con las suya
with
Get by Arreglarselas
Get down Ponerse a
Get down to Ir al grano
Get from Escaparse (de alguien)
Get in Entrar (carro)
Get back Regresar (de un lugar)
Get off Bajarse (carro)
Get on Llevarse bien
Lazarse (hacer algo o ir a un lugar)
Continuar hacienda algo que ya no
se hacia o que se tiene miedo de
continuar)
Go out Andar (novios)
Get out of Irse/ salir (con necesidad)
Levantarse (de la cama)
Evitar hacer algo que no quieres,
especialmente poniendo escusas
Get over Recuperarse
Mejorarse (enfermedad)
Get over Hacer/terminar (algo que no
with quieres hacer)
Get through Terminar (algo)
Get up Despertarse
Give away Donar
Regular
Give in darse por vencido
647
Give off Emitir
Give out Distribuir
No resistir
Give up Rendirse
Give up on Perder la fe
Go ahead Llevar acabo
Go around Ir por ahi
Go back Ir de regreso
Go by Pasar (el tiempo)
Go Bajar (las escaleras)
downstairs
Go in Entrar
Go for Elegir
Go off Explotar (una bomba)
Dejar de gustar
Go on Pasar
Go out Salir
Go over Darle vueltas
Go through Ir mal
Tener que pasar
Go up Aumentar
Subir
Go upstairs Subir (las escaleras)
Hang around Pasar (el tiempo con alguien)
Hang up Colgar (telefono)
Hit back Atacar a alguien que te ataco o te
critico
Hit it off Llevarse bien (la primera vez que
se conocieron)
Hold back Aguantar(se)/contener (emosion)
Hold on Esperar (telefono)
Agarrarse (sujetarse)
Hold up Hacer esperar
Hacer que alguien llegue tarde
Atracar
Keep away Mantenerse lejos
Keep on Insister
Keep in Castirgar (un niño)
Keep down Disminuir
Keep to Seguir adelante con
Keep up Seguir el ritmo
Key in Teclear
Knock out Noquear
Knock down Demoler
Let off Quedar libre
648
Lit up Iluminar
Live up to Estar a la altura
Log in Iniciar session
Log off Cerrar session
Look after Cuidar
Look down Ver por debajo
on
Look for Buscar
Look forward Tener muchas ganas de (que algo
to pase)
Look into Investigar
Look thought Leer (normalmente rapidamente)
Look up Buscar (en el diccionario o en el
directorio)
Look up to Admirar
Make for Dirigirse hacia
Make out Alcanzar a ver/escuchar/
Poder entender
Make up Hacer las pases
Maquillarse
Inventar
Make up for Compensar
Miss out Perder (la oportundiad de hacer
algo)
Move out in Mudarse
Pass away Fallecer
Pass off Hacer pasar por
Pay off Liquidar/pagar (una deuda)
Pick up Aprender (un idioma o habilidad)
Recoger
Pull away Arrancar
Pull on Vestirse (rapidamente)
Pull up Detenerse (carro)
Put down Bajar (algo que estas agarrando)
Put off Desalentar
Posponer
Put out Apagar (fuego, luz)
Put through Pasar (por telefono)
Put together Armar (algo)
Put up Protestar
Dar alojamiento
Quedarse (en un lugar
temporalmente o de vacaciones)
Eregir/construer/levantar
Put up with Tolelar
649
Run away Huir
Run into Encontrarse (a alguien)
Pegarse/estrellarse/chocar (con
algo sin querer)
Run out of Quedarse sin
Save up Ahorrar
Sell out Agotarse (algo en venta)
Venderse (acabarse)
Sell out of Vender todo
Send off Enviar
Set about Ponerse a
Set aside Dejar de (momentaneamente)
Set back Retrasar(se)
Set off/out Salir de viaje
Set up Poner (un negocio)
Shut down Cerrar (un negocio)
Slip on Ponerse (algo rapidamente)
Slip out Salirse (comentario)
Stand out Resaltar
Start out Empezar a trabajar
Empezar (poniendo enfasis en el
inicio)
Stop over Quedarse (en un lugar camino una
o dos noches cuando se va en
camino a otro lugar o de regreso a
casa)
Take after Parecerse (a alguien de la familia)
Actuar como/ser como (alguien de
la familia)
Take back Regresar
Take in Captar (entender)
Engañar (passive)
Take off Despegar
Take on Hacerse cargo de
Take out Sacar
Take over Encangarse de
Take up Empezar (un nuevo hobby o
deporte)
Ocupar tiempo)
Talk into Convencer (a alguien de que haga
algo)
Team up Hacer equipo
Tell apart Distinguir
Diferenciar
Team up Hacer equipo
650
Tidy up Recoger (cuarto)
Turn back Regresar (un camino cuando se
tiene un mal precentimiento)
Turn down Bajar (el volumen) Can you turn out the radio?
Rechazar
Turn into Convertirse en
Turn off Apagar
Turn on Prender
Turn out Acudir
Turn up Subir (volume)
Calentarse (maquina)
Aparecer
Wake up Despertarse
Wear off Desaparecer (sentimiento o efecto
de algo)
Write down Anotar
Write up Escribir (cuando se saca la
informacion de varias fuentes)
Work on Hacer (algo que se lleva rato
haciendo o que se esta
desarrollando
Work out Calculary
Resolver
651
Numbers
0 Zero 10 Ten
1 One 11 Eleven
2 Two 12 Twelve
3 Three 13 Thirteen
4 Four 14 Fourteen
5 Five 15 Fifteen
6 Six 16 Sixteen
7 Seven 17 Seventeen
8 Eight 18 Eighteen
9 Nine 19 Nineteen
Numbers from 20 to 99
20 Twenty 60 Sixty
30 Thirty 70 Seventy
40 Forty 80 Eighty
50 Fifty 90 Ninety
The numbers with ten and unit are built by putting the ten + hyphen + unit.
Example: 21 = Twenty-one
32 = Thirty-two
100 One hundred 600 Six hundred

200 Two hundred 700 Seven hundred
300 Three hundred 800 eight hundred
400 Four hundred 900 Nine hundred
500 Five hundred
One can be changed for a in informal speech.
652
The numbers with hundred got ten, unit or they both, it puts “and” between the
hundred and the rest of the number.
Example: 100 = One hundred
101 = One hundred and one
121 = One hundred and twenty-one
1000 One thousand

1002 One thousand two
1032 One thousand thirty-two
1432 One thousand four hundred and thirty-two
15432 Fifteen thousand four hundred and thirty-two
When we talk about years, we pronounce the numbers as they were separated
tens.
Ex. The year 1994 is pronounced as nineteen ninety-four, and not “one thousand
nine hundred and ninety-four.
100000 One hundred thousand

100001 One hundred thousand one
100021 One hundred thousand and twenty-one
100321 One hundred thousand three hundred and twenty-one
104321 One hundred and four thousand three hundred and twenty-
one
154321 One hundred and fifty-four thousand three hundred and
twenty-one
1000000 One million
653
Vocabulary
654
Bibliography
Michael Swan (2005), Practical English usage, 3ra. Edición
Christina Latham-Koenig, American English File Started, Philadelphia
Christina Latham-Koenig, American English File 1, Philadelphia
Inglés Metodo Integral, Larousse
Meg Morley (2014), Anglais Américain
David Applefield (2017), El inglés americano, Assimil
Inglés Metodo Integral Intermedio, Larousse
Anthony Bulger (2018), El inglés, Assimil
Anthony Bulger (2013), Inglés perfeccionamiento, Assimil
Claude Chapuis/Peter Dunn/Alfred Fontenilles (2013), Inglés de los Negocios, Assimil
Annette Capel/Wendy Sharp, Objective First, Cambridge University Press
Felicity O’Dell/Annie Broadhead, Objective Advanced, Cambridge University Press
Los datos culturales han sido todamos de diferentes fuentes y corresponden a

informacion obtenido en los años 2021 y 2022. También, esta informacion cultural
puede estar basada en la informacion y los conocimientos que tiene el autor de
este libro.
655
Sobre el autor
Mauricio Mateo ha estudiado más de cinco idiomas en instituciones como el

Instituto Politécnico Nacional, el Centro Cultural Brasil en México, la Weslley
University and la Universitat Politecnica de Valencia. Tambén ha recibido
formación docente de universidades como la Universidad Nacional Autónoma de
México y la Arizona State University. Ha trabajado como maestro de inglés y
francés en la licenciatura de idiomas y ha enseñado cursos de cuatro habilidades,
de comprensión de lectura, de conversación y de preparación para los examenes
de CAE, DELF, DELE y CILS.
Cursos y certificaciones
 Arizona State University TESOL (ASU)

 Teaching Knowledge Test Module 1 (Band 3)
 Certificate Teach English Now! Teaching Language Online (Arizona
State University)
 Certificate Teach English Online (Cambridge University)
 TOEFL ITP B2
 Certificate Upper-Intermediate English: Business (Universitat de Valencia)
 Constancia de posesión del idioma inglés (UNAM)
 Constancia de comprensión de lectura en inglés (UNAM)
 Gramática del inglés B1
 Taller de conversación en Ingles avanzado
 TOEFL Test Preparation: The Insider’s Guide
 CELPE-BRAS Intermediario Superior

 Constancia de posesión del idioma portugués (UNAM)
 Curso de Cultura y Civilización lusófona
 Constancia de posesión del idioma Italiano (UNAM)

 Certificate Italian Language and Culture: Advanced (Weslley)
 Taller de Letteratura Italiana contemporanea
 DELF B2
 Constancia de posesión del idioma alemán (UNAM)
656
United States of America
657

New American English For Non-Native Speakers

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

New American English For Non-Native Speakers

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2023

New American For Spanish Speakers

Como mi objetivo no es solo enseñarte el lenguaje formal si no también otros

Este libro se divide en 20 unidades, cada una compuesta de 7 lecciones. También

15. Present simple

22. Modal verbs (can, could, may)

29. Past simple

36. Future simple

43. Subjunctive present

57. Conditional type 0

50. Present continuous

64. Present perfect

71. Prepositions of move outment

71. Present perfect continuous

78. Conditional type 3

85. Purpose clauses

92. Passive voice of the simple tenses

106. Prepositional regency

113. Was/were able to/ would rather have/ would prefer to

134. Phrasal verbs

El idioma tiene 26 vocales.

La letra “Ñ” no existe en inglés.

Las consonantes b, c, d, f, k, l, m, n, p, q, t, w, x, e y se pronuncian igual que en

La “h” al inicio de palabra se pronuncial como jota.

La J siempre suena como una I griega vibrada.

La R siempre suena como la erre en “Rata”

La V suena como una b vibrada.

La Z suena como una ese vibrada.

Las consonants dobles se pronuncian como una.

Swimming /suiming/ not /suimming/

Para fines practicos, te sugerimos aprenderte la table de abajo en lo que aprendes

/a/ /e/ /i/ /o/ /u/ /ə/ /y/

La E final de palabras polisilabas es muda.

La terminación “ture” se pronuncial /chia/.

La terminación “tion” se pronuncial /shion/.

En la combinación wr se pronuncial solo la erre.

La combinación Tw se pronuncial /tu/.

La Sh se pronuncial como la equis en Xola.

En la combinacion S + consonante solo se pronuncial el sonido de la ese.

En la combinación Kn solo se pronuncial la / N/.

What a beautiful woman = /uata biutiful woman/

Good afternoon = /gostupidernun/

Por su puesto esto no es una explicación exaustiva de la pronunciación del inglés,

Regla Español Inglés

La terminación “uro” y Futuro Future

Desde este punto, es necesario que escuhes grabaciones para el nivel A1 de

Vocabulary and reading tips

1. Good morning, my name is Miguel and this is my wife María.

1. Hola, mi nombre es Miguel y ella es mi esposa María.

Personal subject pronoun Pronombre personal

a. Substituir todo lo que no es humano

c. Con el clima y la hora.

En inglés no existe el pronombre usted, en su lugar se usa you.

Llena cada espacio en blanco con el pronombre personal que le corresponda.

1. Hello, ________ Miguel. I’m from ________. (Mexico)

Escriba una breve presentación de tí. (50 palabras)

Contesta las siguientes preguntas.

What’s your name?

Where are you from?

I’m from ______________.

What do you do?

I’m a/an ______________.

1. Buenos dias, hoy tenemos un nuevo estudiante con nosotros. Gabriel

1. Hello, Miguel. I’m from . (Mexico)

11. is Daniel ____.?

___ plus _ is _ _ times _ is ___

___ divided by _ is _ minus is __